Home

it

1. Lower numbers Higher numbers Lower numbers Higher numbers 24 0 2 com 4 6 com2 o 2 COM3 4 6 com4 410 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 4 Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 20 4 Installation Work 9g Refer to Section 8 2 for installation location a8 20 4 1 Mounting 12 e 1 Turn OFF all power supplies connected to the PLC E input output devices and terminal blocks 1 EI 2 Align the top side of the DIN rail mounting groove 13 refer to Fig 1 at right with the DIN rail sz 3 Press the product onto the DIN rail refer to Fig 2 at cs right e 14 S53 20 4 2 Removal SED 1 Turnthe power supply OFF 4 5 2 Disconnect the wiring and input output cables TH gO 3 Place a flathead screwdriver against the DIN rail 3 E mounting hook in the posture shown refer to Fig 1 at right 4 Move the flathead screwdriver in direction shown at right refer to Fig 2 to detach the DIN rail mounting hook from the DIN rail Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu e 5 Remove the product from the DIN rail 2 20 4 3 Input output cable connection The terminal block s CN1 and CN2 connectors comply with the MIL 83503 standard 1 8
2. sesssessssssssssssssseeeen enne nnnm nnn nennen nnns 120 8 Installation In Enclosure 121 MEC dexojcr eijie ioe t mem rc a 124 62 JIMStallatiom IOCAON er EE 125 8 2 1 Installation location in enclosure seessssssssssssssseeeneeen nennen nnne nnne nnn nnns 125 O22 SPACES In enclosure o5 ose ms sais E cce asd ier E elu aetdcue msc E d ed aes dien este 126 0 9 Eayout in Enclosure s ou n e Eee Feo c p rt emenG end PEU n tdem Emu ere MED UE 127 Oal esc 16 oa 2 VO UE euge ansia ees en enlace eae anne f o A So Rost eet ener eet Olen ope Emenee 127 9 39 22 2 Stage AV OU rcs eat erie ack tuse A DN MI M Md IC MEE M ME 127 8 4 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure c ccecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 129 8 4 1 Installing mmelodsuituidutesdt tu Rua arat deobcesd tard tat tainen ids ua e ton e Tos toa TE Mee Arcs hSr os 129 8 4 2 Cautions in examining installing method eeeesssesesesseeenneen menn 129 8 4 3 Examples of installation 1 llsseesssesssssssseseeeeeenn nennen nennen nennen nnns nn nna nnns nar nnn 129 8 5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail seeseeeeeeeeeeenreeeee 131 8 5 1 Preparation Tor installation sii arie oen eoe aute tectus auam Coe e rde DUE IN DL IUe L OE NL OS LOS 131 9 9 2 instalation or mamn BOTE oom Rx PIRA Ec waren see emer nace Fic acit dr et epi E dx u
3. mounting hole pitch The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws 281 SJOJUhOO p ds y iH 3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I eoueua ure N uny 1s9 O c D nN F o o Et gt Q pe1eMog jndino ndul sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF oo suondo pue SylUf 1X3 JOUIO a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 8 3 Terminal layout FX2N 48ER UA1 UL ET confcon xo papa XG T XOPAPa XE T TX 2 X4 X6 TEEN PG D6D6 x T Xt XB XS po TX XS x5 x7 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL vo v2 v4 vel T T lvo v2 TVA 6 T vol Y2 VA V6 com Yi YS ow YS Y7 Eo Y1 YS Eo YS Y7 T Eos Y1 Y8 Y8 Y7 282 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks SE NO DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER o e Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs A Otherwi
4. eeesseeeeeseeeeeneere 103 6 8 5 IE Special extension deVICGS 2 ace aoe uat audae uoce Aad Rial ussu cusa d Ges a ces a te doge decus 104 6 0 6 GI Di Splay module i355 sarees ori steel eee oe ea 105 6 8 7 H Extension power supply unit ccc cecccseecceseceececeeeeceueeceuecceueseeueecaeeeeaaeecaeessaeeseeessueesssaeeseas 105 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification ccccccceecceeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeees 106 6 9 1 Example system configuration iar hee ieee ees ieee enon tdi rae daas ere o a a 106 0 9 2 EXDanSION OF MAN UM sers qoot ua ae soos occi ia ttu ue aesti dosi tes Hau iu aeta ute M s Doa es Posse pes 107 6 9 3 Re examination of suitability for configuration ssseeesssseeeeeseeeneeenn m 110 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y and Unit Numbers 115 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y eessssssssessseeeeeeeenn nnnm nnne 115 1 m ME CONCE Dl OF ASSIOMING ME ES 115 T1V 2 Example Or assigning ass snes cee cre eter as ace adresse ncn Se eet unt dices nuce tcu qus oral t ER 116 1 A 3Applicaion or lO number lab l c oia eoa eee oo a rel HS ue T 117 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Units Blocks ccccccccccecceceeceeseececeeceeseeeeseeeeeseeeetaeeesaees 118 T2 lC ONCE DOL ASSIGN RTL m 118 2 2 Example OF AS SIG IU ING sees ok ce Ses a cu ph o c Lu Ct esL A Ae usd aia 119 7 2 3 Application of unit number labels
5. Power supply for load connected to PLC output For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Output extension block The output circuit of this PLC does not transistor output sink have a built in fuse E Provide a fuse suitable to each load to Lc voha prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit 3 Tey S board caused by output element fracture ax E PT 2 due to load short circuiting Load a4 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 216 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 2 Transistor output source QI AC power supply TD S 100 to 240V transistor output amp source Breaker PA DC power supply 258 Lj co aoe 002 2 25 oo Ooo e p Input output powered extension unit transistor output source O Power supply for load connected to PLC output C Ulm For details on emergency 3 254 stop operation refer to o 2 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS S x lt at Safety Precautions field Output extension block The output circuit of this PLC does not transistor output source have a built in fuse Eds V0 Provide a fuse suitable to each load to Le lvo Sees 7 a Spe prevent blowout of the wires on the c
6. 141 8 7 5 Connecting method D connection of powered extension units blocks 142 8 7 6 Connecting method E connection of extension cable and FX2N CNV BC ceseeeeeeeeeeees 143 8 7 7 Connecting method F connection of input output powered extension unit 143 8 7 8 Connecting method G connection of extension block to input output powered extension unit 144 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 145 9 1 Preparation TOF AN nmt EU m E 147 Oils ft SVMIFIEIG DIOCOQUE OSA 12 Dri EE Peel a E Pond aaa pou UE Du zv ko E ER no Dau de ooh uv kt ado ect Bact 147 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedure uns enrere baeo p eter rto fee DUnenc ke bb dte ep be duum boo eueb pss ada basi 148 9 2 1 Input output terminal block power supply and input output wiring eeeessesesss 148 9 2 2 Input output connectors FX2N input output extension blocks eeeeeeeesseeeeeees 150 9 2 3 Terminal block for europe expansion board and special adapters 151 9 3 Power oupply SPECIICATIONS nirin ir ee ete Se ah tcd quie d Une 152 SEG MN AC POWER SUD DIY MV Oe e E et ced ace eat toed nae uma age nana 152 992 DG Power Supply Type srona eaa euet nee tuse ves tuse ue dea nae npud cu udis esda s de e ensue e aA EEEa 153 SEE Crean Se EE OO I 154 9 5 Examples
7. I No 1 M100 is ON No 2 M101 is ON No 3 M102 is ON 258 E PLCS Setting up Operating 235 Processing unit Now warming up Process 05 E Ver 2 0 Drilling holes KOS 255 2 Character data Seg User message data to be displayed is created in GX Developer and is assigned to the file registers shown S below Refer to Subsection 19 23 7 for character data input 1 6 Message No File Register Where oms Saved Soe BBO 1 D1000 to D1031 Ss 2 D1032 to D1063 i 3 D1064 to D1095 1 7 3 Program com CH iia Sets system information system ES D8300 f signal 1 at D50 to D90 Initial puls D8301 Sets system information system signal 2 at M50 to M56 oo Message No 1 display M100 oc Message No 2 display 95 a UOISU9 X3 194 0 M100 M101 Sets character data at D59 to D90 depending on conditions Message No 3 display M100 M101 M102 M100 Cs Displays character data saved at D59 to D90 M101 M102 END o 5 3 gt f Ww o Q 393 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 23 User Message Display Function 19 23 5 Program example 2 buttons of user messages switching 394 The following is a program example in which the buttons are used to switch the displayed user message Note that user messages do not appear when a screen other than the top screen time display is displayed
8. oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 4 Error Code List and Action When a program error occurs in the PLC the error code is stored in special data registers D8060 D8067 and D8438 The following actions should be followed for diagnostic errors Error codes in shaded columns are added in FX3U PLCs OU Me s operahon at Contents of error Action code error occurrence I O configuration error M8060 D8060 The head number of unconnected I O device Example When X020 is unconnected 1 0 2 BCD conversion value p ome Device number 10 to 337 1 Input X 0 Output Y Unconnected I O relay numbers are programmed en Continues The PLC continues its operation Modify the 4 b operation program check wiring connection or add the e 4st to 3rd digits Device number appropriate unit block e Ath digit I O type 1 input X 0 output Y Example When 1020 is stored in D8060 Inputs X020 and later are unconnected Serial communication error 2 M8438 D8438 DINMNNCENNNL II A NN 30 3802 Inverter communication computer link and 303 programing 3604 correcly set according to their applications 3805 e N N network parallel link etc 3806 Check
9. Not applicable Model name Description pie Marine FX3U AHSX ADP For differential line driver input for high speed counter EARDER z FX3U 2HSY ADP For differential line driver output for positioning output eae For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 3 1 8 I Extension power supply unit v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable EH Model name Description DONIDgipawer e Marine FX3U 1PSU 5V Extension power supply 5V DC 1A 100 to 240V AC 1 Applying for UL standard in February 2006 For details refer to the FX3u 1PSU 5V Installation Manual or contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric Corporation branch office For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 3 1 9 J Extension cables and connector conversion adapter K Battery L Memory cassettes v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted A Partial compliance CE UL EXon 65EC 1 0 65m These cables are used to mount input output 21 extension blocks for FX2N and special ExiGnsion 0 3m function units blocks except FX2N 10GM and FXoN 30EC 0 11 FX2N 20GM away from the main unit i cables This cable is used when FX2N 10GM or FX2N 20GM is mounted at the top of the extension units blocks m E3 3 FX2N GM 65EC Connector Connector conversion adapter to connect input conversion FX2N CNV BC output extension blocks for FX2N
10. Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added 92 In the following quick reference matrix the value at the intersection of the number of input points to be added horizontal axis with the number of output points to be added vertical axis indicates the remaining power supply capacity Select the input output extension block number of points to be connected to the main unit Check that the number of input output points can be added When connecting the FX3u 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest upstream unit to the FX3u 1PSU 5V is an input output powered extension unit include the current consumption by the input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER connected to the FX3u 1PSU 5V when calculating the total current consumption of the input output powered extension unit AC power supply DC input type 1 FX2N 32bR FX2N 32ET FX2N 32ES FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL AC power supply DC input type FX2N 32bL Example 16 24 32 Input Number of added points Example When a 16 input and O output point extension block is connected to FX2n 32EL the current of the 24V DC service power supply becomes 150 mA or less FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current Consumption soma 2 FX2N 48E
11. ccccceecceccseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeesaaas 294 16 4 3 External dimensions RETIRER 295 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C sssssseessesssessseenenen enne nennn nnne nnn nnne nnn nnne nnn a nnns 296 16 574 ProdHBcESDecilICatlOriS ii es So sa ve ae e vao SUR ee us US i d DIS DS D LAE T DELL 296 16 5 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ccccceecceccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeessaeeeesaaas 297 162529 External aimerislolis cns sherds aia el ai ra d ete due eene e rs meses e DIEM A ctu gc PLE 298 16 6 FEX2N 16EXL C 9V DC Input 16 POIFIES 22 722 2500 13050206002 309522 E I2 soo ene pe eec pac 300 TO0 6 1 J roducb SDECIIICAUIONS sai sacs sorsche alice siete este cost ied cotes io e UM ERA ca des didus we ali ur gui o Fixe 300 16 6 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ccccceecccecseeeeeeceaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeesaaas 301 16 63 External dIFelrisloris css does ebat epus DR a D EM LU ets agp 301 TOGA EXamiple OF cn H 301 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC InpU l 45 223 2 tote pee quut eucadessntegict det tit gute uo Dein aot dete extent 303 1655 1 Product SDeciliCcaliOPiSas 34 9 9 ha ee istud a 303 16 7 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangment cccccccseeeceeceseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeessaneeeessaeeees 304 16 7
12. 18 8 1 FX3U 7DM External Dimensions MASS Weight 20g 0 05lbs Display module mounting top cover Manual supplied with product Unit mm inches Accessories MITSUBISHI M m ce O ORO O0OIO 35 1 88 Approx 8 5 0 34 48 1 89 18 8 2 FX3U 7DM HLD External Dimensions MASS Weight 20g 0 05lbs PLC cover Mounting bracket x 2 pieces Tightening bolt M4 x 25 x 2 pieces Extension cable with ferrite core 1 4m 4 7 Clamp A x 5 pieces Clamp B x 1 piece Cable tie x 1 piece Manual supplied with product Unit mm inches Accessories Display module fixing hooks 59 2 33 49 1 93 N Guides Panel thickness must be between 1 and 5 mm 0 04 and 0 19 345 SJO UNOD peedS uDIL adh NO BuutM 1ndjno Jo BuuiM O SOS ShOUEA m I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 pelewod adnonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indinojndu eo N c o fo CD c oO lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition o 9w 19 FX3u 7DM Display Module STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS DANGER Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power i
13. O r O 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names DD zE The following system configuration is classified into product groups A to O in the product introduction sections d given below Display modules e Expansion boards Aq Battery E Memory cassettes eF X3U 7DM eFX3U USB BD eFX3U CNV BD eF X3U 32BL eF X3U FLROM 16 eFX3U 7DM HLD 7778 Fa eFX3u 232 BD eFX3U FLROM 64 eFX3U 422 BD a 98 eFX3U 485 BD c m S I 59 50 E 5e D c 7o 7o ML Special adapters Y Mainunits C Input output extension blocks eFX3U 4AD ADP eFX3U 16MR ES eFX3U 16MT ES S eFX2N 8EX ES UL eFX2N 8EYR ES UL suoneouioedgs Qi s k eFX2N 8EX eFX2N 8EYT ESS UL OU c MERCIER CUME Hs eFX2N 16EX ES UL eFX2N 8EYT E So eF X3U 4AD TC ADP eFX3U 64MR ES eFX3U 64MT ES S eFX2N 16EX eFX2N BEYT H 6 D gt eFX3U 80MR ES eFX3U 80MT ES S eFX2N 16EX C eFX2N 16EYR ES UL a eFX3U 128MR ES eFX3U 128MT ES S eFX2N 16EXL C ee EE x dca eFX3U 16MR DS eFX3U 16MT DS S Input Output oe eFX3U 32MR DS eFX3U 32MT DS S S MESES UE eFX2N 16EYT C mu ESI o 6 Inpuv outpu er AU er A
14. Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapter 8 Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL 13 Product type FX2N extension block lt s Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit Sc cS 2 Weight and Other specifications o Item FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL MASS Weight 0 2 kg 0 44lbs 0 3 kg 0 66lbs I The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 258 Others Accessories Label for indication of input output number ED c The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 2 i D amp 3 Output specifications Relay output type Item FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL 50S Connection unit Vertical terminal block M3 screws 80 Output unit Relay S 5 to 30V DC i External power supply 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation method Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2 Alpoint Resistance The total resistance load current per common should be as follows load 4 output points common 8A or less 1 T Maximum load e 8 output points common 8A or less gt lt 80 VA 3 Inductive load For the product life refer to Su
15. Refer to Subsection 21 2 2 for the removal procedure 2 Install the memory cassette on the main unit Refer to Subsection 21 2 1 for the installation procedure Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC Turn the PLC power ON O oome WR 64L gt PLC e Raise the memory cassette s eject lever Q RD 64L lt PLC 3 Press the RD key 1 time The RD LED lights and a preparation status is established Tocancel press the WR key 4 Press the RD key again Reading is executed and the RD LED blinks 5 Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Reading is completed when the RD LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cas sette from the PLC then turn the PROTECT switch ON Refer to Subsection 21 2 2 for the removal procedure 21 6 Transfers By Display Module Operation Programs can be transferred reading writing between the memory cassette and the PLC s internal RAM memory by a display module operation Refer to Section 19 17 for the memory cassette transfer function 21 7 Operation Precautions Observe the following precautions when writing to file registers D and extended file registers ER by program 1 Flash memory writing count 10 000 writing operations are permitted at the flash memory 2 Precaution for file register usage Writing to the flash memory occurs at each PLC operation cycle if BMO
16. 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol SHUN uoisuagjx4 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddnsg Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply in the main unit and extension units from the outside Such power supply may cause damages to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit and extension units with a 2mm or thicker wire Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system refer to Section 9 4 Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Perform wiring properly to the FXoN FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in acco
17. 2 When the remote running stopping operation from the programming software is performed For this operation keep both the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose input RUN terminal in the STOP position If the stop command is given from the programming software after the PLC is started by either the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal the PLC will be restored to the running status by giving the RUN command from the programming software This can also be accomplished by setting the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal to STOP and then to RUN FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 1 Self diagnostic function When the PLC s power is turned on its self diagnostic function starts automatically If there are no problems with the hardware parameters or program the PLC will start and the RUN command refer to Section 14 2 is given RUN LED is lit If any problems are found the ERROR LED flashes or lights 14 3 2 Test functions Functions of the programming tool to turn on off the PLC devices and change the current values settings are effective or ineffective depending on the PLC status as shown below v Effective A Conditionally effective Ineffe
18. Input output powered extension units In the case of source wiring When a sink and source input type unit is used Main unit and input output powered extension units 226 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 3 Ten Key Input TKY Instructions FNC70 13 3 Ten Key Input TKY Instructions FNC70 9m This section gives examples of wiring for capturing values from ten key pad to D100 using TKY instructions 7 Example of program Ms000 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring NO O e O r E When a sink and source input type unit is used 104 BULIM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 Ses snoueA d mm E E E E E 3 E RA E E I uny 1S9 Main unit and input output powered extension units eoueuea ure N Bunoouse qnoi When a sink input type unit is used peJewog indinojndu Ol d d E E E E E a E E E E sun uoisuejx3 A Input output powered extension units Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo In the case of source wiring When a sink and source input type unit is used NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 E E E E E ES E p E E Input output powered extension units oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 227 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examp
19. NO xo 1 11 xo xi 2 12 Xt xz 3 13 x2 xs 4 14 xs Connector type oo como OOOoooooo Hear line extension connector BuutM 1ndino XS 6 i6 xs X6 7 17 xe Terminal arrangement X718 18 X7 EEA Input indicator lamps LED lamps JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I 16 6 3 External dimensions p z S53 SS amp ES 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches S m 88 e Q lt lt S 15 x DES m ai O x O23 GE ose e o 2E e c ogo E 3 a E a 16 6 4 Example of wiring 17 1 Wiring on input side Su Sink input 7S2 EE no j External 57 5V DC TTL unit E Pig y y p i L N S S t0Vp4V XO 5 XO X1 X3 VAL Input circuit LJ Input circuit main unit or input output powered extension unit oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 301 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points How to connect connector Connection face of connector The polarity is shown in the following table 19 s oda 2L 201841614112 20 P1 gl 46 91 4 91 211 Side B is for the higher input numbers side B S T X7 X6 X5 4 X3 DG XT X0 2a side A i and side A is for the lower input numbers Side A s
20. Value of V6 register Value of Z7 register Value of V7 register Not used Correspond ing special device M8038 Number and name N N Network monitoring D 8200 D 8201 D 8202 D 8203 D 8204 D 8205 D 8206 D 8207 D 8208 D 8209 D 8210 D 8211 D 8212 D 8213 D 8214 D 8215 D 8216 D 8217 D 8218 D 8219 to D 8259 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond ing special device Content of register Not used Current link scan time Maximum link scan time Number of communication error at master station Number of communication error at slave station No 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 2 Number of communication error at slave station No 3 Number of communication error at slave station No 4 Number of communication error at slave station No 5 Number of communication error at slave station No 6 Number of communication error at slave station No 7 M8183 to Code of communication error at M8191 master station Code of communication error at slave station No 1 Code of communication error at slave station No 2 Code of communication error at slave station No 3 Code of communication error at slave station No 4 Code of communication error at slave station No 5 Code of communication error at slave station No 6 Code o
21. and S S terminals Connect sensors and switches to the terminals For details refer to Chapter 10 5 Wire the output Y terminals Connect loads to the terminals For details refer to Chapter 12 147 uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo 5 o 5 ae FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures For cable connection a terminal block or a connector is used The cable connecting procedures are explained below 9 2 1 Input output terminal block power supply and input output wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Perform wiring properly to the FXoN FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electri
22. buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette item then press OK to display the memory cassette transfer screen To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette RAM item then press OK to display the screen shown to the right To cancel the operation and return to the memory cassette transfer screen press ESC 3 Press OK to begin the transfer Or press ESC to cancel the operation Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the memory x cassette transfer screen Disabled Disabled OK Executes the transfer Caution Memory Cassette gt Cassette RAM Cassette gt RAM Cassette RAM Cassette RAM Write OK gt Execute ESC gt Cancel Cassette RAM Write Please wait Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being transferred by a memory cassette transfer menu operation as these actions could destroy the program causing incorrect operation of the PLC 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the memory cassette transfer screen Result and measures to take The transfer is not executed if a PLC is running message appears In this case set the PLC to the STOP state then perform step 3 described above The transfer is not executed if a Transfer failed message appears In
23. sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D 15 5 FX2n 32ER FX2n 48ER FX2n 48ER D 15 5 1 Product specifications 272 The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 Input specifications sink input common Item FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D Number of input points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form Sink Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5 mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3 KQ Input ee 3 5 mA or more 24V DC sensitivity current Aga ev 1 5 mA or less current Input response time About 10 ms Input signal form No voltage contact input or NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler Indication of input operation LED on panel
24. P 3 3kOQ LL J Photo r coupler nm Photo p coupler U 33kQ uS CS Photo coupler EN O00 to OO7 Lower numbers A AO to AA7 Higher numbers pna01 2 3 004 5 6 7 AA0 1 2 3 AA4 5 6 7 For the FX 16EYT H TB the output transistor elements are as shown in the figure below 20 8 3 Example of output external wiring PLC output No 000 1 2 3 004 5 6 7 44012 3 444 5 6 7 power supply For the FX 16EYT H TB the output transistor elements are as shown in the figure below 422 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 4 External wiring precautions QF 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits D A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the Fusell NO output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity Terminal block Transistor protection circuit for inductive loads 9 ae The transistor output circuit in the terminal block is load za equipped with a Zener diode 50V for protection When am an inductive load is connected however a diode should Fuse d be connected parallel to the load when required The diode must comply with the specifications shown below Counter voltage 5 to 1
25. The number of occupied input output points per unit is 8 The number of occupied input output points of each type of device can be obtained by the following formula or from the list shown below Fora list of occupied input output points refer to Section 6 8 Number of special function MUmperonbon e Number of occupied units blocks P p input output points units 8 points points Total number of Each special function unit block i i occupied input PATRE O PECIA CHON used for FROM TO instructions PSE units blocks a output points occupies eight input or output points Observe the following instructions when using the following products e FX2N 1RM SET Up to 3 units can be sequentially connected to the end of one system However when three units are connected they are counted as one unit and the number of input output occupied points is 8 e FX2N 16CCL M CC Link master This master cannot be used together with FX2N 32ASI M When more than one master station is connected a remote I O station cannot be connected to the 2nd and following master stations e FX2N 32ASI M AS i master This master cannot be used together with FX2N 16CCL M Only one station can be used for the whole system FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 4 Calculate the total number of input output
26. uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 Input output powered extension unit relay output Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 Vacant terminal oo oO QO Oo Power supply for load Output extension block connected to PLC output relay output suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field a uoisuo The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting ginpoy ejdsiq 20 Cautions in wiring Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product yoojg jeutua 209 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type This section explains the handling and external wiring of transistor output For the main unit refer to Subsection 12 3 1 Output specifications main unit transistor output sink type Subsection 12 3 2 Output specifications main unit transistor output Source type Subsection 12 3 3 Handling of transistor output Subsection 12 3 4 External wiring precautions and
27. 1 196 The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C235 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams When the input terminals of the main unit are used When pulses having a response frequency of 50 k to 100 kHz are captured to the high speed counter using the input terminals X000 to X005 wire the counter as stated below 1 2 The wiring length should be 5m 16 4 or less As connecting cables use shielded twisted pair cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side Connect a bleeder resistance of 1 5kQ 1W or more to the input terminal so that the sum of the load current of the open collector transistor output on the mating device side and the input current of the main unit is 20 mA or more NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder In the case of sink wiring Rotary encoder Class D grounding 24V JOQO The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder In the case of source wiring Rotary encoder Class D grounding The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 10 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 2 When high speed input special adapter FXsu AHSX ADP is used 1 Differential line
28. 1 Remove the top cover cover 21 2 2 Memory cassette removal 2 Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever C 3 Grasp the detachment lever and pull it Grasp the detachment lever C and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette Caution Take care to avoid twisting the detachment lever when removing the memory cassette 429 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 21 FXSU FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 3 Saved Data Content 21 3 Saved Data Content 430 The following data is saved on the memory cassette e Memory capacity setting Memory capacity default setting 16k steps 2k 4k 8k 16k steps FX3U FLROM 16 2k Ak 8k 16k 32k 64k steps FX3U FLROM 64 64L Comment capacity File register capacity Parameters Buffer memory initial setting capacity Device latch range settings keep device Modem initializing settings battery free operation RUN terminal settings Program RS RS2 instructions computer link function communication settings Programming Memory Positioning settings tool BFM default settings Sequence User created sequence programs programs Max 6350 points Comments and file registers can Comments 0 to 127 blocks be created in the memory by 1 block 50 points 500 steps setting them in the parameter Max 7000 points memory capacity File registers O to 14 blocks 1 block 500 poi
29. 24 l L 327 SJOJUhOO peeds uDIH m NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A syoo g uoisuaX3 idnonndu C N E U o D CD c xe E lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 9 FX2N 4AD TC External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product POWERCO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 4 0 16 55 2 17 Terminal Layout 18 1 10 FX2N 5A External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Labelfor indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch The extension cable
30. A number 1 or more is entered in O of COMO 52 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications b 4 4 2 Product life of relay contacts o The standard life of the contact used for conductive AC loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is Z 500 000 times at 20 VA 4 The following table shows the approximate life of the relay based on the results of our life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF 2 UTI i s Example of applicable loads am song capacity contactue Magnetic switch manufactured by our company S p 0 2 A 100V AC 20 VA 3 000 000 times S K10 to S K95 0 1 A 200V AC 0 35 A 100V AC 35 VA 0 17 A 200V AC 0 8 A 100V AC 80 VA 0 4 A 200V AC If rush overcurrent is shut off even under the above condition the life of the relay contact is considerably decreased 1 000 000 times S K100 to S K150 jnpold CY 200 000 times S K180 S K400 e pmj o e S O 2 4 4 3 Transistor output sink type suoneouioedgs The output numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers YO10 or more means the numbers from YO10 to the largest number that the main unit has The output numbers of FX3U 16MT LIS are YOOO to YOO7 Qi 5 Transistor output sink specifications D em on FX3U 16MT LIS FX3u 32MT LIS FX3u 48MT L IS FX3u 64MT LIS FX3u 8
31. Baia Time ECOSSE EZNJANENE NEED GNE AN Clear all device z i Device all clear T a ee ee ee s SAT SE SIE OS ST S 370 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 13 Entrycodes 19 13 3 Entry code storage QF The system has no process for recovering registered entry codes which are forgotten BS Therefore be sure to store the entry codes in a secure location NO 19 13 4 Screens requiring entry codes for access O At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the EntryCode item then press OK to 8 display one of the 4 screens shown below the screen that displays depends on the entry code status If no entry codes are registered press ESC to return to the menu screen 3 To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC XEntryCod amp The Entry Code ea oe ne EE E E Y c9 ClearAllDev is not set D PLC Status ScanTime I AE Registered SBR Entry code If entry code is correct 5 g Z When switching to menu 2g prohibited by entry code occurs Please All operation 3 input Entry Code is possible 15 Registered mae al oS Entry Code error Registered gee S Entry code 2nd entry code If entry code is incorrect Please Incorrect 16 input Entry Code Entry code us lc k k k e e gs K KXKXKKKK KX SE S NI Make Entry Code cum asg valid
32. D rors 33 BF 5 5 0 2 W 0 2 iO Oi o E rors SS io 6 Y uj m 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 6 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws Unit mm inches Mounting hole pitch W Model name FX3U A4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U AAD TC ADP Refer to the FX3U 232ADP figure shown left FX3U 485ADP FX3u AHSX ADP FX3u 2HSY ADP Unit mm inches Mounting hole Model name pitch W FX2N 32bER ES UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 32ER 140 5 52 FX2N 32ET FX2N 32ES FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48E T ESS UL FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET D FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 210 8 27 172 6 78 Unit mm inches Mounting hole Model name g pitch W FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EX FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 39 1 54 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 16EYR ES UL Refer to the FX2N 16EYR figure shown left FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C FX2N 16EYS FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 5 Special function unit block H I or J Unit mm inche
33. FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 Sink and Source Output Transistor 12 1 Sink and Source Output Transistor 9m FX3U Series main units and FX2N Series input output extension units blocks of transistor sink output type and 8 of transistor source output type are available 1 Differences in circuit e Sink output common Output to make load current flow into the output Y terminal is called sink output BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mh e Source output common Output to make load current flow out of the output Y terminal is called source output I dE OD nV SS Ge oo A RSIS 002 2 25 oo S D Q m uU x oD cO o zc gt q mm 23S O seS S E S o A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 205 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring for Relay Output 12 2 External Wiring for Relay Output This section explains the relay output specifications main unit and external wiring For the main unit refer to Subsection 12 2 1 Output specifications main unit Subsection 12 2 3 Handling of relay output Subsection 12 2 4 Cautions on external wiring and Su
34. Features and part names Introduction of product Specifications Version information System configuration Input output No and unit No assignment Installation Power supply wiring Input wiring High speed counter Output wiring Test operation adjustment maintenance and error check This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for obtaining the manuals and the abbreviations This chapter contains explanations of the product features and the names and functions of the parts This chapter contains explanations of the structures for model names extension products and compliance to overseas standards This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for power supply and input output external dimensions and terminal block layout This chapter contains explanation for upgrading of FX3U PLCs and information for the application of programming tools Procedure for determining whether or not a system configuration is possible Extension device current consumption and configuration examples Input output assignment procedure for input output powered extension units blocks etc and unit No assignment procedure for special function unit blocks This chapter contains explanations for the panel layout and the procedures for installing with DIN rail or screws and how to connect extension devices This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for preparing for wiring powe
35. Inverter communication error latch D8153 ch1 A A FNC274 instruction error D8154 Inverter communication in D8156 execution ch2 Inverter communication error ch2 D8157 Inverter communication error latch D8158 ch2 a FNC274 instruction error D8159 1 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN device Advanced Function M 8160 2 M8161 2 M 8162 M 8163 M 8164 M 8165 2 M 8166 M 8167 2 M 8168 M 8169 SWAP function of XCH FNC 17 8 bit process mode High speed parallel link mode Not used SORT2 FNC149 instruction Sorting in descending order Not used HKY FNC 71 instruction HEX data handling function SMOV FNC 13 instruction HEX data handling function Not used 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 3 Applicable to ASC FNC 76 RS FNC 80 ASCI FNC 82 HEX FNC 83 CCD FNC 84 and CRC FNC188 instructions Pulse Catch M 81704 M 81714 M 81724 M 81734 M 81744 M 81754 M 81764 M 81774 Input X000 pulse catch Input X001 pulse catch Input X002 pulse catch Input X003 pulse catch Input X004 pulse catch Input X005 pulse catch Input X006 pulse catch Input X007 pulse catch 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN El FNC 04 instruction is necessary Communication Port Channel Setting M 8178 Parallel link channel switch OFF ch1 ON ch2 N N n
36. Operation The No 1 message shown below appears when auxiliary relay M100 switches on and the buttons can be used at that time to switch to the other messages as shown below The system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56 No 1 No 2 No 3 PLCS Setting up Operating Processing unit PER US Now warming Process 05 Ver 2 0 Drilling holes Character data User message data to be displayed is created in GX Developer and is assigned to the file registers shown below Refer to Subsection 19 23 7 for character data input Message No File Register Where Saved 1 D1000 to D1031 2 D1032 to D1063 3 D1064 to D1095 Program M8002 l Sets system information system u D8300 signal 1 at D50 to D90 Initial pulse Set emini tion syst ets system information system D8301 signal 2 at M50 to M56 M100 M54 User message display command M100 T ZRST a the user message selection User Sets the user message initial screen message displayed flag button ON M100 M56 M53 H se M61 Sen User message selection flag control in displayed flag button ON accordance with button M100 M56 M52 operation E M59 M63 M60 M61 Sets user message data at D59 to M62 D90 END 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 23 User Message Display Function FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 23 6 Program example 3
37. Specifications Item FX3U 16ML FX3U 32ML FX3U 48ML FX3U 64MLI FX3U 80MLI1 FX3U 128ML T1 Number of input points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points jnpold CY Fixed terminal g Input connecting type block Removable terminal block M3 screw 2 M3 screw Input form sink source Input signal voltage AC power type 24V DC 10 DC power type 16 8 to 28 8V DC I X000 to X005 3 9 kO Input impedance X006 X007 3 3 kQ X010 or more 4 3kQ X000 to X005 6 mA 24V DC Input signal pase X006 X007 7 mA 24V DC X010 or more ey 5 mA 24V DC ON input X000 to X005 3 5 mA or more suoneouioedgs Qi sensitivity X006 X007 4 5 mA or more uve current eas X010 or more 3 5 mA or more are OFF input sensitivity 58 z m current 1 5 mA or less z Input response time Approx 10 ms No voltage contact input 6 Input signal form Sink input NPN open collector transistor Source input PNP open collector transistor OW ETE SS Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation as Input operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven si AC power supply type z Sink input wiring Source input wiring 7 co EIE gt E P Input circuit configuration 1 Input impedance uonejejsu oo DC power supply type Sink input wiring 2 a o AO oe O x pw lt 5 Q 24V E 0V 2 FX3U 128MLI does not have DC power supply type 9 Do not connect with OV and
38. uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 9 Calculation of Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 1 Calculation of overall frequency The overall frequency is calculated by the high speed comparison instruction used in the program based on the above table Overall frequency gt Sum of response frequency of high speed counter x Magnification for calculation of overall frequency 2 Example of calculation When only HSZ instruction is used six times in a program the frequency is calculated by the formulas shown in the Only HSZ instruction column in the above table Magnification for calculation of Instruction to be used High speed counter No to be Input Calculation of max used frequenc response frequenc q y p q y overall frequency C237 Operauon as 30kHz 40 6 times 34kHz software counter HSZ instruc C241 20kHz 40 6 times 34kHz X1 tion is used Software counter six times 1 The overall frequency is calculated as shown below because HSZ instruction is used six times Overall frequency 80 1 5 x 6 71kHz 2 The sum of the response frequencies of the high speed counters used is calculated as shown below 3OkHz x 1 C237 20kHz x 1 C241 4kHz x 4 C253 OP 66KHz lt 71kHz 2 When FXsu Series special function units blocks and analog special adapte
39. uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu mJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Rules of System Configuration 6 2 Rules of System Configuration The system configuration must meet the following three requirements 1 Number of input output points The total number of input output points and remote I O points on CC Link or AS i system must be 384 points or less on the whole system For details refer to Section 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points Number of input output points on whole system Up to 384 points Input output Special e Expansion board CC Link LT CC Link master e S pecial adapter Ber dnd a ud master or AS i master CC Link LT Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote 1 0 station 2 Number of remote I O points Up to 256 points CC Link or AS i system Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote O station Remote I O station 1 Regarding the type of network the number of remote I O is up to 224 points in CC Link and is up to 248 points in AS i ee 2 Number of connected special extension devices The numbers of connectable expansion boards special adapters and special function units blocks are shown below For d
40. yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 15 8 FX2n 48ER UA1 UL 15 8 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications 100V AC Input Item FX2N 48ER UA1 UL Number of input points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form AC input Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC 10 15 50 60 Hz 4 7 mA 100V AC 50 Hz 70 or less when turned on simultaneously 6 2 mA 110V AC 60 Hz 7096 or less when turned on simultaneously Approx 21 kQ 50 Hz Approx 18 kQ 60 Hz TM Dd 3 8 mA or more 80V AC Input sensitivity Current current un 1 7 mA or less 30V AC current Input signal current Input impedance Input response time Approx 25 to 30 ms Input signal form Contact input Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel is lit when there is input Input circuit diagram 1 Input impedance 280 FX3u Series Progra
41. 40 0 21 201 1146 Fax 40 0 21 201 1148 e mail sirius siriustrading ro CRAFT SERBIA AND MONTENEGRO Consulting amp Engineering d o o Branka Krsmanovica Str 43 V SCG 18000 Nis Phone 381 0 18 531 226 Fax 381 0 18 532 334 e mail craft bankerinter net INEA SR d o o SERBIA AND MONTENEGRO Karadjordjeva 12 260 SCG 113000 Smederevo Phone 381 0 26 617 163 Fax 381 0 26 617 163 e mail viadstoj yubc net AutoCont Control s r o SLOVAKIA Radlinsk ho 47 SK 02601 Dolny Kub n Phone 421 435868 210 Fax 421 435868 210 e mail infoGautocontcontrol sk INEA d o o Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail inea inea si SLOVENIA Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 S 20124 Malm Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 e mail infoGbeijer se ECONOTEC AG Postfach 282 CH 8309 N rensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 Kat 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 490 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net SWITZERLAND TURKEY CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 494 3355 Fax 380 0 44 494 3366 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua Systems Siberia Shetinkina St 33 Office 116 RU 630088 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 11959
42. 48 aa 5 2 input output extension blocks EF No need to calculate amp F zi Current consumed mA D Number of input No Type output points 5V DC Internal 24V DC External 24V DC Types for addition of input output FXa SERESUL 16 E 75 0 SE a 6 C 7 0 28 Types for addition of input z Pewxxesu e Ps m 9 psx e s o 7 parne 96 9 1 D2 Types for addition of output 8 Peu 8 5 paser J 8 po 7 9 pov 08 o 7 9 9 paeen e o A pen e mw o 10 paee e CPT w Bui 1ndu 103 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 5 E Special extension devices 1 Special function blocks A 9 4 5 6 STe 104 Number of Current consumed mA Current 39 Type inpusoccupisdi ec ineme AVEC enema belo sis SLE nterna xterna startup mA 3 a BRNE aA TE A T E S E FXsu 208SC H 85 6 Bas 1 5 8 Pow 8 3 8 8 Paese 3 3 3 8 aso 8s 8 8 8 pamm 8 8 8 8 Pmac s m 8 8 xac I8 9l papas 8 8 pai a p FX2N FX2N 32CCL a from ee a E um T FX2N EU M i When the voltage of the external DC power supply is 24V
43. 5 No OK gt Execute c lt ESC gt Cancel oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E Q Q 371 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 13 Entrycodes 19 13 5 Canceling an entry code 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the EntryCode item then press OK to display the entry code input screen If an entry code has been registered one of the following screens is displayed Ifa 16 digit entry code is registered an 8 digit x 2 line screen shown at left below is displayed f an 8 digit entry code is registered an 8 digit x 1 line screen shown at right below is displayed 16 digit entry code 8 digit entry code Please Entry code Please input Entry Code input Entry Code ur ails O k k x k x x k xk xk ook iri diri KK KKK KK 2 Use the buttons to specify the first digit of the entry code then press OK to proceed to the next digit To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 16 digit entry code 8 digit entry code Please Please input Entry Code input Entry Code 6723B967 01234567 AF 2C45B0 Lowest order digit Lowest order digit final digit final digit Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen if pressed when the entry code s left most digit highest order digit
44. 5m 16 4 F2 720RSV T resolver extension cable 6 55mm 2 06 label for o indication of special unit So block number Manual Se supplied with product lii z Terminal block M3 screws cp et 0 16 1 19 55 2 17 F2 720RSV Unit mm inches 4 04 5 mounting holes 45 1 78 Terminal Layout Bojer EJ 333 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL a3 NO BuutM 1ndjno JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 A syoo g uoisuaX3 idnonndu C N E U o D s CD c xe E lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 20 FX2N 232IF External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws FX2u 232IF Pe eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product eConnector RS 232C D SUB 9 pin male The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal Layout 1 CD DCD 5 o 2 RD RXD
45. 71 soma uononpoJju SeuJeN Hed pueseimee4 M jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs 0p lt lt o D 3 uonenBijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 6 Examination of System Configuration 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System The configuration of a whole system is shown below as an example Configuration of whole system 1 Expansion board and special adapters 2 Determination of number of extension devices to be connected to main unit Expansion board 1 Extension devices for FX3su FX2N F XoN Series RD H Se H so lei ms Output Input extension Output Special T extension block block extension block function block Special FX3u 48MR ES FX2N 16EYR FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2n 16EYT ESS UL FX2nN 8AD adapters X000 to X027 ae aoe AAAA AAAA 8 3 MOMOMO MU RINII 38 33 TAA AGA AIGA alia E 8 fes e ee e e e e cura 9 E 30 Fxen 16EYR FXon 16EX Y030 to Y047 Y 050 to YOG7 Range of devices powered from main unit e c Go Gu Gu UD UD GUD UD eee GUD GUND GUD GND GND GND GND GND GUD G
46. Analog Control Edition JY997D16701 Model FX3U U ANALOG E Details of analog special function EX3U EX3UC blocks and analog special adapters separate manual The manuals for FX3U Series will be available in or after July 2005 User s Manual Data Communication Edition JY997D16901 Model FX U COMMU E Details of simple link between PCs FX parallel link computer link no protocol communication and separate EN programming communication manual The manuals for FX3U Series will be available in or after July 2005 User s Manual Positioning Control Edition JY997D16801 Model FX3U U POS E Details of wiring instructions and operations of positioning functions in CASU Ue PLC main unit separate manual The manuals for FX3U Series Transistor output will be available in or after February 2006 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 3 List of manuals FX3U Series PLC main units supplied only with the hardware manual For the details of the hardware of FX3u Series refer to this manual For instructions for programming and hardware information on special function devices refer to the relevant uononpoJju manuals 2 Indispensable manuals ER v Manuals necessary for some purposes Se i o A Manuals with separate volumes for details a j N Q Model name code Manual Contents number M
47. D 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 2 Specifications 19 2 Specifications 19 2 1 Display switch specifications Item Description Display device backlight STN monochrome liquid crystal display Backlight LED green Number of letters 16 letters x 4 lines 2 byte letters 8 letters x 4 lines da English Alphabet Numbers Japanese Characters Shift JIS Level 1 2 Language for menu display Japanese English Button 4 operation buttons OK ESC and Notes for displaying symbols ASCII Code X ASCII Code 5C symbol is displayed as Y even if the language display setting at FX3U 7DM is set to English LANGUAGE ENGLISH e The Character at ASCII Code 7E is not displayed 19 2 2 Parts layout Liquid crystal screen 5 J ESC button 5 y button e y button P5 y OK button Functions of operation buttons The display module has 4 operation buttons as shown in the following table Name of button Function of operation button ESC Use this button to cancel the operation and to return to the previous screen Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value E Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value OK Use this button to select an item or to determine the set numeric value 19 2 3 External dimensions 348 Unit
48. E Handy programming panels HPP RS 232C RS 422 converters RS 232C RS 485 converters Indicators GOT1000 Series GOT 900 Series GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series Manuals 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Description Generic name for the following models FX2N 232IF FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 64CL M FX2N 16LNK M FX2N 32ASI M FX2N 2AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC FX2N 2DA FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A FX2N 1HC FX2N 1PG E FX2N 10PG The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used For applicable devices refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the main unit to be used Generic name for the following models FXON 3A Generic name for the following models FX3U FLROM 16 FX3U FLROM 64 and FX3u FLROM 64L Abbreviation of model FX3u 32BL battery Generic name for the following models FX 16E TB FX 32E TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used For applicable devices refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the main unit to be used Generic name for the following models FXON 30EC FXON 65EC Generic name for the following models FX 16E 500CAB S FX 16E LILILICAB FX 16E LILILICAB R FX A32E LILILICAB 150 300 or 500 is entered in LIL ILI Generic name for the following models FX2C lI O CON FX2c I O CON S FX2c I D CON SA Abbreviation of F
49. Ee 01ASV 8 y y y y j y y iode is gt y e X11 vX12 VX13 VX14 vX15 VX16 vx17 X11 vX12 VX13 VX14 vX15 vX16 vx17 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO D x D S E 48 48 yd Q8 Q8 b 5 V V V V V V V V 19 c c 3 S i 20 Oo ia pu D D UJ 8 231 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 5 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC52 2 Main unit input output powered extension unit block Example of program M8000 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring When the main unit and a transistor output sink type input output powered extension unit block are used O _ CN co ST LO O N 2 s ss 3 ss 0 1A 50V diodeis gt A necessary X11 VX12 VX13 VX14 VX15 VX16 VX17 b CN co ST LO CO N lt lt lt lt lt lt lt S s S zzz x N X11 VX12 VX13 VX14 VX15 VX16 VX17 O v N c ST LC CO N co co co co co co co co s s osssysy xz i i iN iN iN iN iN iN ioe es 2 COM 24 Input output powered extension unit block Main unit Transistor output sink sie 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET Output extension blocks do not have the terminals In the case of source wiring When the ma
50. Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may still occur For example T200Z itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 400 the timer T600 would attempt to be accessed This would cause an operation error since there is no T600 device available This error occurs when the same device is used within the source and destination in a shift instruction etc FROM TO instruction error Other e g improper branching Mismatch among parameters Incorrect sampling time TS TS x 0 Incompatible input filter constant a lt 0 or 100 lt a lt PID instruction is stopped gt Incompatible proportional gain KP KP lt 0 This error occurs in the parameter setting value or Incompatible integral time T TI lt 0 operation data executing PID instruction Incompatible derivative gain KD Check the contents of the parameters KD 0 or 201 KD Incompatible derivative time TD TD lt 0 Continues operation Auto tuning is continued The operation is continued in the condition sampling time TS 7 cyclic time scan time Sampling time TS Scan time Variation of measured value exceeds limit APV 32768 or 32767 APV Deviation exceeds limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV Integral result exceeds limit lt PID muss Outside range from 32768 to 432767 Siu Morte The operation is continued with each p
51. Exe Side B X050 to X057 Side A X040 to X047 Side B gt EOW V7 Y6TY5 Y YS Y2 YT YO Side A _ CoML Y7 ve vs va Y LY2 Y YO 317 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIE a3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog Indjnojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks 16 12 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 12 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output 16 12 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapter Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item Product type Rated voltage 2 Weight and Other spesifications Item MASS Weight FX2N 8EYT H FX2N extension block 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit FX2N 8EYT H 0 2 kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transisto
52. FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals 28 Abbreviation generic name PLCs FX3U Series FX2N Series FXON Series FX3U PLCs or main units FX3UC PLCs or main units Expansion boards Special adapters High speed input output special adapters Communication special adapters Analog special adapters Extension devices FX3U Series extension devices FX2N Series extension devices FXON Series extension devices Input output extension devices FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N Series input output extension blocks FX2N Series input extension blocks FX2N Series output extension blocks Special function blocks units FX3U Series special function blocks FX3UC Series special function blocks FX2N Series special function units Description Generic name for FX3U Series PLCs Generic name for FX2N Series PLCs Generic name for FXON Series PLCs Abbreviation of FX3U Series PLC main units Abbreviation of FX3UC Series PLC main units Generic name for the following models FX3U USB BD FX3u 232 BD FX3U 422 BD FX3u 485 BD FX3U CNV BD Generic name for high speed input output special adapters communication special adapters and analog special adapters Generic name for the following models FX3U 4HSX ADP FX3u 2HSY ADP Gen
53. Grounding and type u power cables Class D i i l Special function SIUS i block l Output extension block SV IOV 24V ene a ee ee j When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case power of the PLC including special extension of 100V AC system and 200V AC system equipment at the same time Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the 4 Some special function units blocks do not have main unit and extension power supply units or earlier in extension the power supply terminals power supply units than the main unit When usin i hi n g an external power supply turn it aA pa Bee VES G PRECAUTIONS AL SAIE ON at the same time with the extension power 2 Connect the OV terminal of the main unit to the S S terminal of the supply unit or earlier than the extension power input extension block supply unit 3 Some special function units blocks do not have the power supply When turning OFF the power confirm the terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit safety of the system and then
54. Input interrupt including the delay function High speed counter C235 to C255 Pulse catch M8050 to M8057 SPD instruction 2 Check the contents of D8336 for the correct interrupt signal specification for DVIT instruction 1 Input X specified by DSZR DVIT or ZRN instruction is already used in another instruction The interrupt signal device for DVIT instruction is outside the allowable setting range Pulse output number is already used ina positioning instruction or pulse output instruction PLSY PWM etc ww The number of times an applied instruction is used Number of applied instruction exceeds limit SM in the program exceeds the specified limit Writing error to flash memory cassette l Check for the correct attachment of the memory Flash memory cassette is not connected ere The write protect switch of the flash memory cassette was set to ON when data was transferred to the flash memory While data was written in the RUN mode data was transferred to read from or written to the flash memory Check to make sure the pulse output destination is not being driven by another positioning instruction Flash memory cassette is protected against writing Access error to flash memory during writing in RUN mode Special block error M8449 D8449 1020 1021 1080 1090 Continues operation ae General data sum error Check for the correct connection of extension Ge
55. Pew8EX lt a femara 8 8 PGNSEXUAMUL oova Terminal block i6 16 PXm GEXESIUL 24VDC Terminal biock v O v 2 i6 16 Bewi6EX avoe Temmabick w 16 pee avoe eomer w e pox VC Connector Input extension type s 8 jPGSEYRESIUL Relay Teminatblock v v v FX2N 8EYT ESS UL Transistor ess inal block 7 2 source 8 s e poen Remy emaa 8 FX2N BEYT Transistor eeninal Black E sink 8 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor s orminal block sink 16 16 FX2N 16EYR ES UL Terminal block 2 16 16 FX2N 16EYT ESS ae M YuiminarBldck 2 UL source 16 16 FX2n FX2N 16EYR BEEN 2 Terminal block ee paces nae remisi f 16 FXon 16EYT hes s rminaliblock sink FX2N 16EYT C Transistor es anector sink 1 Four inputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers 2 For details refer to catalogs or contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric Corporation branch office For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 38 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names md 3 1 4 D E Special function units blocks S For d
56. SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E Q Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Menu Structure 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 6 Menu Structure Title screen MELSEC F FX3U Series Ver 2 00 y Approx 1 5 secs Top screen Time display OK ot BOS 23 59 59 Tue Switched by system information setting User message display function Production OK Target 10000 ESC 100 9900 Production Remaining User creation screen example 352 Menu screen Monitor Test gt gt ErrorCheck gt gt LANGUAGE gt gt Contrast ClockMenu Operation keys OK Press the OK button lt ESC_ Press the ESC button The button are used to move the cursor and switch between display screens Er OK D 16bit XESC DD 32bit T C R 16bit DR 32bit ER 16bit DER 32bit OK ErrorCheck lt ESC_ No errors 9K LANGUAGE ESC B AB English Display example OK lcontrast ESC _ KS gt gt Current time lt ESC _ Clock Setting FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 6 Menu Struc
57. Source common SE E ee Model Number Common Number Common it Type Type i uni of points system of points system Common to both sink and source inputs FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC 4 8 t 4 8 DR bo Dedicated to sink input only 1 Fourinputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers 2 For input extension Sink common Source common Connection Tune Number Common Tvbe Number Common vh yP of points system yP of points system Common to both sink and source inputs Model Terminal Dedicated to sink input only FX2N 16EXL C 100V AC input type Terminal block 285 SJOJUhOO peeds uDIH m NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog Indjnojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 1 Outline 286 3 For output extension Sink common Source common Model Number Common Number Common Type i Type unit of points system of points system Relay output type FX2N 8EYR ES UL Relay Terminal block Terminal FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay 16 Terminal block Terminal Dedicated to sink output only asen o o o pee Bes mm w o c pee ees Dm W
58. The input mode of an input output extension block is determined according to the selection of the sink or source input mode on the powered extension unit power source Caution in selecting model A type common to sink source input and a type only for sink input are both available Select a proper type Differences from FX2N PLCs in input specifications reference FX2N PLCs only for sink input manuals in Japanese are supplied and those common to sink source input manuals in English are supplied have different model names n FK2N PLCs only for sink input the S S terminal and the 24V terminal are connected unlike in FX3U PLCs e FX2N PLCs common to sink source input are switched to the sink or source input mode by external wiring like FX3U PLCs FXau Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input b 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input The input specifications for the main unit cautions in wiring the unit and examples of wiring are given below S 10 2 1 Input specifications main unit 2 The input numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers X010 or more means the numbers from X010 to the largest number that the main unit has ZE The input numbers of FX3U 16ML are X000 to X007 g For details on sink source input refer to Subsection 10 1 1 S
59. Up counting Down counting input input Main unit 2 For C249 00 ci LE e While X012 is on C249 starts counting immediately when 2 RST C249 the input terminal X006 turns on oe o The up counting input terminal is X000 and the down counting input terminal is X001 C249 can be reset on the sequence by X011 For C249 X002 is allocated as reset input When X002 Down counting External start input input turns on C249 is immediately reset Ed E un e The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 X000 X001 X002 X006 200 EU OR E ON Down counting OFF Up counting 189 SJojuno2 peeds ubiH NO BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol SHUN UOISUS X4Z syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 6 Handling of High speed Counters 11 6 3 2 phase 2 count input 190 These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed coun
60. press ESC 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Clock setting item To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 3 Press the OK button to display the Clock setting screen To cancel the operation and return to the selection screen press Clock setting ESC 19 8 7 11 19 Thu 4 Use the buttons to change the blinking data as desired then press OK to register the change Clock setting Settings are performed in the following sequence Year Month gt 31 1 2004 Day Hours Minutes Seconds After pressing OK to register the final seconds setting a Current time is set message is displayed completing the current time setting procedure The default Year display is a Button Operation Description 2 digit value indicating the Western calendar year 23 595594Sat Returns to the previous setting item ESC Returns to the selection screen when at the Year item Year is blinking position Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase Proceeds to the next setting item OK Current time is set message displays if pressed at the Seconds item Seconds is blinking 5 Press OK or ESC to return to the selection screen 6 Press ESC to return to the menu screen 367 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL a3 NO Bu
61. uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo N SON UN SON jnd no ndul uonejejsu oo 5 o 5 ae FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply in the main unit and extension units from the outside Such power supply may cause damages to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit and extension units with a 2mm or thicker wire Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system refer to Section 9 4 Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Perform wiring properly to the FXoN FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cau
62. 0 5 A point 1 A point Resistance The total load current of resistance loads per The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value common terminal should be the following value mises eros 4 output points common terminal 0 8A orless 4 output points common terminal 3A or less neue hve 12 W 24V DC 24 W 24V DC load Open circuit leakage 0 1 mA 30V DC 0 1 mA 30V DC current Response OFF5ON 0 2 ms or less 24V DC 0 3 ms or less 24V DC n 4 x time ONOFF 1 5 ms or less 24V DC 4 ms or less 24V DC voltage Circuit isolation Photo coupler isolation Photo coupler isolation Operation indicators LED lights when photo coupler power is supplied LED lights when photo coupler power is supplied Power consumption 2 7 W 112 mA 24V DC 2 7 W 112 mA 24V DC 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 421 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIE a3 N BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow SHUN uoisuag x4 490 UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo C o nen o lt O Q D FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 20 8 2 Internal circuit Photo y coupler 4
63. 1 3 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Contrast item then press OK to display the contrast adjustment screen To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Contrast Use the buttons to adjust the contrast To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press Contrast ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Lowers the contrast decreases the numeric value The value can be decreased to 5 Increases the contrast l increases the numeric value The value can be increased to 10 OK Registers the selected setting and returns to the menu screen Press the OK button to register the selected setting and return to the menu screen FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 12 Clock Menu Current Time Setting 19 12 Clock Menu Current Time Setting The ClockMenu menu consists of current time display and the time setting items The current time should be set before operating the system 19 12 1 Current time setting procedure 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ClockMenu item then press OK to display the selection Current timet screen shown at right Glocke sarin To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display
64. 3 Seven Segment Decoder 74 Seven Segment With Latch 75 Arrow Switch 76 ASC ASCII Code Data Input 77 NEL Print ASCII Code 78 Read From A Special Function Block 79 Write To A Special Function Block FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FNC No Function External FX Device 80 Serial Communication 81 Parallel Run Octal Mode 82 Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 84 Check Code 85 Volume Read 86 Volume Scale 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 88 PID PID Control Loop 89 to 99 Data Transfer 2 100 101 102 ZPUSH Data Transfer 2 Batch Store of Index Register 103 ZPOP Batch POP of Index Register 104 to 109 Floating Point 110 ECMP _ Floating Point Compare 111 EZCP Floating Point Zone Compare 112 EMOV Floating Point Move 113 to 115 116 ESTR Floating Point to Character String Conversion 117 EVAL Character String to Floating Point Conversion 118 EBCD Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion 119 EBIN Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion 120 EADD Floating Point Addition 121 ESUB Floating Point Subtraction 122 EMUL Floating Point Multiplication 123 EDIV Floating Point Division 124 EXP Floating Point Exponent 125 LOGE Floating Point Natural Logarithm 126 LOG10 Floating Point Common Logarithm 127 ESQR Floating Point Square Root 128 ENEG Floating Point Negation 129 INT Floating Point
65. Bunoouse qnoi eoueuea ure N Uny S L peJewog jndinoanduj DO Sjiuf uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N Pun A ddng Jewog UOISU9 X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 o 5 3 gt f Ww o Q FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition EN 3 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC 2 When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks
66. Deceleration time H Default 100 Lower Y001 Current value register YOO1 Bias speed Default 0 Lower Y001 Maximum speed Upper Default 100000 YOO1 Creep speed Default 1000 Lower Y001 Zero return speed E Upper Default 50000 Y001 Acceleration time E Default 100 YOO1 Deceleration time B Default 100 Lower Y002 Current value register B Upper Default O YOO2 Bias speed Default 0 Lower Y002 Maximum speed H Upper Default 100000 0008Q 0008IN sr uononuisu WwW sooi e jeloeds 9po00 J9joeJeu2 YOO2 Creep speed Default 1000 Lower Y002 Zero return speed Upper Default 50000 YOO2 Acceleration time Default 100 Y002 Deceleration time B Default 100 Lower 1Y 003 Current value register Y003 Bias speed Default 0 Lower Y003 Maximum speed U r Default 100000 ppe Y003 Creep speed Default 1000 Lower 1003 Zero return speed Upper Default 50000 NH Y003 Acceleration time E e Default 100 Y003 Deceleration time e Default 100 D8380 t D 3 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP adapters are connected to an PLC 451 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond ing special device Number and Content of register name Interrupt Program D 8393 Delay time M8393 D 8394 D 8395 Not used D 8396 D 8397
67. MCR P I DI El FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND or END STL MC or MCR can be used only in main 6618 program but it is used elsewhere e g in interrupt routine or subroutine 6619 Invalid instruction is used in FOR NEXT loop This error occurs when a combination of STL RET MC MCR interrupt pointer or IRET instructions is incorrect in the entire circuit block or 6620 Stops FOR NEXT instruction nesting level exceeded when the relationship between a pair of instructions operation is incorrect 6621 Modify the instructions in the program mode so that match their mutual relationship becomes correct 6672 6623 6624 more Invalid instruction is programmed within STL RET 6626 loop MC MCR interrupt pointer SRET or IRET 6627 6628 Invalid instruction is used in main program interrupt pointer SRET or IRET 6629 STL RET or MC MCR instructions in subroutine 668 6632 Operation error M8067 D8067 0000 NO eror No jump destination pointer for CJ or CALL instruction Label is undefined or out of PO to P4095 due to 6701 indexing Label P63 is executed in CALL instruction This error occurs in the execution of operation cannot be used in CALL instruction as P63 is for Review the program or check the contents of the jumping to END instruction operands used in the applied instructions 6702 Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an 6703 Continues Interrupt nesting level is 3 or more o
68. Output extension block Main unit 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET Output extension blocks do not have the terminals In the case of source wiring When the main unit and a transistor output source type input output powered extension unit block are used Digital switch of BCD diode is necessary S S OV 24V Input output powered extension unit Output extension block Transistor output Source MG Main unit 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET ESS UL Output extension blocks do not have the terminals 224 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 3 Input output powered extension unit o a Example of program 29 D Q M8000 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring When an input output powered extension unit block with transistor output sink is used with input output powered extension unit NO O e O r 2 s Dig
69. Ses Rotary encoder oo Class D grounding e ie R o o up a S s 2 2 z I TI D lt J O suondo ginpoy ejdsiq pue spun e UOISU9 X3 JOUIO 20mA or The grounding resistance should be 100 or less more 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 197 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 10 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder In the case of source wiring Rotary encoder Fuse T DC TN itus Class D grounding wH cus VEG ETE OOO T S000 20mA or The grounding resistance should be 100 or less more 2 When high speed input special adapter FX3u 4HSX ADP is used 1 Differential line driver output rotary encoder In the case of differential line driver wiring Rotary encoder Input No of first second unit Twisted pair Non inverted shielded wire output S e EAE Phase A Non inverted OOO Tiers opu ae Inverted output nverted outpu premis pez Z High speed input grounding special adapter The grounding resistance should be 100 or less 11 10 3 Cautions for the other side device Encoders having the output forms shown in the following table can be connected to the terminals The encoders may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility Check the specifications in a
70. Setting the PROTECT switch to ON on memory cassette s rear face prevents accidental overwriting of memory cassette program Refer to Subsection 21 2 1 for the installation procedure Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC Turn the PLC power ON WR LED WR key Raise the memory cassette s eject lever mr 2 Press the WR key 1 time OIA re O C Rb e4LePLO The WR LED lights and a preparation status is established e To cancel press the RD key 3 Press the WR key again Writing is executed and the WR LED goes off Writing to the built in RAM is completed instantaneously and the LED goes out soon 4 Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Writing is completed when the WR LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cas sette from the PLC Refer to Subsection 21 2 2 for the removal procedure 432 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 21 FXSU FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 6 Transfers By Display Module Operation 21 5 3 Reading RD 64L lt PLC Programs are read from the PLC s internal RAM memory to the memory cassette Required condition The PLC must be stopped and the PROTECT switch must be OFF 1 Turn the PROTECT switch OFF at the rear face of the memory cassette The memory cassette must be removed from the PLC in order to turn the PROTECT switch OFF
71. Unit mm inches 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 310 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 10 EX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 11 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 9g 16 10 1 Product specifications N The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapter 8 Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR 13 Product type FX2N extension block lt s Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit Sc cS 2 Weight and Other specifications o Item FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR MASS Weight 0 2 kg 0 44lbs 0 3 kg 0 66lbs I The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 258 Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number x D e The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 2 i D amp 3 Output specifications Relay output type tem FREN TSEYR 2 CD c Connection unit Vertical terminal block M3 screws 80 Output unit Relay S External power supply 250V AC 30V DC or less Output circuit insulation method Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp o
72. User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond ing special Correspond ing special Number and name Number and name Operation and function Operation and function device High Speed Counter Comparison High Speed Table and Positioning M 8130 M 8131 M 8132 M 8133 M 8134 M 8135 M 8136 M 8137 M 8138 M 8139 M 8140 M 8141 M 8142 M 8143 M 8144 M 8145 M 8146 M 8147 M 8148 M 8149 HSZ FNC 55 instruction Table comparison mode HSZ FNC 55 instruction D8130 Table comparison mode completion flag HSZ FNC 55 and PLSY FNC 57 instructions Speed pattern mode HSZ FNC 55 and PLSY FNC 57 D8131 to instructions D8134 Speed pattern mode completion flag HSCT FNC280 instruction D8138 Instruction execution complete flag HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 HS2 FNC 55 HSCT FNC280 instructions D8139 High speed counter comparison instruction executing ZRN FNC156 instruction CLR signal output function enable Not used Y000 Pulse output stop command YOO1 Pulse output stop command Y000 Pulse output monitor 2 BUSY READY YOO 1 Pulse output monitor B BUSY READY Inverter Communication Function M 8150 M 8151 M 8152 M 8153 M 8154 M 8155 M 8156 M 8157 M 8158 M 8159 Inverter communication in D8151 execution ch1 Inverter communication error ch1 D8152
73. User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Installation location 8 2 2 Spaces in enclosure Extension devices can be connected on the left and right sides of the main unit of the PLC If you intend to add extension devices keep necessary spaces on the left and right sides 1 Configuration without extension cable FX3u Series main unit FX2N 16EYT ESS UL x LLI co um Z N 2 LL ES UL Another equipment FX3U Series main unit FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Extension cable FXoN 65EC Input output TON UE powered extension unit FX2N CNV BC FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 10PG Another equipment Another equipment i EN gt 50mm 1 97 126 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Layout in Enclosure sad 8 3 Layout in Enclosure I The PLC components can be laid out in one stage or in two stages upper and lower The connecting ej procedures in each case are explained below 8 3 1 1 stage layout 2 UT Input output powered extension units blocks as Special adapter Special function units blocks 3 o GL NN M 0078 fk Pe gr mi m m m PP PPP NE ox oX il mutoupt oX ox BY 3 1059581716154 PURSE 25 22 powered 35 f 3585 4 Hon moy mod d G i o extension units amp S i AS 23 n n m om om om Y il I Odo 8 H8 08 8 n n m M yj LAE ee te ERN NEL UN e Qo o Up to 10 units app
74. buttons sets K200 the 5th displayed device as a D200 NEN 16 bit device with a hexadecimal current value display format M65 At user registered device screen scrolling by and buttons sets K210 the 6th displayed device as a D210 a 16 bit device with a decimal current value display format M66 At user registered device screen scrolling by and buttons sets K201 the 7th displayed device as a D201 MEN 16 bit device with a hexadecimal current value display format END 386 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 20 Operation Button ON OFF Information 19 20 Operation Button ON OFF Information 9m Operation button ON OFF information can be monitored at the system information system signal 2 MAA 8 to MAA 3 while the PLC is running Various applications of this function are described below Refer to Section 19 18 for system information setting NO 19 20 1 Various applications O 1 Operation button function checks 2 The programming tool can be used to monitor the system information s system signal 2 operation button ON OFF information to verify that operation buttons are functioning properly 1 3 2 User registered device changes Sz The system information s system signal 2 display screen information and operation button ON OFF Sa information can be used together to change and display 4
75. constant in an instruction S Operating frequency of high speed counter 7 For hardware and software counter device numbers refer to the following section B Refer to Section 11 5 32 l Input terminals X000 to X007 High speed input special adapter s9 1 phase 100 kHz x 6 points 10 kHz x 2 points 200 kHz x 8 points Hardware counter 50 kHz multiply by 1 100 kHz multiply by 1 50 kHz multiply by 4 100 kHz multiply by 4 40 kHz multiply by 1 40 kHz multiply by 1 10 kHz multiply by 4 10 kHz multiply by 4 uonejejsu oo Software counter e BuulM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 57 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 6 External Dimensions Weight and Installation 4 6 External Dimensions Weight and Installation 4 6 1 The external dimensions of the main unit are explained FX3u 16MI FX3u 32MI 58 2 0 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Daannnonnn oO O 090 zZ O20 E x o Den 0000 R mounting hole pitch o c d P o oe V Series W mm inches W1 mm inches MASS weight kg Ibs FX3U 16MR ES FX3U 16MT ES FX3U 16MT ESS FX3U 16ML1 130 5 12 103 4 06 0 6 1 32 Ibs FX3U 16MR DS FX3U 16MT DS FX3U 16MT DSS FX3U 32MR ES FX3U 32MT ES FX3U 32M
76. is blinking ERG Cancels the input and moves leftward to the next digit higher order digit if pressed when a digit other than the left most digit is blinking i Reduces the value FE 21 0 Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value 05 12 EF Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase Registers the specified value and moves to the next digit input position If OK is pressed at the lowest order digit and if the entered entry code is correct the Entry Code is canceled Highest order digit to 2nd digit An All operation is possible message appears and the Entry Code is canceled Incorrect Entry Code A Incorrect Entry Code message appears 3 Ifthe OK button is pressed at the lowest order position the entered Entry Code is registered and the message shown to the right lf entry code is correct appears All operation If the Incorrect Entry Code message appears press ESC and return to step 1 Lowest order Correct Entry Code digit final digit is possible 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the menu screen If entry code is incorrect Incorrect Entry code 372 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 13 6 Enabling an entry code 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 14 Device All Clear 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the EntryCode item then press OK to display t
77. occurred Take any of the following measures Review the program The maximum value D8012 of the scan time should not exceed the setting D8000 of the watchdog timer Check that the input used for input interruption or pulse catch is not being abnormally turned on and off in one scan Check that the frequency of the pulse duty of 5096 input to the high speed counter does not exceed the specified range Add the WDT instructions Add some WDT instructions to the program and reset the watchdog timer several times in one scan Change the setting of the watchdog timer Change the watchdog timer setting D8000 in the program so that the setting is larger than the maximum value of the scan time D8012 2 Remove the PLC and supply power to it from another power supply on a desk If the ERROR LED goes off noise may have affected the PLC Take the following measures Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring route and installation location Fit a noise filter onto the power supply line 3 If the ERROR LED does not go off even after the measures stated in 1 and 2 are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer A watchdog timer error may have On occurred or the hardware of the PLC may be damaged One of the following errors has occurred in the PLC Perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool For the remedies refer to Section 14 6 Judgment by Error Syntax error Code
78. power supply when there are input output extension blocks and special function units blocks uejs S e For input output powered extension units blocks power consumption information S refer to Section 15 2 2 When input output extension blocks are connected 24V DC service power is consumed by the blocks S and the power to be consumed by the main unit is reduced For details on 24V DC service power supply refer to Section 6 5 7 3 The power supply is not for external use The current capacity specified above is for the input output extension blocks special function blocks 22 special adapters and expansion boards e ze uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 49 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 2 Power Supply Specifications 4 2 2 DC Power Supply Type Specifications Item FX3u 16ML I DL FXsu 32MLI DLI FX3u 48ML I DLI FX3su 64ML I DL FX3u 80ML I DL Supply voltage 24V DC Allowable supply 9 voltage range 16 8 to 28 8V DC Allowable instantaneous power Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 5 ms or less failure time Power fuse 250V 3 15A 250V 5A Rush current 35 A max 0 5 ms or less 24V DC Pon eemper E a E UE UN EN da 24V DC service power supply 5V DC built in power 2 500 mA or les
79. pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo C o nen o lt O Q c D FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block 20 2 External Dimensions amp Component Names 20 2 External Dimensions amp Component Names FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 150 5 91 150 5 91 45 1 78 N 2 5 MITSUBISHI FX 16E TB z a ee Ae FX 32E TB ai X g rrara x 5 CLT li 9 6 9 9 6 9 7 9 FX 16EYR TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 150 5 91 150 5 91 1 3 ETEA ReRe a ETT TTA o 9 4 6 9 Units mm inches Accessories Input output No labels terminal block arrangement cards No 1 CN1 connector 2 CN2 connector 3 Operation indicator LED A POWER LED 5 CN2 terminal block M3 5 screws 6 CN1 terminal block M3 5 screws Nameplate 8 DIN rail mounting groove DIN rail width 35mm 1 38 9 DIN rail mounting hook Remarks Present at FX 32E TB Present at FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB Present at FX 16EX A1 TB Present at FX 32E TB 408 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 3 Terminal Arrangement 20 3 Termin
80. rae olg 3 SD TXD olg 4 ER DTR 3 o0 gt o o 7 5 SG 1 o 9 6 6 DR DSR 7 RS RTS 8 CS CTS 9 CI RI 18 1 21 FX2N 32ASI M External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws UASIO ASI ACTIVE O eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product POWER CO A R I FX2n 32ASI M 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block M3 screws MODE SET PRJ MODEO PRG ENABLEO FROM TOO CONFIG ERRO 4 0 16 55 2 17 The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Terminal Layout ASASI 334 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 22 FX2N 64CL M External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 15kg 0 33lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product LO T eo eThe connector for CC Link LT interface is on the front face of the product mounting hole pitch The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 18 1 23 FX2N 16CCL M External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm i
81. seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng jewog ue uorneJedaJd EEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 2 Features and Part Names 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 1 Front Panel Factory default configuration standard 1 Top cover 2 Battery cover 3 Special adapter connecting hooks 4 Expansion board dummy cover 5 RUN STOP NES 6 Peripheral device connecting connector 9 Input display LEDs 10 Terminal block covers MITSUBISHI e 11 Extension device connecting connector cover 7 DIN rail mounting hooks 1 2 3 4 9 6 7 8 9 10 11 32 Top cover Battery cover Special adapter connecting hooks 2 places Expansion board dummy cover RUN STOP switch Peripheral device connecting connector DIN rail mounting hooks Model name abbreviation Input display LEDs red Terminal block covers Extension device connecting connector cover 13 Output display LEDs Mount the memory cassette under this cover When FX3U 7DM display module is used replace this cover with the cover supplied with FX3u 7DM The battery standard accessory is set under this cover When replacing it with a new one open this cover
82. side Terminal block External wiring Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC 1076 1576 50 60 Hz Input signal current Ra aea ia ps iude 6 2 mA 110V AC 60 Hz T TR Approx 21 KQ 50 Hz ied Approx 18 kQ 60 Hz 3 8 mA 80V AC or more Input sensitivity eN OFF 1 7 mA 30V AC or more Response time 25 to 30 ms Input signal format Voltage contact Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation Input operation display No input LEDs equipped with 24V power supply LED indicator Power consumption 1 2 W 48 mA 24V DC 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 2 3 9W 160mA 24V DC is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C 415 SJOJUhOO peeds ybiIH a3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo C o nen o lt O Q D FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 6 2 Internal circuit W Photo coupler W Photo coupler LILO to L1L13 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block 20 6 FX 16EX A1 TB W Photo coupler W Photo coupler O04 to O07 AAOtoAA3 AA4to AAT7 O00 to OO7 Lower numbers A A0 to A A7 Higher numbers 20 6 3 Example of input external wiring PLC in
83. supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit Sc cS 2 Weight and Other specifications o Item FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL MASS Weight 0 2 kg 0 44lbs 0 3 kg 0 66lbs I The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 258 Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number x D e The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 2 i D amp 3 Input specifications common to both sink and source inputs Item FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 2 CD ce Vertical terminal block M3 screws For a detailed description of wiring refer to S29 Connection unit i l 3 5S the input line connection diagram of the main unit EE Input type sink source d Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5 mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ M DUM 3 5 mA or more at 24V DC Input sensitivity current SUR uum 1 5 mA or less current 17 Input response time Approx 10 ms cm D ere ater tas Sink input No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor E P g yP Source input No voltage contact input PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input 1 9 Sink input line Source input line 9S9 connection connection eu a Lm ax Main unit Main unit pa a uoisuo Input circuit diagram ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg
84. ted to 5g a biis s NEN So output FPo Ul zg powered PX2N 0 o p D lamin ee ee re NENNEN FXoN FX2N FX30 8 FXoNFXaNFX3U z FXoN FX2N FX3u o o Special function FXONFXaN FX3U S PowxwE FXoNPX2NIFX3U 9 XoNFXoNIFXSU OT 22 Calculate the totals a lt 5 p 1 When connecting the FX3U 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest upstream unit to the FX3U 1PSU 5V is input output powered extension unit also enter the current consumption and number of occupied l O points for the input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER that are connected to the FX3U 1PSU 5V 2 Amaximum of 8 special function units blocks are connectable including the main unit and extension power supply unit Bui 1ndu 95 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 3 Determine whether FXoN 3A FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA can be added Determine the number of analog special function blocks FXon 3A FX2N 2AD and FX2n 2DA to be connected to the input output powered extension unit by the following method e When connecting to FX2N 32EbELI Total current Analog special function block FXON 3A FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA 90mA ris Soma x ris Bm lt 190mA units units units mA e When connecting t
85. x indicates 32 48 FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS from August 1st 1998 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL from August 1st 2005 FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EY T ESS UL to March 31st 2002 compliance with EN50081 2 EN61000 6 4 and EN50082 2 from April 1st 2002 EN50081 2 1993 EN61000 6 4 2001 EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 EN50082 2 1995 Above mentioned products compliance with EN50081 2 EN61000 6 4 and EN61 131 2 Standard Remark Electromagnetic compatibility Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Generic emission standard e Radiated Emissions Industrial environment e Mains Terminal Voltage Emissions Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirements and tests RF Immunity e Fast Transients e ESD e Damped oscillatory wave Electromagnetic compatibility Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Generic immunity standard e RF immunity Industrial environment e Fast Transients e ESD e Conducted Power magnetic fields 17 Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive 18 The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Low Voltage 73 23 EEC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Typ
86. 0 6 sz 5 Current value 10004 U a Setting value or device specified by setting value if an index n 6 ame aee di 1 2 3 4 o modifier is present the index register s device is also displayed C200 to C255 7 Current value of device specified by setting value 7 1 4 5 zu 6 amp x B 8 Bunoouse qnoi pelewod indinonndu Ow 5 6 7 sun uoisuejx3 5 Input X Output Y Auxiliary Relay M State S Display Content 1 Device No at beginning of line 2 1 Input X and output Y 8 points per line Auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M and state S 10 points per line ON OFF status Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI 2 ON Last digit of device No H com OFF e e 2 of E oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 o 5 3 gt f Ww o Q 357 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices 19 7 4 Test mode operation There are 3 types of test mode operations depending on the device type The 3 operations are explained below Refer to Subsection 19 7 1 for test mode subject devices 1 Data registers D D 16 bit DD 32 bit extended registers R R 16 bit DR 32 bit extended file registers ER ER 16 bit DER 32 bit user registered devices 1 Perform a monitor mode o
87. 1 If the selected devices in the previous section cannot be connected due to a shortage of current from the main unit s built in 24V DC sercive power supply add an input output powered extension unit Since input output powered extension units have built in input output terminals reexamine the input output devices connected to the main unit to ensure the required number of points Range to be covered by main unit Range exceeding power supply capacity Input output Before Special Input extension Output extension Special en function block block 16 points block 16 points function block Input output Input output powered After i Special Special Main unit extension extension unit selection paint black function block 32 points function block Replaced with input output powered extension unit Determine whether extension devices can be connected to the input output powered extension unit by the following method When only input output extension devices are added use the quick reference matrix Refer to Subsection 6 6 1 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added When also special extension devices are added calculate the current consumption to ensure that the total current to be consumed by the added extension devices can be supplied by the built in power supply Refer to Subsection 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption
88. 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches eAccessories Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type 90 3 55 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 337 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL a3 NO BuutM 1ndino Jo BuuiM O SOS ShOUEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N E U o D CD c xe E lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Special Adapters 18 3 2 FX3U A4DA ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 945 mounting ene Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws E Accessories Manual supplied with product xu RE ls Terminal block European type UIN poles O N lt 62 C9 E Q o Oo c gt O E 5 poles 18 3 3 FX3u 4AD PT ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout eMASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs elinstallation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Accessories Manual supplied with product
89. 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EX C OF cS 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 29 D T Q mo 2g E oo o oS amp FX 16EX C co 5 a a 53 o gt c Q Ze How to connect connector FX2N 16EX C go n Connection face of connector The polarity is shown in the following table I S52 ez o 2 Fo gt oo O d E OZ 204 g el 914 P2 19 17 15 13 11 s 20 P1816 P1 4 P2 ree S cr S amp z Side B is for the higher input numbers Side BBE X7 e S 4 X3 PeO 2a side A l and side A is for the lower input numbers Side Apa xr xe xe xa xa X2 X1 X0 Exe siae B x050 to X057 Side A X040 to X047 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISU9 X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 299 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points 16 6 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 16EXL C Product type FX2N connector type extension block for each application Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input
90. 2 for bulk wire Solderless contact HU 411S AWG22 0 3mm 357J 5538 FX2C I D CON SA Housing HU 200S2 001 2 for bulk wire Solderless contact HU 411SA AWG20 0 5mm 357J 13963 Model name and composition of input output connector FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 4 Certified connectors commercially available connectors Connectors made by DDK Ltd shown in Item 3 described in the previous page and connectors made by 3 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd shown in the following table z Model name of connector Pressure bonding tool Contact alan Dom AXY52000 Sg Cy pU AWG24 0 2mm E 9 2 3 Terminal block for europe expansion board and special adapters jnpold CY uononpoJju WIRING PRECAUTIONS D ANGER Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire end
91. 24V DC 200 mA or more 1 current to 10 to 100 mA 5 to 24V DC Input output powered extension unit 4 Output extension block 0 2ms or less 24V DC 200 mA BuutM 1ndino 1 The transistor OFF time is longer under lighter loads 1 3 For example under a load of 24V DC 40mA the response time is approx 0 3ms When response sz performance is required under light loads provide a dummy resistance as shown to the right to Bs increase the load current EE Sink output type Source output type Dummy Dummy 1 4 Fusel Load n resistance Fusel Load resistance p z S52 S T z o 2 002 2 25 2 9 o e Q peJewog indinojndu Ol 6 Output current The maximum resistance loads for the input output powered extension units and output extension blocks are shown in the following table The ON voltage of the output transistor is approx 1 5V sun uoisuejx3 When driving a semiconductor element carefully check the input voltage characteristics of the applied 1 6 element mm o cO Q oc Model Output current Limitation o 2 O FX3U 16MT ES S 2 FX3U 32MT ES S FX3U 48MT ES S Main unit 1 T SOX FX3U 80MT ES S 38 FX3U 128MT ES S The total load current of resistance loads per gs common terminal should be the following value S FX2N 32ET ESS UL 1 point common 0 5A or less FX2N A8ET ESS UL DEAE 4 points common 0 8A or less 1 8 5A poin Input output powered FX2N 48ET DSS 8 points common 1 6A
92. 2AD External Dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product FXe2n 2AD POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block or EZ pud UNE 4 0 16 43 1 7 Terminal Layout 324 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 3 FX2N 2DA External Dimensions MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product FXan 2DA POWER Terminal block M3 screws T O O ep lOO OD ofc otc 2 O E The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 18 1 4 FX3u 4AD External Dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product POWERCO 80 3 15
93. 3 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped 1 240 Turn on the PLC power Make sure that the RUN STOP switch of the PLC is set to STOP and turn the power on Check the program Check for circuit errors and grammatical errors with the program check function of the programming tool Transfer the sequence program Write the program to the memory cassette with the programming tool When the memory cassette is used Make sure to set the PROTECT switch of the memory cassette to OFF shown right For details on handling of the memory cassette refer to Chapter 21 Verify the sequence program Verify that the program has been correctly written to the memory cassette Execute PLC diagnosis Check for errors in the PLC main body with the PLC diagnostic function of the programming tool For details on the PLC diagnosis with the display module or GX Developer refer to Section 14 6 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON gm 14 2 1 Methods of running and stopping NO FX3U PLCs can be started or stopped by any of the following three methods Two of the methods can be combined O 1 Operation with built in RUN STOP switch E Operate the RUN STOP switch on the front panel of the main unit
94. 32 40 48 56 64 Number of added points Example When adding 16 inputs to FX3u 16 32ML I DLI1 a maximum of 32 outputs are expandable Note When adding 16 inputs under the supply voltage 16 8V to 19 2V a maximum of 16 outputs are expandable 2 FX3u A48MR DS FX3u 48MT DS FX3U 48MT DSS FX3U 64MR DS FX3U 64MT DS FX3u 64MT DSS FX3u 80MR DS FX3u 80MT DS FX3u 80MT DSS These main units do not have a built in 24V DC service power supply cm 0 bee DC input type 48 O O ojo Example FX3U 48MLI DO Not allowed to add FX3U 64ML1 DL FX3U 80ML1 DU Number of added points I ERIE ECL AE TELS 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 _ gt Number of added points Example When adding 32 inputs to FX3U 48 80ML1 DL a maximum of 40 outputs are expandable Note When adding 32 inputs under the supply voltage 16 8V to 19 2V a maximum of 24 outputs are expandable 88 96 Dee 64 72 80 Input 88 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 6 5 4 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current 3 consumption DC Power Type 2 ej 1 Select a main unit gt select a main unit Select one main unit appropriate to the required number of input output points from the following table SE Capacity of o NU built in a umber o Ower ower Class
95. 32E TB items must be connected using an FX2N series input output connector type 8 extension block Input Connector Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EX C sink input FX2N 16EYT C sink output N O S 2 20 5 1 Internal circuit E OLO to LILI7 Lower Nos A A0 to AA7 Higher Nos 1 3 CM con con EOM 53 22 cS 2 ems cow coy cov I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 FX 32bE TB AAQ AA2 AA4 AAG AA 443 AA5 AA7 s LN oO con all EB pa AA 6 17 7 006 hss Ft zz AA4 15 5 nod mj AA 3 14 4 reat 14205 5 i52 AA 1 12 2 nn t zi Irek ma eana enana ea ea OLO to LIL17 Lower Nos A AO to AA7 Higher Nos 1 24 when connected to FX2N 16EX C 2 e when connected to FX2N 16EX C Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N FX 16E TB yu A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo C o nen o lt O Q D 413 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 20 5 2 Example of input external wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 1 When connected to an FX2n 16EX C sink input input extension block LIL1O to LILT7 Lower Nos A A0 to AA7 Hi
96. 32ET FX2N A8ET Transistor output sink NENNEN N E In the case of source wiring When a source input type unit is used O v CN co ST LO CO N LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO 3 S gt gt 0 1A 50V gt diode is X61 VX62 VX63 VX64 VX65 VX66 VX67 necessary 5 N 5 To e lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt gt o 2 25 s B5 s xz WV X61 VX62 VX63 VX64 VX65 VX66 VX67 O w N co bg LC O N co co co co co co co co gt o5 s ss ss 5 WV V V V V V V V HERE Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL Transistor output Source VO Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053 Y054 Y055 Y056 Y057 E D 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 13 5 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC52 233 SJOJUNOD peeds uDIH m NO O e O e 104 BULIM Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueuea ure N uny 1S9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 13 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 13 6 1 When SEGL instruct
97. 5 19 Version cheek Telhod dace state Pei ed DR rd rano deut tup Du do DA PERDE FE DEREN Ade Doa hse pi edes rer L DONOR oda 65 5 1 2 How to look at manufacturer s serial number esesssssssssseseeeeene eene 65 5 1 9 Version Xipgrade nistOlVsssusdesoo as cael sentido alates nde ease ette i dca Lco osse dq uaa a rcd e Tu E 65 9 2 Programming L0 AD ON CAIN 3c i eects bete iei oos oet ton detti ooo uicit cti ad aoro cando dide cnuss 66 5 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tOOl cccceccccsecccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesuseeseeeeeseaecessaecesseeeessaeeeesaes 66 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not appliCable ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 66 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tOOl ccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeessaeeeeeaaeeeeeas 66 5 24 Cautions on Wite during RUN miessen Scauro eai desees aide xs pes fece Cottae deti des acs tonnes secede sank 67 5 3 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series 69 5 4 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 70 5 5 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability esseeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeneennnnnn enn 71 5 5 1 Applicable products and Versions d eet Dole BA ee Sed OO vede 71 5 5 2 In the case of peripheral equipment not applicable cccecccceeecccceeeeeseeeece
98. 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3u 1PSU 5V uononpoJju If the selected devices in section 6 5 are not connectable due to the built in 5V DC power shortage add an extension power supply unit 1 Enter the current supply specification of the extension power supply unit 2 UTI The output current of the extension power supply unit is proportional to the ambient temperature as 32 shown by the derating curve below Enter the output current value based on this derating curve 58 Also verify that the number of occupied input output points from input output extension block s connected to the extension power supply unit is less than 32 Derating curve Output current A m 5V DC jnpold CY uononpoJju Co I I I I I I I I I I I cx cix I 40 55 Ambient temperature C Capacity of built in power C a Power Number of supply DRES I O occupied suoneouioedgs suppl Classification connected Type PEE units j 5V DC power Sower Supply points 9 l A for internal points ovg supply MA 24V DC mA EE 929 5 3 223 With built in Esdansm FX3U 1PSU 5V 32 power supply power supply unit uoneJnBijuo wa shS jndinogndu mJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 97 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 7 Expansion of Ext
99. 95 99 EXSU 232ADP Sica x voe ob I IN MEME IE MI M CE EIE 339 19 9 0 TSU TODA etica dito bedebsonisdekicon ut bodas fitecet tc teu tei Ld Le M te Lau Ll tup ATE 339 18 WM P eo UE LP TB LAM 340 19 9 9 FAU HOY ADP ea er eet gee ene sorted none rue rior Tae HERUM EUR crure ete oe eee o meee enor 340 19 4 EXPANSION BOI E e E 341 om A WML ow eae ee eR a etc ect en Oe ee ee OG 341 NGA KO W eZ 2 S in noL E ED a ea ee 341 VO ARS ESO 2 2BD nhera gues ond ages cas veenadhc odeemontee oa eet a a a 341 194A EX9USI05 BD a ioo Race eec m AME I M E 342 WGA XOU CNNSBIS n oett dete baad se E tad iDe teretes teet an euni cd petu ia a es tU dee aM cata eda 342 18 9 oiii SUI DIY NER uu tum 343 1S 521 o 02 79018 CC c c 343 18 6 Connector Conversion Adapter cuan ins uccide hdi bc pae eati eis verti heu tent inae oat n best edis 343 M2242 o Cree cc 343 19 1 Interface MOGOUIG 555a t Ut Od aedes toos iat biaaboubnie age tana bon an hee or eua scu ebd d iecaes aus Sd Ra dii cute te td 344 187 1 FXS292AWG EL ioi ree er Pec a tete Ia ence esto p e R Oval UP odo LA aed 344 go RPM Piso Cr Hm 344 WG 6 IIS y IVIOCUING ne M 345 WS 624 MIL 610 vd E 345 18 0 2 D esp P EENEREUN 345 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 346 19 1 Description of Products Introduction of Related P
100. AC can a uoisuo be driven For the life of the contact for switching an inductive load refer to Subsection 12 2 2 g When an inductive load is switched connect a diode for commutation or a surge absorber in parallel with this load zi DC circuit Diode for commutation i AC circuit Surge absorber 20 o 7 Open circuit leakage current 3 When the output contact is turned off no current leaks 207 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 4 Cautions on external wiring 12 Output Wiring Procedures 12 2 External Wiring for Relay Output 1 Protection circuit for load short circuiting A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads The relay output circuit in the terminal block is not equipped with a protection circuit Therefore when an inductive load is connected For the expected product life and noise reduction it is recommended to insert a contact protection circuit 1 DC circuit Connect a diode in parallel with the load The diode for commutation must comply with the following specifications Item Guide Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times the load voltage Forward current Load current or more 2 AC circuit Connect the surge absorber shown below combined CR components such as a surge killer a
101. Corporation in the United States and or other countries e The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 5 Puit isbnax a edes eid el ice Ge ERN ASK ds 1 Standards 15 Cer ficadonm or db cUL standards us aoratse turus ulate i eiat ti c iate eoe dte eut ue tele tsm tia 15 Compliance with EC directive CE Marking ccccsecccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeseeseeeeessaeeeesseeeeessaaeees 16 Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive ccccccccecceceeceeceeceeceeeceseeeeeseueeesseeeesseeeseeeessnaeees 16 Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive ccccccccccsececseeceeceeeeeseeeceeeeeeeseeeeessueeesaseesaueeesaaeees 18 Caution for compliance with EC Directive seeessssesssssssssseeeee nennen nnne nnne nnns nnne 19 1 Introduction 20 1 3 ADtFoOUcHorr or Mahualss 5 52 en iacit i i ees ra Lodo aeo coma a Eo t odor cotes acc tun Paru forse bodies 20 1 1 1 Classification of major components in this manual seseessessseeeenemm 20 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual sseessssseeseeee nen 22 UNES TST On NU PARET 23 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals seeesssees
102. DC and 5V DC the current is 70 mA and 100 mA respectively This block cannot be used together with FX2n 32ASI M The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network Number of remote I O stations x 32 points The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network Total number of input output points of remote I O stations The number of points varies according to the products connected to the network For details refer to FX2N 16LNK M Manual This block cannot be used together with FX2n 16CCL M Only one unit can be added to the whole system The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network Number of active slaves x 8 points When analog special function blocks FXon 3A FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA are connected to an input output powered extension unit FX2N 32EL or FX2n 48EL the following limitation must be taken into consideration When the blocks are connected to the main unit this limitation is not applied The total current consumption of the analog special function blocks FXon 3A FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA should be less than the following current values Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N 32bEL 1 190 mA or less Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N 48EL 300 mA or less When applying the DC power type main unit calculate the current consumption at startup FX3u Series P
103. E SET 4 4 4 A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 A 4 4 4 4 A A A 4 4 4 A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 A A A A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 A 4 uonejejsu DUUM A ddns Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 127 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Layout in Enclosure 2 When an input output extension block or a special function block is connected at the top of the 2nd stage l Input output powered extension Special adapter units blocks Special function units blocks oH Ho on M H uM uM u noon H Hn RORO HH M FX ri Sao gg oe 1009585756555453 3U Series gs dob oM o Lr de m d main unit 9o 9o Qo ub AE sm a HE D Oo 1 o i Oo il 2 2 2 DPI Up to 10 units approx 18mm 0 71 x number of units For the dimensions of each product refer to the external dimensions diagram FX2N CNV BC t L7 nco 7 3 Cele cy SA cA n A om OOQ i S 0 pa PE S i S O toe DUM Os i OF p io i iE extension units aii i iat 2 n 2 zu 2 Extension cable eF XON 65EC 650mm 25 59 For the dimensions of each product refer
104. ESS FX3U 80MR ES FX3u 80MT ES FX3u 80MT ESS FX3u 128MR ES FX3u 128MT ES FX3u 128MT ESS Foust AC power supply 56 Example DC input type 2 48 o FX3U 48ML gea 40 225 175 125 75 25 FX3U 64MO ES FX3U 80ME Hu a 375 325 zre 228 175 tas 75 25 1o 450 400 aso soo zoo tso 100 so o af sas av aas a7 ses zrs ze 175 125 75 25 soos soo s on sso soo aso e io w s 0 40 48 98 96 gt Number of added mer FX3U 128MLJ Input Example When a 32 input and 16 output point extension block is connected to FX3u 48 128MLJ the current of the 24V DC service power supply becomes 250 mA or less 2 Confirm the current capacity of 24V DC service power supply from the value shown in the quick reference matrix This remaining power supply capacity current can be used as a power supply to external loads sensors or the like by the user When special adapters and special function units blocks are connected it is necessary to consider whether they can be covered by this remaining power supply capacity 84 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 6 5 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current 2 consumption AC Power Type a z 1 Select a main unit 9 Select a main unit 22 Select one main unit appropriate to the requ
105. Edition 8 7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 7 5 Connecting method D connection of powered extension units blocks 142 This subsection explains the procedures for connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension units blocks or FXON FX2N FX3U Series special function units blocks Remove the top cover B in the right figure of the existing unit block left side A in the right mns figure GE e When connecting FX2N 10GM or FX2N 20GM remove the PLC extension block connector cover e When connecting FX2N 1RM E SET or FX3U 1PSU 5V remove the top cover of FX2N 1RM E SET or FX3U 1PSU 5V UYS rtl 77 YY S A Connect the extension cable C in the above figure of the block to be con nected right side to the existing unit block A in the above figure When FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX2N 1RM E SET or FX3u 1PSU 5V units are connected connect the unit to be added right side and the existing unit left side with the supplied extension cable Fit the top cover B in the above figure except when connecting FX2N 10GM or FX2N 20GM FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 7 6 8 7 7 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices Connecting method E connection of extension cable and FX2N CNV BC This subsection explains the proc
106. Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC 18 2 Main unit and input output powered extension units QI Example of program Y e M8000 D100 K2Y020 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output NO O e O r E Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET Transistor output sink i 23 D m JE e 9 Jt e i I Bunoouse qnoi eoueuea ure N uny 1S9 pelewod indinoAnduy Ow 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output sun uoisuejx3 Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL A Transistor output source syoo g uoisuaX3 ndnonndu C NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 237 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS Q DAN G E R Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electrical shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals externally cut
107. Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 4 Determine whether the devices can be connected to the main unit i Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected Sg 1 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 24V DC power supply 24V DC service power supply 2 The value obtained by this calculation when the value is positive indicates the remaining capacity of 24V DC 3g service power supply and the capacity can be used for external loads z 30 Total of current consumed by extension devices g 2 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply MOD E A Current consumption Calculation result Total of current consumed Manun by extension devices Main unit jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi If the calculation results for the current consumption for the 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply Jrx are negative values the current consumption exceeds the capacity of the built in power supply ST S Reconfigure the system configuration adding input output powered extension units or extension power 9 o supply units If the calculation results for the current consumption for the 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply are negative values add an input output powered extension unit Refer to Section 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current os Consumpti
108. Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 3 External dimensions QI FX2N 8EYR ES UL 8 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches NO g FX2N 8EYR ES mo CD POWER c 0123 C e B sg oc 13 O E PRE SS L rJ ea N W e 43 1 7 TE p FX2N 16EYR ES UL 1 4 2 4 5 mounting holes X Unit mm inches SE e ED c e Q o2 O S Q 80 3 15 pelewod idnonndu Ow mounting hole pitch sun uoisuejx3 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 307 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 1 Product specifications 308 1 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapter Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications Item FX2N 8EYT ESS UL F
109. FX2N FX2N Series Jew E Ei Input output powered A E a extension unit GaSe O eA Connecting method D method E method F method G 139 uononpou S WEN Hed pueseimee4 M jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo N jndjnondu O o Z O o uonejejsu DUUM A ddns Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 7 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion board To connect an expansion board to the main unit in the enclosure it is necessary to remove the main unit from the enclosure Refer to Subsection 8 5 4 for the removal from DIN rail procedure Refer to Section 8 6 for the direct mounting removal procedure 1 Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the part A of the expansion board com partment dummy cover B in the right fig ure on the left side of the main unit and slightly lift the dummy cover e Put the main unit on the edge of a desk or so to insert the screwdriver Caution Take care not to damage the wiring board and electronic components with the screwdriver 2 Remove the expansion board compart ment dummy cover B in the right figure 3 Hold the expansion board C in the right figu
110. GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later Select RS 232C on PC side I F Serial setting dialog box and execute setting shown below Select RS 232C on PC side I F Serial setting dialog box and set COM port and Transmission speed When using transparent function in GOT F900 Series When directly connecting GX Developer to PLC Setting shown below is Setting shown below is required not required Set COM port and Transmission speed on PC side I F Serial setting dialog box 1 GX Developer Ver 8 23Z or later supports the FX3U Series Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 13P or later 1 Select Online Transfer setup to open the Transfer Setup dialog box 2 Double click PLC module in PLC side I F to open the PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module dialog box 3 Put a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode as shown below Transfer Setup Serial NET IO H NET II CC Link Ethernet PLC AF SEE b board board board board board net afe E M1 Transmission ENEN 115 2Kbps Bus module ALC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module Cancel Connection channel list via MAC MTA transparent mode i No specification PLC direct coupled setting bici en conection Put a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode System image Co existence a a a a TEL FXCPU network route C24 NET 10 H NET I CC Link Ethernet Accessing host statio
111. Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 1 A Main units The main unit incorporates a CPU memory input and output terminals and power supply To establish a system at least one main unit is necessary FX3u OOM I L Series name Power supply Input output type Connection on terminal block e R ES AC power supply 24V DC sink source input relay output e ES AC power supply 24V DC sink source input transistor sink output Total number of input Main unit e T ESS AC power supply 24V DC sink source input transistor source output and output points e R DS DC power supply 24V DC sink source input relay output e DS DC power supply 24V DC sink source input transistor sink output e DSS DC power supply 24V DC sink source input transistor source output v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable CE Number of input output points CE Output type UL l Total Number of Number of Model name connection form UL Marine number of input output terminal block EMC LVD points points points AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input 32 1 FX3U 32MT ES Transistor sink 32 106 FX3U 32MT ESS Transistor source raha ea FERFE FEEFE FERFE lt lt SEES 5 48 245 7 FX3U 48MT ES Transistor sink 1 2 2 48 2 3 3 3 5 6 6 i s s s i i
112. INC Increment 25 DEC Decrement 26 WAND Logical Word AND 27 WOR Logical Word OR 28 WXOR Logical Exclusive OR 29 NEG Negation Rotation and Shift Operation 30 ROR Rotation Right 31 ROL Rotation Left 32 RCR Rotation Right with Carry 33 RCL Rotation Left with Carry 34 Bit Shift Right Rotation and Shift Operation 35 Bit Shift Left 36 Word Shift Right 37 Word Shift Left 38 Shift Write FIFO FILO Control 39 Shift Read FIFO Control 456 FNC No Mnemonic Function Data Operation 40 Zone Reset 41 Decode 42 Encode 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits 44 BON Check Specified Bit Status 45 Mean 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set 47 ANR Annunciator Reset 48 SQR Square Root 49 FLT Conversion to Floating Point High Speed Processing 50 Refresh 51 Refresh and Filter Adjust 52 MTR Input Matrix 53 High Speed Counter Set 54 High Speed Counter Reset 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare 56 SPD Speed Detection 57 Pulse Y Output 58 Pulse Width Modulation 59 Acceleration Deceleration Setup Handy Instruction 60 IST Initial State 61 SER Search a Data Stack 62 Absolute Drum Sequencer 63 Incremental Drum Sequencer 64 Teaching Timer 65 Special Timer 66 Alternate State 67 Ramp Variable Value 68 Rotary Table Control 69 SORT Tabulated Data External FX I O Device 70 TKY Ten Key Input 71 HKY Hexadecimal Input 72 DSW Digital Switch Thumbwheel Input External FX I O Device
113. If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install in a manner which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device connections Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS q DANGER e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 404 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS WIRING PRECAUTIONS WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Use the product in the environment within the generic specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Ne
114. Input terminal Both AC and DC power type have the same input terminals however the external input wiring differs from each other For external wiring make sure to read the input wiring described later Refer to Chapter 10 e Indication of output terminals connected to common terminal COML One common terminal covers 1 4 or 8 output points The output numbers Y connected to a common terminal are enclosed with heavy partition lines For transistor output source type COMU is V e Output terminals of FX3U 16MR L top right figure One output point is connected to one common terminal Both ends of a relay output contact are wired and the same signal name is shown on both sides For external wiring make sure to read the output wiring described later Refer to Chapter 12 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 2 FXsu 16MLI 3 AC power supply type S E TSpVvIXxopepape T T Pe EN pavixi X5 XS X7 2 UT AE ji E FX3U 16MT ESS 3 volva vs va vs e Y7 zd Ce Dwvopvamvopwa wa pws we pw7 ES S e DC power supply type S S oV xo x2 x4 x6 e O jav X1 X3 XB XT e e suoneouioedgs D TvoTrapvz v3 va vs ve Y7 C TYo Y1 Yz2 T3 Ya YS Ye Y7 FX3U 16MT DS FX3U 16MT DSS Tvo vi vapv3 a ve ve v7 Tvopva vzp v3
115. Interlock dz For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a E Inter Limit of cz c hazardous condition could result if switched ON lt m lock rotation Normal simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for A i rotation 16 interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the lt Reverse 205 right Limit of reverse rotation SOR PLC output rotation Vee element zs 4 In phase 17 PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner Sox oS oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 219 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 4 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type 12 4 3 Example of external wiring AC power supply Main unit 100 to 240V relay output Power ON For the relay output wiring of the main unit refer to Subsection 12 2 5 Relay Output Vacant terminal Vacant terminal Output extension block triac output Power supply for load connected to PLC output Input output powered extension unit triac output For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Output extension block triac output The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board ca
116. M 8400 Not used _ M 8401 9 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send wait flag M 8402 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send request D8402 I RS2 FNC 87 ch1 M 8403 ae ee ie uin RS2 FNC 87 ch1 dum Lone oe i i 6 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 B M 8405 Data set ready DSR flag M 8406 M 8407 Not used M 8408 M 8409 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 B Time out check flag 5 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when RS2 instruction ch1 is OFF 6 Supported in Ver 2 30 or later FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Number and Operation and function ing special name device RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 Correspond M 8410 to M 8420 Not used M 8421 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send wait flag M 8422 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send request D8422 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 74 M 8423 Receive complete flag eee RS2 FNC 87 ch2 M 8424 Carrier detection flag 7 IMj8425 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 E Data set ready DSR flag M 8426 Computer link ch2 Global ON Computer link ch2 M 8427 On demand send processing Computer link ch2 D8427 uda On demand error flag D8428 Computer link ch2 D8429 On demand Word Byte changeover RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Time out check flag 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when RS2 instruction ch2 is OFF 2 Supported in Ver 2 30 or later M 8429 Error Detection M 8430 to M 8437 Not
117. M8172 ous or more X003 M8173 X004 M8174 X005 M8175 X006 M8176 50us or more X007 M8177 10 5 2 Cautions for pulse catch 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instructions and general purpose input Take care not to overlap the input numbers Example When the pulse catch input contact M8170 is used X000 is occupied Therefore it is impossible to use C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C252 and C254 input interruption including delay interruption pointers 1000 and 1001 and SPD ZRN DSZR and DVIT instructions at the same time 2 Cautions in wiring e The wiring length should be 5 m 16 4 or less e Connect a bleeder resistance of 1 5kQ 1 W or more to the input terminal so that the sum of the load current of the open collector transistor output on the other side device and the input current of the main body is 20 mA or more 179 soma uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo 2 a o AO oe O x pw lt 5 Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8177 10 5 3 Examples of external
118. MOD ea aaa Current consumption Calculation result Input output powered Total of current consumed by extension unit extension devices _ 250mA em omal 250mA gt OMA KOJN 8 Verify the evaluation results Since the capacities of the 5V DC and 24V DC power supplies and the number of input output points are within the specified ranges the reexamined system configuration is feasible 114 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y 7T Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y and Unit Numbers 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y If input output powered extension units blocks have been connected when the power is turned on the main unit automatically assigns the input output numbers X Y octal to the units blocks Therefore it is unnecessary to specify the input output numbers with parameters Accordingly it is not necessary to specify input output numbers using parameters It is necessary to assign input and output numbers in the following special extension unit block e FX2N 64CL M e FX2N 16LNK M 7 1 1 Concept of assigning When the power is turned on input output numbers X Y are assigned in accordance with the following rules For special function blocks such as FX2N 64CL M and FX2N 16LNK M that assign input output numbers to connected remote I O stations refe
119. Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 4 External wiring precautions QF 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits D A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the N output o Terminal block Q 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads The relay output circuit in the terminal block is not equipped with a protection circuit 1 3 Therefore when an inductive load is connected For the expected product life and noise reduction it is lt lt recommended to insert a contact protection circuit za c da 1 DC circuit cg Connect a diode for commutation parallel to the D load inductive load M aue E eru must comply with the PLC output 14 g Sp i contact Diode Sins Item Guide for commutation es gt qu e e Reverse voltage o to 10 times the load voltage E o Forward current Load current or more 3 2 AC circuit 15 Connect the surge absorber shown below combined CR components such as a surge killer and spark inductive load Bes killer etc parallel to the load 236 P PLC output S ae c te Item Guide contact Surge Rated voltage 250V AC absorber Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF 1 6 Resistance value Approx 100 to 120Q oms Soe Reference SE Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 102
120. OFF Up count operation M 8193 M 8220 C220 M 8194 m M Not used M 8221 C221 M 8195 5 M 8222 C222 M 8196 2 M 8223 C223 M 8197 x M 8224 C224 High Speed Counter Edge Count Specification M 8225 C225 M C251 C252 C254 1 4 ed t M 8227 C227 ae C253 C255 or C253 OP 1 4 M 8199 edge count selector ud p a s a 1 OFF 1 edge count M 8230 C230 ON 4 edge count M 8231 C231 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP M 8232 C232 E M 8233 C233 M 8234 C234 High Speed Counter Up down Counter Counting Direction M 8235 C235 M 8236 M 8237 MSEE When M8000 is ON the 7 M 8239 corresponding COO is M 8240 changed to down mode M 8241 e ON Down count operation M 8242 OFF Up count operation M 8243 M 8244 M 8245 C245 442 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Number and name Operation and function High Speed Counter Up down Counter Monitoring M 8246 C246 i icai al When CLILIL of 1 phase IM C248 5 input or 2 phase M 8249 C249 2 input counter is in down M 8250 C250 mode the M 8251 C251 corresponding MaLILIL M 8252 C252 turns ON V 8253 C253 ON Down count operation e OFF Up count operation M 8254 C254 M 8255 C255 M 8256 to M 8259 Not used Analog Special Adapter Correspond ing special device 1 The number of connected FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA
121. ON Executed Not executed 1 The PLS instruction is not executed MEP instruction Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEP instruction the execution result of the MEP instruction turns ON conducting state if the operation result up to the MEP instruction is ON MEF instruction Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEF instruction the execution result of the MEF instruction turns OFF nonconducting state regardless of the operation result ON or OFF up to the MEF instruction When the operation result up to the MEF instruction is set to ON once and then set to OFF the execution result of the MEF instruction turns ON conducting state Operation result up to MEP MEF instruction OFF OFF nonconducting OFF nonconducting ON ON conducting OFF nonconducting MEF instruction When writing during RUN with GX Developer Ver 8 13P or later the program is as follows When the number of program steps is reduced by deletion of contacts coils and applied instructions the program capacity becomes smaller by as many as the reduced number of steps FXau Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 3 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000
122. Output display LEDs 3 Model name When adding this to the main unit connect the supplied extension cable or the optional extension cable to the connector under this top cover The input output powered extension unit can be installed on DIN rail 35 mm 1 38 wide The model name of the input output powered extension unit is indicated When an input terminal X0 X1 etc is turned on the corresponding LED lamps are also turned on The input numbers change depending on input output allocation The input output powered extension unit 48 points type assigns input numbers in ascending order from A B C below A OOOOOOOO 10123456 7 ke e e e e e e e o u u u u u u u u u U U M ke e e e e e e e o u u u u u m u um U m mm m d The covers can be opened about 90 for wiring Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running the unit power is on Connect the extension cable of input output powered extension unit block or special function unit block to the extension device connecting connector under this cover FX3U Series extension devices FX2N Series extension devices and FXON Series special function devices are compatible and can be connected For details on extension devices refer to Chapter 15 Chapter 16 and Section 18 1 The LED lamp is on green while the power supply terminal is on When an output terminal YO Y1 etc is turned on the corresponding LED lamps are also turned on The output numbers change de
123. PLC should be measured in accordance with the following procedures 1 3 1 Remove all input output wires and power supply wires from the PLC lt lt 2 Connect a crossing wire to each of the PLC terminals power supply terminal input terminals and output o3 terminals except the ground terminal cF For the dielectric withstand voltage test of each terminal refer to the generic specifications for the product D Refer to Section 4 1 3 Measure the dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance between each terminal and the ground terminal Dielectric withstand voltage 1 5kV AC or 500V for 1min The terminals vary in dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance 500V DC 5MQ or more 4 O c D nN F o o gt Q 14 1 2 Connection to built in programming connector pelewod indinonndu Ow When connecting the communication cable of a peripheral device align the positioning mark of the cable with that of the main unit sjluf uoisuejx3 FXsu 48M Programming E3 connector 55 amp M S o S N ey 17 Positioning mark D S g m K N D S Communication cable ME 2s Positioning 5 mark d oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 239 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1
124. RS L OCO 2 pop Sp SSI v x x 4 x XO 1x x x T og o D 00000000 a pers f m Mm MITSUBISHI INO0656866 gt QO Se 01234567 C POWER atre LO T c 9 5 d wn e D e MELSEEFKa32ER 99399893 v EIS coMi Yi Y3 TCO Y5 YT CONG Yi Y3 ipesim Ye 171 a UUUUUUUUUUU 19 M c3l69l 63169169 63 693 9 6363 9 63 C3 9 T 3 SS ES ES ES ES OSES 69 ES C9 59 lt B 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch 150 15 91 9 0 36 The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 267 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS 4 94 5 mounting holes esee ene een en elles esses Ies Iss FI Fo e EYE slalsle e EUER Unit mm inches es esee fesses es es esses es o 00000000000 O0o0ooooooooooooooo MITSUBISHI 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws 15 3 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ER ES UL FE TE STovTXo X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 LINT pasa x3 xs xz x1 X3 X6 X7 voa TY4 veL TYoTvz TY4 v8 oni Y1 YS Ev YS Y7 ev Y Y Ew YS Y7 FX2N 48ER ES UL TE SS OV XO x2 x4 X6 X0 X2 X4 XO X0 X2 X4 X6 Pe ENT EAvxi x3 x5 x7
125. Refer to Subsection 9 2 2 for input output cable information ERE EU A uoisuo Input output cable C o nen o lt O Q D Terminal block yoojg euiuJe 411 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 4 Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 4 4 Connection to terminal block 1 The product terminal screws are as shown in the table below Model Name Terminal Screw Size e FX 16E TB FX 32E TB e FX 16EX A1 TB e FX 16EYR TB e FX 16EYS TB e FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB M3 5 2 Crimp terminal sizes vary according to the wiring method Use the sizes shown below e When 1 wire is connected to 1 terminal Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below and install it as shown in the lower right figure i Terminal Crimp o 3 7 0 15 screw terminal 6 8mm 0 27 TOI or ee 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 ST Terminal or xe m When 2 wires are connected to 1 terminal Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below and install it as shown in the lower right figure 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 TNR Terminal Crimp 6T screw _ terminal or less 6 0mm 0 24 or more b 3 7 0 15 27 6 d Sar Terminal H Omm 0 24 a eae more 412 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 2e The FX 16E TB and FX
126. Ring Counter D 8398 of 0 to 2 147 483 647 D 8399 in units of 1ms 32 bit 1 1ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON RS2 FNC 87 ch1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D 8400 Communication format setting i D 8401 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 2 D 8402 Remaining points of transmit data ee RS2 FNC 87 ch1 2 D 8403 Monitoring receive data points ME D 8404 j D 8405 Communication parameter display B ch 1 D 8406 a D 8407 Not used D 8408 il RS2 FNC 87 ch1 _ D 8409 Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D 8410 Header 1 and 2 lt Default STX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D 8411 Header 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D 8412 Terminator 1 and 2 Default ETX RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D 8413 Terminator 3 and 4 g RS2 FNC 87 ch1 E D 8414 Receive sum received data RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D 8415 Receive sum calculated result D 8416 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send sum x D 8417 a IDI8418 Not used D 8419 Operation mode display ch1 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Communication format setting D 8420 Computer link ch2 Station number setting RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Remaining points of transmit data RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Monitoring receive data points D 8422 D 8423 M8423 452 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number
127. Supports FX3uc PLCs Ver 2 20 or later Supports FX3u PLCs Ver 2 30 a i Supports FX3uc PLCs Ver 2 30 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable Inapplicable programming tools can programme by setting alternative model Alternative model setting Model to be programmed Model to be set Priority High gt Low FX3U PLC FX3U C gt FX3UC gt FX2N gt FX2 Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in a PLC selected as the alternative model e When FX3UC is selected programs and functions of applied instructions added from the corresponding version are different e Change the parameters such as the memory capacity and file register capacity using a programming tool allowing selection of FX3U C or FX3UC 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tool 66 When either of the following interfaces is used for GX Developer Ver 8 13P or later writing and reading of programs and monitoring of devices can be executed at high speed 115 2 kbps in FX3u and FX3uc PLCs Applicable interface e Standard built in port or function extension board FX3u 422 BD for RS 422 When the RS 232C RS 422 converter FX 232AWC H or USB RS 422 converter FX USB AW is connected e Function extension board FX3u 232 BD for RS 232C e Special adapter FX3u 232ADP for RS 232C e Function extension board FX3U USB BD for USB Communicatio
128. TEENS 322 12 2 S9DOCHICOHOLIS excute ease eset pes ashe E ee EE ae e uat ceed haces LEE UM oi icd eats 323 17 2 1 Generic SPSCINCATIONS usi oriri ot reor wdactous edu oe et pE ua Ras o Revue Une deae etant edu vU Ris arca qKU uu 323 17 2 2 Pertormance SpecilCatloliS 53 265 taie dessiner te tenete dieto uates tionen A oM Uode die EO 323 17 2 3 External DIMENSIONS ster coasters cute autour aeuo eoe aoo que oett ev dd eue cactus asse aei cen eU d ue dose ud aout puse ia o 323 17 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution seeeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeee 323 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 324 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks lt iq tet R enter a Inn rt Ron cbt se aon ddidedencdesedend ancdensdonwanes 324 js UM o iioi CC cH 324 TO PA P SA EL Em shes 324 19 Do adr 0 pj a 325 18 IA FXS UAA ae ra Eee pace arta e ee tree et ARRA REN ROSA REOR RC ET NE 325 domus Mur eoru itn ere etek et oe a te Reece tt Soe cet a TT mE 326 iler Meo do a2 2 ID ee em ee eee ere ee ee ee 326 i Mee NT aR 04 E IDV A uis ue Re MEL MEE PP a On EA Pe er E EAE MAL E 32 ioo Bin CEA POLI 327 jussu o d pppaeRm E e 328 T9 OU cop 0d 7 2 tit decr fce SPY gS eer c AN ier MU LI AA MAU MC Ma Io tu 328 doe Du II FANE LEO nep TERRE 329 TOIT EX 2NSBAL R e i dA P tee d M
129. Table of Contents 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS eeeeeeeeeseeeseeeereneenn 269 1541 Product SpeciliCaliOtS ioco desi ieee adio eo deem Oe a ea eee 269 15 4 2 ExterrialalimelsloliS ar teeth cca b tutdbee a a Ioas e e docui de ee Potes ai e aid 270 19 259 Terminal VAY OU eriscc lariat tecnw set bus conati ost Pass RE ER av Ra E RLR DUREE NUE Lnd a brc Urdu dicun 271 15 5 FX2N 32ER EX2N 49ER FX2N 48ER D ssiaidis doesassntiondeiaivanonanctandh ih Ent EN OR EGO VE ACC Rab Fu a E cba adea 2 2 15 5 1 Product SPe CIFICATIONS ccc ccccccsecceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeceeeeeceeuceeseeeseaeeesseaeeessaeeessaeeessageeeseeeesanes 272 15052 ExtemakdiMensi ONS sie e TP M 273 19 95 23 Terminalia OU creis noite tert te aried bode A LUN cS ton Eat LES 274 15 0 FX2N 32E T FX2N 46E T FX2N 4 8E UD ec spss prr arie EI pow etas eer cee a Fes ned os cra Pus 2 5 15 671 PrOdUClS DCCINGANONS ssi ite eor base a uoti untere tn tu s eem enn Cafes s Qa e Lf e E tr iere 275 15 02 External dimensions xdi deus ce seems ete cto e nei sas pose un ied xcu eee att Fd dei uu Deo sade U E ineud at un eut ic E 2 6 1503 TSAI AUN AY OU PT 217 ite EA N ior EHE N 278 15 7 1 Produc rspecihcaloNS NET Nn 278 19 42 EXENA kdNEN IONS sein a e Ea R STR 279 ASF J Srmillialday ODE caie E A ae Oat ee AM CA AME ALES 279 15 8 JEX NEdOERCUATMUE i ee ree A eu kann ipd ei ergab edu Deck ne AA NOU ERES 280 1
130. UUUUUUUUUUU 6963 693 63 69169169169 6969 69 69 691 69169 69 69 de 2 9 G3 ee ES 63 9 ES 69 G3 9 69 G3 CO E9 69 63 172 6 78 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 1 3 182 7 17 sz The terminal block uses o8 M3 terminal screws ae 15 6 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ET 158 c I Oo Ls com x0 x2 x4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 FE CLINT 24 x4 X3 X5 x7 x1 X3 X5 x7 T a vo v2 v4 ve vol v2 TY4Tv8 con Y1 YS ou V5 v7 rons Y1 Y om V5 V7 peJewod SIUM UOISUS X3 jndino ndul FX2N 48ET 16 com XO X2 x4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 XO X2 XA X6 omz 24 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 SEE BBO oS Yo Y2 Y4 Ye jYO Y2 Y4 Y6 YO Y2 YA Y6 coms 17 coma Y1 Y3 cov2j Y5 Y7 coms Y 1 YS cov YS Y7 Y1 Y3 YS Y com Bf OD FX2N 48ET D 3 X Ls com X0 X2 x4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 XO X2 XA X6 i J O 24 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 18 oco FX2N 48ET D Bae a Lm EL A Yo Y2 Y4 Ye Yo Y2 Y4 Ye YO Y2 YA Y6 coms 1 coma Y1 Y3 cow YS Y7 Y1 Y3 YS Y7 z Ei 3 J a d Ww 277 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 7 FX2N 32ES 15 7 FX2n 32ES 15 7 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as tho
131. When connecting the special adapter secure it with these hooks Remove this dummy cover and mount an expansion board To stop writing batch of the sequence program or operation set the switch to STOP slide it downward To start operation run the machine set it to RUN slide it upward Connect a programming tool to program a sequence For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 The main unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide The model name of the main unit is indicated Check the nameplate on the right side for the model name When an input terminal X000 or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights The covers can be opened about 90 for wiring Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running the unit power is on Connect the extension cables of input output powered extension unit block or special function unit block to the extension device connecting connectors under this cover FX3U Series extension devices FX2N Series extension devices and FXON Series extension devices can be connected For details on the extension devices refer to Chapter 15 Chapter 16 and Section 18 1 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 12 Operation status display LEDs The operation status of the PLC can be checked with the LEDs The LEDs turn off light and flash according to the following
132. Where possible users should run analog cables separately Good cable shielding should be used When terminating the shield at Earth ensure that no earth loops are accidentally created When reading analog values EMC induced errors can be smoothed out by averaging the readings This can be achieved either through functions on the analog special adapters blocks or through a user s program in the FX3U Series PLC main unit 19 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 1 1 1 1 Introduction 1 Introduction 1 1 Introduction of Manuals This manual explains the procedures for selecting the system components main unit specifications and procedures for installing the main unit specifications for the input output powered extension units blocks and procedures for adding input output devices and procedures for operating the display module etc FX3U PLCs can make various kinds of control in combination with the main unit functions and many extension devices expansion board special adapters and special function units blocks The detailed explanation of the sequence instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are given in separate manuals For information on manual organization refer to Subsection 1 1 2 Introduction of Manuals Classification of major components in this manual 20 1 Main unit Chapter 1 to 14 Division Introduction of manuals
133. Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Grounding 9 4 Grounding Ground the PLC as stated below Perform class D grounding Grounding resistance 100Q or less e Ground the PLC independently if possible If it cannot be grounded independently ground it jointly as shown below PLC Q Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed Extension devices of PLC except expansion board and special communication high speed input output adapter Independent grounding Class D grounding E grounding resistance 100 or less ru MEE Use ground wires thicker than AWG14 2 mm Position the grounding point as close to the PLC as possible to decrease the length of the ground wire 154 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 5 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 5 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 5 1 Example of input output wiring with 24V DC service power supply 24V DC service power supply of the main unit can be used as a power supply for loads 2 However the power consumed by extension devices should be subtracted from the 24V DC service power Ym and the remainder can be used as power for loads ec AC power supply of a 100 to 240V E ZEN Beer 3 Power ON 5y PL 8B ms MC g e MC l T
134. X002 S se ar aan uL un 3 Starting and stopping by remote control from programming software The programming software has a function to forcibly start and stop the PLC by remote control remote RUN STOP function However when power is reapplied the remote RUN STOP function is disabled The RUN STOP status is then determined by the RUN STOP switch or RUN terminal The remote operation for starting and stopping from the programming software is used in combination with the built in RUN STOP switch oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua 241 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods 1 When the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose RUN terminal are used without remote running stopping operation from the programming software The RUN STOP status of the PLC is determined by the conditions shown in the following table Condition of built in Condition of general purpose input terminal Status of PLC RUN STOP switch specified as RUN terminal by parameter RUN OFF STOP STOP ON RUN Use either built in RUN STOP switch or the general input specified as RUN terminal When specifying the general purpose terminal as the RUN terminal always set the built in RUN STOP switch to STOP
135. and ground terminal Special function unit block Escher Refer to the manual for each special function unit block 48 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 2 Power Supply Specifications 4 2 Power Supply Specifications z o The specifications for the main unit power supply are explained below ej For the power current consumed by the special function units blocks refer to this manual or the special function units blocks manual 2 4 2 1 AC Power Supply Type Jy Specifications 2 D Item FX3u 16MLI FX3u 32MLI FX3u 48ML FX3u 64ML FX3u 80MLI FX3u 128ML1 EL EL Er EL EL EO 3 Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC z Allowable supply 85 to 264V AC 2g voltage range ES Rated frequency 50 60 Hz S ONDE Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or less instan taneods When the supply voltage is 200V AC the time can be change to 10 to 100 ms by editing the user power failure nc program g Power fuse 250V 3 15A 250V 5A je Rush current 30 A max 5 ms or less 100V AC 65 A max 5 ms or less 200V AC o Power i T consumption 5 24V DC service Se 2 400 mA or less 600 mA or less BDO power supply F 5V DC built in S o 500 mA or less a power supply 1 These power consumption values are maximum values which apply to the main unit s 24V DC service
136. and j Content of register ing special name device DE D 8425 Communication parameter display ch2 Djsazs Computer link ch2 D 8427 Specification of on demand head device register Computer link ch2 D 8428 Specification of on demand data LA oS M8429 length register RS2 FNC 87 ch2 computer link D 8429 ch2 Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch2 EDT Header 1 and 2 Default STX RS2 FNC 87 ch2 EO Header 3 and 4 7 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 PORE Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch2 s Terminator 3 and 4 7 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 etes Receive sum received data RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Leo Receive sum calculated result D 8436 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send sum 018437 8 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Error Detection Error code for serial D18438 communication error 2 ch2 POTE RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 D 8439 Operation mode display ch2 Error Detection D 8440 to D 8448 Not used D 8449 Special block error code M8449 D 8450 to D 8459 Not used z Positioning FX3U and FX3UC PLCs D 8460 to D 8463 Not used DSZR FNC150 and ZRN FNC156 instructions YOOO Clear signal device specification DSZR FNC150 and ZRN FNC156 instructions Y001 Clear signal device specification D 8464 M8464 D 8465 M8465 DSZR FNC150 and ZRN FNC156 instructions Y002 Clear signal device specification D 8466 M8466 DSZR FNC150 and Z
137. and special function adapter MJ blocks with model FXON 30 65EC extension cable This battery backs up the following data Program memory in built in RAM Keep devices battery backup devices Results of sampling trace Time on clock Battery 4 FX3U 32BL PE 16k step flash memory a B Memory 7 i A rice 64k step flash memory 2 B cassettes M 64 ES iius 64k step flash memory with transfer switch elas ES 1 When the extension cable FXoN 30EC or FXON 65EC is used use up to one cable for one system When an extension block is added use FX2N CNV BC in addition to the cable These extension cables are unusable for FX2N 10GM and FX2N 20GM 2 Products manufactured in and after May 2005 will comply with the overseas standard For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 42 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 10 M FX Series terminal blocks cables and connectors 1 FX Series terminal blocks v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted A Partial compliance Number Number of UL Model name of input Marine B output EMC LVD cUL points points FX 16E TB 16 input points or 16 output points 32 input points To be directly connected to the PLC FX 32E TB 32 output points or input output c
138. attempt the operation again from the first step Transfer failed A Transfer completed message appears when the transfer is completed Cassette gt RAM When this message appears press OK or ESC to display the Read memory cassette transfer screen Transfer completed 5 Press ESC to display the menu screen 378 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 17 Cassette Memory Cassette Transfers 19 17 3 Memory cassette amp internal RAM consistency check Cassette RAM 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette item then press OK to display the memory Memory Cassette cassette transfer screen Cassette RAM To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Cassette gt RAM 1g P 10 1g 4 7 asse ttg il RANE logo P d dg VW 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette RAM item then press OK to display the screen shown at right Cassette RAM To cancel the operation and return to the memory cassette transfer Verify screen press ESC OK E t Xecute ESC 5 Cancel 3 Press OK to begin the consistency check Or press ESC to cancel the operation Cassette RAM Button Operation Description Verify ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the memory Please wait cassette transfer scree
139. block M3 screw z screw Input form sink source Input signal voltage AC power type 24V DC 410 DC power type 16 8 to 28 8V DC X000 to X005 3 9 KQ nput X006 X007 3 3 kQ impedance X010 or more X000 to X005 6 mA 24V DC Input signal x oos X007 7 mA 24V DC current X010 or more Se 5 mA 24V DC 4 3 KQ suoneouioedgs Qi ON input X000 to X005 3 5 mA or more sensitivity 4 5 mA or more EF current 3 5 mA or more d 3 OFF input sensitivity current 1 5 mA or less Input response time Approx 10 ms No voltage contact input 6 Input signal form Sink input NPN open collector transistor Source input PNP open collector transistor S Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation as Input operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven zi AC power supply type E Sink input wiring Source input wiring 7 Se gt E P 8 A Input circuit configuration 1 Input impedance DC power supply type S Sink input wiring 9 EIE ese D DC 238 E BEN p 2 FX3U 128MLIJ does not have DC power supply type 9 Do not connect with 0V and 24V terminals Bui 1ndu 51 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 Output Specifications The main unit output specifications are explained below 4 4 1 Relay output The output numbers in the table indicate t
140. blocks 1 Input does not turn on Disconnect the external wiring and connect the S S terminal and the OV terminal or the 24V terminal Short circuit the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S terminal and the input terminal then check the input display LED or a peripheral device to confirm that the input turns on Measures Check that the input device does not have a built in diode or parallel resistance When Input turns on ie So refer to Subsection 10 2 3 Measure the voltage between the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S When input does not terminal and the input terminal with a tester to confirm that the voltage is 24V DC turn on e Check the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension cables 2 Input does not turn off Check for leakage current from input devices If the leakage current is 1 5mA or more it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance For details on the measures refer to Subsection 10 2 3 258 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword 1 Cautions in registering keyword The keyword limits access to the program prepared by the user from peripheral devices Keep the keyword carefully If you forget the keyword you cannot operate the PLC online from the programming to
141. board with JY997D13101 l roditi Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s p Manual Data Communication Edition eee Procedures for handling the RS 485 PP FX3U 485 BD communication expansion board with JY997D13001 l due Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s p Manual Data Communication Edition Suaulicd Procedures for handling the RS 485 pP FX3U 485ADP communication special adapter with JY997D13801 l adici Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s p Manual Data Communication Edition Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 232C RS with FX 485PC IF JY992D81801 485 conversion interface E product Hardware Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition MCC Link CC Link LT MELSEC I O LINK and AS i system When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supolied Procedures for handling the CC Link master wan FX2N 16CCL M JVoo2Doa2oi SPecial function block J Hardware Manual When using refer also to FX2N 16CCL M product i User s Manual Sepa EX2N 16CCL M Details of CC Link master special function rate vol JY992D93101 p 09R710 User s Manual block ume Supplied l us E JY992D71801 Procedures for handling the CC Link remote 09R711 User s Manual device station special function block product Supplied Remote I O station and with rem
142. bt pasate ate rhea ard asd 428 21 2 2 Memory cassette TelnoVdliszeseis aco ntubr ide Deeds ED acad netu toi biizatu broth avdvaS e MER d 429 21 3 Saved Data COntelll scies iisocsas deme idi tnma s iaes d Gesamt xev uad ar vues dub esso de spl eU ce sedute uEe 430 21 4 PROTECT SWIC sacr un Quent do qut Yu Quad oto CoC battu Cd en o bua on po t 431 241 4 T PROTBCT SWIIChSSITID up siones oio leek aris heehee nes ad adus eaten ee Deed cremari sedata 431 214 2 PIROTEGIT SwWwIICh ODerallOlxsss co cc icp ia esumi oo tos pioe NC oue a a esf oe duds nudemewacteth amen 431 21 4 3 Precautions when setting and using the switch eesssesssseeene 431 21 5 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC RAM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 432 21 5 1 Tool for pressing the WR and RD keys sseeeseseeeseeeennrennnn nnne 432 2152 Writing WR 64b PL tiit E ees acc acini doe tastes oett td 432 21 5 3 Readmg RD 64L S PLC 25 0 2 Soet Sa deut ep dee pd pun ne Eu e alu e abit ta aee Ra uis 433 21 6 Transfers By Display Module Operation cccccsscccceeeecceeseeeceseeeceeeeecseseeessaeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeas 433 21 7 Operation PRECAULOINS 22 5 titan Eine tB pon CE Sins tn e Rape nt binebatasncacceeeiactanacediacdeantoiecies 433 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 FX3U 32BL Battery 22 1 Baley miU 919 1 P REI oL 1L 22 2 SO9ecIHCallOLiSiuiconieutte
143. burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply in the main unit and extension units from the outside Such power supply may cause damages to the product SJOJUhOO p ds y iH 3 N Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit and O extension units with a 2mm2 or thicker wire Ss Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system refer to Section 9 4 z Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual a If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out 1 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product SS When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident Sa may cause fire failu
144. by the count input X000 When the current value increases from 6 to 5 the output contact is set and when the value decreases from 5 to 6 it is reset The current value increases and decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact However when the counter s value increments from 2 147 483 647 it changes to 2 147 483 648 In the same manner when it decrements from 2 147 483 648 it changes to 2 147 483 647 This type of counter is called a ring counter When RST instruction is executed after the reset input X011 turns on the current counter s value resets to 0 and the output contact is restored The current values output contact operations and reset status of the high speed counters for retention upon power failure are kept even if power is turned off 11 6 2 1 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters NM of program For C246 X011 While X012 is on C246 increments the value when the input terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON and decrements the value when the input terminal X001 switches from OFF to ON eni The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting D2 D3 The setting is D3 D2
145. can be displayed on the display module FX3U 7DM PP 21 uononpoJju pue s n d MJ SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uonenBijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejejsu oo e BuulM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 Introduction 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual This manual describes detail on the hardware including the system configuration selection installation and wiring The instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are explained in separate manuals Refer to the manuals as needed Main unit Built in functions eSequence instructions eHigh speed counter ePositioning instructions ePID 0000909099009900 MITSUBISHI MALES 1 DHHHTLLL A raw aN ast c ce ce ce wi TETTETETT Additional options Input output powered extension units blocks eee eeeeeeeeeeeealo IS 8 98 exes oso exes wma ipte 32338383 ae I UE 00000000 mm c FXav EX C 3 3 9 3 ES S9 3 9 KA 9 9 M94 EAS JAO SHES HES ES ES KE KS ES ES KES eS KES ESI E39 ES 83 CO Expansion board Specia
146. communication a When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed a System configuration of the USB Supplied communication expansion board and with IE JY997D13501 procedures for installing the driver product When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 232C PP FX3u 232 BD communication expansion board with JY997D12901 l l cack Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s P Manual Data Communication Edition uonejejsu oo e Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 232C Sos PP FX3U 232ADP communication special adapter av with JY997D13701 og sick Installation Manual When using sefer also to FX Series User s 5 5 p Manual Data Communication Edition lt e Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 232C PP FX2N 2321F communication special function block with JY992D73501 l i aduci Hardware Manual When using sefer also to FX Series User s p Manual Data Communication Edition 23 Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Indispensable manuals v Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Manual Model Contents number name code Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 422 EE FX3U 422 BD communication expansion
147. connected Type input output PEN lr P P 5V DC power e Min 9 classification units points points STO MA service power did supply mA 27 3 3 ns So a BE sewers Input output 32 250 1 0 y powered extension unit 5 3 111 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification 4 Enter the specifications for the products to be added to the input output pow 112 ered extension unit Calculation of current Number of consumption of built in power input output supply Number of Classification connected Type occupied Internal 24V units f points points pa Pu E DC power ud supply mA products the Input powered unit block E 1 The number for FX2N 64CL M is calculated by adding the number of input output points at the connected remote l O station to 8 points Calculate the number of input output points Calculate the number of input output points on the whole system Calculate the number of input output points of the main unit and extension devices Number of input output points Total input output points Input output powered Total input output points of extension devices extension unit of extension devices 2 4 3 4 ZED points 48 points 32 points 48 points Max number of Calculation result Tee cU EU EAR Main unit
148. count 71 71 71 71 1 1 1 1 1 Phase A Phase B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Up counting Down counting e The down count up count operations of C251 to C255 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8251 to M8255 ON Down counting OFF Up counting FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 7 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 11 7 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value SJojuno2 peeds ubiH 11 7 1 Timing of updating of current value NO When a pulse is input to a high speed counter input terminal the counter increments or decrements The current value of the device is updated at the timing shown in the following table o Therefore when the hardware counter directly handles the current value of the high speed counter for MOV z instruction or CMP instruction or an applied instruction such as a contact comparison instruction it uses the z current value updated at the timing shown in the following table As a result the counter operation is affected 3 by the scan time Classification Timing of updating of current value 1 3 OUT instruction of counter ss Heel ST HCMOV instruction dE Software counter When count is input Se D 11 7 2 Comparison of current value I To compare and output the current value of a high speed counter the following two methods ar
149. duration of power loss is within period of time specified in D8008 It is set when momentary power failure is detected If power loss time is longer than period of time specified in D8008 M8008 is reset and PLC is turned in STOP mode M8000 OFF ON when 24V DC power fails in either powered extension unit Correspond ing special device D8004 D8005 D8006 D8007 D8008 D8008 D8009 Number and name Clock M 8010 M 801 1 10 ms clock pulse M 8012 100 ms clock pulse M 8013 1 sec clock pulse M 8014 1 min clock pulse M 8015 M 8016 M 8017 M 8018 M 8019 TEG M 8020 Zero M 8021 Borrow M 8022 Carry M 8023 M 8024 M 8025 M 8026 M 8027 M 8028 M 8029 Instruction execution complete Operation and function Not used ON and OFF in 10 ms cycle ON 5 ms OFF 5 ms ON and OFF in 100 ms cycle ON 50 ms OFF 50 ms ON and OFF in 1 sec cycle ON 500 ms OFF 500 ms ON and OFF in 1 min cycle ON 30 sec OFF 30 sec Clock stop and preset For real time clock Time read display is stopped For real time clock 30 seconds correction For real time clock Installation detection Always ON For real time clock Real time clock RTC error For real time clock ON when the result of addition subtraction is 0 ON when the result of subtraction is less than the min negative number ON when carry occurs as a result of addi
150. e While X011 is on the counter resets when RST instruction Reset is executed X012 The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or 238 K 5 up count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 Count input Main unit 2 For C244 X010 e C244 starts counting immediately when the input terminal oun X006 turns on while X012 is on The count input terminal is X000 The setting for this example is the data of the one sa 2 T Mor p E Reset indirectly designated data register D1 D0 X012 I C244 can be reset by X011 on the sequence For C244 c DO D1 X001 is allocated as the external reset input The counter resets immediately when X001 turns on e The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or The setting is D1 D0 Count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 Count input External reset External start input input Main unit Example of operation The above counter C235 operates as shown below X010 Up count Down count Up count X011 Reset input X012 Start input X000 Count input 4 94 C235 9 P 2 2 Current 1 1 value Q 0 0 sedi chattel a en tot toe RITE TEENS gt 1 3 3 When output has 4 5 4 operated we 6 9 7 8 7 C235 output contact NW 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 11 6 Handling of High speed Counters FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition C235 is set to the up count or down count mode through interruption
151. either character data or the data shown below RPM BENE Alphanumeric 20H to 7DH A1H to DFH ASCII code ard DLJL 1 40 e Japanese Shift JIS code 2 System signal 2 Specie poate System Description Reference register Information OK button ON OFF MAA 1 Operation button ON ESC button ON OFF MAA 2 OFF information button ON OFF D8304 KAA MAA 3 button ON OFF Occupies 7 MAA 4 User message display command Section 19 23 Section 19 20 oints g p AA Device for specifying the Monitor Test menu s current value and Section 19 21 setting the value display format hexadecimal or decimal DISSI GO RUE ON during user registered device Section 19 19 MAA 6 play monitoring screen or user message and information i display Section 19 23 380 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 18 System Information Restrictions From PLC 19 18 2 System information setting programexample QF The following is a program example in which the system information has been assigned to D50 to D90 and BS M50 to M56 MOV D8300 1 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D90 Initial pulse S MOV D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M56 NO BuutM 1ndjno JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 A syoo g uois
152. eli Cte cU EE 251 14 6 4 Error Code List and Action ccccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeessanseeeenas 252 T JroUbIesoOUllg enneunen a a a cn S Cep toc c ee esu Pac Chad 258 14 7 1 Output does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 258 14 7 2 24V DC input does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 258 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword cc scccccssseeeccseeeecceeeececcesseeeceusssecseeueeeessusseeeeseuseessegsseessnes 259 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units 260 15 ROI C E 262 19 01 Product conguet obs condo pase ene E Hares cor t bcati cepe eni ta etse edlen a 262 LES SAM dios Denier 262 15 2 Power Supply Specifications Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply 263 19 21 W elghit aecessorleS GIC 20 si ai a duds Nas ee et coti eal esa ia ede ede ecole end ue ro o cus cabe 263 1922 s TBI RIZ INT I NR ERE TES TERT s 264 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N A8ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS esses 266 19 94 Producb SpeelHiCatiOLlSescaccsdutta adii a tere chen ee Lease tes aec duis cc du doe quae leitete uR rei DU EL LO UEE 266 19 9 2 EX USI AN CIITA CTS ONS s acus tote asm due tanc dup MR AI AR CI Mele Ae DM eel MAL ELI 267 USERS MEE Penelope T UT T UM 268 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition
153. eoe 0000 oon 009 5999 Biss rss cen e np ia en Wa aab DM DDG rempersture C Peers DOSO FWT 5 ees WX S wH ooaj neg tale BEW eeo e GX Developer character arrangement precautions A single line is comprised of 8 data registers To prevent garbled characters when a 2 byte character shift JIS code arrangement extends into the next line the system replaces those characters with 2 spaces Ex spaces display at the end of the 1st line and at the beginning of the 2nd line The condition of the display module line must therefore be considered when entering the characters Moreover the 1st character device should be specified for displaying a 1 line character input 400 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 24 Operation Error Messages amp Corrective Actions FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 24 Operation Error Messages amp Corrective Actions T The following is a list of error messages which the system displays after an operation is performed 8 Relevant Menu Screen Corrective Action Japanese Entry Code error ETEA 1 2 Cancel the entry code then attempt the operation All menus T l O 7 gt ic amp ko again 8 Rie STUCTWRS 2 The Entry Code 4 7 5 pE amp h No entry code has been registered E is not set CU EH Entry codes cannot be registered from the display module A programming tool such as GX 1 3 Developer etc is required to re
154. error M8065 D8065 0000 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error codes in shaded columns are added in FX3U PLCs PLC operation at Contents of error error occurrence Parity overrun or framing error Communication character error Continues operation Data format error Command error oom Nem 0 Communication character error operation initializati NE Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction setting sum check error Stops operation Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction setting error Other setting error o m Nem O Incorrect combination of instruction device symbol and device number No OUT T or OUT C before setting value Nosetting value after OUT T or OUT C Insufficient number of operands for an applied instruction Same label number is used more than once Same interrupt input or high speed counter input is used more than once Stops operation Device number is out of allowed range Action Check the cable connection between the programming panel PP programming device and Communication data sum check error the PLC This error may occur when a cable is disconnected and reconnected during PLC monitoring nverter communication computer link a
155. in RUN STOP switch The PLC can be started and stopped with the built in switch RUN and STOP commands can be given to the PLC through a general purpose input terminal or peripheral device Writing during RUN The programming software for personal computer enables you to modify the program while the PLC is running Built in clock function The PLC has a clock function to control the time Programming tool Use a version of GX Developer applicable to FX3U Refer to Chapter 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability in this manual For peripheral devices not applicable to FX3U Series specify FX2N Series or FX2 Series for model selection and you can program the devices within the ranges common to FX3U Series and the selected model of PLC Remote debugging of program Use of programming software enables you to remotely transfer the program and monitor the PLC operation through a modem connected to the RS 232C expansion board and RS 232C communication special adapter Input output high speed processing functions of main unit High speed counter function 1 Input terminals of main unit Input of open collector transistor output 1 phase 100 kHz x 6 points 10 kHz x 2 points 2 phase 50 kHz x 2 points 2 Input terminals of high speed input special adapter FX3U AHSX ADP Input of differential line driver 1 phase 200 kHz x 8 points when 2 units are connected 2 pha
156. input output terminals Procedures for the wiring power supply 146 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 1 Preparation for Wiring 9 1 Preparation for Wiring 9 1 1 Wiring procedures Before starting wiring work make sure that the main power is off 1 Prepare the parts for wiring Prepare the solderless terminals and cables necessary for wiring For details refer to Section 9 2 2 Wire the power supply terminals In the case of AC power supply type Connect the power supply to the terminals L and N In the case of DC power supply type Connect the power supply to the terminals and Provide the power supply circuit with the protection circuit shown in this subsection For details refer to Section 9 5 3 Wire the ground terminal at a grounding resistance of 100Q or less Class D Connect a class D ground wire to the terminal For details refer to Section 9 4 and 9 5 4 Wire the input X terminals For a type 24V DC input type common to sink source input select sink or source input by the following connection In the case of AC power supply type For sink input connect the 24V and S S terminals For source input connect the OV and S S terminals In the case of DC power supply type e For sink input connect the and S S terminals e For source input connect the
157. is lit when there is input AC power supply type DC power supply type Sink input wiring Sink input wiring Input circuit diagram 1 The DC power type applies to the power supply voltage in Power Supply Specifications Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply 2 Do not connect with 24 terminals FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 5 FX2N 32bR FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D 3 Output specifications relay output type QF Item FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D ZO nm D Number of output points 16 points 24 points 2 Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Relay 12 External power supply 250V AC 30V DC or less O Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation When power is applied to relay coil LED on panel is lit 2 A point 2 A point e The total load current per common ter The total load current per common ter minal should be the following value minal should be the following value 1 3 Resistance i l Gad e 8 output points common terminal 8 A 4 output points common terminal 8 A sz enone or less or less SE Od e 8 output points common terminal 8 A ae or less D 80 VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 4 4 2 4 4 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 2 4 E Open circuit leakage current 5 m o O m Min load 5
158. iui uus eoa AE 419 20 7 5 Product life of relay output contacts seesssssssssssseseseeen eene nnne 420 20 0 FA TO6EYXTSIB EXSTOEYTSBSIDB zu o terr tie e pte pce cett e a teet uqits sant asta Ro EER 421 PAUSE SIe ie eiTe EET TT T E E dens oats areca E N 421 20 0 2 Intermal GIreulb eee ea er ee n eS uS pU LEM Lu UM MU iE 422 20 8 3 Example of output external wiring ccccccccccceeceeceeceececeeceeeceeeeessaecesseaeesseeeesseaeeessaeeesseeeees 422 20 0 4 External WIRING PreCAUllonS ssc si ad dac ene vrbes venere botox raa es aE E cta Le ict RU APowt Pastel es neca dis 423 20 9 FX TOEYSSTB aaa tct koci beso peus eese ewe TED imu dU MPEG cene at emma panied MU SEDI S DELE 424 20 971 SPCCIICANONS xc caciccubas uid eeedesscun e dunes uu cuu Leu ed apo E 424 20 92 Menna Creu t Lc 425 20 9 3 Example of output external wiring cccccceccccceecceceeceeceeceeseeesaeeeeeeueeeeaeeeesseeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeees 425 20 9 4 Externa wird precautions i venu deve gu imo uM ia dq Vs peu UEM TO ES bee Ld DUUM INED ERE aoe ais 426 21 FX3U FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette 427 AE MESS enean team RU DET 427 21 141 Electrical SDECIHICallOriS o 0 daisaS cal ha dg As chou oti a at sll es eu t ce 427 21 1 2 Component names amp external dimensions essseessssssssssssseseeen enean 427 21 2 InstallatoriflemmoVvallscu dedecus tede r a ede ete n lt de eee deni 428 21 2 1 Memory cassette IstalldloLisso oen t tue
159. k O Comer l O age a ama e A ama ama e 1 Applicable when the main unit is AC power type 2 If an extension power supply unit is connected on the upstream side of an input extension block the power must be supplied from the main unit s 24V DC service power to the input extension block 72 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System b 6 1 1 List of system components z g Q M Other items to be considered S ax 5 Number of Classification Vp stare eoe podia is died input output p a Reference inpu w able units output points OCCUPIEU 2 points om FX3U 16MR ES v ec 1 unit 256 points or v6 ucc 38 Maloun FX3U 80MR ES less s v FX2N 32ER Not hee state cs 6 3 Input output powered EX2N 48ER specified E extension unit ds enneacion 3g FX2N 8EX 6 8 4 ES v ex FX2N 8EYR Not S 6 P 3 Input output FX2N 16EX specified a at Y extension block FX2N 16EYR ims Dacis iin Subsection 4 B FX3U 422 BD 1 unit v 682 DP Expansion board FX3U CNV BD 2 FX3U 4AD ADP Up to 4 f 3 z 4 Commu FX3U 232ADP Up to 2 p nication FX3u 485ADP units 5 High Subsection g p S Specie FX3U 4HSX ADP UP 104 4 4 oe ass adapter units P E m ok units 4 OVU 256 points or VT 4 V S Anal less Ee nalog T S 256 points or yt 4 v4 less C d f OMMU EX2N 2321F 256 points or al Y
160. load In this manual the term micro current load refers to a load of Micro current load Surge 0 4VA 100V AC or less and 1 6VA 200V AC or less apecipel Item Guide Rated voltage 250V AC Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 1200 Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where Interlock Forward limit a hazardous condition could result if switched ON Sard simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to gt paves the right Reverse limit PLC output element 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase x manner Bad Good 426 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 21 FXSU FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 1 Specifications ENEN 1 21 FX3U FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette Asowey p sseg This chapter explains the memory cassette specifications and functions 22 The memory cassette can be installed at the main unit and when installed the memory cassette s internal D program is used in place of the internal RAM memory E 21 1 Specifications 21 1 1 Electrical specifications Max Memory Allowable PROTECT Loader Compatible Type Switch Funct
161. mounting hole pitch FX3U 4AD 4 0 16 55 2 17 Terminal Layout Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 9 0 36 87 3 43 325 SJOJUNOD peeds ubiH m NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A syoo g uoisuaX3 idnonndu C N EM U o D CD c xe E lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 5 FX3U 4DA External Dimensions 2 64 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product POWERCO T O B O E LOO sae OD O S OF Oo E Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 4 0 16 55 2 17 Terminal Layout 18 1 6 FX2N 4AD External Dimensions MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws
162. nU eo MEE Up EE ue toti Dual qu DE toteip dubios Rede 22 2 1 Differences between main unit s internal battery and the optional battery 22 9 Battery Handig FR eee et Een taie a td E uei Mp UN EMu E 22 3 1 Battery life amp replacement guidelines eese 22 3 2 Reading the date of manufacture sess 22 3 3 Special battery low voltage device amp notification program example 22 4 Battery Free Operation ccccccccccsssceecceeseecceeseeeceeueeecseueeessegeeessegseessageeessegseessageees 22 9 Battery IxebDiacetniefil e oium iode desse td sioe EE 22 6 Battery Related Precautloris itti eto ooo tp ceo e LES REPE RES ESSE MADRE RUES Appendix A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 eeeseesssss Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 esses Appendix A 3 Analog special adapters M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299 Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8299 eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8299 eseeeeeeeeeeee Appendix B Instruction List Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions ccccccccsscceseeceeeceneceueeceeesaeeseueseueeseeesseeseaeeneeess Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions ccccccceccccecec
163. of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type ccccsccccsesceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaneeseaees 155 9 5 1 Example of input output wiring with 24V DC service power supply eeeeeeeeee 155 9 5 2 Example of sink input COMMON wiring cccceeccccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceteeecessaeeesaueeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeees 156 9 5 3 Example of source input FCOMMON wiring sseeeesseeeseeeeeeeennnennnnn nnn 157 9 5 4 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit sink input Common 158 9 5 5 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit Source input common 159 9 6 Examples of External Wiring DC Power Supply Type cc ccccceececeeeeeeeceeseeeeseeeesseeeesaeess 160 9 6 1 Example of sink input COMMON wiring ccccceeceececeeceeeecaeeeeeeueceeaeecesseeeesseeeesseeeeseaeeeseaeeeees 160 9 6 2 Example of source input FCOMMON WIFI cccceecceceeceeceececeeeeeeeeeceseeeceseeeeeseeeeessaeeesseeeeees 161 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch 162 10 1 Before Starting Input VVIFITIQ 3o dra e dees io Etre Oque cb ote e Eco decease PE Ra Desc tens ence eee 164 10 1 1 Sink and source input 24V DC input type ssssssessssseesneeenn nemen 164 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input seeeeseeeeeeeeeenreeennnnn 165 10 2 T Inputspecificauons malt Unit
164. of counters ssssesseeeennennennn 192 11 9 Calculation of Response Frequency and Overall Frequency ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeees 193 11 9 1 Response frequencies of hardware counters sssessssssssssssssseeeee eene nnns 193 11 9 2 Response frequencies and overall frequency of software counters sssessss 193 11 10 Examples of External Wiring Rotary EnCoder cccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeeaeeseesaeeeeeeas 196 T4 10 1 T phase Tsmpuc C235 OK 2A SY ocd nde te rub L acerbe eek de ad desde ires esta dete uto sen ine 196 11 10 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 oo cccccsecccceeeeeeeeeeeesee cess ceeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeetsageessnseesanes 197 11 10 3 Cautions for the other side COVICE cccceecccccsesecececeeeeecceseeeecauseeecsceaseeecseuseeeeseuseessenseesenies 198 11 11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures esseeeseeeeeeennnenn 199 Trt Related devic ES suicides de cssc eumd Pu tu EM LK IM MU Mc EN II 199 11 11 2 Function switching switching of logic of external reset input signal 201 11 11 3 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals 201 11 11 4 Function switching procedures for using 2 phase 2 count input counters C251 to C255 in 4 edge count MOE cseccccssseceeccesseeeceaesceeeceusecec
165. on mounting and removing the DIN rail refer to Section 8 5 jnpold CY uononpoJju 2 Direct installing with screws The PLC can be installed directly in the enclosure with M4 screws For the mounting hole pitch refer to Section 8 6 I 8 4 2 Cautions in examining installing method suoneouioedgs Refer to Section 8 3 Qi 1 Cautions when FX2N 8AD is used When the system is laid out in two stages do not mount FX2N 8AD at the top of the second stage or FX2N Sas CNV BC cannot be installed directly Se 2 Cautions when FX2N 10GM or FX2N 20GM is used 2 FX2N 10GM and FX2N 20GM can be installed only on the DIN rail They cannot be installed directly in the enclosure 6 OW 8 4 53 Examples of installation 35 SE As shown in the following example when the main unit is installed on the DIN rail the extension devices connected with the extension cable can be installed directly in the enclosure 1 Example of installation on DIN rail r 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 E 58 FX3U Series BSS 3 16EYT main unit ESS UL DIN rail Extension cable eF XoN 65EC eFXoN 30EC 1 FX2N CNV BC 9 DIN rail a indicates an M4 screw a9 V L sg 1 FX2N CNV BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail zu BEN p Bui 1ndu 129 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Examination fo
166. or more user registered devices FS Refer to Section 19 19 for the user registered device setting procedure Refer to Subsection 19 19 3 to 19 19 5 for program examples I 3 User message changes p z The system information s system signal 2 display screen information and user message display gER command and operation button ON OFF information can be used together while a user message is 286 displayed in order to change by button operation the user message that the program displays 2g Refer to Section 19 23 user message display function 2 Refer to Subsection 19 23 4 to 19 23 6 for program examples peJewog indinojndu Ol 19 20 2 System information operation button ON OFF information sun uoisuejx3 1 System signal 1 System signal 1 has no system information related to this function A 2 System signal 2 System Information OK button is pressed MAA OK button is not pressed ON ESC button is pressed Description syoo g uoisuaX3 ndnonndu C NI MAA 1 ESC button is not pressed SE O ON button is pressed S D MAA 2 ON EH button is p o button is not pressed lt lt button is pressed MAA 3 button is not pressed 18 Qs Sg T Q 2 UOISU9 X3 194 0 20 D 3 2 at E o Q 387 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 1
167. otc i 1 User registered device 3 is set as 16 bit data at D103 58 MO K E User registered device 4 is set as 16 bit data at D104 cum registered 5 device E monitoring User message in progress display command M56 M54 oo ced Hexadecimal current value appears while user registered device io device monitoring screen is displayed 27 monitoring in User message At other Monitor Test screens the current values and setting values a progress display command M56 M54 are displayed in a decimal format UOISU9 X3 194 0 H d g C Oo Lo L 1L 1L IL N m Z UO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q 383 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 User User Registered Device Setting 19 19 4 Program example 2 when 3 or fewer devices are displayed as user registered devices Use this program example as a reference when setting 3 or fewer devices as user registered devices 1 Precaution When Setting 3 Or Fewer Devices When 3 or fewer devices are set as user registered devices the type setting for unused devices should be set to a value other than 7 and 8 2 Operation In this program example the 3 devices shown in the table below are set as user registered devices with a hexadecimal format specified for the current value display 1 The hexadecimal display format applies only to current values which are displayed at t
168. output high speed counters C235 to C255 OUT instruction e SORT2 FNC149 TBL FNC152 RBFM FNC278 and or WBFM FNC279 instruction Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output e DSZR FNC150 DVIT FNC151 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 instruction with acceleration deceleration operation DRVI FNC158 and or DRVA FNC159 instruction Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instruction uonejejsu oo e UD during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the c Circuit blocks which require attention on 2955 i PLC immediately stops pulse output ase operation after write during RUN og e PLSV FNC157 instruction without acceleration deceleration operation 59 O Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions lt 8 during execution of communication If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC may stop communication after that If the PLC stops communication set the PLC to the STOP mode once and then set it to the RUN mode again VCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 and or IVBWR FNC274 instruction EEN p Bui 1ndu 67 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 68 Ite
169. output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications Item FX2N 16EXL C MASS Weight 0 3 kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 16EXL C Input points 16 points Connection unit Connector terminal block Input type TTL level Input signal voltage 5V DC x 5 Input signal current 20 mA at 5V DC maximum Input impedance 2 2kQ Input sensitivity ON Low 1 mA or more current OFF High 0 4 mA or less Input sensitivity ON Low 1 5V DC or less voltage OFF High 3 5V DC or more OFF ON 1 ms 1 ms 0 5 ms Input response High Low du Oe Ort 1 ms 1 ms 0 5 ms Low High i Input signal type TTL input Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input External unit Input circuit diagram 300 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points 16 6 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement QF When an input X number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 BS points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers With cover Without cover Input indicator lamps LED lamps
170. output wiring Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications for sink input common and source input common Item FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS Number of input points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink source Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5 mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3 KQ m 3 5 mA or more 24V DC Input sensitivity current aper 1 5 mA or less current Input response time About 10 ms No voltage contact input Input signal form Sink NPN open collector transistor Source PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler Indication of input operation LED on panel is lit when there is input AC power supply type Sink input wiring Source input wiring Input circuit diagram DC power supply type Sink input wiring 1 The DC power type applies to the power supply voltage in Power Supply Specifications Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply 2 Do not connect with OV and 24V terminals FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS 3 Output specifications relay output type or Item FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS ZO nm D Number of output points 16 points 24 points 2 Connection type Rem
171. outside range from O to 32767 The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement Limit cycle method 6757 Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP outside range from O to 32767 Limit cycle method 6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time TD outside range from 0 to 32767 256 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Error code 6760 6762 6763 6764 6765 6770 6771 6772 6773 PLC operation at Contents of error error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 Continues operation 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error codes in shaded columns are added in FX3U PLCs Action ABS data read from servo sum check error Check servo wiring and parameter setting Also check ABS instruction ron specmeg 9y inventer CODImeHieSHot Check to make sure the port is not specified by instruction is already used in another another instruction communication 1 Check to make sure the input X as specified by DSZR DVIT or ZRN instruction is not being used for the following purposes
172. ove con Y1 Ys pow YS V7 ovijv1 vtspowgvt v t7 ons 2 r v23 v2 v27 v3 r v33 v5 v57 FX3U 64MT DSS vol v2 v4 ve Poya vialy ie ozas evo 1 vs VAL vs V7 SZE DEEA va v2 r v23 v25 v27 Y33 Y55 Y57 62 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 6 FXsu 80MLI O e AC power supply type 3 Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2 2 Fx S sSTov Tov xo x2 Dx4 X6 TOA LIN 24V 124V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 am PLINY j24V24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 2 FX3U 80MR ES FX3U 80MT ES 2 vo v2 V4 Ye viojy12 vi4 vte v2o v22 v24 v26 EE S Com Y1 Y3 ow v5 Y7 pow3 v 1 vtsponqvts v t7 kou v21 Y23 v25 Terminal block 2 Terminal block 1 FX3U 80MT ESS T T Tvsovszivsaqvas Tvao vaz vaajvas var Tvslvsijvsspvssvszpvejve vas vas va ivo v2 Tva ve piora Javie vo vzz v24jae suoneouioedgs SONARA Evi vs vr VON IY Vay gly rpvavz vasos 5 Terminal block 2 Soo Terminal block 1 SoS Qo Oo gt Eo e DC power supply type a Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2 6 pA OTOL pex x3 KiKa es S C peopez pape paopazpaspas aopazpaapae 3 xv peipesposper parpspesspr Dutipaispaspa FX3uU 80MR DS FX3u 80MT DS 7 o8 vo vz Ya ve ioia jvi4pvie v2o vz v24 v2e SE com Ya VS po
173. parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications
174. power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler Indication of output operation When photocoupler is driven LED on panel is lit 0 5A point 0 5A point The total load current per common ter The total load current per common ter minal should be the following value minal should be the following value e 4 output points common terminal 0 8 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less A or less e 8 output points common terminal 1 6 A or less Inductive load 12 W 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA 30V DC Min load OFF ON 0 2 ms or less 200 mA at 24V DC ON OFF 0 2 ms or less 200 mA at 24V DC Resistance Max load load Response time Output circuit diagram A common number applies to the of V L 15 4 2 External dimensions FX2N 32ET ESS UL 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches J MITSUBISHI 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch MELSECFXa 32ET TRANSISTOR UNIT UUUUUUUUUUU The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws 270 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS 4 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches qo S33 S ees ES ES GS ES EYES EAA S IGISISSSSISGGSISIGE
175. power supply of the connected main unit or powered extension unit on the upstream side 3 Grounding and power cables should be positioned to exit the unit from above For details refer to Subsection 9 5 4 and 9 5 5 323 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL a3 NO BuutM 1ndjno JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I JE oN NH SS Ge Er Be RSIS 002 ae oo 2 0 5 co mI x oD co o zc gt q mm 0 00 O 3 8 MS 2 7 A syoo g UOISUS X3 5 O O O c Lon UOISU9 X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 1 FXoN 3A External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Terminal Layout VIN2 IIN2 COM2 VIN1 IIN1 COMI 18 1 2 FX2N
176. setting 19 22 1 Entry code amp display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions If an entry code has been registered that entry code related restriction takes priority over the display screen protect function Usable Timer and counter settings cannot be changed Only monitor function is usable test function is not available Unusable Function Name Entry code Display Screen Protect All online Writing Reading 16 digit entry code setting gt operations rohibited writing prohibited P prohibited A All B Anti C Erroneous 8 digit entry code setting level gt operations lagiarism write prohibited P 9 prohibited Top screen time display Ce EEE vA Device 7 B A4 J BH Monitor Test User User registered device 7 ScanTime Scan time display Pvt H v v YY PLC status v ErrorCheck User message display LU b gt S n Wi di EEE TEEREEE Orolo do SIL LBS Ss s sS s IPIS Display screen protect function Menu display language setting Contrast adjustment Bem 7 8 ae ae oe Entry code cancel oes v Clear all device Device all clear Memory cassette transfer LJ 1 9 Iw a 19 22 2 Relationship between entry code amp display screen protect function X u SS lt S 5 Hs E If the PLC s entry code registration function is used that entry code related restriction takes priority over the dis
177. special function units blocks are connectable including the main unit and the input output powered extension unit Calculate the totals FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 3 Determine whether the devices can be added to the extension power supply 3 unit Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected 1 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply 2 Extension power Total of current consumed a supply unit by extension devices 5 1 6 1 2 Calculate the available current supply from the internal 24V DC power supply Power supply capacity for Current consumption Calculation result internal 24V DC Extension power Total of current consumed supply unit by extension devices 5 2 ea 3 Calculate the available input output occupied points excluding the occupied input output by special function units blocks IONPAd Q3 uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi OC U c Connectable O Number of I O 22s occupied points occupied points Calculation result ES o Extension power Total of I O occupied points 23 supply unit by extension devices 5 3 6 3 SL If the calculation result for the 5V DC power supply is a negative value the current consumption exceeds the 23 power supply capacity 3l Reco
178. switching device for C245 Subsection Function switching 11 11 3 devices i M8392 Function switching device for C248 and 253 rid Device for switching C251 C252 and C254 to single or 4 edge Subsection M8198 count 11 11 4 Device for switching C253 C255 and C253 OP to single or 4 edge Subsection M8199 sr 14444 199 SJojuno2 peeds ubiH NO BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 syoo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 4 Operation status of hardware counter software counter M8380 Operation status of C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 and C254 M8381 1 M8382 1 Operation status of C236 Operation status of C237 C242 and C245 Operation status of C238 C248 C248 OP Software Operation status C550 C253 and C255 1 To be cleared when the device turns RUN from STOP Hardware counter M8383 M8384 1 M8385 1 200 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 11 11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures FXsu Series Programmable Contr
179. table For details on the operation status refer to Section 14 5 LED name Display color Description POWER Green On while power is on the PLC RUN On while the PLC is running BATT V Red Lights when the battery voltage drops Red Flashing when a program error occurs ERROR Red Lights when a CPU error occurs 13 Output display LEDs red When an output terminal YOOO or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights When the terminal block covers are open 16 Input X terminals 17 Terminal block mounting screws 18 Terminal names 151 Protective terminal c 17 Terminal block mounting screws 15 Protective terminal covers Hist Outodt terminals 14 Power supply terminal Connect the power supply to the main unit 15 Protective terminal A protective terminal cover refer to the following drawing is fitted to the lower covers stage of each terminal block The cover prevents fingers from touching terminals thereby improving safety 16 Input X terminals Wire switches and sensors to the terminals 17 Terminal block If the main unit must be replaced loosen the screws slightly loosen the left and mounting screws right screws and the upper part of the terminal block can be removed On FX3u 16ML the terminal block cannot be removed 18 Terminal names The signal names for power supply input and output terminals are shown 19 Output
180. terminal Sink output Load current flows into the output Y terminals Connect each COML number terminal to the minus side of the load power supply The COMLI terminals are not connected internally Sink output type Source output Load current flows out of the output Y terminals Connect each VL number terminal to the plus side of the load power supply The VLJ terminals are not connected internally 2 External power supply For driving the load use a smoothing power supply of 5 to 30V DC that can output current two or more times the rated current of the fuse connected to the load circuit 3 Insulation of circuit The internal circuit of the PLC and the output transistor are insulated with a photocoupler The common blocks are separated from one another 4 Display of operation When any photocoupler operates the corresponding LED lights and corresponding output transistor turns ON 212 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 5 Response time oz The time from when the PLC drives or shuts down the photocoupler until the transistor is turned on or off is 232 shown in the following table 3D Classification Load current When using an instruction related to pulse train l l Y000 to Y002 5 us or less Main unit DC 10mA output or positioning make sure to set the load Y 003 or more
181. than 7 and 8 Refer to Subsection 19 19 4 for a program example 382 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 User User Registered Device Setting 19 19 3 Program example 1 when 4 devices are displayed as user registered devices QF di Use this program example as a reference when setting 4 devices as user registered devices 23 e 1 Operation In this program example the 4 devices shown in the table below are set as user registered devices with a hexadecimal format specified for the current value display N T D52 O 1 The hexadecimal display format applies only to current values which display at the user registered 8 device menu Other current values display in a decimal format 2 In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56 a User Registered Device Devices Set As User Display 1 3 Data Length No Registered Devices Format sz 1 D100 D101 32Bit Sa 2 D102 16Bit E l Hexadecimal P 3 D103 16Bit 4 D104 16Bit 14 2 Program 258 M8002 228 D8300 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D90 o s i Initial pulse E E D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M56 M8002 1 5 Initial pulse IN 1 User registered device 1 is set as 32 bit data at D101 D100 255 E 1 EE wo os E User registered device 2 is set as 16 bit data at D102 1 6 om5 oi aS Qo
182. the case of 2 wire proximity switch Bleeder resistance PLC source input Use a two wire proximity switch whose leakage current Z is 1 5 mA or less when the switch is off When the current is 1 5 mA or more connect a bleeder resistance Rb determined by the following formula as shown in the following figure 0 I4 1 5 Rb kQ Bleeder resistance 2 wire PLC LS Ian sink input 1 In the case of a type only for sink input connect the device to the COM terminal Bleeder resistance 2 wire Rb proximity sensor PLC source input FXau Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input b 10 2 4 Examples of external wiring sink input AC Power Supply Type zl S Sink and source input type Main unit I 3 A Fuse 1 2 uo re N 3 8 5 ey oj 2 lt 10H l l pnpod C uononpoJju AY Input impedance Three wire Sensor I 5V OV 24V suoneouioedgs Qi Sink and source US 0 uudtm 1d TCO 2g Input type E S a 9 NE ge Class D as ET grounding 3 far lI 7 DAY rx 8g e DAH zm 5V OV 24V 1 Handle the power supply circuit 8 24V correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring a and Power Su
183. the extension block Terminal Layout VIN o VIN FP o o FP RP o o RP PGO o o PGO CLR o Of CLR oat o olf 9A Notch oB o Oo OB DOG o o START SIS o of S S XO o of X1 331 SJOJUNOD peeds ubiH m NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A syoo g uoisuaX3 idnonndu C N E U o D CD c xe E lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 17 FX2N 10GM External Dimensions Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width only can be used for installation eAccessories FX2NC 100MPCB power cable FX2N GM 5EC extension cable label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block Connector Terminal Layout CON1 START o o XO SVRDY o SVEND STOP o o Xl1 COM2 o COM2 ZRN oOo of X2 CLR o of PGO FWD o of X83 COM3 o o COM4 RVS o og YO O O Notch DOG o oM Y1 FPlo o4 RP LSF o of Y2 VIN o o VIN LSR o of Y3 VINo o VIN COM1 o of COM1 COM
184. the input line There is a delay of approx 10ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON Change of filter time X000 to X017 up to the largest number in the main unit have digital filters and the filter time can be changed in increments of 1ms in the range from 0 to 60ms through applied instructions When 0 is specified for the time the input filter values are set as shown in the following table Input number Input filter value when 0 is specified Remarks X010 to X017 200 us Except FX3U 16MLJ 1 When the circuit is used at an input filter value of 5us be careful when wiring The details are stated later 2 The FX3u 16ML main unit input range is X000 to X007 The filter time for input numbers X010 to X017 is kept 10 ms because the input filters of the input output powered extension units blocks are used for them 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input User s Manual Hardware Edition Cautions in wiring when changing filter time z When setting the input filter to 5us or capturing pulses of a response frequency of 50 to 100kHz with a high g speed counter wire the terminals as stated below B 1 The wiring length should be 5m or less B 2 Connect a bleeder resistance of 1 5kQ 1 W or more to the input terminal so that the sum of the load current of the open collector transi
185. the main unit and Sq extension units with a 2mm or thicker wire cc Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system refer to Section 9 4 E Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual si zi If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Perform wiring properly to the FXoN FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends
186. the setting value Without index modifier data register D extended register R Indirect With index modifier Indirectly The directly specified device No index data register D index register VO to Specified registers current value becomes the V7 ZO to Z7 device No device No specified by the setting value Extended register R index register VO That device s current value becomes the to V7 ZO to Z7 setting value The specified device s current value becomes the setting value setting 4 The C200 to C255 32 bit up down counters and the high speed counters have counting directions 5 Enabled only when a memory cassette is installed 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 7 2 Monitor mode operation QF This section explains the procedure for monitoring the input X output Y auxiliary relay M state S timer BS T counter C data registers D DD extended registers R DR and the extended file registers ER DER The file register D and the index registers V Z cannot be monitored Refer to Subsection 19 7 3 for a monitor screen display example Refer to Section 19 8 for user registered device operation procedures N Refer to Section 19 21 for the procedure used to display the timer counter E and data register current
187. this case turn the power off check the memory cassette connection then attempt the operation again from the first step The transfer is not executed if a Memory Cassette is write protected message displays In this case turn the power OFF set the memory cassette PROTECT switch to OFF then attempt the operation again from the first step A Transfer completed message appears when the transfer is completed When this message appears press OK or ESC to display the Cassette screen 5 Press ESC to display the menu screen PLC is running Cassette RAM Write Transfer failed Memory Cassettes i S write protected Cassette RAM Write Transfer completed 377 SJOJUNOD peeds ybiIH dh _ N 10 BUM a3 BuutM 1ndino SOS ShOLEA I JE oN NH SS Ge Eu RSIS 002 SLs oo 2 0 5 co mI x OD D c gt q mm 0 00 O 35 c E 2 7 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 17 Cassette Memory Cassette Transfers 19 17 2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal RAM Cassette gt RAM 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette item then press OK to display the memory Memory
188. to the eF XON 30EC 300mm 11 81 external dimensions diagram 4 Except FX2N 8AD 50mm 1 97 3 When a special function block FX2N 10GM 20GM is connected at the 2nd stage Refer to the previous page for FX2N 1RM E SET information Input output powered extension Special adapter units blocks Special function units blocks FX3U Series main unit UOISUS X3 UOISUS X3 UOISUS X3 Ten mm am ml hen ae aa al ee ee ee ee Up to 10 units approx 18mm 0 71 x number of units For the dimensions of each product refer to the external dimensions diagram FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM UOISUS X3 2ol q UOISUS X3 Extension cable eFX2N GM 65EC 650mm For the dimensions of each product refer to the external dimensions diagram 50mm 1 97 128 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure h 8 4 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure Examine the installation location of PLC in consideration of the environmental conditions generic S specifications 8 4 1 Installing methods 2 oo The PLC can be installed by the following two methods ES 30 1 Installing on DIN rail 52 The PLC can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide he PLC can be easily moved and removed The PLC is installed higher by the height of the DIN rail For details on the procedures
189. to the input terminal so that the load current of the open collector transistor output on the mating device side to 20mA or more For the wiring refer to Section 11 10 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 19 24 11 5 2 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 11 5 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers When the comparison set reset instructions DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ and DHSCT for high speed counters are used the hardware H W counters are switched to software S W counters When the input signal logic is inverted by the reset input signal logic switching function M8388 and M8389 C253 is switched from a hardware counter to a software counter For the conditions under which it is handled as a software counter refer to Section 11 8 The input terminals to be used and the functions are switched by driving the special auxiliary relays in the program For the procedures on switching to hardware counters refer to Subsection 11 11 3 The 2 phase 2 count input counters are 1 edge count counters The use of special auxiliary relays changes them to 4 edge count counters For the procedures on operating them as 4 edge count counters refer to Subsection 11 11 4 Inhibition of redundant use of input numbers e The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interruption pulse catch SPD ZRN DSZR and DVIT instructions and general purpos
190. to the main unit as shown in the right figure 4 Slide the special adapter connecting hooks B in the right figure of the main unit to secure the special adapter C in the right figure 8 7 4 Connecting method C connection of powered extension unit block to main unit The procedures for connecting an powered extension unit block to the main unit are explained below 1 Remove the extension device connector cover A in the right figure on the right side of the main unit 2 Connect the extension cable B in the right fig ure from the extension block to be connected right side to the extension device connector of the main unit NSSNSNSNSNSNSS K L o amp Pi a V D 0 of o 0 0 nm y g DU 0 A d A SSSSSSSSSS When connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension unit FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX2N 1RM E SET or FX3u 1PSU 5V connect the unit to be added right side and the existing unit main unit with the supplied extension cable 3 Fit the extension device connector cover A in the right figure 141 uononpou pueseimee4 M S WEN Wed pnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON UN SON 9 DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware
191. turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time 159 uononpoJju pue s n d MJ S WEN Hed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo N SON HUN SON jndjno indul uonejejsu oo 5 o e zt 5 a FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 6 Examples of External Wiring DC Power Supply Type 9 6 Examples of External Wiring DC Power Supply Type 9 6 1 Example of sink input common wiring An example of sink input common wiring is given below When connecting input output powered extension units blocks carefully check the signal names on the terminal block because the sink and source input type units blocks and the sink input type units blocks vary in signal names on the terminal block Sink and source input type Class D 24V DC grounding E 5V OV 24V m Circuit Protector Power supply ON MC ink an Mc source ae input i FIOP Une e Input extension MC TOE h ee MC 5V OV 24V 1 5 Class D grounding block 4 o e Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC Sink and source input PRECAUTIONS at type Safety Precautions field Input extension block 4 5 Class D grounding 24 output terminals a oe tee t a As for the details of emer
192. uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uonenBijuo N SON UN SON uonejjesu Co jndinondu e DUUM A ddng jewog ue uorneJedaJd EEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Indispensable manuals v Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Manual Model Contents number name code Procedures for handling the 3 ch analog Supplied i output special adapter Wim ooo eee JY997D14001 When using refer also to FX3U FX3uc 2 User s Manual product Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition ide FX2N 4DA Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog with JY992D65901 product User s Guide output special function block Analog input output mixed When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied FXON 3A Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog with JY992D49001 input and 1 ch analog output special User s Guide l product function block Supplied FX2N 5A Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog with JY997D11401 input and 1 ch analog output special 09R616 User s Manual product function block Manuals for high speed counter llHigh speed counter When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to
193. uoo aD Ne eG duo pas E cass 361 19 8 Monitor Test Mode User Registered Devices cccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeas 362 19 5 1 Montor Triode ODBFallOrnc i soaatsuicdatoedea dida heated alee le ed hi Ri REL oe ade 362 19 8 2 Test mode OPeLatiONn ccccccccccsecccseeccsseceececeeeeceeecsueecsueecsueesseeseueessueessusessueessusessuessunenseueessaass 363 ucro igiene 363 19 10 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting eeeseeeseseseeeneeeennnn nn 364 19 10 43 Xhanging to dapariese Men s x 5 addu Pneus Ihe cae Toe setenta incen E oen ce meet ch Ree edet 364 19 0 2 Changing to Englisht MENUS ese ooo cle cel to ee cedes em eee ales eee tome ti etus petia us 365 19 10 3 D8302 changes by program amp related devices ssssssesseeeennneenrnn 365 QS MEG CR T RN 366 19 12 Clock Menu Current Time Setting esses nnne 367 19 12 1 Current time seting procedure tedio ena acd e Lid amma e ut quot reed 367 19 122 Displaying the CULTeHlb IITIG eects mcs tester nup Mad mee oue uote bande anu RE date vastos Loeb ea e 368 19 12 3 Changing the current time s Year from 2 digit format to 4 digit format 368 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 uis 2 COC NEED ERE E T TON 369 19 13 1 Entry code types amp levels iore dU ibi ree tio edes edic e
194. va ve ve v7 comofcomifcomafcoms coma coms come com7 Le HVOF VY 2 13 3V4 V5 16 3V7 Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A 4 7 3 FXs3u 32ML uejs S e AC power supply type CX TS STov xo X2 X4 x6 X16 x12 x14 X36 L N TZvD3 X5 X5 x7 xt1 xt3 xt5 xt7 uonenBijuo jndinogndu eJ voj v2 Tv4 ve vo vave com Y1 Y3 pow vs v7 ons vt1 vt13 ond 15 Y17 FX3U 32MT ESS voTY 2 v4 ve Mioa aarre evo v1 va pi vs vz Eva t vt3p vavts vt7 DC power supply type i S S 0V XO X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 O fa Xt X3 X5 X7 Xt1 X13IXt5 xaT SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog FX3U 32MR DS FX3U 32MT DS ue uorneJedaJd vol 2 v4 ve vir Tias e onal Y1 Ys ou V5 V7 os jv 3 feow vts v 17 FX3U 32MT DSS vo v2 Tva ve viovi2 Tria BEN p eva v1 vs vip vs raaa Bui 1ndu 61 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 4 7 Terminal Layout User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 4 FXsu 48ML AC power supply type i S S OV XO X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 L NT vp px xe x X11 X13 X15 xt x21 x23 X25 X27 FX3U 48MR ES FX3U 48MT ES vo Y2 J va ve Tvio vi2 v14 v16 v20 v2 vz4 ve cows comi Y1 v3 cow vs v7 ous 11 v13 Eonq
195. vt 17 Y21 Y23 Y25 27 FX3U 48MT ESS voja v4 ve Tvtolv ia Tei4 vielvzojvzzvaa vae va EVOL 1 V3 vi vs V7 va vts valvts vt v2 2s v2s v27 DC power supply type i S SI 0V XO X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 JO fav Xt X3 X5 X7 Xt15813 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 FX3U 48MR DS FX3U 48MT DS VOT v2 Tva ve Pioa viapvielvzo vzz vaa vecos co Y1 Y3 ow Y5 V7 oom r vts ee vts v t7 v2 1 Y23 Y28 Y27 FX3U 48MT DSS vo v2 v4 vel Tv19 v12 Tvia v e vao vzlvzajvze va evo Y1 vs Evi vs Yz va EAMA 4 7 5 FXs3u 64ML AC power supply type i S S OV OV XO X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 X30 X32 X34 X36 _ L NT AV av xi X8 XS x7 xt1 xt3 xt5 xt x21 X23 x25 x27 x31 X33 X85 X37 FX3U 64MR ES FX3U 64MT ES vo vz TY4Tve Tvio viz Jv14 v16 TY29 zz v2a vze v30 32 va4 36 ons con v1 Y3 pou vs Y7 ou t1 vt3ponqv15 Y17 Eons v21 v23 v25 v27 Y31 v33 3s Y37 FX3U 64MT ESS vo vz TY4 vs Tviojvia Tviapvis Tvzo vzz vza vze vao vaa vsa vae vo eva Ys Evi vs vz aZe vivis vtz E vajvz v2a v2slvz7 vst vs v35 v57 DC power supply type i S S oV 0V XO X2 X4 X6 X109X12 X14 X16X20 X22 X24 X206 X30 X32 X34 X36 O feye X1 X8 X5 X7 X11 X13X15 Xt7 X21 X23 X25 X27 X31 X33X35 X37 FX3U 64MR DS FX3U 64MT DS vol y2 va Ye roya are v2olvzzjvzapvze vso vsa vaa vse
196. way in the cassette is approx 0 4mm 0 02 lower than the Align the cassette with the prevent reverse installation slot Q O o Ke D gt O ab lt xX O O Ke D gt O O Q O P Oo Eam O o o D i Q Raise the memory cassette detachment lever C Install the memory cassette Installat If a display module surrounding surface 1 Remove the top cover cover B 2 Ra 3 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 21 2 1 Memory cassette installation User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 2 PLC body Raised cassette Press the 4 corners in approx section drawing memory cassette installation condition 0 4mm 0 02 Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions Cross Tilted cassette posture NNNNNNNNNNN MQQQQQQVQA MOOV AN Memory cassette MQ QVGA MQQQOQQVA MQQQQQQQAY MQQQQQQQAY SNNNNNNNNNN 428 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 21 FX3U FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 2 Installation amp Removal Memory Cassette 4 Attach the top cover B Battery lt Special Devices to Instruction List O Character code M8000 D8000 as shown in the figure to the right B Q O Oo C _ D gt O D C lt xX O O ta pa eb gt O O Q O _ Qo Eum O o o D i e
197. wei ote eroe rte eR na utis Ae De ee lates 165 10 2 2 Handling orz4V DC Jnpl 55 259 tat doce nat eludet nested tela abd xo a b anuo od aeu 166 10 2 3 Instructions for connecting input devices ssssssssssssseeeeeenen nennen 167 10 2 4 Examples of external wiring sink input AC Power Supply Typel sess 169 10 2 5 Example of external wiring source input AC Power Supply Type 171 10 2 6 Examples of external wiring sink input DC power supply type 172 10 2 7 Examle of external wiring source input DC Power Supply Type 174 10 3 7T00V AC Input Except Main Unit 3 52 00d tet de eden Er a 175 10 3 1 Input specifications REM ERE T 175 10 32 Handing Of T00V AC TI pl eco tras ete oi Ease seque o ase do noe d ER De eec a Pues Ioa EE aUe retta d nce sees 175 10 9 9 Example OF externalAVirltig susci ceases ect io pO E a eia aane e poc se Ra ln uad ed dece 176 10 4 Input Interruption IOOL 1 to I50L I With Delay Function seeeeeeeeen 177 10 4 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration 177 10 4 2 Input interruption delay function c cece cecccccseececeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeeseeceeseeeeesaeeeeseeeeessueeessusessueeeenaaes 177 10 4 3 Cautions Tor Input int rru ptio srs er
198. wire proximity Sink and source sensor input type itu grounding i 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 Inthe case of source input wiring short circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S S terminal and the O terminal of the main unit 4 Do not connect with OV and Class D 24V terminals grounding Special function block 5V OV 24V 174 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 100V AC Input Except Main Unit 10 3 100V AC Input Except Main Unit 10 3 1 Input specifications Select the input for the input output powered extension units blocks Main units of a 100V AC input type are not available For the specifications on input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 10 3 2 Handling of 100V AC Input 1 Input terminal When voltage of 100 to 120V AC is applied between the input terminal and COM terminal the input terminal is turned on The input display LED lights Do not connect the COM terminal of an AC input type input output powered extension unit block with
199. with insulating sleeve Treatment of stranded wires and solid wires without coating T l l i e Stranded wire solid wire Twist the ends of stranded wires tightly so that loose wires will not stick out Do not solder plate the electric wire ends k 0 36 5 o 5 ae 151 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Power Supply Specifications e Treatment using bar terminal with insulating sleeve It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath Select the Ap Contact portion electric wire referring to the outline drawing B V Manufacturer Caulking tool amm e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve Insulating sleeve Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX UD6 2 6mm oem 14mm 0 56 4 Tool Fortightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right With straight tip Manufacturer Model names Phoenix Contact SZS0 4x2 5 RUM m 0 e J SEU 9 3 Power Supply Specifications The specifications for power supply input to the main unit are explained below For the power consumption by the special function units blocks refer to this manual or the manual of each product 9 3 1 AC Power Supply Type 152 Specifications FX3u 16M
200. with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable odel name Description Marine FX3U 4AD ADP 4 ch voltage input current input a vi FX3U 4DA ADP 4 ch voltage output current output FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input a m FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 ch thermocouple K J type temperature sensor input v dl 1 Products manufactured in and after May 2005 will comply with the overseas standard For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 2 Communication functions v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable FX3U 232ADP RS 232C communication FX3U 485ADP RS 485 communication 1 Products manufactured in and after May 2005 will comply with the overseas standard For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 41 uh uononpoJju pueseimee4 M U RV ZZ D 3 D o jonpoJg uononpoJju I Qi seoMe Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uonenBijuo N SON UN SON jndjno indul uonejejsu oo e DuutM A ddng jewog ue uorneJedaJd EEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names 3 High speed input output functions v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted
201. x or less T zz o 3 7 0 15 ae 6 8mm 0 27 T Terminal co or less Ze e When two wires are connected to one terminal o 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 or less 6 0mm 0 24 or more o 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 T Terminal or less 3 6 0mm 0 24 or more A Terminal Crimp CO UF screw terminal uonejejsu oo 3 5 E 5 a 149 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 2 Input output connectors FX2N input output extension blocks 150 The input output connectors of FX2N Series input output extension blocks connector type and special function units blocks conform to MIL C 83503 Prepare the input output cables referring to the following tables Applicable products Classification Model names Input output extension blocks FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 16EYT C Special function units blocks FX3U 20SSC H FX2N 10PG FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM Preparation of input output connectors 1 Compliant connectors commercially available connectors Use 20 pin 1 key sockets conforming to MIL C 83503 In advance make sure that no interference is caused with peripheral parts such as the connector cover 2 Input output cables our options Input output cables with attached connectors are available A 20 pin connector is fitted FX 16E 500CAB S 5m 10 4 General purpose input output cabl
202. xr xe xe x X3 X2 X1 X Exe Side B X050 to X057 Side A X040 to X047 302 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input 11 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input 9g 16 7 1 Product specifications N The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapter S Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 13 Product type FX2N extension block lt s Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit Sc cS D 2 Weight and Other specifications Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL MASS Weight 0 2 kg 0 44lbs 1 4 The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 358 Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number x 2 e The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 33 amp 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 9 Input points 8 points Hoz 2 CD c Vertical terminal block M3 screws For a detailed description of wiring refer to S29 Connection unit i l 3 5S the input line connection diagram of the main unit EE Input type AC input g Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC Input signal current 6 2mA 110V AC 60Hz 4 7mA 100V AC 50Hz a T App
203. xt X3 X5 x7 X1 X8 X5 X7 FX2N A8ER ES UL vo v2 TY4 Ye TYo Y2 TY4 Y6 Yo onal Y1 Y3 ow YS Y7 Eo Y1 3 pow Y Y7 YA Y3 V5 FX2N A8ER DS i S S OV XO X2 X4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 O 24V X1IX3 Xo xz X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N 48ER DS YOj Y2 Y4jY6 YO Y2 YA4 YO YO Y2 YA YG coms coma Y1 Y3 cows 268 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS LLL IL LL L LLL LLL LL A LL Z LLLA 15 4 FX2n 32ET ESS UL FX2n 48ET ESS UL FX2n 48ET DSS 9m 15 4 4 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 N For external wiring refer to the following chapters 2 Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring z Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring amp 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 1 3 ie P F r S 2 Input specifications for sink input common and source input common Ss c da Item FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS cg Number of input points 16 points 24 points P Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink source 1 4 Input signa
204. 0 yoojg jeutua 249 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 2 Operation and check by GX developer 1 Connect the personal computer and the PLC 2 Execute the PLC diagnosis Click Diagnostics PLC diagnostics on the tool menu and the diagnosis of PLC will start 2 MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project 3 LOMEdit made MAIN 1 Step T Project Edit Find Replace Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help C ca a e amp Bs E 5 Program Sf B x PLO diagnostics MELSEC NETL TAH digenostics Ethernet Glaenostics Wein eene idet syetem monitor nline madue chance Device comment H Parameter B Device memory 3 Check the results of diagnosis Display the following window to check the errors Example of error display screen PL diagnostics i X PLG panel LED status Monitor start stop atat mantar Display of RUN conditions of EN Stop monitor LEDs on FX T Help PLC error The help function of GX Developer opens and you can check the details of the error code Error indication Current error 1 2004 12 The PLC error is displayed i 6617 Ladder error 18 PLO diagnostics X P
205. 0 RUN monitor D103 nsr ovs rast ve DBCD D100Z0 D108 C Du oss M8000 Program that converts the 5 digit numeric value to ASCII code Converts the BCD code saved at D109 D108 to ASCII code which s saved at the D111 to D115 M8000 lower order bytes il MOV D11 Adds space data nOA Sein MCI ear ee Zero suppress program aaa Replaces 0 H30 with a space 60 20H oro ois reo or hov nao ors z Continued on next page 396 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 23 User Message Display Function FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Continued from previous page SIOJUNOD d peedS uDIE a3 MUL D111 H100 D120 ADD D120 D110 D130 D113 H100 D121 Program comprising 6 characters with space added ADD D121 D1121D131 e Target D140 to D142 e Production D150 to D152 e Remaining D160 to D162 _ N BuutM 1ndino D115 D122 H100 D114 D122 D132 JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOUEA mh M8000 BMOV D130 Di40Zi K3 RUN monitor SRET END Y uny so X Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N pal Mmod ndjnopndu OY sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO J wn pen o lt O c D 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 397 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Ma
206. 0 times of the load voltage a Oo go Forward current Load current or more zia qu e e Fo gt Interlock 8 8 C Forward E For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right Terminal block limit Interlock Reverse PLC output limit element 423 I pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo J o o o m O Q e D FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 9 FX 16EYS TB 20 9 FX 16EYS TB The FX 16EYS TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction interruption positioning DVIT instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV
207. 01 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 1 7 3 Interlock com For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where Interlock Forward limit ss a hazardous condition could result if switched ON PLC output 2s simultaneously an external interlock should be provided contact S for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to PLC output ES NOS the right Son oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase x manner Bad a uoisuo Good C o nen o lt O Q D 419 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 5 Product life of relay output contacts 420 The standard life of the contact used for conductive AC loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 times at 35 VA The following table shows the approximate life of the relay based on the results of our life test Test conditions 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Example of applicable loads Load Capacity Sene Mis Magnetic switch manufactured by our company asya 0 35 A1 100V AC S K10 to S K150 0 17 A 200V AC S N10 to S K35 0 8 A 100V AC 80VA 1 000 000 times S K180 to S K400 0 4 A 200V AC 1 2 A 100V AC 120VA 0 6 A 200V AC Even under the above conditions the life of a relay contact could be shortened dramatically by shutting off a rush current ove
208. 09R622 Describes operation details of FX Configurator FP Configuration Software IAS product llConnector conversion Supolied Procedures for handling the conversion pp FX3U CNV BD function expansion board for connectors for with JY997D13601 pe Installation Manual connecting communication and analog product special adapters Battery maintenance option Supplied with ee ey JY997D14101 Battery life and handling procedures product Hardware Manual Display module Supple FX3U 7DM Procedures for mounting and handling the with i JY997D17101 User s Manual display module product Display module holder Suppliea FX3U 7DM HLD Procedures for mounting and handling the with JY997D15401 product User s Manual display module holder MMemorry cassette Supplied Memorry cassette Specifications and operating procedures of with FX3u FLROM 16 64 64L JY997D12801 P P g P the memory cassette product Hardware Manual MExtension power supply unit Supp Hee FX3U 1PSU 5V Specifications and operating procedures of with JY997D22501 i l product Installation Manual the extension power supply unit 27 uononpoJju pue s n d MJ SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uonenBijuo N SON HUN SON nd no ndu uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu
209. 0MT LIS FX3u 128MT ES E 5 SES e sd of oupi 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points Fixed terminal Connecting type block Removable terminal block M3 screw 6 M3 screw 9 e Output type form Transistor sink output gu o External power 5 to 30V DC S supply 0 5A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value T l For details on the common terminal for each model zz ob refer to the terminal block layout 22 Max load Pe 1 output point common terminal 0 5 A or less Se e 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less S e e 8 output points common terminal 1 6 A or less Inductive 12W 24V DC load uonejejsu oo S Ped TEU eaa 0 1 mA or less 30V DC current ON voltage 1 5 V or less Min load OFF SON Y000 to Y002 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC 9 Response Y 003 or more 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24V DC suv oOg time ON OFF Y 000 to Y002 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC 238 Y003 or more 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24V DC me Circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation RE e IRR DUE LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven 1 0 operation Bui 1ndu 53 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 4 Transistor output sink specifications Item FX3U 16MT LIS FXsu 32MT LIS FX3
210. 100 ms accumulating type T250 to T255 6 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec ams T256 to T511 256 points 0 001 to 32 767 sec CICER TER EN CO to C99 100 points Counting from 0 to 32 767 i re The retentive status can be changed by NOrEmEnT tor aS 7 arameter settings 16 bits changeable C100 to C199 100 points P g Counter Both directions for general 32 bits C200 to C219 20 points ci a INS to changeable AE s 3 ESO The retentive status can be changed by ene MENTIOrSSEPINg arameter settings 32 bits changeable C220 to C234 15 points P g 1 phase 1 count input in both directions 32 C235 to C245 Counting from 2 147 483 648 to bits changeable Up to 8 2 147 483 647 For keeping 1 phase 2 count input points can The retentive status can be changed by High speed in both directions 32 C246 to C250 be used in parameter settings counter bits changeable range from For the high speed C235 to counter operating 2 phase 2 count input C255 frequency refer to the table in both directions 32 C251 to C255 shown in the next page bits changeable 56 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications dh Item Performance O EN LL D Do to D199 200 points changeable The retentive status can be changed by e i i arameter settings EN LL D200 to D511 312p
211. 11 Correspond Number and Content of register ing special name device PLC Status Default value is shown on the right in 1ms steps D 8000 Writes from system ROM at power Watchdog timer ON i g Value overwritten by program is valid after END or WDT instruction execution BCD converted D 8001 EXE value system version i FX3U FX3UC FX2N FX2NC Series e 2 2K steps e 4 4K steps D 8002 8 8K steps D8102 Memory capacity If 16K steps or more K8 is written to D8002 and 16 or 64 is written to D8102 D 8003 Type of cassette or ON OFF status Moor dnd of memory protect switch is DE stored lelole BCD converted D 8004 value Mana Error number M 8060 to 8068 when M8004 is ON BCD converted D 8005 al value Baltenvoltadl in units of 0 1V M8005 Y g Battery voltage present value Example 3 0V abate Pola an Writes from system ROM at power M8006 voltage detection ON level D 8007 Operation frequency of M8007 is Momentary power stored M8007 failure count Cleared at power off D 8008 Power failure nce ower supply type M8008 detection P PPY typ D18009 a one C eu i ee teen power units in which 24V DC has MODUS failed 1 D8003 becomes the undermentioned content Present value Type of memory Protect switch 02H Flash memory cassette OFF OAH Flash memory cassette ON 10H Built in memory in PLC 446 Correspond ing special device Number and C
212. 14 6 for error codes and corrective actions Refer to Subsection 14 5 3 for watchdog timer error corrective actions If no program error is active There may be a problem with the PLC s memory content Perform the following procedure 1 Use the programming tool to perform a program memory all clear 2 Rewrite the program 3 Stop the PLC turn the power ON display the PLC Status 1 3 screen and check to refer to if the Fatal error occurred message appears Ifthe Fatal error occurred message appears perform the corrective action described at item 2 below Ifthe Fatal error occurred message does not appear set the PLC to a RUN state then check again if the message appears If the message appears a watchdog timer error has probably occurred In this case the program should be re examined Refer to Subsection 14 5 3 for watchdog timer error corrective actions If the Fatal error occurred message still appears after performing the corrective actions described in item 1 above perform the following procedure to check for symptom changes Turn the power OFF and disconnect all extension devices extension connectors extension cables expansion board connectors and CC Link LT dedicated flat cable Turn the power ON again at the main unit display the PLC Status 1 3 screen again and check if the Fatal error occurred message appears 1 Ifthe Fatal error occurred message appears The main unit hardware m
213. 2 YOO1 Zero return direction specification M 8353 Y001 Forward limit M 8354 YOO 1 Reverse limit M 8355 Y001 DOG signal logic reverse 4 Y001 Zero point signal logic M 8356 reverse 4 Y001 Interrupt signal logic M 8357 reverse Y0OO 1 Positioning instruction poss activation M 8359 Y001 Pulse output stop command Y002 Pulse output monitor bi ie ON BUSY OFF READY M 8361 Y002 Clear signal output function enable M 8362 YOO2 Zero return direction specification M 8363 Y002 Forward limit M 8364 Y002 Reverse limit M 8365 Y002 DOG signal logic reverse Y002 Zero point signal logic M 8366 reverse I Y 002 Interrupt signal logic 1 MOROL reverse Y002 Positioning instruction M309 activation M 8369 1 Y002 Pulse output stop command Y 003 Pulse output monitor 2 eee ON BUSY OFF READY Vus Y 003 Clear signal output function 1 2 M enable 4 Y003 Zero return direction 1 2 NOSE specification M 8373 Y003 Forward limit M 8374 Y003 Reverse limit M 8375 1 2 Y003 DOG signal logic reverse as Y 003 Zero point signal logic 1 2 NL BaCO reverse ita Y003 Interrupt signal logic 1 2 l RAA reverse Y 003 Positioning instruction 2 ieee activation M 837912 Y003 Pulse output stop command 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 2 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP units are connected to an FX3U PLC 444 Number and name A Operation of Special De
214. 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product POWERCO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 326 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 7 FX2N 4DA External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product POWERCO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 9 0 36 4 0 16 52 17 Terminal Layout 18 1 8 FX2N 4AD PT External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block M3 screws FXar4AD PT The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 4 0 16 9 0 36 55 2 17 87 3 43 Terminal Layout
215. 2 times including the number of times of use of o T HSCT instruction 5 x HSZ HSCT Only once oo 1 When HSZ or HSCT instruction is used the maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of all software counters becomes limited For the maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of software counters refer to Section 11 9 suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 191 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 8 Conditions for Hardware Counter to be Handled as Software Counter 11 8 Conditions for Hardware Counter to be Handled as Software Counter The high speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters Some hardware counters are handled as software counters depending on the operating conditions In this case use hardware counters within the range of maximum response frequency and total frequency determined for software counters 11 8 1 Conditions under which counters are handled as software counters The hardware counters can perform counting with the hardware of FX3U regardless of the overall frequency However under the following conditions they are handled as software counters When using them in the condition below the maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of the counters are considered to be the same as those of other software count
216. 24V terminals 165 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input 10 2 2 Handling of 24V DC input 166 1 Input terminals Sink input When a no voltage contact or NPN open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the OV terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the input display LED lights Source input When a no voltage contact or PNP open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the 24V terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the input display LED lights Display module option When the display module is mounted the ON OFF status can be checked on the LCD display RUN terminal setting X000 to X017 up to the largest input number in the main unit 1 of the main unit can be used as RUN input terminals by setting parameters 1 The FX3U 16ML I main unit input range is X000 to X007 For the functions of the RUN terminals refer to Subsection 14 2 1 Input impedance Input circuit Function of input circuit The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler and the second circuit is provided with a C R filter The C R filter is designed to prevent malfunctions caused by chattering of the input contact and noise from
217. 29 SJOJUhOO peeds uDIH m NO BuutM 1ndjno JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N E U o D CD c xe E lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 13 FX2N 1HC External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 9 0 36 4 0 16 55 2 17 Terminal Layout 18 1 14 FX3U 20SSC H External Dimensions Saat moning ieies Unitmm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs elnstallation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in a PN width or screws ka Bla Accessories Label for indication of special Jeelg unit block number os 2 Dust Proof sheet SEP FX2NC 100MPCB Power a x supply cabl
218. 2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT and FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Output indicator lamps LED lamps 2 E o oca ocm o O0000000 FXw 16EYT C o c Output indicator lamps LED lamps amp g ooa omo 00000000 16 11 3 External dimensions Without Connector type Rear line extension connector Ys 6 6 Y5 Terminal arrangement COM FX2N 8EYT 2 04 5 mounting holes FX2N 8EY T CD POWER oTo 12 3 OOOO 4567 OOOO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX2N 16EYT 2 04 5 mounting holes 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 316 Unit mm inches Unit mm inches FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT and FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output FX2N 16EYT C 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 40 1 58 How to connect connector FX2n 16EYT C Connection face of connector The polarity is shown in the following table 901 9 6 914194 2l f 2o Pie ord 12 Side B is for the higher input numbers and side A is for the lower input numbers
219. 3 External aImelislOLiS avser ae oet ol dabei odii oa D ai ide red Lu Suae see as s sas c Rea roca idus 304 16 8 FX2N 8bEYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 305 ues PROGUUCHS DECINICAUON RERO TUNES T em 305 16 8 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ccccceecccecseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeseaeeeeeaaas 306 16 8 3 External dimensions ccccccccseeccseeccseeccseeccuceccucecsucecsueceusessusessueessueecsueessueesaueessuesasensaueessaaes 307 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output sess 308 16 91 Produc ES DECINGAUONS 3 eer rarrbeuoca ct eis cem Ue Seded statue tot LA iater 308 16 9 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ccccceeccceeseeeeeeceeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaas 309 16 923 Exterrnabl aimelisloriS east cosutascub ious peta eu ase d VN D uias aoc me enna Ig se sd do buc euo o cbe a aod adii ed 310 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output sees 311 16 101 ProductspeciHE allons a do veoh crest doe ace secs ede cepta n a leeds pedo eesp cates eae edd ud nb deb vin Soon coded 311 16 10 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent cccccececcssseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeesseeeeeeseaeeeeeas 312 16 10 3 Ext malk
220. 3 OP Phase A Phase B 1 1 1 1 Up counting 1 1 1 1 1 Phase A C254 aa Phase B 1 1 1 1 Down counting C255 202 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition o 1 12 Output Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS DESIGN PRECAUTIONS WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC 2 When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outpu
221. 3U FX Series terminal blocks can be eFX3U AHSX ADP eFX3U 80MR DS eFX3U 80MT DS S connected to connector type units oS eFX3U 2HSY ADP as 34 Extension cables 3H Connector conversion adapter zi gt FXoN 30EC FX2N CNV BC FXON 65EC 7 SSSSSSSSSSESSSSSII 000000000000000 E O LJISISSIBIBISI BISISIBISISIBIBISTO 2 5 ZS 1 24 Input output powered C u c9 dengue tU Ls d extension units B Special function blocks 8 inputioutput o E eFX3U 4AD eFX3U 20SSC H FXoN 232lF 8 eFX2N A8ER ES UL eFX3U ADA eF X2N 48ER UA1 UL eFX2N 1HC eF X2N 32ER eFX2N 2AD eFX2N 1PG E eF X2N 48ER eFX2N 2DA eF X2N 10P eF X2N 32CCL eFX2N A8ER DS eFX2N AAD eFX2N 16CCL M eF X2N 48ER D eFX2N 4AD TC f Special function units eFX2N 64CL M eFX2N 32ES eFX2N AAD PT eFX2N 16LNK M 9 F X2N 48ES sEX2N ADA eFX2N 32ASI M eFX2N 5 2 9o EXON ABET ESS UL SEXNBAD i SEX2N 20GM Tenor 38 eFX2N 32ET enn eFX2N 1RM E SET co 8i eFX2N 48ET eFXON 3A 5S eFX2N 48ET DSS 25 eFX2N A8ET D B Extension power supply unit eFX3U 1PSU 5V O Power supply unit The configuration is remote I O for CC Link N Remote I O FX Series terminal block eFX2N 20PSU BEN p Bui 1ndu 35 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual
222. 4T ve cow Y 1 V3 Eo YS Y7 ovs Y1 YS Eo YS Y FX2N 48ER p cou x0 x2 x4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 XO X2 X4 x6 PL N 24 X14 x3 X5 x7 X41 X3 X51 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N 48ER YO Y2 Y4 Y6 YO Y2 Y4 Y6 YO Y2 Y4 YO cous coma Y1 Y3 cows FX2N 48ER D p com x0 X2 X4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 O 24 x1 x3 X5 x7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 XT FX2N 48ER D vol y2 Tva ve Tvo v2 TY4 Ye vo v2 con Y1 Y3 pow Y8 Y7 Eoi V7 Y3 Eon YS Y7 Y FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D 15 6 FX2n 32ET FX2n 48ET FX2n 48ET D T 15 6 1 Product specifications NO The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 O For external wiring refer to the following chapters 8 Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring A Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications 1 3 For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 S 2 Input specifications sink input common cg Item FX2N 32bET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D Number of input points 16 points 24 points I Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw pey Inpu
223. 5 8 1 drole elei E NUT 280 15 0 2 Externa dimensi ONS sua isctesiciaesced acci at n qu rac oe fos die EHE etu Leo sew bui E cese tme Cere ora 281 19 0 3 WO iwnia cibis OU iM UR 282 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks 283 16 T TULISSE ccm cC RE 284 TOi Frodi t TV DG RT Hr IRR 284 VG As Me ISU OL DEOQUUGIS aig iuc mie hg Ae ie aha ied te aR hte tO ets 285 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output cc eeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeens 287 162241 Produc speolliCaliOliSaaiustolani tbe Petru isti beta e e Sano issus ume o Ee dee peas cs ulus 287 16 2 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ccccceecccecsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeesaeeeesaaas 288 16 2 3 Extemak dimensions 5 5 2 25 aot cond iod uev ee ead coat eee Lc Lex DL ED edges 289 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output eeeeesssessseseeeeeennnnenene enn 290 16 9 1 Product SDecIHCaltIOTS scc in mcs io ier a a ees dedd doute lua ioca cou seco eos ee ee 290 16 3 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ccccceccceccsseeeeeceaeeeseseeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeesseeeeesaaas 291 16 33 EX VSIA CITC TAS IONS ess OE P 292 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 293 16 4 1 Product SDecIIICallO iS sues iei aei sene Do rut D dcdce nti uei eio ma Drac tatu eR asp iu SU Dau e an 293 16 4 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement
224. 5 o o COM5 YA o o Y5 ST1 o of ST2 18 1 18 FX2N 20GM External Dimensions Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width only MITSUBISHI MELSE FXon 20GM eAccessories EX2NC 100MPCB power cable FX2Nc 100BPCB crossover power cable FX2N GM 5EC extension cable label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product El 86 3 39 Terminal block Connector Terminal Layout CON1 Y axis CON2 Xaxis X axis Y axis YOO o o X00 START o START SVRDY o SVEND SVRDY o SVEND YO1 o o X01 STOP o STOP COM2 o0 COM2 COM6 o0 COM6 Y02 o of X02 ZRN o o ZRN CLR o of PGO CLR o of PGO Y03 o of X03 FWD o of FWD COM3 o o COM4 COM7 o o COM8 Y04 o of X04 RVS o od RVS O O e O O Notch YO5 o oM X05 DOG o oY DOG FPlo o4 RP FPlo o4 RP YOG o o X06 LSF o of LSF VIN o of VIN VINo of VIN YO7 o of X07 LSR o of LSR VIN o of VIN VIN o o VIN COM1 o oO COM1 COM1 o o CcoM1 CcoM5 o of COM5 COM9 o o COM9 Oo o O O e ST1 o of ST2 ST3 o of STA 332 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 19 FX2N 1RM E SET External Dimensions Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 5kg 1 1 Ibs 2 4 5 mounting holes Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories FX2N RS 5CAB signal cable
225. 6 Examples of external wiring sink input DC power supply type Sink and source input type Main unit Fuse 4 a p E NN Class D i e LL grounding ubi pc 0V EN xn od AV 1 x4 Input 5VIOV 24V impedance Three wire sensor Sink and source input type TWo wire proximity Sensor grounding VES Input terminal 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 5V OV 24V 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required Input terminal 3 In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S S terminal and the terminal of the main unit Special function block 4 Do not connect with OV and Class D 24V terminals grounding 5V IOV 24V 172 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Use of input output extension units blocks of sink input type Main unit SES ie Sink and source 4a input type mE I EM ES N AY Input impedance a 5V OV 24V terminal Input extension block Sink input type aH DH og 5V OV 24V Input terminal Input extension block Input terminal Special function bloc
226. 67 D8067 Auto tuning is finished PID operation is started e When auto tuning was started the difference between the measured value and the target 6750 Step response method value was 150 or less SV PV lt 150 Improper auto tuning result When auto tuning was started the difference between the measured value and the target value was 1 3 or more e Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started The operation direction estimated from the measured value at the start of auto tuning was 6751 SIEP n P MANO different from the actual operation direction of the Auto tuning operation direction mismatch l l output during auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto tuning and the measured value and then execute auto tuning again Auto tuning is finished PID operation is not started Because the set value was fluctuated during auto tuning auto tuning was not executed correctly 6752 SIEP Tesponse MENONA Set the sampling time to a value larger than the Improper auto tuning operation output change cycle or set a larger value for the input filter constant After changing the setting execute auto tuning again lt Limit cycle method gt 6753 Abnormal output set value for auto tuning lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is Continues ULV u
227. 7 D 8038 D 8039 Constant scan duration Stepladder and Annunciator D 8040 ON state 1 D 8041 ON state 2 D 8042 ON state 3 D 8043 ON state 4 D 8044 ON state 5 D 8045 ON state 6 D 8046 ON state T D 8047 ON state 8 D 8048 D 8049 On state minimum number Content of register Not used Default 0 ms in 1 ms steps Writes from system ROM at power ON Can be overwritten by program number number number The smallest number out of active state ranging from SO to S899 and number S1000 to S4095 is stored in D8040 and the second smallest state number is stored in D8041 Active state numbers are then sequentially stored in registers up to D8047 Max 8 points number number number number Not used When M8049 is ON the smallest number out of active annunciator relay ranging from S900 to S999 is stored in D8049 D8050 t 108050 1 Executed at END instruction Correspond ing special device M8039 M8047 M8049 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and i i l Content of register ing special name device Error Detection If the unit or block corresponding to a programmed I O number is not actually loaded M8060 is set to ON and the first device number of the erroneous block is written to D8060 D 8060 Example If X020 is unconnec
228. 8 Fax 7 3832 119598 e mail info eltechsystems ru Elektrostyle Poslannikov Per 9 Str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 542 4323 Fax 7 095 956 7526 e mail info estl ru Elektrostyle RUSSIA Krasnij Prospekt 220 1 Office No 212 RU 630049 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 106618 Fax 7 3832 106626 e mail infoGestl ru ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8A Off 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mail mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra Sverdlova 11A RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 532745 Fax 4 7 34 32 532745 e mail elektra etel ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9 Str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 790 7210 Fax 7 095 790 7212 e mail info privod ru AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi amp cbi co za RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC NDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 7650 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation de www mitsubishi automation com PLC 04 06 Printed in Germany
229. 9 21 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format 19 21 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format The procedure for specifying a hexadecimal display format for current values which display at the Monitor Test menu explained below The display format is specified by the system information s system signal 2 MLILI 5 ON OFF status The display formats which correspond to the ON and OFF statuses are shown in Subsection 18 21 1 below The display format should either be fixed as decimal or hexadecimal Switching between the two should be possible by an external operation Refer to Section 19 18 for system information setting 19 21 1 System information specifying a hexadecimal current value display format 1 System signal 1 System signal 1 is unrelated to this function 2 System signal 2 System Setting Display l Timer T current value counter C current value data register D 16 bit 32 bit extended register R 16 bit 32 bit and extended file register MAA 5 OFF ER 16 bit 32 bit 19 21 2 Program example 1 specifying a hexadecimal data display format The following program example specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values and setting values which display at the Monitor Test screen In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56 M8002 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D90 Initia
230. 9 Calculation of Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 11 9 1 Response frequencies of hardware counters The maximum response frequencies of the hardware counters are shown in the following table Depending on the working conditions the maximum response frequencies of hardware counters are the same as those of the software counters and limitations on overall frequency are set up For the conditions under which the hardware counters are handled as software counters refer to the previous page Max response frequency C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 100kHz Counter type Counter Nos 1 phase 1 count input C244 OP C245 OP 10kHz 200kHz 1 phase 2 count input C246 C248 OP 100kHz 1 edge count SOKHz 100kHz 2 phase 2 count C251 C253 input 4 4 edge count count L 100kHz 11 9 2 Response frequencies and overall frequency of software counters The maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of software counters are shown below When HSZ or HSCT instruction is used in the program limitations are put on the maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of all software counters regardless of the instruction operand When examining the system or creating the program use the counters within the maximum response frequency and overall frequency ranges suitable to the conditions in consideration of the limitations 1 When FX3u Series special function units blocks and analog special adapters are not used Examp
231. 9 Program MOdIlIGALION TUNCUON eie tutte ee Ae eel ee ee Lote eee et oe 244 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection cccccecccceecceeeece ceca eeseeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeseeeeseeessueeseeesaees 245 14 4 1 Procedures for checking model name ccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeecaeeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeseeseeesaaas 245 14 4 2 Periodic inspection battery life etc nnns 245 14 4 3 Maintenance product life of relay contacts essssessssseseseeeeneennee een 246 14 4 4 Procedures for replacing battery ccccccccsececcceesecececeeseeecsuseeeceeececsseaseeessesesesesseesessensesessas 246 14 5 Troubleshooting With EEDS o Ere E Ot uI PERO DeL lade awe 247 14 5 1 POWER LED on flaShing Off cccccccccccceeececeeececeeeceseeeceeseeceeseeeeeseueeessueeeseeeeseeeeesseeeenaaes 247 1452 BAIT CED TONOM de ome cov ras weston oe ume ose edes busco ive ee eee era 247 14 5 3 ERROR LED on flashing off lsseesessessssesssseeeeneenen nennen nnnm nennen nnns 248 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes cccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 249 14 6 1 Operation and check on display module FX3U 7DM esseeseeseeeennnenenn nn 249 14 6 2 Operation and check by GX developer sseessssssssssesseeneeneeneennenn nennen nenas 250 14 6 3 FREDIESEMIALION Ol GITOISua eds Teu c umo ects eae fett uetus deti as tud uni ub tate Ret ce
232. A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 321 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 17 FX3U TPSU SV Extension Power Supply Unit User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 1 Introduction re 17 FX3u 1PSU 5V Extension Power Supply Unit DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC 2 When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations
233. ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP and FX3U 4AD PT ADP units is counted from the main unit side M 8300 to M 8303 Not used Turns ON when the multiplication or division result is 0 Not used 2 Turns ON when the division result M 8306 arry overflows M 8304 Zero M 8305 M 8307 to M 8315 Not used 2 Supported in Ver 2 30 or later Unconnected 1 O Designation Error and flag M 8316 Unconnected I O designation error M 8317 Not used BFM initialization failure ON when a FROM TO error has occurred in a special function block unit as specified in the BFM initialization function at changing M 8318 PLC from STOP to RUN When M8318 turns ON the unit number in which the error has occurred is stored in D8318 and the BFM number D8319 M 8319 to M 8327 Not used is stored in D8316 D8317 D8318 D8319 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 M 8329 M 8328 Instruction non execution Instruction execution abnormal end 3 If the I O device numbers are unavailable M8316 turns ON when its directly designated to device numbers including LD AND OR and OUT instructions or indirectly designated by index Number and Correspond Operation and function ing special name device Timing Clock and Positioning M 8330 DUTY FNC186 instruction D8330 Timing clock out
234. Art no 168590 01 02 2006 JY997D16501 Version B MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC FX Series Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual Hardware FX3U 5 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC NDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION GHEE Scy Precautions IIIS Read these precautions before use Before installing operating maintenance or inspecting this product thoroughly read and understand this manual and the associated manuals Also pay careful attention to handle the module properly and safety This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories KPDANGER and ACAUTION DAN ER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in G death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in CAUTION medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Depending on circumstances procedures indicated by may also be linked to serious results In any case it is important to follow the directions for usage otore this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER NE Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an int
235. C Power supply 24V DC sink source input transistor source output gt S input and output eR UA1 AC Power supply 100V AC input relay output o points eR DS DC Power supply 24V DC sink source input relay output Input output extension T DSS DC Power supply 24V DC sink source input transistor source output eR D DC Power supply 24V DC sink input relay output 4 eT D DC Power supply 24V DC sink input transistor sink output v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable Number of input output points CE Total number of points suoneouioedgs Output type connection form terminal block Number of Number of Model name Marine EMC LVD cUL Qi AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input O U c i 2 6 AC power supply common to 100V AC sink and source input AC power supply un for 24V DC sink input E 3 3 ie ren rar 7 DIOR ole 7 1 T common to 24V DC sink and source input d a mx m ox u c c B DC power supply a for 24V DC sink input x 1 FX2N 48ER DS and FX2N 48ET DSS comply to UL standard 9 2 For details refer to catalogs or contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric Corporation branch office zu For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 288 lt 5 p Bui 1ndu 37 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards Use
236. C output rotation element 214 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 3 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads o When an inductive load is connected connect a diode for commutation in parallel with the load as 232 necessary BS e The diode for commutation must comply with the following specifications Item Guide Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Forward current Load current or more External Wiring of Sink Output Type BuutM 1ndino Inductive load 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA External Wiring of Source Output Type I Inductive load Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 215 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 3 5 Example of external wiring 1 Transistor output sink Main unit transistor output sink AC power supply 100 to 240V Breaker Output extension block transistor output sink Input output powered extension unit transistor output sink
237. CC Link Ethernet C24 module modu PC side I F Serial setting 0p lt lt o D 3 PC side I F Serial setting uonenBijuo RS 232 include FX USB AW FX3U USB BD Cancel include FX USB Aw FX3U USB BD Cancel a C USB GOT transparent mode T Dther station N COM port COM 1 7 No specification Ot Time out Sec 10 Transmission speed 115 2Kbps Z5 O o c Network e route CO C24 NET 10 H NET II CC Link Ethernet 2 5 SS na Select USB GOT z amp transparent mode D Co esistence m m FE E am EE B TEL F amp CPU network route C24 MET 10 H NET I CC Link Ethernet OK Accessing host station Close uonejejsu oo 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 69 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 4 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 5 4 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series When monitoring circuits device registration etc in an FX3U PLC from GX Developer Ver 8 13P or later using the transparent 2 port function in the GOT F900 Series make sure to execute the following setting If the following setting is not provided monitoring cannot be executed normally GX Developer GX Developer Ver 8 12N or earlier Ver 8 13P or later
238. CONSUMPTION cece cecceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 83 6 5 1 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added AC Power Type 84 6 5 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption AC Power Type ccccccsecceseeceeceeeesaeeessueeesaseesaaeees 85 6 5 3 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added DC Power Type 88 6 5 4 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption DC Power Type ccccecseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeaseees 89 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 92 6 6 1 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are addedQ sssss 92 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption 95 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V eesssseesseseennem 97 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 100 OGS DAT IANS oo as alae oan Sos eet A eee cere SU eaten Eu Aa anu ree 101 6 8 2 B Expansion boards seessssssessssessesenenenn nnne nnne nnne nnne nnn nnn nnns 102 6 6 9 IG Special Ada DISS suu acus este custos ieu a eaa e od dou 102 6 8 4 D Input output powered extension units blocks
239. Calculate the number of remote I O points on the network Since this system uses CC Link calculate the number of the remote I O stations Max number of Input output on network Calculation result mo Louw BOIS Number of CC Link remote I O stations x 32 points o 32 points 224 points e FX2N 16CCL M up to 7 stations FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification dh 3 Calculate the total number of input output occupied points number of input output points S a Calculation Max number of S Total number of input output points DEUS UI IIS 5 usd B ApULGUUL Input output on network occupied points jx 8 ote lt 384 points 674 yy 176 points 32 points 208 points 28 z o Total obtained in Step 1 Total obtained in Step 2 a e 6 Determine whether the devices can be added to the main unit jnpold CY Calculate the current by the following formula to confirm whether the extension devices selected in otep 2 can be connected uononpoJju 1 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply ci PUEDES Current consumption Calculation result Total of current consumed by Main unit extension devices _ 500mA 370mA i30mA 2 Oma FO 2 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 24V DC power supply 24V DC service power supply The
240. Cassette cassette transfer screen Cassette RAM To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time JI display press ESC Cassette RAM Logo cg d V Cassette RAM 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette RAM item then press OK to display the screen shown to the right Cassette gt RAM To cancel the operation and return to the memory cassette transfer Read screen press ESC OK gt Execute ESC 5 Cancel 3 Press OK to begin the transfer Or press ESC to cancel the operation Cassette gt RAM Button Operation Description Read ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the memory Please wait cassette transfer screen Disabled Disabled OK Executes the transfer e Caution Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being transferred by a memory cassette transfer menu operation doing so may destroy the program and disorder the PLC 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the memory cassette transfer screen e Result and measures to take The transfer is not executed if a PLC is running message appears PLC is running In this case set the PLC to the STOP state then perform the step 3 operation described above The transfer is not executed if a Transfer failed message appears Cassette gt RAM In this case turn the power off check the memory cassette Read connection then
241. Chapter 16 etc Special function blocks FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA FX3U 20SSC H Contents are added to product introduction Chapter 3 examination of system configuration Chapter 6 installation in enclosure Chapter 8 other extension devices Chapter 18 etc Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V Contents are added to product introduction Chapter 3 examination of system configuration Chapter 6 installation in enclosure Chapter 8 example of power supply wiring Chapter 9 etc Chapter 17 added for Extension power supply unit Ver 2 30 is supported Two types of instructions are added Appendix B 1 For the details of instructions refer to the programming manual Special auxiliary relays and special data registers are added Appendix A Cautions on write during RUN are added Subsection 5 2 4 The applicability of other peripheral equipment is added Subsection 5 5 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 e mail megfamail meg mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 155 68 56 85 e mail factory automation fra mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IRELAND EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info me
242. Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 3 Installation of main unit 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 6 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 8 6 4 Mount the expansion board and special adapters on the main unit before installing the unit in the enclosure For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 8 7 2 8 7 3 and 9 5 2 Make mounting holes in the mounting sur face according to the external dimensions diagram Fit the main unit A in the right figure based on the holes and secure it with M4 screws B in the right figure The positions and number of screws depend on the product Refer to the external dimensions diagram For the external dimensions refer to Section 4 6 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function unit block 138 Make mounting holes in the mounting sur face according to the external dimensions diagram Push in the DIN rail mounting hook A in the right figure of the input output exten sion block If the DIN rail mounting hook is not pushed in the screw hole is covered and the block cannot be mounted For input output powered extension units 8 point type input output extension blocks and special extension units blocks this operation is unnecessary Fit the input output extension block B in the right figure based on the holes and secure it with M4 screws C in the right fig ure T
243. EICICSO 5 SSS eo 00000000008 Ooooooooooooooooo 2 MITSUBISHI So oaa mo c Power aL O oe o MELSEC FXoy 48ET 0799999589 60566556 ee TRANSISTOR uT 99990000 DWOLYL LYE bavi Lvs Ve ve VL La Dev LV VELL CY Ys Y7 Oo UUUUUUUUUUU 9693 693163169 63 1693169 6969169 6963169169 69 63 B 9 T Nr gh 2 3 G9 ee 9 G9 eS HSH CS ES 69 G3 ES KDHE CS gt 172 6 78 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 182 7 17 The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws 15 4 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ET ESS UL Cx TErspov XO X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 XG CC TNT Eavixi X8 x x7 X1 X3 X5 X7 vo v2 v4 ve TYo Y2 TY4 V6 SVO YATYSEVITYS Y7 EVA YA YSEVS YS T YT FX2N 48ET ESS UL Hr SS OV XO x2 x4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 Pe EN gAvjxi x3 x5 x xt X3 X5 x7 x1 X8 X5 X7 FX2N 48ET ESS UL vo v2 TY4 v6 TYo V2 v4 Ye vo Y2 Y4 V6 Va sva Y1 YapVi vs TV YA EV YS Y7 Y YS YS YT FX2N 48ET DSS i S S OV XO X2 X4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 XO X2 XA X6 OO 24V X1I X3 X5 x7 X1 X8 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N 48ET DSS vol v2 v4 v6 vo v2 TY4 ve vo svo v1 Ys evi Y8 Y Eva Y Y Va YS YT 271 SJOJUNOD peeds ubiIH 3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I eoueua ure N uny 1s9 O c D nN F o o gt Q peJewod jndino ndul
244. FX2N 20GM the extension cable FX2N GM 65EC can be used Fit the extension connector cover A in the right figure FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition o 5 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC 2 When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case 3 The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are t
245. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage
246. H0010 Write protection H0011 Read write protection H0012 All online operation protection A Advanced Function i D 8160 B E z D 8161 PB D 8162 B D 8163 E D 8164 Not used z D 8165 S D 8166 a D 8167 D 8168 C D 8169 inr E status by 2nd J 2 Access restriction status by 2nd keyword 3 a Present bits value status Read Write ing change n 73 Irl EE e 3 The accessibility is restricted depending on the keyword setting status 449 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Number and name N N Network setting D 8170 D 8171 D 8172 D 8173 D 8174 D 8175 D 8176 D 8177 D 8178 D 8179 D 8180 D 8181 Content of register Not used Station number Total number of slave stations Refresh range Station number setting Total slave station number setting Refresh range setting Retry count setting Comms time out setting Not used Index Register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 D 8182 D 8183 D 8184 D 8185 D 8186 D 8187 D 8188 D 8189 D 8190 D 8191 D 8192 D 8193 D 8194 D 8195 D 8196 D 8197 D 8198 D 8199 450 Value of Z1 register Value of V1 register Value of Z2 register Value of V2 register Value of Z3 register Value of V3 register Value of Z4 register Value of V4 register Value of Z5 register Value of V5 register Value of Z6 register
247. HI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES INTEHSIS SRL Bld Traian 23 1 MD 2060 Kishinev Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 e mail intehsis mdl net MOLDOVA Kazpromautomatics Ltd KAZAKHSTAN 2 Scladskaya Str KAZ 470046 Karaganda Phone 7 3212501150 Fax 7 3212501150 e mail info kpakz com TEHNIKON Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 BY 220030 Minsk Phone 375 0 17 210 4626 Fax 375 0 17 210 4626 BELARUS e mail tehnikon belsonet net Koning amp Hartman B V BELGIUM Researchpark Zellik Pontbeeklaan 43 BE 1731 Brussels Phone 432 0 2 467 17 51 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 e mail infoGkoningenhartman com AKNATHON BULGARIA Andrej Ljapchev Lbvd Pb 214 BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 97 44 058 Fax 359 0 2 97 44 06 1 e mail AutoCont CZECH REPUBLIC Control Systems s r o Nemocnicni 12 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 59 6152 111 Fax 420 59 6152 562 e mail consys autocont cz louis poulsen DENMARK industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 70 1015 35 Fax 45 0 43 95 95 91 e mail Ipiaelpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 7280 Fax 372 0 6 51 72 88 e mail utu utu ee Beijer Electronics OY Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 e mail infoG
248. In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 122 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Use the product in the environment within the generic specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or wind and rain If the product is used in such a place described electrical shock fire malfunctions damage or deterioration may be caused Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly thus avoiding failure or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM and terminal block DIN rail only Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block and FXoN FX2N Bik cilteneimectmounnr FX3U Series special extension block special adapter g Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to fix the function extension board with tapping screws for fixation Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Contact failures may cause malfunctions When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when the install
249. Input data Ch3 Output data Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 52 Measured temperature C D 8284 DE T times for BEL de times for oes Jotreden o o e e Dra WaR ne D 8286 nude d times for e Me times for D 8287 NU times for Sa we times for D 8288 Error status Error status Error status Error status D 8289 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K20 Model code K10 4th analog special adapter D 8290 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 D 8291 Input data Ch2 Output data Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8292 Input data Ch3 Output data Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 D 8293 Input data Ch4 Output data Ch4 Measured temperature Ch4 Measured temperature Ch4 Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for D 8296 Ch3 1 to 4095 Ch3 1 to 4095 Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for D 8268 Error statu D 8299 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K20 Model code K10 Number 454 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition o 1 Appendix B Instruction List B Instruction List B 1 Basic Instru
250. Instruc Sar Description tion Mechanical zero return instruction with DDAR DOG search function Instruction to read the current value ABS from our servo amplifier with absolute position ABS detecting function Positioning relative positioning to DRVI specify the movement from the current position Positioning absolute positioning to DRVA specify the target position based on the current value O Instruction to change the pulse train PLSV output frequency Positioning for fixed feed interruption DV drive Instruction for positioning based on TBL batch setting of positioning operation moving distance and speed 3 Display functions display module FX3U DM Display Module option can be incorporated in the PLC The display module can be mounted on the panel by using the display module holder option Monitor test function Devices can be monitored and tested by operating the buttons on the display module The button operations can be inhibited by the user program Message display function User messages can be displayed on the display module by the user program 2 Features and Part Names 2 1 Major Features Other functions On the display module you can set the time adjust the contrast and display the PLC version and error codes Communication and network functions The expansion board special adapter and special function block for each communication function can be connected K
251. J PERRE HERE 50 e Relay 30 PXw OMTES Transistor ain 7 i 6 I I 128 128 5 5 8 amp 4 PGU28MTES Transistor ink 7 DC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input wf 8 5 JjPUMRDS Reay i amp 8 8 Pms Transistor Sink X X X X X 5 ao FeU BOMTIDSS__ Transistor souree 7 O 7 For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 36 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names b 3 1 2 B input output powered extension units g The input output powered extension unit incorporates a power supply circuit and input and output terminals Z B It is designed to add input and output terminals 2 It can supply power to extension devices connected on the downstream side 2 EX OO E LIZLI j T Series nam LL Classification 1 None Not compliant with standard ze UL Compliant with standard Bo Power supply Input output type Connection on terminal block eR AC Power supply 24V DC sink input relay output eS AC Power supply 24V DC sink input triac SSR output eT AC Power supply 24V DC sink input transistor sink output N Um umm m eR ES AC Power supply 24V DC sink source input relay output a3 Total number of eT ESS A
252. JedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 39 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names 3 Pulse output and positioning v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable D m UL un Model name Description VD cUL Marine D Pulse output for independent 1 axis control manual in e FX2N TPG Japanese supplied 100 kHz open collector output Pulse output for independent 1 axis control manual in L z P FX2N 1PG E 5 English supplied 100 kHz open collector output ra i Pulse output for independent 1 axis control P E FX2n 10PG B 1 MHz differential line driver output Simultaneous 2 axis independent 2 axis control E s v FXsu 20SSC H s Applicable to SSCNET III pv ols Pulse output for independent 1 axis control 5 v v v E FX2N 106m i 200 kHz open collector output epee Pulse output for simultaneous 2 axis independent 2 FX2N 20GM 3 axis control 200 kHz open collector output E p 1 axis programmable cam switch manual in Japanese FX2N 1RM SET E supplied fee pee i 1 axis programmable cam switch manual in English DGNARM ESETIR supplied LEID For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 1 Up to 3 units can be connected to one system Connect them to the end of the system For details refer
253. L EL FX3u 32MLI EL FX3u 48ML EL FX3u 64ML EL FX3u 80MLJ EL FX3u 128ML Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC Item Allowable supply 85 to 264V AC voltage range Rated frequency 50 60Hz Allowable Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or less instantaneous When the supply voltage is 200V AC the time can be changed to 10 to 100 ms by editing the user power failure time program Power fuse 250V 3 15A 250V 5A 30 A max 5ms or less 100V AC 65 A max 5 ms or less 200V AC Power consumption 24V DC service 2 400 mA or less 600 mA or less power supply 5V DC built in power supply Rush current 500 mA or less 1 These power consumption values are maximum values which apply to the main unit s 24V DC service power supply when there are input output extension blocks and special function units blocks For input output powered extension units blocks power consumption information refer to Section 15 2 2 When input output extension blocks are connected 24V DC service power is consumed by the blocks and the power to be consumed by the main unit is reduced For details on the 24V DC service power supply refer to Section 6 5 3 The power supply is not for external use The current capacity specified above is for the input output extension blocks special function blocks special adapters and expansion boards FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation
254. LED on the panel is lit in red and M8005 and M8006 latch are turned on The memory can be retained for about one month after the lamps turn on However the operators may not immediately find the lamps to be on Prepare a new battery promptly and replace the battery with the new one For details on the specifications and functions of the battery refer to Chapter 22 FX3U 32BL Battery FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs When trouble occurs check the LEDs on the PLC to identify the problem with the PLC 14 5 1 POWER LED on flashing off State of I LED State of PLC Remedies Power of the specified voltage is On being correctly supplied to the power The power supply is normal supply terminal One of the following problems may have occurred Check the supply voltage Power of the specified voltage and e After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re Flashing current is not being supplied to the apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If power supply terminal no improvement is obtained consult your local Mitsubishi External wiring is incorrect Electric distributer Internal error of PLC One of the following problems may f the power is not off check the power supply and the power have occurred supply route The power
255. LO panel LED status EE RUN Batty C PROG E Monitor start stop Start mantar Frror indication Current error Ma error lt Example of screen displayed in normal state gt 250 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 3 Representation of errors Errors are represented in this manual GX Developer and the display module as shown in the following table GX Developer Display module This manual Display in Display in English Japanese I O config err 1 0 xkx gt O RRI PLC H W error PC Kb xrvxrs PC H W error PCn M I5 PLC PP communication error PLC PP comm err PC PP 1 o Comm s error PC PP3 815 Serial communication error 1 Serial communication error 2 LY PLE LS 2 M I O refresh error E Unconnected I O 99 B error BFM initialization failure English version Japanese version I O configuration error PLC hardware error Syntax error Circuit error Operation error Special block error 251 SJOJUNOD p ds y iH 3 NO Bundi 1ndjno 10 BULIM O3 S O o c o D o uny 1S9 eoueua ure N Bunoouse qnoi pelewod indinonndu Ow sjluf uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3
256. Lm uM e LN E E 329 joi o Fee me zy dP ERE rc 330 Toon ER cae Go Yd s lumus ML M Lud sueta d ER UA MEL REAL EL EP M ne RE E 330 19 1715 ION PS SE aiaa a aeaa eaaa eea Ea aiena aA EE ai acus AE a TA c ea LE E 331 18 Ded FAON OPO a A A a A GENOE 331 18 117 FX2N T0GM aaa eaa a a a aa ia eae aaa a a aa a aaie ia eae Tenana 332 161 16 a 4 ed ET EAE EA AE E E E E E P SE E ES EE ET 332 TO 19 EX2NSTERIVICE FSE ere ne eee ee eee ee Ee ee epee eee cec iude 333 dou 49 MN P n LE Ce 334 Tow 2L 3EX2NES2ASI NI cio rtt uiua ea eae te ah SA E ea iA Aa A N yf hs an A 334 V2 I NAO AC LIA croatia Labi ds rete ino ten cmt ceils Riad on tn a MA anus On um iu LI din UM E 335 19123 co 71 Nia Gia Obs so rae Ree oe ian fnt cit mae a t eS A E En MI EE 335 ToS 24 oP Gd Cea o BRA ane ee caua oO gn mE ER eis Mi Ed LA EE eie c Aud LIA IE AM D EC IE ARI 336 to Meals Yam ap e cs eM 336 19 2 Extension POWE SUD DIY 5m 337 1552 Pup e SUD te Ie I Er RO EIL M Aoi Se Te E E ee AE 337 10 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 18 3 Special Adapters isisisi EOD ERE 337 gto i Fi EX UVAAD ADP ane A N dan esca E ee eee dara 337 VS 32 P COUP Dm E a E RN 338 19 9 9 EXSUSTAD PT SADIBS nus testimo a psg ees Sarees deis iterata fette israel deat 338 18 34 EXSUAD T CAA c O 338 19
257. N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks 16 11 EX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT and FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EYT With cover FX2N 8EYT rower Output bobb indicator OOOO lamps LED lamps FX2N 16EYT When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers Without cover Par eTa z 3 2 WIE s je I W Giy Rear line extension connector FX2N 8EYT and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Output indicator lamps LED lamps E g 2o o Noo nw OOOOOOO Output indicator lamps LED lamps o oa cmo OOOOOOOO Without cover O0000000 O0000000 Rear line extension connector Lower numbers Higher numbers NJ 315 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL a3 NO BuutM 1ndjno JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod idnonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX2N 16EYT C 16 FX
258. N to Character String Conversion 244 OR Compare n 201 VAL Character String to BIN Conversion 202 Link Character Strings EN j 203 LEN Character String Length Detection lt gt 204 RIGHT Extracting Character String Data from the ii OR Compare CSO CS Right 245 OR Compare lt 205 LEFT pan Character String Data from the 246 OR Compare S02 247 to 206 MIDR Random Selection of Character Strings 249 NEN 207 MIDW Random Replacement of Character TA aus OSs Strings z 250 to 208 INSTR Character aiii search 255 w 209 MOV Character String Transfer 256 LIMIT lamit Gonuol Data Operation 3 257 BAND Dead Band Control 210 FDEL Deleting Data from Tables 258 ZONE Fone oral eM bis D M ec E 259 SCL Scaling Coordinate by Point Data 212 POP ShiftLast Data Read FILO Control 260 DABIN Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Stud paa 261 BINDA BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion 213 SFR Bit Shift Right with Carry 262 to 214 SFL Bit Shift Left with Carry 268 EN 215 to 269 S02 Scaling 2 Coordinate by X Y Data 458 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No External Device Communication Inverter Communication Function sseo N AUN A 270 IVCK Inverter Status Check 271 IVDR Inverter Drive 272 IVRD Inverter Parameter Read 22 273 IVWR Inverter Parameter Write m 214 IVBWR Inverter Parameter Block Write g 275 t
259. ND GUD GND GP GUD GP GND GP ND GP Gu Gm Om m6 Ya Selection of extension cable Determination of number of devices to be connected to extension unit extension power supply unit FX2N input output powered Extension devices for FXsu FXoN FXoN Series Input extension Special function Special function Special function block block block block FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 16EX C FX2N 4AD FX2N ADA FX2N 16CCL M X050 to X077 X100 to X117 ee Refer to this chapter extension unit Extension power supply unit 1N 09 ue 3 OR S POWERO POWERO mec POWER 33284882 03224887 MASE FX 48ER on 90999999 805865888 Pow 16EX C FX2N 4AD FX2N 4DA FXa160CL M CC Link ELTE EET a3 a 20 PNO SOSOOSOSOOOE 2 3 E av o E es 1 DA d LS f es fee H 2 ADIS L in The range of devices powered from the FX2N input output powered extension unit or the extension power supply unit 5 When CC Link is used esee po bob 6000 0000000000000000 r6 FX Series terminal block Refer to Chapter 20 17777 98950oo 0000000000000000 a ee e ee A eA e e e e 9 a a e a e e e eio o O
260. Ne sopatceoes 43 31 12 O Power SUDO UNU MENT EP 43 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program COMMUNICATION cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeueeeeesaeeeeeeas 44 SV te FOOL AIIIMING aea U 45 9 2 2 Comrmunicalion Cables incu codcx cerne us E a ahlatd Pa gab ecce bd udal runs 45 3 2 3 Converters and interface ccccccccccecccesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesseeeesseeseeseeseeseeeeeseeeeeseueeessaueessaeeessaneeesaes 46 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units 47 AA Generne SPSCIICAN OMS EET E D o 1D m 47 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance teSt cccceecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 48 4 2 Power Supply SpeclilcallOLiss isse dete met te eran sca tion ea tae eae 49 4 2 T AGIPOWEPOSUDDIYTVDG iu coeur etis a ai ytd sh cop oh cd edt Mu M ELE eu DE REESE aes 49 4 22 DCOCToNWeroulpply TVDetsiisd ae cns LM RU QM LM I P A see 50 4 9 Input 9DecllicaliOfiS 3 oiii en es peel Goss Oa pore e Ont equa etc seu pot bran aite dean REL aet petendi step need Md Riu UeES 51 233 24V DG nput sinK SOUl GB setae 11s e Deed rad ode r a ipa IDEE Ran em uid LUPUS UM rea 51 AA Output 9SpeciliCallOElS s coil denidiiet ei uaa oeddsenfo etsi eei dde dala escas aeu Uude uee Evan te ruta eddie 52 Z4 I
261. O RUNON Section 19 11 operation ClockMenu Setting Sets the current time Button Subsection 19 12 1 Time setting Display Displays the current time operation Subsection 19 12 2 EntryCode The currently specified entry code can be canceled Section 19 13 operation Initializes the Input X 1 output Y auxiliary relay M state S timer T counter C data register D ClearAllDev 16 bit 32 bit and extended register R The file Button i l Section 19 14 Device all clear register D is excluded from this function Bit operation devices are turned OFF and word device current values are set to 0 PLC Status Verifies the version information entry code status Button Section 19 15 program memory type status and battery voltage etc operation ScanTime Displays the scan time max min current value Section 19 16 operation Cassette Allows data transfers and consistency checks Button Section 19 17 Memory cassette transfer between the internal RAM and the memory cassette operation l Non menu functions Operation button ON OFF information Allows monitoring of operation button ON OFF status program or Section 19 20 Changes the display format of the current values and Hexadecimal current value setting values for the timer counter data register Requires display setting extended register and extended file register to a program 2 hexadecimal display format Display screen prote
262. ON o Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply in the main unit and 7 extension units from the outside Such power supply may cause damages to the product 2 Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit and extension units with a 2mm or thicker wire ZE Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system refer to Section 9 4 3 Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual P If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Perform wiring properly to the FXON FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit discon
263. R FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ES FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL AC power supply DC input type uononpoJju a Example 2 dires k 35 ool e 170 eo 16 ug 33 24l 235 185 195 e ss i 46 310 260 210 ve E cop 10 e f e ses as zes 235 es vas as as 0 Faso af sec sic zen zio Teo mol vo 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Input Number of added points jnpold CY uononpoJju Example When a 32 input and 16 output point extension block is connected to FX2n 48EL the current of 24V DC service power supply becomes 110 mA or less I 2 DC power supply DC input type 1 FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET D 24V DC service power supply is not provided output 48 Not allowed to add suoneouioedgs DC power supply DC input type FX2N A48ELI DL Qi Example UU D RE oo D 2 om v Number of added points pue uolsJ3A 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 956 64 Input So Number of added points as Example When adding 32 inputs to FX2N 48EL DL a maximum of 24 outputs are expandable ej 3 AC power supply AC input type 1 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 24V DC service power supply is not provided 2 EI zg AC power supply Output DC input type ES Example FX2n 48ER UA1 UL S Number of added points a Nd MG RC EA IR uonejejsu oo e 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 956 64 Input Number of added points TE Example When adding 24 input
264. R ES UL FX2N 48ER FX2w 32ET ESS UL py Soe FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET 12 Classification FX2N powered extension unit E Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC E Allowable supply voltage range 85 to 264V AC 3 Rated frequency 50 60 Hz Power fuse 250V 3 15 A 3 A 56 x 20mm 0 79 250V 5 A 50 x 20mm 0 79 1 3 100V AC Up to 40 A 5 ms or less se Rush current 2 200V AC Up to 60 A 5 ms or less ce Power consumption 30 W 35 VA 35 W 45 VA n ETO Aon 24V DC 250 mA or less 24V DC 460 mA or less 24V DC block 1 4 service power When input output extension blocks are connected 24V DC service power is With extension Iz supply Ser consumed by them 358 For details refer to Section 6 6 g 2 Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw T i FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ER D tem pce eM FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ET D Classification FX2N powered extension unit Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC 24V DC sun uoisuejx3 Allowable supply voltage range 85 to 264V AC 30 to 20 jndino ndul Power fuse 250V 5 A 50 x 20mm 0 79 100V AC Up to 40 A 5 ms or less Rush current 1 6 200V AC Up to 60 A 5 ms or less apie Power consumption 35 W 45 VA 8 SE 24V DC service power supply None E Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw 15 2 1 Weight accessories etc 17 C Um 225 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER z D TM FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ES FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ER 5 gt FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 32ET F
265. RN FNC156 instructions Y003 Clear signal device specification D468 v DST 4 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP adapters are connected to an PLC D 8467 4 M8467 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 User s Manual Hardware Edition A 3 Analog special adapters M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299 Appendix A 3 Analog special adapters M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299 egesse N AJOWS ede When analog special adapters are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the number of connected analog special adapters Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column For details refer to the manual of each product 22 UJ D D lt Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8299 Operation and function 1st analog special adapter 2nd analog special adapter 3rd analog special adapter 4th analog special adapter Number 0008Q 0008IN sr uononJjsu W s n d jeioeds 9po00 J9joeJeu2 453 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 User s Manual Hardware Edition A 3 Analog special adapters M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299 Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8299 Operation and function FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP 1st analog specia
266. SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL adh NO O c e ej E Lon 2 2 ae 104 BULIM Sses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueuea ure N uny 1S9 peJewog indinojndu Ol SHUN uoisuagjx4 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddnsg Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply in the main unit and extension units from the outside Such power supply may cause damages to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit and extension units with a 2mm or thicker wire Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system refer to Section 9 4 Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or mal
267. Series sad 5 3 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 z Series S When monitoring circuits device registration etc or reading writing programs in an FX3u PLC from GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later using the transparent function by way of USB in the GOT1000 Series make 2 sure to execute the following setting If the following setting is not provided a communication error occurs 3g GX Developer Ver8 22Y or later S E When using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series Not supported not available Setting shown below is required When using transparent function by way of i i 0 l RS 232 in GOT1000 Series Set COM port and Transmission Select RS 232C in setting shown speed on PC side I F Serial setting below and set COM port and When directly connecting GX Developer to dialog box Transmission speed PLC jnpold CY uononpoJju 1 GX Developer Ver 8 23Z or later supports the FX3U Series I Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later 1 Select Online Transfer setup to open the Transfer setup dialog box suoneouioedgs 2 Double click Serial in PC side I F to open the PC side I F Serial setting dialog box 3 Select USB GOT Transparent mode Transfer Setup PC side I F f i T 10 H NET I CC Link Ethernet PLC AF board board board board board board COM COM ersi Double click it PLC side I F E m PLC MNET IO ARRMNET I
268. Subsection 12 3 5 Example of external wiring Forthe input output powered extension units blocks refer to Subsection 12 3 3 Handling of transistor output and Subsection 12 3 4 External wiring precautions in this section For the specifications and examples of wiring refer to the specifications for each model For the specifications on the input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on the input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 12 3 1 Output specifications main unit transistor output sink type 210 Transistor output sink specifications Item FX3u 16MT FX3u 32MT FX3u 48MT FX3u 64MT FX3u 80MT FX3u 128MT LIS LIS LIS LIS LIS ES Seite EOL 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points Fixed terminal Connecting type block Removable terminal block M3 screw M3 screw Output type form Transistor sink output External power 5 to 30V DC supply 0 5A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value For details on the common terminal for each model refer to the terminal block layout Resistance Max load 1 output point common terminal 0 5 A or less load 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less e 8 output points common terminal 1 6 A or less Inductive 12W 24V DC load PSI tana 0 1 mA or less 30V DC ON voltage 1 5 V or less Min load Y000 to Y002 5 us or less 10 mA or mo
269. T ESS FX3U 32ML 150 5 91 123 4 85 0 65 1 43 Ibs FX3u 32MR DS FX3U 32MT DS FX3U 32MT DSS 1 Installation 35 mm 1 38 wide DIN rail or Direct installation with screws M4 x 2 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 6 External Dimensions Weight and Installation 4 6 2 FX3u 48MI FX3u 64MI FX3u 80MI I FX3u 128ML i 3 4 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches a nooonoo00 2 6 F 2g 9 53 ES EE 30 co t D c 3 78 E UUUUUUUUUU W1 mounting hole pitch a 3 ge 58 B Series W mm inches W1 mm inches MASS weight kg Ibs FX3U 48MR ES FX3U 48MT ES FX3U 48MT ESS 77 FX3U 48MUJ 182 7 17 155 6 11 0 85 1 87 Ibs 3 FX3U 48MR DS FX3U 48MT DS S FX3U 48MT DSS FX3U 64MR ES 5 FX3U 64MT ES RE FX3U 64MT ESS S5 g FX3U 64ML 220 8 67 193 7 6 1 00 2 2 Ibs 939 FX3U 64MR DS oo FX3U 64MT DS E FX3U 64MT DSS FX3U 80MR ES 6 FX3U 80MT ES os FX3U 80MT ESS 5 FX3U 80MLI 285 11 23 258 10 16 1 20 2 64 Ibs m FX3U 80MR DS o FX3u 80MT DS FX3U 80MT DSS T FX3U 128MR ES za FX3U 128MUI FX3u 128MT ES 350 13 78 323 12 72 1 80 3 96 Ibs Ls FX3U 128MT ESS ZE zc 1 Installation 35mm 1 38 wide DIN rail or Direct installation with screws M4 x 4 8 S jad 9 e a9 oo 592 EE Q 59 FX3u Seri
270. TIGU OLEO DIS Number of CC Link remote I O stations x 32points B 32 points lt 224 points e FX2N 16CCL M up to 7 stations k 3 Calculate the total number of input output occupied points number of input output points Total number of input output points on E Number of input output occupied points 176 points 32 points 208 points 394 points OK Total obtained in Step 1 Total obtained in Step 2 Input output on network i 108 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification 4 Determine whether the devices can be added to the main unit uononpoJju Calculate the current consumption to confirm whether the extension devices selected in the above step can be connected 4 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply 2 p p pply F U TI co OEC Current consumption Calculation result SE v D Total of current consumed 2 SIRE by extension devices amp zi 500mA 760mA 260mA 5 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 24V DC power supply 24V DC service power supply The value obtained by this calculation when the value is positive indicates the remaining capacity of the 24V DC service power supply that can be used for external loads aco mae Current consumption Calculation result Main unit Total of current co
271. Terminal block European type 18 3 4 FX3u 4AD TC ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22Ibs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches eAccessories Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type mounting hole pitch 106 4 18 i 9 41 o 1 o Z o o O H o jo jo jo j Oo 4 o j o i o ijo A 1 338 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Special Adapters 18 3 5 FX3u 232ADP o External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 80g 0 18lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in ee width or screws NO O POWER O E c eAccessories Manual supplied with product I io S Connector RS 232C ao D SUB 9 pin male c c O 5 13 O E sz BE ca s I lee 1 CD DCD 228 s 5 2 RD RXD 22 E alo 9 3 SDTXD 83 315 0 8 4 ER DTR z gt o 2 7 5 SG GND 15 Ilo J6 6 DR DSR 7 Not used UE 8 Not used Sas 9 Not used see 18 3 6 FX3u 485ADP A External Dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 80g 0 18lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo wid
272. The high speed counter numbers are allocated to the input terminals X000 to X007 as shown in the following table The input terminals not allocated for high speed counters can be used as general input terminals 11 5 1 Allocation table 186 The allocation of the first unit of FX3U 4HSX ADP is shown in the heavy line frames H W Hardware counter S W Software counter U Up count input D Down count input A A phase input B B phase input R External reset input S External start input Input allocation X606 X09 nput terminals of main unit Y FXSU AHSX ADP EXE oversees pes ew ire qe quoe High speed input special adapters andit 7 7 7 Terminals to be connected T f t C ter N Classifi Input allocation adn cation X006 X007 ES 8 NEM 1 EM 1 phase 1 count NM pu ws 1 1 1 1 1 og w jw 1 m cu w w L5 m jx cs sw 1w 1 L5 Jf Ll ue mi car w fojoj 1 phase 2 count sw 9191 id motto ENEN O r T5 co SW L perer 1 L5 p LL aaa Ce 11 2 phase 2 count ENMNENENM Up lc er aye ee e swf 115 1 1 15 1 When the input terminals of the main unit receive pulses having a response frequency of 50k to 100kHz wire the terminals as stated below The wiring length should be 5m 16 4 or less Connect a bleeder resistance of 1 5kQ 1 W or more
273. U 190mA or less FX2N 2AD FX2N 48EL1 300mA or less FX2N 2DA The 5 special function units listed on the left have restrictions in current consumption internal FX3U 4HSX ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP 24V DC at startup when connected to FX3u Series main units DC power type At the startup of an FXoN 3A FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA FX3U 4HSX ADP or FX3u 2HSY ADP make sure to set the total current consumption internal 24V DC less than the following values FX3uU 16 32MLI DS S 640mA FX3u 48 64 80MLJ DS S 800mA 6 4 3 Extension cable One extension cable can be used in a system The type of cable varies according to the product being connected e FXoN 65EC e FXoN 30EC e FX2N GM 65EC for FX2N 10GM and FX2N 20GM FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption z The amount of connectable extension equipment to the main unit varies depending on the power supply type S AC DC For each power supply type follow the instructions below AC power type main unit 2 When only input output extension devices are added use the quick reference matrix Sz Refer to Subsection 6 5 1 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added AC Ze Power Type 3 When also special extension devices are added calculate the current consum
274. V DC 2 mA reference value 25 5 OFFON Approx 10 ms E Q Response time ON OFF Approx 10 ms peJewod SHUN uoisugjx4 jndino ndul Output circuit diagram power suppl coM I A common number applies to the Jof COM Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI 15 5 2 External dimensions C Um 30 xX 25 FX2N 32ER pil 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches n lt OR oo 90000000 MITSUBISHI InnSd686886 01234567 suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO MESECFXa 32ER o79299 2 23 U UUDUUUUUUUU A uoisuo a 52 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 190 5 91 The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 273 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER D 4 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 00000000000 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 90 3 55 UUUUUUUDDUUU 9 0 36 The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws 15 5 3 Terminal layout 274 FX2N 32ER CE rom xO x2 x4 X6 X0 X2 x4 X6 Pe EN Bespa xsxe pr xi X5 X X7 volva TvsTveL vol vL TY
275. V instructions are used in a continuous execution format with regard to a file register To prevent this be sure to use pulse execution format BMOVP instructions 3 Precaution for extended file register ER usage Do not use continuous constant execution SAVER and LOGR instructions with regard to extended file registers Use the individual instructions only when required 433 Asowey ayjesse NO NO Kieyeg 0008Q 00098IN 9p02 J9 96JeUu2 sr UONONISU WwW sooi e jeloeds gt FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 22 FX3U 32BL Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 1 Battery Purpose EN 22 FX3U 32BL Battery STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION e Before attaching or detaching the memory cassette turn off power If it is attached or detached while PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Before transporting the PLC turn on power to the PLC to check that the BATT LED is off and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the BATT LED on or the battery exhausted the backed up data may be unstable during transportation The main unit of the PLC has a built in battery When the battery voltage drops the BATT LED lights and the special auxiliary relay M8005 or M8006 turns on In this case replace the battery FX3u 32BL 22 1 Battery Purpose The ba
276. W p FX2N 16EYS Triac SSR 16 tormina block Dedicated to source output only FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 11 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 9m 16 2 1 Product specifications N The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters 8 Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring z Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 3 1 Power supply specifications 1 3 Item FX2N 8ER ES UL lt lt Product type FX2N extension block dE Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit cg D 2 Weight and Other specifications I Item FX2N 8ER ES UL MASS Weight 0 2 kg 0 44lbs Sc The extension cable is already connected to the extension block ES Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number F j e The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation a palamod indinonndu Ow 3 Input specifications common to both sink and source inputs Item FX2N 8ER ES UL Input points 4 points Vertical terminal block M3 screws For a detailed description of wiring refer to Connection unit the input line connection diagram of the m
277. X2N 20GM Handy Manual 26 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Indispensable manuals v Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Manual Model Contents number name code Supplied Procedures for handling the 2 axis with FX2N 20GM JY992D77601 positioning special function unit 7 product User s Guide When using refer to FX2N 10GM F X2N 20GM Handy Manual See NM Procedures for handling the 1 axis 2 axis p Hardware Programing JY992D77801 NE g l 09R612 volume positioning special function unit Manual Programmable cam switch When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied with en E SET JY992D71101 Procedures for handling the programmable o9R614 product User s Manual cam switch special function unit Manuals for FX3u 20SSC H Positioning Block Supplied Procedures for handling the 2 axis E FX3U 20SSC H JY997D21104 positioning special function block Installation Manual When using refer to FX3U 20SSC H User s product Manual Separate POA JY997D21301 Describes FX3U 20SSC H Positioning block volume User s Manual details Supplied FX Configurator FP JY997D21801 Operation Manual Other manuals with When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed
278. X2N 16CCL M Remote stations that handle information in bit units only Remote stations that handle information in bit units and word units Generic name for remote I O stations and remote device stations Unit to be connected to supply power to the CC Link LT system Power supply to be connected to supply power to the CC Link LT system Abbreviation of model FX2N 32ASI M AS i system master block Generic name for programming software handy programming panel HPP and indicator Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel HPP Generic name for GX Developer and FX PCS WIN E Abbreviation of programming software packages SWLID5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E Abbreviation of model FX PCS WIN and FX PCS WIN E programming software packages Generic name for the following models FX 20P FX 20P E FX 10P FX 10P E Generic name for the following models FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H Abbreviation of FX 485PC IF Generic name for GT15 and GT11 Generic name for GOT A900 Series and GOT F900 Series Generic name for GOT A900 Series Generic name for GOT F900 Series FX3U Hardware Edition Programming manual Data Communication Edition Analog Control Edition Positioning Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Abbreviation of FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instructions Abbreviation of FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Abbreviation of F
279. X2N 16EYT ESS UL MASS Weight 0 2 kg 0 44lbs 0 3 kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other e Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transistor output type Item FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Connection unit Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output unit type Transistor source output External power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation method Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5 A point Resistance The total load current per common should be as follows Maximum load load 4 output points common 0 8A or less e 8 output points common 1 6A or less Inductive load 12 W 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA 30 A DC Minimum load OFF ON 0 2 ms or less for 200 mA at 24V DC ON OFF 0 2 ms or less for 200 mA at 24V DC Response time Output circuit diagram A common number applies to the LJ of VL FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EYT ESS UL With cover FX2N 8EYT ESS rower Output 5566 indicator 0000 lamps LED lamp
280. X2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ER D UA1 UL E FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ET D Weight 0 65 kg 1 43 Ibs 0 85 kg 1 87 Ibs 1 00 kg 2 2 Ibs 1 8 Terminal protective cover 2 pcs S Fitted to FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL and 95 2 A l FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS i z aaa ata Extension cable 55 mm 2 16 D Optional extension cables FXoN 30EC and FXoN 65EC are available e input output number label 1 9 One The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws Installation of the DIN46277 35 mm 1 37 wide rail or screws 2 J D 3 D QU o 263 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 2 Power Supply Specifications Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply 15 2 2 Part names 1 Front 1 Top cover 4 Input display LEDs 5 Terminal block covers A a 2 DIN rail mounting hooks 1 Top cover 2 DIN rail mounting hooks 2 places 3 Model name abbreviation 4 Input display LEDs red 5 Terminal block covers 6 Extension device connecting connector cover 7 POWER LED green 8 Output display LEDs red MELSE FXov 48ER err eae 16 Extension device connecting ep connector cover 7 POWER LED MITSUBISHI 01234567017 34567 OTODOODROIOOOAAOATFOe0000 01234567 O0O0000E0 er Se 8
281. X3u FX3uc Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3u FX3uc Series User s Manual Positioning Control Edition 29 uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejejsu oo e BuIA A ddng Jamod ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 Major Features 2 Features and Part Names 2 1 Major Features 1 Basic functions sequence In this case use instructions and Up to 384 input output points The number of input output points up to 256 points wired directly to the PLC and remote input output points up to 256 points on the network CC Link can be increased to 384 points in total Powered extension units blocks that can be connected FX2N Series input output powered extension units blocks can be connected Up to 8 FXoN FX2N FX3U Series special function units blocks can be connected Among FXoN Series only FXoN 3A can be connected Program memory The PLC has a 64K step RAM memory Use of the memory cassette enables the program memory to be used as flash memory Operation instructions Various instructions such as floating point and character string processing instructions and scaling instructions are provided Built
282. Y terminals Wire loads contactors solenoid valves etc to be driven to the terminals When the display module FX3u 7DM is installed 20 Display module FX3u 7DM 21 Top cover accessory to FXsu 7DM ERROR C 012 3 4 5 G 7 2021 22 23 24 25 26 27 or o000000000000000 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 07 oo0000000 20 Display module FX3u 7DM The display module option can be installed 21 Top cover accessory to FX3u A square hole is made so that the display module can be seen Replace 7DM the original top cover with this cover 33 gt Lon o Q Q em o E SeuJeN Wed pue seJnjee 4 jnpoljd CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uonenBijuo N SON UN SON uonejjesu Co jndinondu e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 2 Sides Left side 1 Cover of special adapter Right side connector 2 Cover of high speed input output special adapter connector 3 Expansion board securing screw holes 4 Nameplate BE 5 DIN rail mounting groove 1 Cover of special adapter Remove this cover and connect the 1st special adapter to the connector connector when the expansion board is installed When the e
283. ZU ZS E nication Ore Special Up to 8 less Subsection co 4 2 function Position FX2N 10PG units d 6 8 5 ZE FX2N 10GM 256 points or vt v d z unit block ing FX2N 1RM SET less 8 FX2N 64CL M 256 points or VT 4 4 less S Network D FX2N 16CCL M E g 384 points or vi ya FX2N 32ASI M eee FX3U 1PSU 5V Mane Chapter17 2 Extension power units P Ss E supply unit a 25 DM gt FXoN 30EC S9 One of 2 Extension cable FXoN 65EC v oru lt 3 FX2N GM 65EC Tem n 10 1 Forconnectable product type refer to the following chapter For details refer to Chapter 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards Bui 1ndu 73 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 74 2 Forsome products there are restrictions on combination and number of connected units For details on the special adapters refer to Subsection 6 4 1 For details on the special function units blocks refer to Subsection 6 4 2 3 When CC Link master or AS i master is used the maximum number of input output points is 384 For an outline of CC Link master refer to Subsection 6 3 2 Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used For an outline of AS i master refer to Subsection 6 3 3 Maximum number of input output points when AS i master is used 4 When the special function units blocks a
284. a register D 16 bit extended register R 16 bit extended file register ER 16 bit Display Content Device No 1 2 Current value 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l 2 Data register DD 32 bit extended register DR 32 bit extended file register DER 32 bit Display Content Device No 1 Upper 16 bit device No odd number Lower 16 bit device No even number 2 Current value File register D The file register D current value cannot be directly monitored at the display module 3 Timer T Display Content 1 Device No Contact image 2 ON E OFF Blank Reset image 3 ON M OFF Blank 4 Current value 4 9 Setting value or device specified by setting value if an index 4 5 modifier is present the index register s device is also displayed 6 Current value of device specified by setting value 356 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices 4 Counter C 9m Display Content a o n D D Q 1 Device No Contact image 9 2 ON E 6 OFF Blank 9 12 Reset image E 3 ON M S OFF Blank bocas LA 2 B Count direction display 1 11 1 1 ae e o auyp 2 UP count E aeee Se 4 DOWN count Blank eiie 5 1 3 32 bit up down counter and high speed counter only D lt
285. ac output is turned off Therefore use a load of 0 4VA or more at 100V AC or 1 6VA or more at 200V AC If the load is less than this value connect a surge absorber as stated below in parallel with the load For the connection of the surge absorber refer to Subsection 12 4 2 External wiring precautions FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 4 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type 12 4 2 External wiring precautions Ox cS g Ym p 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits 8 A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output BuutM 1ndino 2 Micro current load 13 The PLC s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn Micro current load lt lt off C R absorber When a micro current load is connected be e sure to connect a surge absorber parallel to the load am In this manual the term micro current load refers to a load of Surge D 0 4VA 100V AC or less and 1 6VA 200V AC or less absorber Item Standard 14 Rated voltage 250V AC E on Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF e 05E Resistance value Approx 100 to 1200 E 2 e Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name 1 5 Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 E ED 236 3
286. ain 1 3 ss 28 I JE oN NH SS Ge Eu RSIS 002 SLs oo 2 0 5 co mI x oD D c gt q mm 0 00 O 35 c E 2 7 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q 391 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 23 User Message Display Function 19 23 User Message Display Function The user message display function allows a user prepared message to appear in place of the top screen time display The OK button is then pressed to switch from the user message screen to the menu screen If using fixed user messages the messages created in GX Developer s device memory window should be saved individually at DLILI 9 to DLILJ 40 of the file register D extended register R and extended file register ER Refer to Section 19 18 for system information setting Refer to Subsection 19 23 7 for character data input 19 23 1 System information user message display function 1 System signal 1 System Information Description DLILI 9 l Device where the user message character string is saved DLJL 14 40 1 Displayable Characters amp Codes Character Type Code Alphanumeric 20H to 7DH A1H to DFH ASCII code Japanese Shift JIS Level 1 2 2 System information s system signal 1 DLILI 9 to DLILJ 40 and dis
287. ain unit sun uoisuejx3 Input type sink source Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5 mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ itivi dra 3 5 mA or more at 24V DC Input sensitivity current current d nd 1 5 mA or less current 17 Sok Input response time Approx 10 ms 7 S PISTES Sink input No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor 3 P g yP Source input No voltage contact input PNP open collector transistor lt Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation 18 Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input 9s9 Sink input line Source input line Sas connection connection oak Main unit a uoisuo Main unit vL Input circuit diagram ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoo g JeuiuJe 287 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 4 Output specifications Relay output type Item FX2N 8ER ES UL Output points 4 points Connection unit Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output unit Relay 5 to 30V DC External power supply 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation method Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2 Alpoint The total resistance load current pe
288. ain unit Bad communication analog SY The adapters do not function When the board is not connected 2 When an expansion board other than the FX3U CNV BD is used one communication special adapter may be used G d Special adapter Special adapter Expansion board Main unit OO communication communication FX3U CNV BD Special adapter Special adapter Expansion board Main unit communication communication Not FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232 BD The adapters do not function FX3U 422 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3U USB BD Bad 3 When high speed input output analog and communication adapters are used When these adapters are used connect the high speed input output special adapters on the left side of the main unit The high speed input output special adapters cannot be connected on the downstream side of any communication analog special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Main unit communication analog high speed output high speed input Interchangeable Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Jal ad Main unit analog high speed input high speed output d Meu The adapters cannot be connected in this order Good Bad 75 soma uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi O U D CD cS pen oO O E h v pue UOISJ9A ueis S
289. al Arrangement 9g 1 FX 16E TB When connected to the FX2N 16EYT C C N MITSUBISHI FX 16E TB O et E LITE Ee EE ES G9 9E 0 gt E OS a When connected to the FX2N 16EX C cS nN r N c n FX 16E TB I CE R SEEIER 14 EXESESE ESTE oj m 255 92 228 9 o S peJewog indinojndu Ol 2 FX 32E TB When connected to the FX2N 16EYT C Lower numbers Higher numbers sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo AOS JEIESTESESSST C EE N Higher numbers Pun A ddng Jewog UOISU9 X3 When connected to the FX2N 16EX C Lower numbers Higher numbers oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo EE E E ESESESESIES o E UJ wn ze Higher numbers 2 o Q c D 409 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 3 Terminal Arrangement 3 FX 16E A1 TB MITSUBISHI FX 16EX A1 TB AC 100V INPUT zi ply LA q ATE AA BISECTS
290. ammable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 9 FX 16EYS TB 20 9 2 Internal circuit QF E op Oo oD e NO E ss 3 3kQ 7 Photo O Photo thyristor 8 thyristor S y z 3 m E saa Photo thyristor 3 thyristor Sz Zi ey L L O to L1L1I7 Lower numbers A AO to AA7 Higher numbers S Surge absorbers are connected to each output D00 1 2 3 004567 440123 4567 I Azo gee AV AVI MW AY AV 5 D e eel IS eos TET Fo TL 2 TE 15 m U gee Se z Surge absorbers are connected to each output 1 6 PECORI D00 12 3 004567 440123 444567 No om5 JA ODS BBO Photo coupler 8 power supply NI Pun A ddng Jamod UOISUS XF oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo C o pn o lt O Q D 425 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 9 FX 16EYS TB 20 9 4 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Terminal block 2 Micro current load The PLC s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn off C R absorber When a micro current load is connected be sure to connect a surge absorber parallel to the
291. and returns to the monitor screen 4 Press OK to register the current value and return to the user registered devices screen 19 9 Error Check The main unit s error status displays at the ErrorCheck menu 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ErrorCheck item then press OK The error check result then displays at the error display screen refer to fig at right To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC at the menu screen 2 If multiple errors have occurred the keys can be used to switch between the error display pages When no errors have occurred ErrorCheck No errors When 1 error has occurred Button Operation Description ErrorCheck ESC Returns to the menu screen Hi Tenor or less Disable r Displays the previous page s error screen 1 error or less Disabled 2 errors or more Displays the next page s error screen Returns to the menu screen 4 Display Content 1 Display Content 2 1 Active error flag 3 2 Error name 3 Error code 4 Number of concurrent errors 4 displays only when multiple errors have occurred 1 3 To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press 2 ESC 3 363 SJOJUNOD peeds ubiIH 3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojnd
292. and terminal arrangement Input numbers X are assigned to the upper four points and output numbers Y are assigned to the lower four points With cover Without cover FX2N 8ER 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISU9 X3 FX2N 8ER Input indicator lamps LED lamps Output indicator lamps LED lamps Rear line extension connector oo suondo eE pue shun 1X3 Jeuo A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 291 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 16 3 3 External dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8ER CD POWER LO LO S e mounting hole pitch 292 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 EX2N 8EX ES UL EX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input E r 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 9m 16 4 4 Product specifications N The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapter 8 Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 13 Product type FX2N extension block lt s Rated voltage 24V DC
293. anuals for PLC main unit BIFX3U PLC main unit Extractions of descriptions of input output Supplied specifications wiring and installation of with FX3U Series JY997D18801 FX3U Series PLC main unit from FX3U E product HARDWARE MANUAL Series User s Manual Hardware Edition For the detailed explanation refer to this manual FX3U Series User s Details of hardware of FX3u Series PLC Separate Manual Hardware JY997D16501 main unit including input output 09R516 volume Edition specifications wiring installation and this manual maintenance Programming IONPAd CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi FX3U FX3uc Series Details of sequence programming for FX3U Separate Programming Manual Series including explanation for basic Loe JY997D16601 po l 09R517 zu volume Basic amp Applied instructions applied instructions and various 9339 Instruction Edition devices 223 WFX Series terminal block FX INPUT AND OUTPUT TERMINAL BLOCKS USER S GUIDE Manuals for communication control Supplied with product Procedures for handling FX Series terminal block uejs S e uoneJnBijuo JY992D50401 llCommon Details of simple link between PCs parallel Separate FX Series link computer link and no protocol z p User s Manual Data JY997D16901 ee P 09R715 volume ww im communication RS instructions FX2N Communication Edition N 3 232lF d BRS 232C RS 422 RS 485 USB
294. arameter set Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative loli madmi or minimam gain KD l Derivative result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 PID operation result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 lt Transpose of output upper limit value and output lower limit value PID operation is continued Check whether the target setting contents are correct Alarm output is not given PID operation is continued Check whether the target setting contents are correct PID output upper limit set value PID output lower limit set value Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output variation alarm set value Set value 0 255 SJOJUhOO peeds uDIH m NO BuutM 1ndino Jo BULIM O S O o c n D o uny 1S9 Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N peJewog jndinoanduj DO sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indinojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error codes in shaded columns are added in FX3U PLCs Error PLC operation at p Contents of error Action code error occurrence Operation error M80
295. at edema atc qe tite ds 409 20 4 Tristallduor VVOIKSa oai es aca has ida chose natu mie entes nosti eund oio doble ssi esta ale nau ehen seeds tee 411 20A T MOUNN terr p 411 SAN Aaron PE 411 20 4 3 Input output cable connection lesseessssesssssesseseseeeeee nennen nennen nnn rnnt rns na nnn 411 20 4 4 Connection to terminal block llsseessssessssssssseseeeeee nennen nnne nnne na nnns nans nar rn 412 20 5 FAIG E IB EX 32E TB ne creer E E ELA E aba ee ee 413 ZO 971 NOLO Ker RR E T E DOE 413 20 5 2 Example of input external WIring ccccccsecceceeeeeceeceeceeeeseeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeseaeesseeesseaeeeseaeeesseeeees 414 20 5 3 O tp t external Mig sossen m 414 20 0 FX VO eal B aem a a a 415 20 6 1 SpecITICallOEiS ssi cette sas a E e sea sete 415 206 A a ida g cs 0 PEE 416 20 6 3 Example of input external WIring ccccccecccecseceeceeceeceeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeeessuaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeesseeeees 416 FAUNE C uomn rcuocee M 417 ZO SSP SCINCAUONS NENNEN L P stare 417 20 72 IMMERMal CCW 32 se2 s aia eter sn we E ee ee te eee eee eee 418 20 7 3 Example of output external wiring cccccceccccceeceeceeceeceeceeceeeeeaeeeeseeeceesueeessueeesseeeeessaeeeeeaeeeees 418 2044 External WANG DFECAUTIONS siet dota exile uec va ete eps eo E eR ooi me
296. ation LED lights when relay coil power is supplied 1 92 W 80 mA 24V DC This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 417 output 1 4 20 7 1 Specifications 358 FE Item Relay output o gt E oS Input output Gere circuitry SBO CN1 e Connector side External wiring 1 6 Load voltage 250V AC or less 30V DC or less om5 mm 2 A point TE es stance The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value os Max load l z load e 4 output points common terminal 8 A or less Inductive 17 Min load 5V DC 2mA Reference value com Open circuit B es leakage current ES lt oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo C o nen o lt O Q D FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 2 Internal circuit DO0 1 2 3 004 5 6 440 1 2 3 444 5 6 7 AIC OIC eal Ileal irs ears re AJOJI ELA TS Ee L0 T2 EST LAT T TE IL 10 to 0017 Lower numbers A AO to AA7 Higher numbers 20 7 3 Example of output external wiring LILO to OO7 Lower numbers A A0 to AA7 Higher numbers a 000 12 3 004 56 7 440 12 3 444 5 6 7 Relay power supply CHI sem SIC on ia ea ere eal ale aoe ESSTES TT Boe Eng T4 TES Eve Dey n Fuse 24V DC D D 418 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s
297. ation see DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Wiring precaution Grounding and power cables should be positioned to exit the unit from above as shown in the figure DIN E Grounding and SV OV 24V power cables l a l z l C l Sink and Input extension put i source block l f input l I l type e E 1PSU 5V t M Output extension G l block 5V 0V 24V Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time 9 3 4 158 Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension power supply units or earlier in extension power supply units than the main unit As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit to the S S terminal of the input extension block In the case of the sink input type the S S terminal is used as the 24 terminal Some special function units blocks do not have the power supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit D Some special function units blocks do not have the power supply terminals When using an ext
298. ation work is completed Failure to do so could cause fires equipment failures and malfunctions Fit the extension cables peripheral device connecting cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to the designated connectors Contact failures may cause malfunctions Fit the display module memory cassette and function extension board securely to the designated connectors Contact failures may cause malfunctions Before attaching or detaching the following devices turn off power Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal block Battery and memory cassette WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition g WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTI
299. ay have failed Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor 2 Ifthe Fatal error occurred message does not appear Turn the power OFF connect the extension devices then operate the system again to check for errors If the problem persists there may be main unit or extension device hardware failure Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 25 Menu Display Characters Japanese amp English Display Character Correspondence Table 19 25 Menu Display Characters Japanese amp English Display Character Correspondence Table Menu Screen Menu ErrorCheck LANGUAGE Menu display language setting Contrast ClockMenu Current time setting EntryCode ClearAllDev Device all clear Japanese Monitor Test Ena TA ErrorCheck I7 f197 LANGUAGE LANGUAGE Contrast JY NA ClockMenu IEZI SS E EntryCode t 7 MV ClearAllDev F N 4 MU7 PLC Status PCAF 4A ScanTime AREY DRI Cassette XEY ALY Nin x ErrorCheck I7 j11937 No errors I7 UL ErrorCheck T5 F1y7 Error code I2 1 NV LANGUAGE LANGUAGE AA AAR English English DA Current time JH TE EI Clock setting AY ZB Clock setting FFX zb SB Current time Tae AFR A is set ZELLE Please th x input Entry Code AJUTE Uu Make Entry Code 5 amp valid AMC U sS OK Execute OKoXfj ESC Cancel ESCtrvtll All operation TRUE 7 Is possib
300. be installed Supplied 5 AHSX ADP Procedures for handling the high speed with JY997D16301 Installation Manual input special adapter product SUpDIed FX2N 1HC Procedures for handling the 1 ch high speed with JY992D65401 product User s Guide counter special function block Manuals for positioning control llCommon FX3U FX3UC Series P Separate User s Manual JY997D16801 Details of positioning functions of FX3u 09R620 volume Positioning Control FX3UC Series Edition llPulse output and positioning When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Procedures for handling the high speed Supplied output special adapter with rd nU etd JY997D16401 When using refer also to FX3U FX3UC Installation Manual l Mun product Series User s Manual Positioning Control Edition Supplied l l with Roy eink PG JY992D65301 Procedures for handling the 1 axis pulse 09R610 User s Manual output special function block product Supplied Procedures for handling the 1 axis pulse IE FX2N 10PG JY992D91901 output special function block E Installation Manual When using refer to FX2N 10PG User s product Manual y Separate Bes JY992D93401 Details of 1 axis pulse output special 09R641 volume User s Manual function block Supplied Procedures for handling the l axis With FX2N 10GM JY992D77701 positioning special function unit E product User s Guide When using refer to FX2N 10GM F
301. beijer fi ESTONIA FINLAND UTECO A B E E 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 e mail sales uteco gr Meltrade Ltd Fert Utca 14 HU 1107 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 e mail office8meltrade hu GREECE HUNGARY SIA POWEL Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 2281 e mail utu utu lv LATVIA UAB UTU POWEL Savanoriu pr 187 LT 2053 Vilnius Phone 370 0 52323 101 Fax 370 0 52322 980 e mail powel utu lt LITHUANIA Koning amp Hartman B V NETHERLANDS Avtomatika Sever Ltd RUSSIA Donauweg 2 B Lva Tolstogo Str 7 Off 311 NL 1000 AK Amsterdam RU 197376 St Petersburg Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 Phone 7 812 1183 238 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 Fax 7 8121183 239 e mail info koningenhartman com e mail as avtsev spb ru Beijer Electronics A S NORWAY Consys Teglverksveien 1 Promyshlennaya St 42 RUSSIA N 3002 Drammen RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Phone 7 812 325 3653 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 Fax 7 812 147 2055 e mail info beijer no e mail consys consys spb ru MPL Technology Sp zo o POLAND Electrotechnical RUSSIA ul Sliczna 36 PL 31 444 Krakow Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 e mail krakow mpl pl Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Str Biharia No 67 77 RO 013981 Bucuresti 1 Phone
302. ber concurrentl of points AS i 248 points or less y uonejejsu oo e ee Ae total number 384 points or less o of points E S ns input output Input relay X000 to X367 248 points The device numbers are octal 5 5 lt 5 The total number of input and output relay Output relay Y000 to Y367 248 points points is 256 EEN p Bui 1ndu 55 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications ltem Performance por general MO to M499 500 points changeable The retentive status can be changed by i arameter settings Tor Keeping M500 to M1023 524 points x changeable Auxiliary relay For keeping M1024 to 6656 points B fixed M7679 P M8000 to l Initial state for general S0 to S9 10 points changeable For general The retentive status can be changed by changeable S10 to 8499 490 points parameter settings State FOr kecpmg S500 to S899 400 points changeable For annunciator For keeping S900 to S999 100 points changeable FOrKecping S1000 to S4095 3096 points E fixed 10ms TO to T191 192 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec 100 ms for subroutine s T192 to T199 8 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec interruption subroutine Timer on qoms o T200 to T245 46 points 0 01 to 327 67 sec delay timer nao SC CUM ALEC T246 to T249 0 001 to 32 767 sec
303. bsection 12 2 5 Example of external wiring in this section For the input output powered extension units blocks refer to Subsection 12 2 3 Handling of relay output and Subsection 12 2 4 Cautions on external wiring in this section For their specifications and examples of wiring refer to the specification for each model For the specifications on the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on the input output extension block refer to Chapter 16 12 2 1 Output specifications main unit 206 Relay output specifications Item FX3U 16MR FX3U 32MR FX3U 48MR FX3U 64MR FX3u 80MR FX3uU 128MR OS OS OS OS OS ES eT uU 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points Fixed terminal Output connecting DM block Removable terminal block M3 screw yP M3 screw Output form Relay External power 30V DC or less or 240V AC or less supply 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards 2 A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value Resistance For details on the common terminal for each model load refer to the terminal block layout e 1 output point common terminal 2 A or less e 4 output points common terminal 8 A or less e 8 output points common terminal 8 A or less 80 VA For the product life refer to Subsection 12 2 2 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsect
304. bsection 4 4 2 oS For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 2 4 S Open circuit leakage current 18 Minimum load 5V DC 2 mA reference values OFF ON Approx 10 ms ON OFF Approx 10 ms Response time suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo Output circuit diagram ginpoy ejdsiq supply unit A common number applies to the L of COML 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 305 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL With cover Without cover FX2N 8EYR ES Rear line extension connector eatis Output 5660 indicator di lamps LED lamps hdi AN lt ole lt KA Io 1 H lt FaR ie FX2N 16EYR ES UL When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Without cover Output indicator Q c amps EE EE LED lamps Big Ae a XL E Rear line 2x E extension se Lower E connector an numbers Output indicator 6 e0 z iamos acd J LED lamps SOE lt Higher 2x numbers Ep 5 Er N N 306 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output
305. c shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent electrical shock short circuit breakage of wire or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem For the main unit FX2N Series input output powered extension units blocks and FXoN FX2N FX3u Series special function units blocks an M3 or M3 5 screw terminal block is used 1 Applicable products Product type Model name Main unit All models of FX3U Series main units Input output powered extension unit All models of FX2N Series input output powered extension units All models of FX2N Series input output extension blocks A a except FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C and FX2N 16EYT C Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V Special function unit block Refer to the manual for each special function unit block FX Series terminal block All models Power supply unit FX2N 20PSU 2 Terminal block screw size The size of the terminal screws for each product is shown below For the solderless terminals refer to the following page Product Tightening torque Main unit FX3U Series special function block FX2N Ser
306. cial auxiliary relays M8388 M8198 and M8199 they can be used as 4 edge count counters For the procedures on using them as 4 edge count counters refer to Subsection 11 11 4 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 4 List of Device Numbers and Functions 5 The external reset input terminals are reset when they are turned on When they are used in QT combination with special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8389 they can be reset when turned off For the procedures on changing the external reset input logic refer to Subsection 11 11 3 a 6 C253 is usually used as a hardware counter When it is used in combination with the special auxiliary relay M8388 and M8392 it can be used as a counter C253 OP without reset input In this case C253 OP is handled as a software counter NO BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 185 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 5 Allocation of Device Numbers to Inout Numbers 11 5 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers
307. ct Enables all functions prohibits change test Requires l i l Section 19 22 function functions and protects the top screen time display program The following codes saved at the display device can be used as display commands User message display Alphanumeric 20H to 7DH ASCII code Section 19 21 Section 19 23 Katakana A1H to DFH ASCII code Japanese character Shift JIS Level 1 2 1 There is no test function for Input X 2 A sequence program is required to enable a hexadecimal display of the timer T counter C data register file register D extended register R 16 bit 32 bit and extended file register ER 16 bit 32 bit current values Refer to Section 19 21 for the setting procedure 350 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 5 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 5 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in English When the menu display language is set to Japanese please convert the screen messages to their Japanese translations Refer to Section 19 25 for the Japanese amp English display character correspondence table Refer to Section 19 10 for menu display language setting 19 5 1 Title screen The screen shown at right is displayed for 1 5 seconds after the power is turned
308. ct function setting In this program example the display screen protect function is set to level 2 Use this program as a reference when other level settings are specified In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56 D8300 H System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D90 Initial pulse NN D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to i is Mov K D58 Sets the display screen protect function to level 2 MOV 390 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 22 Display Screen Protect Function 19 22 6 Pointers for using the display screen protect function QF The display screen protect function settings should be specified in a sequence program BS The protect function is enabled by using the display module s monitor test function to change the system information s system signal 1 DLIL 1 8 current value to 1 or 2 NO Once the setting is made it cannot be canceled from the display module 2 e To cancel the setting use the programming tool to change the system information s system signal 1 E DLILI 8 current value to a value other than 1 and 2 z If the system information s system signal 1 DLILI 8 is set in a general purpose data register however T the display screen protect function can be canceled by turning the power off then on ag
309. ctions Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions Mnemonic Function Contact Instruction Initial logical operation contact type NO normally LD open LDI Initial logical operation contact type NC normally closed LDP Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse LDF Initial logical operation of Falling trailing edge pulse AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts ANI Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts ANDP Serial connection of Rising edge pulse ANDF Serial connection of Falling trailing edge pulse OR Parallel connection of NO normally open contacts ORI Parallel connection of NC normally closed contacts ORP Parallel connection of Rising edge pulse ORF Parallel connection of Falling trailing edge pulse Connection Instruction ANB Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits ORB Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits MPS Stores the current result of the internal PLC operations MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Pops recalls and removes the currently stored MPP result INV Invert the current result of the internal PLC operations MEP Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse 1 MEF Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse 1 Supported in Ver 2 30 or later Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions Mnemonic Function Out Instruction OUT Final logical operation type coil drive SET SET Bit device latch ON RST RESET Bit device OFF PLS Rising
310. ctive tem In stopped status Devices used in program A oo Paes owors Dod eee Change of current values of timers counters Devices used in program A 2 3 v 3 data registers extension registers extension When the program memory is the built in 7 RAM Ch fti d 5 When the program memory is in the memory B JEO EUN OTET AN OES cassette and the PROTECT switch is on When the program memory is in the memory L cassette and the PROTECT switch is off 1 Forcible ON OFF The forcible ON OFF function is effective on the input relays X output relays Y auxiliary relays M state S timers T and counters C On the display module the function cannot be operated for the input relays X The forcible ON OFF function can turn on or off the devices only for one scan While the PLC is running the function is substantially effective in clearing the current values of the timers T counters C data registers D index registers Z and V and extension registers R and in controlling the SET RST circuit and self retaining circuit The operation to forcibly turn on timers is effective only when the timers are driven by the program The results of forcible ON OFF operation performed while the PLC in the stopped state or performed for devices not used in the program are retained However the results of the operation performed for the input relays X are not retained because the relays refresh input even while the PLC is in
311. ctly or indirectly using index register BFM initialization function M8318 BFM initialization function D 8319 Error BFM number D 8320 to D 8328 Not used 2 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Timing Clock and Positioning D18329 DUTY FNC186 instruction 919930 Scan counting for timing clock output 1 mces0 D18331 Scan counting for timing clock output 2 M839 218334 a aoe output 3 BOUE D18333 Scan counting fortming clock output 4 M8333 018334 Scan counting for timing clock output 5 M8334 D 8336 DVIT FNC151 instruction M8336 Specification of interrupt input D 8337 to D 8339 Not used iion Y000 Current value register E D 8341 Default 0 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 Number and name D 8342 D 8343 D 8344 D 8345 D 8346 D 8347 D 8348 D 8349 D 8350 D 8351 D 8352 D 8353 D 8354 D 8355 D 8356 D 8357 D 8358 D 8359 D 8360 D 8361 D 8362 D 8363 D 8364 D 8365 D 8366 D 8367 D 8368 D 8369 D 8370 D 83719 D 8372 D 8373 D 8374 D 83753 D 83763 D 8377 D 8378 D 8379 A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Qg Content of register ing special P 3 device T Y000 Bias speed Default 0 Y000 Maximum speed B Default 100000 22 Y000 Creep speed B y Default 1000 8 Lower Y000 Zero return speed Upper Default 50000 YOOO Acceleration time B Default 100 YOOO
312. d by special function units blocks 0 points 128 136 144 160 256 344 384 points Number of remaining points NNNNNNNNNNNI NNNNNNNNNNNI NNNNNNNNNNN RQ WW WN Number of input output points 128 points Number of input output points excluding number of input output points on AS i system Number of input output occupied points Up to 256 points 8 points 240 points Number of remaining points x5 units Number of AS i system input output points Up to 248 points 31 slaves x 8 points 384 points or less in total 81 uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi ov lt DDD S5 X o o o2 oo OL wa shS uoneJnBijuo N SON UN SON uonejjesu Co jndinondu e DUUM A ddng jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 4 Number of Connected Special Extension Devices Including Extension Cable 6 4 Number of Connected Special Extension Devices Including Extension Cable 6 4 1 Expansion board and special adapter The number of connected special adapters is restricted depending on the type of special adapters attached as explained below The number of communication special adapters is restricted depending on the combination of a communication expansion board The number of special adapte
313. d current per common should be as follows e 8 output points common 0 8A or less 15 VA 100V AC 30 VA 200V AC Open circuit leakage current 1 mA 100V AC 2 mA 200V AC Minimum load 0 4 VA 100V AC 1 6 VA 200V AC 1 ms or less ON OFF 10 ms or less Resistance Maximum load load Response time Output circuit diagram A common number applies to the LI of COML FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement QF When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers BS and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Without cover 1 2 Zt Output indicator E 2 lt o lamps eR E E 5 LED lamps i 2 gt lt Bie amp 9 Rear line 2x 3 i extension ower E connector numbers zea 13 31 Output indicator Bz EGJ ae 1 e lamps ris E Gg S Sz 8 3 ed 5j LED lamps IE ze o ee 62 lt P ELS Higher 14 Jz numbers 3153 o es Q 255 2 25 S 98 Si pelewod idnonndu Ow 16 13 3 External dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches sun uoisuejx3 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 17 40 1 58 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO
314. ddng Jewog UOISU9 X3 oo suondo pue Syuf 1X3 Jeuo A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 319 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 1 Product specifications 320 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapter Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring Power supply specifications Item FX2N 16EYS Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications Item FX2N 16EYS MASS Weight 0 3 kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Triac output type Item FX2N 16EYS Output points 16 points Connection unit Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output unit Triac output SSR External power supply 85 to 242V AC Output circuit insulation method Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 3 A point The total loa
315. decimal value Sins entry code M o A to F 0 to 9 es 16 digit registration level at Ex 235 the GX Developer s Al online opera FABOSC25DAECF293 9 3 setting screen AABCDEFF34509345 a pal Mmod ndjnopndu OY sun uoisuejx3 A 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with A or 0 to 9 Pie frst char EXIOABCDEF2 AABCD345 Mb DA e 8 digit hexadecimal value 8 digit wien Geta is v v beginning with B entry code g Ex B1234567 BABCDEF7 8 digit hexadecimal value C beginning with C Ex C8904567 CDEF567F syoo g uoisuaX3 ndnonndu C NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q 369 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 13 Entrycodes 19 13 2 Level specific restrictions screen list v Function enabled A Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed Function disabled Entry Code 8 digits Label entered as the first character at Entry Code input Entry Code 16 digits Selected at GX Developer setting screen Function name All online oe Reading Writing SE operations rohibited writing prohibited P prohibited T vena e a nv e l Test User User registered L T device med if pee Display screen protect function a ee S ipi 7 p O Q 2 zi 3 D 7 O Q 2 3 D o o o Q AEAT ALA S EA
316. dimenSi NS vias ak iaa fce Soctde E tb Pix eee ee uA sas e Bid eee duh obi tee ses 313 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT and FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output essssse 314 16 11 1 Product SpecilICallOris sce toiture E ERR OR Exe ERE RF en ke otlasencan iunctae t tunpx ut ekexu e 2E Rs pha eonun ud 314 16 11 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent ccccceccccssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeesaeeeeeas 315 16 11 3 External dimensions 5 antes ct ine E tio ep E ete ertt tnn Eee i abies ra a e i bier Rector tadta 316 16 12 FX2N BEYER ransistor Output acci ei Opes pam Eris Der Eit Dno ieta c bts aoo sterio teca 318 10 121 Product specilic alors eei oui ese tacet e en cun ede ioco teet ora eb Ens aeree eed Saa foc eae eer 318 16 12 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangment c ccccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeeeeaaas 319 16 12 93 E XtemnmakdimeNSIoN cR TTE E 319 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Trac Output T6 Polnts uii oni o queis ardeo Pads aba eos tese a a sequ 320 16 13 T Product SDOCITICallOFISu 2e e ctun aecdesuusdasud ci sd deut tu Sosa A e neus a d dogdceacas tse noxx aen sued cd dea A 320 16 13 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent ccccececcssseeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeesseeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeas 321 16 15 35 External daltrieblslofiS nsise i ies oot puit m E tA ILI e LM I PEEL UN Lp 321 17 FX3U 1PSU 5V Extension Power Supply Unit 322 Mahe RTOU OMe ctu E ERE
317. driver output rotary encoder In the case of differential line driver wiring Input No of first second Rotary encoder unit SJojuno2 peeds ubiH NO O Exc E Twisted pair i s _ shielded wire _ Non inverted output a FERE Phase A d 1 3 eB S ea ae EE s rounding High speed input x 1 4 special adapter The grounding resistance should be 1004 or less z g 2 E 11 10 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 pelewod indinonndu Ow The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C251 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams sun uoisuejx3 1 When the input terminals of the main unit are used When pulses having a response frequency of 50 k to 100 kHz are captured to the high speed counter using the input terminals X000 to X005 wire the counter as stated below A The wiring length should be 5m 16 4 or less syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo For connecting cables use shielded twisted pair cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side e Connect a bleeder resistance of 1 5kQ 1W or more to the input terminal so that the sum of the load current of the open collector transistor output on the mating device side and the input current of the main unit is 20mA or more NI C Um 1 NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder mE 3j os In the case of sink wiring
318. dule is supplied with the FX3u 7DM display module 349 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL a3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu e N Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue SylUf UOISU9 X3 JBUIO yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 4 Summary of Functions 19 4 Summary of Functions The display module functions are summarized below ltem Reference Top screen time display seca ts Indlcalee Pyne ma unk snierma Edu Subsection 19 5 2 Menu screen functions Input X 5 output Y auxiliary relay M state S timer T counter C data register D 16 bit 32 bit Button Devices l Section 19 7 extended register R and extended file register ER operation Monitor Test 16 bit 32 bit monitor test function Up to 4 data registers D 16 bit 32 bit can be i Section 19 8 and registered registered Section 19 19 Button l ErrorCheck Performs error checks and displays the results l Section 19 9 operation LANGUAGE selects the Selects either Japanese or English as the menu Button l l Section 19 10 menu display language display language operation Contrast Adjusts the contrast 5 to 10 default setting
319. dvance Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high speed counter input terminals Terminal for connecting Output form that can be directly connected i cuum ei NE Open collector transistor output form P applicable to 24V DC Differential line driver output form DUIS OR Set the input voltage of FX3U 4HSX ADP to 5V DC or less 198 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 11 11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 11 11 1 Related devices 1 For switching 1 phase 1 count input counter mode to up count or down count Down Counter Counter Specifying type No device counting C235 M8235 C236 M8236 1 phase C239 M8239 1 count OFF ON 2 For monitoring of up count down count counting direction of 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input counters Down Counter Counter Monitoring Down Counter Counter Monitoring type No device counting type No device counting C246 M8246 C251 M8251 3 For switching high speed counter function Device No Description Reference Contact for changing high M8388 Contact for changing the high speed counter function speed counter function T l l Subsection M8389 Switching of logic of external reset input 11112 M8390 Function switching device for C244 ri M8391 Function
320. e 19 8 1 Monitor mode operation 1 At the menu screen use the and buttons to move the cursor to the Monitor Test item then press OK to display the device 5 XD 16 bit E selection screen shown to the right ee hoo To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC at the menu screen T C DD 32bit 2 Use the and buttons to move the cursor to the User item To cancel the operation and return to the device selection screen R 16bit press ESC Er DR 32bit ER 16bit DER 32bit X 3 Press OK to display the data registers specified by the system information The first time the power is turned on the display begins with device No 1 of the user registered devices At subsequent power ONS the device which was being monitored at the previous operation is displayed If a specified user registered device has been changed the newly specified device is displayed To cancel the operation and return to the device selection screen press ESC Display Content Device comments registered at the PLC are displayed together with the devices If no device comment has been registered the device comment area is left blank 1 2 Device included in the user registered devices 3 Current value 4 Use the and buttons to scroll the user registered devices screen To cancel the operation and return to the device selection screen D 103 D 104 pre
321. e Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3U series manufactured from May 1st 2005 FX3U MR ES Where x x indicates 16 32 48 64 80 from November 1st 2005 FX3U MT ES FX3U MT ESS Where x x indicates 16 32 48 64 80 from February 1st 2006 FX3U 128MR ES FX3U 128MT ES FX3U 128MT ESS FX3U MR DS Where x x indicates 16 32 48 64 80 Standard Remark EN61131 2 2003 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for Equipment requirements and tests fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 2 2003 Models MELSEC FX2N series manufactured from July 1st 1997 FX2N ER ES UL FX2N ET ESS UL Where x indicates 32 48 FX2N 16EYR ES UL from April 1st 1998 FX2N 48ER DS from August 1st 1998 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL from August 1st 2005 FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL to March 31st 2002 compliance with IEC1010 1 from April 1st 2002 Above mentioned products compliance with EN61131 2 Standard Remark IEC1010 1 1990 Safety requirements for electrical The equipment has been assessed as a component for A1 1992 equipment for measurement control fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements and laboratory use of IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 1992 General requirements EN61131 2 1994 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for A12 1996 Equipment requirements and tests fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the r
322. e 170 Decimal to Gray Code Conversion 171 GBIN Gray Code to Decimal Conversion 172 to 175 176 RD3A Read form Dedicated Analog Block 177 WR3A Write to Dedicated Analog Block Extension Function 180 EXTR External ROM Function FX2N FX2NC 457 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Mnemonic Function FNC No Mnemonic Function Others Data Comparison 182 COMRD Read Device Comment Data 223 EN 184 RND Random Number Generation 225 Load Compare gt Ro m 226 Load Compare SD lt 186 DUTY Timing Pulse Generation 227 ww 187 mw 228 Load Compare CS z amp 188 CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check LD 189 HCMOV High Speed Counter Move zen pe i Load Compare S1 lt S2 yore BY 1t MO er te ltlela 230 Load Compare CS1 gt CS2 192 Block Data Addition 232 AND Compare E 193 Block Data Subtraction 233 AND Compare gt Block Data Subtraction 234 AND Compare lt 194 BKCMP Block Data Compare 235 ae 195 BKCMP Block Data Compare CS CS 236 AND AND Compare D SD 196 BKCMP lt Block Data Compare St lt 237 AND Compare S1 197 BKCMP lt gt Block Data Compare SD z Cg 238 AND Compare Si gt 198 BKCMP Block Data Compare Cg 239 EE NN 199 BKCMP gt Block Data Compare gt CS2 Data Comparison Character String Control 240 om OR Compare 200 STR BI
323. e 1m 3 3 E Manual supplied with product Terminal block Connector 4 0 16 Mery 55 2 17 Terminal Layout The extension cable is already connected to the extension block X INTO o o Y INTO NC O of NC X INT1 o o Y INT1 X 9A O O Y 0A X gA O Of Y oA X 0B O OF Y oB OL X B O O Y oB X DOG O O Y DOG S S O Of SS X START O O Y START 330 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 15 FX2N 1PG E External Dimensions 2 94 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 4 0 16 43 1 7 Terminal Layout CLRISTOP DOG 18 1 16 FX2N 10PG External Dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs J Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Labelfor indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Terminal block Connector The extension cable is already connected to
324. e Ote ats eae 369 19 13 2 Level specific restrictions screen list seeesssesesssessseseeeeeeenennenenn nennen 370 T9 19 9 EMILY code storage uic iicet ret db droit taber mcer dui d iu E Lucca E CAR E Pru Qu db dud aan 371 19 13 4 Screens requiring entry codes for access ssssssssssssssssseeeeeenne eene 371 19 195 Gancelirig an entry Code cttam eto retos Voti vens tenuti vebae Dove eom C di duum unes v etd eU ENS edd E UE 372 19 13 6 Enabling an entry code 1eeeelieeeeeeeeee eese nennen enn nn e nen nn nn nes n nna san nia seta ia aaa nnne an 373 19 14 Device AlGlea mv EE 373 19 14 1 Device all cl drl ODCIAON sicaicsc hes Stee te a a e ol eh al ales 373 19 15 Bt at Gs 1 Ko enrages ee eee eee fee ee eee eee eee 374 19 1531 Display Opera O osesicuzeuciulou des ca seta du tco Sie sue ettet uie ate eden gustu ete ata es cee eee 374 1915 2 PEC Status display TIGITIS ose r eoa ne ee ee ee ee 375 19 16 Scan Time Scan Time Display cccccccsseeeceeseeeceeseeeceeeeeceaeeecseseeseagseessageeessaseeessanesenss 376 19 16 1 Scan time display operation c ccccccssececeeececeeseecsaceceaeeesaeeesaeeesaueeseuaeesseaeesseeeesnsceeessoes 376 19 17 Cassette Memory Cassette Transfers cccccecccecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeas 376 19 17 1 Transfer from internal RAM to memory cassette Cassette lt RAM seee
325. e available 355 SFD 1 Use of comparison instruction CMP band comparison instruction ZCP or contact E comparison instruction S8 When the comparison results are necessary for counting operation the value can be compared with time in the main program by using HCMOV instruction just before a comparison command CMP command ZCP command or a contact comparison instruction 1 To compare the value with the high speed counter s changing value and to change the output contact Y use Comparison instruction for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ HSCT instruction pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 2 Use of Comparison instruction for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ HSCT instruction Comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ and HSCT instructions perform comparison and output the comparison results when the relevant high speed counting operation These instructions have limitations on the number of times of use as shown in the following table When the output relay Y has been designated for comparison results the ON OFF status of the output is affected directly until END instruction output is refreshed When the PLC is a relay output type a mechanical delay in operation approx 10ms is caused Therefore use a transistor output type PLC A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Applied instruction Limitation on number of times of use of instruction C Dm HSCS 22 A HSCR Up to 3
326. e inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers For example when C251 is used X000 and X001 are occupied Therefore it is impossible to use C235 C236 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C252 and C254 input interruption pointers 1000 and 1101 pulse catch contacts M8170 and M8171 and SPD ZRN DSZR and DVIT instructions at the same time The same input numbers are allocated to the input terminals on FX3U 4HSX ADP and the input terminals of the main unit of FX3u PLC Use one of the terminals with the same number If both input terminals are being used intended operation cannot be realized because the input terminals on FX3U AHSX ADP and the main unit operate in the OR relation 187 SJojuno2 peeds ubiH NO BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 6 Handling of High speed Counters 11 6 Handling of High speed Counters 11 6 1 1 phase 1 count input 188 Examples of program 1 For C235 X010 e C235 counts the number of times the input terminal X000 Pd switches from OFF to ON while X012 is on X041
327. e main unit and extension units or earlier in extension A T other Connect ihe Ou Nee P units than the main unit Peta 6 Some special extension units blocks do not have power For the details refer to WIRING PRECAUTIONS in Safety Precautions As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit or the input output extension unit to the S S terminal of the input extension block 2 156 terminals When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the extension unit or earlier than the extension unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 5 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type dh 9 5 3 Example of source input common wiring z a An example of source input common wiring is shown below Sink and source input type Buea AC power supply of 2 grounding 100 to 240V syloyl 24y Special adapter O on 2g Ld Breaker F Power supply ON P 3 MC 3 e Sink and x 39 E Emergency S a source l stop 5 2 input 4 RE o m p Input extension power MC IMC 4 Supply I Yee cae WwW SV IOV 24V output g g block Sas EA Power s
328. e o betuietvatudenuiidu Untese funi ast a 183 11 3 3 High speed counter device notations cccccccsecccsscceceeceecesseecesseeseseeseseceseseeessesenseesenseeseess 183 11 4 List of Device Numbers and Functions ccccccecccccseececceseeeccegsecceeeeeseeseessageeesseseeesseeeeeees 184 11 5 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers eeeseeessseesseseeeeen ener 186 TES HAMOCAUON TAD C NEN D DD TT 186 11 5 2 Inhibition of redundant use of input numbers ccc cc cee cceceeceeseeceeceeceeceeseeseeeeseeeesseeeesaeeeenanes 187 11 6 Handling of High speed COUFIEGrs arsin ene Seo RUR EOS RN GRE SS Eom OUT NE HEU bI pha pue ao a DEUM DE 188 Qu E o NE ear T COUML INDUS T PEN 188 ESSA DP MASC3Z COUN OU Mee c e NA foe a ee oa 189 PVC 8 2a MASS 2 COUPE ale sain m E 190 11 7 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 191 11 7 1 Timing of updating of current value ore obe de heec ves acer eles ees 191 11 7 2 Comparison of current value ssesssesssssesssssseseeenen enne nennen nennen nene anne sean sse a renean ns 191 11 8 Conditions for Hardware Counter to be Handled as Software Counter 192 11 8 1 Conditions under which counters are handled as software counters sssussssse 192 11 8 2 Method of confirming operation status
329. e of connector or combination with cable No Suspe conecto ar com tao wiin cable USBA Peripheral device connector RS 422 connector USB cable supplied with MINI DIN 8Pin female FX USB AW or FX3U USB BD FX3u 232 BD D SUB 9Pin RS 232C FX3U 232ADP D SUB 9Pin RS 232C 3 Extension device input output powered extension unit FX3U 422 BD MINI DIN 8Pin RS 422 block and special function unit block connector 2 2 Expansion board special adapter connector ex 422C ABO EJ F gt 232CAB 1 FX3U USB BD USB MINI B connector female D SUB FX 232AWIFX 232AWC FX 232AWC H 8 USB2 0 OPin FX USB AW USB MINI B connector female FX 232CAB 1 USB2 0 EI Fx 422cABo Ell F2 232CAB 2 Half pitch Ex 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H 14Pin FX 232CAB 2 PI Fx 422CABO F2 232CAB iris EX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H In F2 232CAB 1 1 When FX 232AW or FX 232AWC is used the communication baud rate is 19 200 bps or less For details refer to Subsection 3 2 3 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication uh 3 2 1 Programming tool S e The following programming tool supports FX3u Series PLCs S Model name Description Version 8 23Z or later of SWLID5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E supports FX3u 2 GX Developer Although the tool earlier than ver
330. e of relay contacts 1 Main unit input output powered extension units and output extension blocks For the applicable models refer to Chapter 3 The standard life of the contact used for conductive AC loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 times at 20 VA The following table shows the approximate life of the relay based on the results of our life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Example of applicable loads roaa capacity Cocos Magnetic switch manufactured by our company 0 2A 100V AC l 20VA 3 000 000 times S K10 to S K95 0 1A 200V AC 0 35A 100V AC l 35VA 1 000 000 times S K100 to S K150 0 17A 200V AC 0 8A 100V AC E HEN C CONNECT S K180 0 4A 200V AC S K400 FX Series terminal blocks For the applicable models refer to Subsection 3 1 10 The standard life of the contact used for conductive AC loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 times at 35 VA The following table shows the approximate life of the relay based on the results of our life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Example of applicable loads ose capacity pate aL Magnetic switch manufactured by our company 0 35A 100V AC S K10 to S K150 seus ee ee 0 8A 100V AC l 80VA 1 000 000 times S K180 to S K400 0 4A 200V AC 1 2A 100V AC E DOM S S Em S K600 0 6A 200V AC S K800 14 4 4 Procedures for replacing battery 246 When the battery voltage drops while the PLC power is on the BATT
331. e only to one end of bulk wire Wire color red FX 16E 150CAB 1 5m 4 11 Cables for connecting FX Series terminal Flat cables with tube with a 3 FX 16E 300CAB 3m 9107 block ang input output connector 20 pin connector at both ends FX 16E 500CAB om 10 4 For the connection with FX Series terminal FX 16E 150CAB R 1 5m 4 11 block refer to the following chapter Chapter 20 FX 16 32E Round multicore cables with a a A a BU sd uod TB Terminal Block 20 pin connector at both ends FX 16E 500CAB R 5m 10 4 FX A32bE 150CAB 1 5m 4 11 4 nm Cables for connecting A Series Model dica dd uds A6TBXY36 connector terminal block Flat cables with tube that have two 20 pin connectors in 16 point units on the PLC side and a dedicated connector on the terminal block side One common terminal covers 32 input output terminals conversion unit and input output connector FX A32E 500CAB 5m 10 4 type 3 Connectors for making input output cables by users our options The users should prepare the electric wires and pressure bonding tool Applicable electric wire UL 1061 are recommended and tool Our modeiname Details of part E A cine Pressure bonding tool made by DDK Ltd made by DDK Ltd FX2c I O CON for ignea st Solderless connector FRC2 AWG28 0 1mm 35 7 J 4674D Main body flat cable P A020 30S 1 27 pitch 20 core 357J 4664N Attachment FX2c I O CON S Housing HU 200S2 001
332. e operation and returns to the menu screen Disabled Disabled OK alzss the subject devices and returns to the menu screen 3 Press OK or ESC to display the menu screen Clear all devices OK 5 Execute ESC 5 Cancel A11 were cleard device When PLC is running PLC is running 373 SJOJUNOD peeds uDIH m NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 15 PLC Status 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 15 PLC Status The PLC statuses shown below can be displayed from the PLC Status menu Refer to Subsection 19 15 2 for display details Page Title Display Item Version e Program memory type PLC Status 2 3 e Memory cassette s write protect status Program memory capacity Battery voltage CERVI Number of registered comments 19 15 1 Display operation 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the PLC Status item then press OK to display the PLC Status 1 3 screen To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC 2 Use the buttons to swi
333. ed For the input specifications for X000 to X007 of the main unit refer to Section 10 2 11 2 1 High speed input special adapter FX3u A4HSX ADP 1 Performance specifications Item Specification Number of input points 4 points These points are not included in the total number of PLC input output points Input form Differential line receiver equivalent to AM26C32 1 phase 1 input 200kH Z Max input frequency 1 phase 2 input High speed counter operating with hardware counter 2 phase 2 input 100kHz Min pulse width 1 us or more insulation The external wiring of the input block and the PLC are insulated with a photocoupler or a transformer Wiring length Up to 10m 1 The maximum input frequency to the software counters is the same as that of signals to be captured to the input terminals of the main unit For details on the responce frequency refer to Subsection 11 9 2 2 The software counters include hardware counters that operate as software counters For the conditions under which the hardware counters operate as software counters refer to Subsection 11 8 1 2 Internal circuit of input interface Rotary encoder etc High speed input special adapter Twisted pair shielded wire A Equivalent to Phase A B Z dp AM26C32 Q A Inverted output Phase A B Z 1 XOOLI indicates input number of the high speed input special adapter 2 SG of the first unit and SG of the second unit are Class D in
334. ed refer to Subsection 6 3 2 OD 2 FX2N 32ASI M AS i master 28 Calculate the number of remote I O points connected on the network in the following step T When AS i master is used refer to Subsection 6 3 3 ej jndinogndu mJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration 6 3 2 User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used 80 1 Calculation of maximum number of input output points When CC Link master block is used the following maximum number of input output points can be connected Maximum number of Number of input Number of input output occupied CC Link remote I O input output points output points points 384 points A B C D E units 2s F stations in points points Total number of points obtained by formula number of remote 1 0 Maximum number gt Total number of Number of points occupied by of sup input output points special function units blocks stations x 32 points The number is dpi SEEN multiplied by 32 points regardless of sos the number of remote I O points For details refer to Subsection 6 3 1 A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M or FX2N B Number o
335. edge pulse PLF Falling trailing edge pulse Master Control Instruction MC MCR Other Instruction Denotes the start of a master control block Denotes the end of a master control block NOP No operation or null step End Instruction END Program END I O refresh and Return to Step 0 Mnemonic Function STL RET Starts step ladder Completes step ladder 455 eyesse N AJOWS A NO NO apeg gt sooi eq jeioedg CO em em e U co em em e AUR 9poo J9joeJeu2 sr1 uononJjsu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition B Instruction List B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Mnemonic Function Program Flow 00 Conditional Jump 01 Call Subroutine 02 Subroutine Return 03 Interrupt Return 04 Enable Interrupt 05 D ov Disable Interrupt 06 Main Routine Program End 07 WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh 08 FOR Start a FOR NEXT Loop 09 End a FOR NEXT Loop Move and Compare 10 CMP Compare 11 Zone Compare 13 SMOV Shift Move 14 CML Complement 15 BMOV Block Move Move and Compare 16 FMOV Fill Move 17 XCH Exchange 18 BCD Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 19 BIN Arithmetic and Logical Operation x Conversion to Binary 20 ADD Addition 21 SUB Subtraction 22 MUL Multiplication 23 DIV Division 24
336. edures for connecting an extension cable and FX2N CNV BC to the extension cable of the powered extension unit block Separate the case of FX2N CNV BC into two pairs as shown right To separate the case use a precision flathead screw driver Slightly insert the tip of the screwdriver into the part A shown in the right figure and the hook B in the right fig ure will come off 4 places Connect the extension cable on the upstream side C in the right figure Connect the extension cable on the down stream side D in the right figure Fit the upper cover E in the right figure and the lower cover F in the right figure and press down the upper cover until it is hooked Connecting method F connection of input output powered extension unit This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an input output powered extension unit Remove the top cover A in the right figure on the left side of the input output powered extension unit Connect the connector of the extension cable supplied B in the right figure to the exten sion connector Connect the connector of the extension cable supplied B in the right figure to the exten sion connector of the unit to be added right side Fit the top cover A in the right figure 143 md uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Hed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e u
337. eeceseeeeesseeeeseaeeesanes 71 6 Examination of System Configuration 72 6 1 CONTGUIaviON ota Whole System cetera tse eet erste ye ae alee e cuoi eleva Deu issues dereud 72 6 121 Histor system COMPONCINS xoci e a eee ee 73 6 1 2 System configuration with special adapters ee eceecececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeessaeeeesseeeeeeeas 75 6 2 R les Of SYSIEM CONGUNALION uero reece cee datu ere qe E ad cae cr a a sa cae ae IAE 76 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 78 6 3 1 Calculation of number of input output points ccc c ee cccceeeeceeeeeeseeeeeceeececeeecesseeeessesesseeseeeaes 78 6 3 2 Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used 80 6 3 3 Maximum number of input output points when AS i master is USE cccceeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeees 81 6 4 Number of Connected Special Extension Devices Including Extension Cable 82 6 4 1 Expansion board and special adapter ccccceececeececeeeceeeccececeeeceeecaesecaeeeseeeesaessueeseueessgeess 82 6 4 2 Special function units blocks High speed input output special adapter 82 Pa Mel XIGMSION CAI ER TNI TU UTERE 82 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current
338. eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeess Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number Appendix C Character code Appendix C 1 ASCII Code Table rie oi io De ee ot tac ess cao ets l rici a Revised HISTOTY mel 14 Table of Contents Standards Certification of UL cUL standards FX3U main units and FX2N input output extension units blocks supporting UL cUL standards are as follows UL cUL registration number E95239 Models MELSEC FX3u series manufactured FX3U MR ES FX3U MT ES FX3U MT ESS Where x indicates 16 32 48 64 80 128 FX3U MR DS FX3U MT DS FX3U MT DSS Where x indicates 16 32 48 64 80 FX3U 232ADP FX3U 485ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U ADA ADP FX3U AAD PT ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U AHSX ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP Models MELSEC FX2N series manufactured FX2N ER ES UL FX2N ET ESS UL Where x x indicates 32 48 FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Compliance with EC directive CE Marking This note does not guarantee that an entire mechanical module produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with the following standards Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user manufacturer For more details please contact to the local Mitsubi
339. eeseeeeeeeeeerne 392 19 23 2 Shift JIS code arrangement precautions cccccccccssseeccceseeecceecececeuseeeceeseeeeseueeeessasessssaas 392 19 23 3 Displaying a word device current value as a message sssesssseeeeeeeen eene 393 19 23 4 Program example 1 user messages display switching eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 393 19 23 5 Program example 2 buttons of user messages switching 394 19 23 6 Program example 3 user messages plus data display eeseeeeeeeeesesee 395 19 23 7 Character data input PrOCECUIE ccccccccccceeecccesececeeececeeeceeseceeseceesaeeeeseeeeseeeeessueeesaueeeesanes 398 19 24 Operation Error Messages amp Corrective Actions ccccsecceeceeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeneeeeeeas 401 19 24 1 When a Fatal error occurred message appears sssssssesseeeeeen nee 402 19 25 Menu Display Characters Japanese amp English Display Character Correspondence Table 403 Table of Contents FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block 404 20 TOVON ICW eme 406 ZO led Productcorigut aU OI sra a A A N 407 20 2 External Dimensions amp Component NaMes cccccccccsecceceeceeseeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesseeeess 408 20 9 ol STAI ALANIS CIN t ates eet cebet pepe tet ee t
340. efresh and filter adjust REFF instruction ten key input TKY instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction 3 The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction interruption Pulse output positioning DVIT instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Time division Input matrix MTR instruction hexadecimal input HKY instruction digital switch DSW input instruction arrow switch ARWS instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction print ASCII Code PR instruction 4 A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C The current consumption is shown in the table below Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption FX2N 16EX C 24V DC 160 mA 407 SJOJUhOO p ds y iH 3 N BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo
341. en RS 232C RS 422 converter and 2 CLP FX3U programming port FX3u 422 BD uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 45 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 3 Converters and interface v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted A Partial compliance CE UL Model name Description ER NN Marine RS 232C RS 422 Converters FX 232AWC H RS 232C RS 422 converter high speed type 72 B E y Communication speed Applicable to 9 600 to 115 000 bps FX 232AW RS 232C RS 422 converters EXE FX 232AWC Communication speed Applicable to 9 600 19 200 bps USB Interface FX USB AW USB RS 422 converter with 3m 9 10 USB cable eee 1 When the programming software is not applicable to FX3u or FX3uc the converter is applicable only to 9 600 or 19 200 bps 2 Products manufactured in and after July 2004 conform to the overseas standard 3 Products manufactured in and after August 2004 conform to the overseas standard 46 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Generic Specifications 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units 4 1 T
342. ension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 98 2 Enter the specifications for the products to be added Enter the data on the input output extension blocks and special function units blocks to be connected to the input output powered extension unit and calculate the current For the data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 Capacity deri power Nambe O Power Number of PP y I O occupied supply Classification connected Type Power supply M classification units LEE for internal paints supply mA 24V DC mA points FX2N PXim Input output FX2N extension block FX2N products connected to the extension power supply unit PXwrxwrXu g PXwrxwrX g PXwrxwrX g PX Sd 1 Input output occupied points by special function units blocks are excluded 2 For input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER do not include the current consumption by the internal 24V DC Subtract the internal 24V DC current consumption from the service power supply of the input output powered extension unit or the nearest main unit on the upstream side of extension power supply unit When the main unit is on the upstream side refer to Subsection 6 5 1 and 6 5 2 When the input output powered extension unit is on the upstream side refer to Subsection 6 6 1 and 6 6 2 3 A maximum of 8
343. ension block FX2N connector type extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other spesifications Item FX2N BEYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C MASS Weight 0 2 kg 0 44lbs 0 3 kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transistor output type Item FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Output points 16 points Connection unit Removable terminal block M3 screws Connector terminal block Output unit type Transistor sink output External power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation method Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5 A point 0 3 A point EIE The total load current per common The total load current per common should be as follows should be as follows Maximum load load 4 output points common 0 8A or less 16 output points common 1 6A or e 8 output points common 1 6A or less less Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA 30 A DC Minimum load OFF ON 0 2 ms or less for 200 mA at 24V DC ON OFF 0 2 ms or less for 200 mA at 24V DC Response time AU e Ae DC power Output circuit diagram Spo Lal mis in DC power supply unit supply unit 16 FX2
344. ension cable is already connected to the extension block Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C Vertical terminal block M3 screws For a detailed description of wiring refer to the input line connection diagram of Connector terminal block the main unit Sink 24V DC 10 5 mA 24V DC 4 3kQ 3 5 mA or more at 24V DC 1 5 mA or less Approx 10 ms No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Photo coupler insulation LED on panel lights when input Sink input line connection Main unit FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C 16 5 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement QF nm D FX2N 8EX ci With cover Without cover pn Ger 12 yd O F X2n 8E X AE 2N S C POWER In ut Hear line Ap extension 8086 indicator connector a SOS lamps LED lamps 1 3 Ek Sz n ici cS 62 D 62 I eoueua ure N uny 1s9 Bunoouse qnoi FX2N 16EX 15 When an input X number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers moz i f x O and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers Dsg S Sec With cover Without cover FX2N 16EX c 8 a I
345. ents capacity Im Block 0 block to 31 block Points File register capacity 1 Block 0 block to 14 block 500 Points Program capacity 15500 Steps Special Function Memory capacity D Block Special Function Block Settings 8 Blocks Positioning Instruction Settinas 18 Blocks 398 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 23 User Message Display Function FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 Selecting The File Register 1 From the project data list select Device memory then right click and select New at the submenu 2 The New dialog box then appears Click OK Project data list Unset project x be Program Device comment Parameter a PLC parameter amp Device memory Data type Copy ua Delete Program type Project RENAME ta e Lado Not sort Sort data name ascending Sort data name descending Data name Title MELSOF T series GX Developer A Create new data MAIN OK A confirmation dialog box then appears Click Yes PALL SOL I series eh Deveti inset projeri lievice mermoa y MARE T Brit DX pimps Gore Yew qne Qagodrs In prae ee x Dje di 6j 5j A eni EROR z T 3 s fear m acad Rd 3 Enter D1000 at the device then click Display The first No of the file register is selected 4 At the 2 selection boxes next to the inpu
346. equirements A11 2000 of EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 Caution for compliance with EC Directive 1 Installation in Enclosure Please use FX3U PLCs while installed in a shielded enclosure PLCs are open type equipment and should be installed in enclosures when used This is not only for the safety but for the shielding of noise The effect of noise shielding by enclosure is important 2 Caution for Analog Products in use The analog special adapters have been found to be compliant to the European standards in the aforesaid manual and directive However for the very best performance from what are in fact delicate measuring and controlled output devices Mitsubishi Electric would like to make the following points As analog devices are sensitive by nature their use should be considered carefully For users of proprietary cables integral with sensors or actuators these users should follow those manufacturers installation requirements Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used If NO other EMC protection is provided users may experience temporary induced errors not exceeding 10 10 in very heavy industrial areas However Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed with general good EMC practice for the users complete control system users can expect errors as specified in this manual Sensitive analog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling
347. eric name for the following models FX3u 232ADP FX3u 485ADP Generic name for the following models FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U A4AD TC ADP Generic name for FX3U Series extension devices FX2N Series extension devices FX2NC Series extension devices and FXON Series extension devices The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used For applicable devices refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the main unit to be used Generic name for FX3U Series special function blocks Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N Series input output extension blocks FX2N Series special function units and FX2N Series special function blocks Generic name for FXON Series special function block Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N Series input output extension blocks The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used For applicable devices refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the main unit to be used Generic name for the following models FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ER FX2N 32ES FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET D The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used For applicable devices refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the main unit to be used Generic name for t
348. erlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases NCAUTION MEE Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install in a manner
349. erminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 4 Expansion Board 18 4 4 FX3u 485 BD External Dimensions 2 03 2 MASS Weight 20g 0 05lbs OUR holes Unit mm inches Weight 20g eAccessories Two M3 tapping screws for installation of board Label for indication of link station number Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type Terminal resistance 330Q 110Q built in Terminal resistance setting switch 330Q OPEN 1100 18 4 5 FX3u CNV BD External Dimensions 2 3 2 MASS Weight 10g 0 03lbs mounting holes Unit mm inches eAccessories Two M3 tapping screws for as installation of board EM Manual supplied with product 53 5 2 11 19 6 0 78 342 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 5 Power Supply 18 5 Power Supply oz 18 5 1 FX2N 20PSU NO External Dimensions O 2 64 5 ES MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs z mounting holes iG Unit mm inches eInstallation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws _ Accessories Manual supplied with product 4 3 A 2 Terminal block M3 screws Ma sz d 2 sl e o c E 14 4 0 16 358 mounting hole pitch x g 60 2 37 F E pelewog indinojndu O sun uoisuejx3 pM jeje es pAVpave s p s A syoo g UOISUS X3 i
350. ernal power supply turn it ON at the same time with the extension power supply unit or earlier than the extension power supply unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 9 5 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 5 5 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit source input common This example shows a source input wiring common including the extension power supply unit Sink and source input type AC power supply of Class D 100 to 240V S aladani grounding syloyl24v pecial adapter E M Breaker Class D Main unit 1 grounding Power supply ON L MC l a Sink and x Source Emergency input i Stop type 24V DC Input extension power IMC MC block Supply Yvv cca SV IOV 24V output l grounding Special function 5VI0V 24V i Class D I g i grounding Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals As for the details of emergency stop operation see DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Wiring precaution Grounding and power cables should be positioned Sink and Input extension E to exit the unit from above as shown in the figure source block EN poU eee input Xe d
351. ers Hardware counter No C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C244 OP C245 OP C246 C248 OP C251 C253 Conditions under which counters are handled as software counters When DHSCS FNC53 DHSCR FNC54 DHSZ FNC55 or DHSCT FNC280 instruction is used for a hardware counter number the hardware counter is handled as a software counter Ex C235 05 In this case C235 works as a software counter When the index register is used for the counter number designated by DHSCS FNC53 DHSCR FNC54 DHSZ FNC55 or DHSCT FNC280 instruction all hardware counters are handled as software counters Ex C235Z0 DHSCS K100 C235Z0 YOOO When the logic is reversed by the external rest input signal logic change function C253 hardware counter is switched to a software counter Ex The logic of the external reset input signal of C253 is inverted For the inversion of the logic of external reset input signal refer to Subsection 11 11 2 11 8 2 Method of confirming operation status of counters The high speed counter mode hardware or software can be confirmed by checking whether the operation status M8380 to M8387 is on or off 192 For the list of operation status of high speed counters refer to Subsection 11 11 1 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 11 9 Calculation of Response Frequency and Overall Frequency FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11
352. ers and functions of the special auxiliary relays indicated as special M in tables and special data registers indicated as special D in tables are shown below Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the series of the PLC Do not use the undefined blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in the sequence program since they are occupied by the CPU In addition do not activate or write to the devices with brackets on the first letter such as M 8000 or D 8001 in the program For detailed explanation refer to the Programming Manual Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Number and name PLC Status M 8000 RUN monitor NO contact M 8001 RUN monitor NC contact M 8002 Initial pulse NO contact M 8003 Initial pulse NC contact M 8004 Error occurrence M 8005 Battery voltage low M 8006 Battery error latch M 8007 Momentary power failure M 8008 Power failure detected M 8009 24V DC down 438 Operation and function RUN input M8061 Error occurrence M8000 M8001 M8002 M8003 He 1 scan time ON when either M8060 M8061 M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 is ON ON when battery voltage is below the value set in D8006 It is set when battery voltage low is detected ON for 1 scan when detecting momentary power failure Even if M8007 turns ON PLC continues to RUN mode in case
353. es Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch peJewog Indjnojndu Ol FXa 16EX sun uoisuejx3 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoo g JeuiuJe 295 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C 16 5 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapter Item Product type Rated voltage Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Power supply specifications FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N extension block FX2N connector type extension block 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications Item MASS Weight Other 3 Input specifications Item Input points Connection unit Input type Input signal voltage Input signal current Input impedance Input Input ON current sensitivity Input response time Input signal type Input circuit insulation Indication of input operation Input circuit diagram 296 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C 0 2 kg 0 44lbs 0 3 kg 0 66lbs The ext
354. es Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 1 The terminal layout in the main unit is shown below Interpretation 60 Interpretation of terminal block layout Power supply 24V DC service terminals power supply Input terminal e Vacant terminal Do not use LE Test wo De x4 Ds pas xe eos xs AY Te TA po Ds pe D xu xs s xr7 lt REEL Output terminals FX3U 32MR ES ome ed o CONA Output side terminals of FX3u 16MR LI m vo Te T De Ez rove TY DT C7 propria va s ve v7 con vi va Eo vs v7 porri vis pond vis vi Nopn vz vs va vs ve vz Common terminal 4 points common Output terminal Partition Same signal name Partition terminal Indication of Power supply terminals The AC power type has L and N terminals whereas the DC power type has C3 and terminals For external wiring make sure to read the power supply wiring described later Refer to Chapter 9 Indication of 24V DC service power supply The AC power type has 0V and 24V terminals whereas the DC power type shows 0V and 24V since the DC power type does not have the service power supply Do not connect with OV and 24V terminals For external wiring make sure to read the power supply wiring described later Refer to Chapter 9 Indication of
355. essssss 377 19 17 2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal RAM Cassette gt RAM seeeessesse 3 8 19 17 3 Memory cassette amp internal RAM consistency check Cassette RAM ssse 379 19 18 System Information Restrictions From PLC cccccccccsseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeseeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeas 380 19 19 1 System morman dU 2 os oodd impos m ol Si hee MM UU LU EN I E UE 380 19 18 2 System information setting programexample ccccceecceccseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeaueeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeas 381 19 19 User User Registered Device Setting ccccccecccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeesseeeeeeneeeeeeas 382 19 19 1 System information user registered device setting seeeeseeseeeeeeeeneee 382 19 19 2 Precaution when setting 3 or fewer devices sssssssssessseeeeeeeeee eene 382 19 19 3 Program example 1 when 4 devices are displayed as user registered devices 383 19 19 4 Program example 2 when 3 or fewer devices are displayed as user registered devices 384 19 19 5 Program example 3 when 5 or more devices are displayed as user registered devices 385 19 20 Operation Button ON OFF InforrnatlOr oe tes bebe e rese rit Ee RE eo ete verc le ux dM pex uud 387 19 20 1 Various applications 2lseessesssssssesseseeneennene nnne nn nnn nnn nnne nnne nnne nnne nn nnns 387 19 20 2 System i
356. etails refer to Section 6 4 Number of Connected Special Extension Devices Including Extension Cable o d When an expansion board other than F X3u CNV BD is used only 1 adapter can be connected Special adapter up to 10 units Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Expansion analog communication high speed output high speed input board Up to 4 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Only 1 unit Special function unit block Ee to 8 units Input output Special function pe function powered unit block extension unit Input output extension block 1 When an expansion board other than FX3u CNV BD is used up to 9 adapters can be connected 76 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 2 Rules of System Configuration 3 Calculation of current consumption The power is supplied to each connected device from the built in power supply of the main unit the input output powered extension unit or the extension power supply unit There are three types of built in power supplies 24V DC service power 5V DC power and internal 24V DC power The power to be consumed varies depending on the type of product to be added Input output powered extension unit Extension block Extension Extension block some blocks can power supply some blocks can be connected unit be connected Exten
357. etails of each product refer to the product manual Z 1 Analog control v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable 2 Model name e Description Marine oo EMC LVD cUL a EUER Eee ze Analog input 28 eee oe ee ne ae ea ere ee ee EIE 4ch Voltage current input py oly FX2N 8AD Voltage current temperature 7 7 3 thermocouple input aS Q z FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC I Temperature resistance x thermometer sensor input Temperature thermocouple F input FX3U 4DA 4ch Voltage current output Py Of v Analog input output mixed Temperature control Analog output suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A Temperature control resistance FX2N 2LC 2 loops thermometer sensor v v thermocouple For details refer to catalogs or contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric Corporation branch office For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 uejs S e uonenBijuo 2 High speed counter v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable N D m TM Model name Description Marine Z5 FX2N 1HC 1 ch high speed counter 22 For details refer to catalogs or contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric Corporation branch office zz For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 Si uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorne
358. ette S button is ineffective SSS SSS SS pe e SS e O OK The flashing item at the cursor is selected 2 Q 2 When the OK button is pressed an error check is performed The results are displayed on the error display screen shown to the right ErrorCheck Pressing the ESC button on the menu screen cancels the operation No Error and returns the screen to the top screen time display peJewog indinojndu DO When no errors have occurred sun uoisuejx3 3 If some errors have occurred the pages can be switched with the or button 1 Operation When one error has occurred Operation button ErrorCheck Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo ESC The screen returns to the Menu screen 1 1 error effective operation 2 or less 3 NI 2 errors The previous page of the error display screen is or more displayed When more than one error has 1 error occurred ze x Ineffective operation Eom L9 less 4 OS 2 errors The following page of the error display screen is 1 1 S or more displayed 2 OK The screen returns to the Menu screen 3 1 8 Displayed data sSg o 5 9 Displayed data o sm 1 Flag of occurred error 4 gt 4 2 Error name 1 3 Error code 2 1 9 Number of simultaneously occurring errors 3 4 displayed only when more than one error has occurred 4 Pressing the ESC button cancels the operation and returns the screen to the Menu screen ginpoy ejdsiq 2
359. etwork channel switch 5 The channel is specified by either creating or not creating M8179 in setting program ech1 not creating M8179 in setting program ch2 creating M8179 in setting program 441 21 Oz a 0008Q 0008IN sr uononJjsu W s n d jeioeds 9po00 J9joeJeu2 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond Correspond E UE Operation and function ing special ipic Operation and function ing special device device N N Network Counter Up down Counter Counting Direction M 8180 M 8200 C200 M 8181 Not used M 8201 C201 M 8182 M 8202 C202 IM 8183 Data communication error M 8203 C203 Master station M 8204 C204 E Data communication error M 8205 C205 M 8184 i Slave station No 1 M 8206 C206 E M18185 SAN D T MT a Bal M 8208 C208 M 8186 ata communication error M 8209 C209 Slave station No 3 Data communication error Deroo NISZU veiw IN TS Slave station No 4 EOD M 8211 C211 M 8188 Data communication error M 8212 C212 F Slave station No 5 M 8213 C213 x Data communication error M 8214 C214 PUR Slave station No 6 M 8215 CPI EE me E TTE duda Slave station No7 Waa e a a changed to down mode M 8191 Data communication in execution M 8218 C218 ON Down count operation M 8192 M 8219 C219
360. ex register V Z v Possible A Possible under certain conditions Ll Not possible Item not supported by this device Monitored Items Test Items Device COnQSCI Operation Current Setting pin current Setting Direction Value Value Change put P poe ue a eq a e Output Y ee e aren Tae s SONIS c eim qeu v Sues aa LIERE Term D a a cuter sm Extended file register ER DER Pow ie os msnm Index register V Z La eS ee ee a 1 A forced ON or OFF is executed for only one operation cycle and therefore has a considerable effect on the SET RST and self retaining circuits when the PLC is running Moreover a forced ON OFF result is retained for devices Y M S which are not being driven by an OUT instruction etc in the program EN 2 Setting values of timer and counter can be changed when the PLC status is as shown below Program Memory Type RUN STOP Status Setting Change Enabled Disabled Internal RAM STOP Enabled PROTECT switch ON STOP Disabled Memory cassette RUN Enabled PROTECT switch OFF STOP Enabled 3 The following setting changes are possible Changeable Content Setting Description Selectable Setting Values The directly specified value becomes the Without index modifier Direct K H setting value Direct setting With index modifier direct KH index register VO to V7 ZO to Z7 The directly specified numerical value index registers current value becomes
361. extension IMC IMC 4 DOK qd Jo ER CERE D 5V 0V 24V D ul 4 Class D 2 grounding e C Power supply for loads to p S grounding be connected to PLC 25 output terminals As for the details of 6 Sink and emergency stop Source operation see DESIGN Su input PRECAUTIONS at e3 type Safety Precautions field 2 A 1 4 Class D I Special function grounding block eo a Output extension block uonejejsu oo 5V 0V 24V 1 Connect DC power to and terminals The same power 2 Do not connect with OV and 24V source for the main unit extention unit and special function terminals unit block is preferable When using the different power source 3 24V DC supplies power to the S S from the main unit turn ON the perepheral devices power terminal at the input extension block simaltaneously or earlier than the main unit s When turning 4 Some special function units blocks do not OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn have power supply terminal OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time 5 o 5 ae 161 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates
362. f communication error at slave station No 7 Not used Analog Special Adapter D 8260 to D 8269 D 8270 to D 8279 D 8280 to D 8289 D 8290 to D 8299 1st special adapter 2nd special adapter 3rd special adapter Ath special adapter 1 The number of connected FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP and FX3U 4AD PT ADP units is counted from the main unit side FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond ing special device Number and Content of register name Display Module Function FX3U 7DM Control device D for display module pees Default K 1 Control device M for display module Mia Default K 1 Language display setting D 8302 e Japanese KO e English Other than KO LCD contrast setting value yale oes Default KO D 8304 to D 8309 D 8305 D 8306 Not used D 8307 D 8308 D 8309 1 Latch battery backed device RND FNC184 D 8310 Lower RND FNC184 instruction Data for generating random D 8311 Upper Number Default K1 Syntax Circuit Operation or Unconnected I O Designation Error Step Number D 8312 Operation error step D 8313 number latched 32 bit M8068 D 8314 Lower Error step number of M8065 to D 8315 2 Upper M8065 to M8067 32 bit M8067 D 8316 Step number of instruction specifying an unconnected M8316 D 8317 Upper O number dire
363. f input output points of input output 16LNK M powered extension units E Number of input output points occupied by special C Number of input output points of input output function units blocks extension blocks F Number of remote I O stations units connected to CC Link master 1 When seven 32 point type remote I O stations are used the number of CC Link remote I O points reaches the maximum number The number of CC Link points is calculated by the formula 32 points x number of stations even when remote I O stations having less than 32 points are used For details refer to FX2N 16CCL M User s Manual Procedures for calculating number of input output points based on example of system configuration For the main unit input output powered extension units blocks and CC Link remote I O stations the number of input output points and the total number of points are restricted X000 to X027 X030 to X057 X060 to X077 X100 to X117 Input output Input Input Main unit powered extension extension extension unit block block Y000 to YO27 Y030 to Y057 E 24 24 24 24 16 0 16 0 l l 48 points _ 48 points _ 16 points 16 points 8 points 8 points CC Link network Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O 8 points 16 points 32 points Special FX2N 16CCL M function unit Remote I O Remote I O 32 points 32 points Number of input output points occupied by special function units blocks 0 p
364. ff even under the above conditions the life of the relay contact is considerably 104 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb decreased 14 ES 12 2 3 Handling of relay output ix 1 Output terminal E One common terminal is used for 1 4 or 8 relay output points 1 5 The common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems for example 200V AC 100V AC and 24V EI DC 285 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indinojndu eo 2 External power supply Use an external power supply of 30V DC or less or 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards for loads NI 3 Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and external load circuits are electrically insulated between the output relay coil and cum contact The common terminal blocks are separated from one another 7 g Od 4 Display of operation S When power is applied to the output relay coil the LED is lit and the output contact is turned on oo 5 Response time The response time of the output relay from when the power is applied to the coil until the output contact is turned on and from when the coil is shut off until the output contact is turned off is approx 10ms suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO 6 Output current At a circuit voltage of 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards a resistance load of 2A per point or an inductive load of 80VA or less 100V AC or 200V
365. for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Power Supply Specifications dh 9 3 2 DC Power Supply Type 3 o 5 Specifications S em FX3u 16MLI DL FX3u 32MLI DL FX3u 48MLI DL FX3u 64MU DO FX3u 80ML1 DLI Supply voltage 24V DC 2 Allowable supply voltage 3 range 16 8 to 28 8V DC 2g zc 7 D poe ae ITISCITEEDHE Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 5 ms or less a e power failure time Power fuse 250V 3 15A 250V 5A jnpold CY Rush current 35 A max 0 5 ms or less 24V DC 2 24V DC service power B supply S 5V DC built in power 9 500 mA or less supply 4 1 This power consumption is the value maximized by input output extension blocks and special function units blocks connected to the main unit For input output powered extension units blocks power consumption information refer to Section 15 2 suoneouioedgs 2 The power supply is not for external use The current capacity specified above is for the input output extension blocks special function blocks Qi special adapters and expansion boards 3 When supply voltage is 16 8 to 19 2V DC the connectable extension equipment decreases Ss a For details refer to Subsection 6 5 3 or 6 5 4 H o uejs S e uoneJnBijuo N SON HUN SON jndjno indul uonejejsu oo 5 o 5 ae 153 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for
366. functions Perform wiring properly to the FXoN FX2N Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fixthe electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent electrical shock short circuit breakage of wire or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring The examples of wiring are given u
367. gency stop operation see DESIGN Special function block Output extension block SV IOV 24V 1 Connect DC power to and terminals The same power source for the 3 24V DC supplies power to the S S main unit extention unit and special function unit block is preferable When terminal at the input extension block using the different power source from the main unit turn ON the perepheral 4 In the case of the sink input type the S S devices power simaltaneously or earlier than the main unit s When turning terminal is used as the 24 terminal OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the 5 Some special function units blocks do not power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time have power supply terminal 2 Do not connect with OV and 24V terminals 6 Do not connect with 24 and terminals 160 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 6 Examples of External Wiring DC Power Supply Type 9 6 2 Example of source input tcommon wiring z 3 An example of source input common wiring is shown below S Sink and source input type 24V DC 2 sv ov 24V Special MEME mm um Circuit protector AB Sg BEEN 5 Power supply ON E E MC 3 S 4 u Sink and 8 source iEmergency 6 2 input NE 3 stop S mee LT E Input
368. gher Nos Input numbers in the FX2N 16EX C 001 003 005 on7 AA1 443 AAD AA7 p 000 002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG scopre TH 24V DC 20 5 3 Output external wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 1 When connected to an FX2n 16EX C sink output output extension block O00 to LJL 7 Lower Nos A AO to AAT Higher Nos PLC s output No SM 001 203 005 007 AA AA3 AAS AA Vacant 000 002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG terminal COM relearn irene fiii 414 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 6 FX 16EX A1 TB 20 6 FX 16EX A1 TB The FX 16EX A1 TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series input extension block 24V DC Input Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EX C sink input The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications TUSpend High speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instruction processing Input matrix MTR instruction hexadecimal input HKY instruction digital switch DSW instruction arrow switch ARWS instruction Refresh and filter adjust REFF instruction ten key input TKY instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction Time division input Other 20 6 1 Specifications Item AC Input Type Input output circuitry UM i
369. gister entry Entry code andes lt lt Incorrect HIF AL BY The entered entry code does not match the ae Entry Code registered entry code Verify the registered entry cS D Monitor test user registered devices the program 2Eg c X PLC is running RUNI CS Stop the PLC then attempt the operation again 9 g z oo D PENEN Monitor test LaL Cassette E GGAGUIECS Turn the memory cassette s write protected l l status to OFF then attempt the operation again setting change write protected 1 5 Memory cassette Write error x AAI Writing failed Verify that the memory cassette is m transfer properly installed CEE Read error DAAI Reading failed Verify that the memory cassette S ae is properly installed c PLC Status Fatal error 71 3 17 3 amp E rH Monitor test occurred 16 setting change wmz Memory cassette Refer to Subsection 19 24 1 882 transfer for details 9 Memory cassette transfer is set in the WENT g power OFF ON then use the programming com Internal Memory tool to cancel the entry code in the internal RAM 7 e Programs match 7075h23 t L The memory cassette program matches the RAM E Memory cassette Chia oO program lt transfer code then enter the correct entry code A device has been specified that does not exist among the system information system signal 1 The wrong device zzzr UL Z VP N42 is registered Ah xSREITCUx d user registered device monitor devices Chec
370. git format The Year data displays as 2 digit value with a default This can be changed to a 4 digit display by the following programming PAP vov ram oss It is also possible to set the current time with a sequence program Refer to the time setting special devices D8013 to D8019 section of the Programming Manual 368 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 13 Entrycodes 19 13 Entrycodes 9g Entry codes registered at the PLC can be canceled from the EntryCode menu 8 When canceled all operations are enabled Registering or changing entry codes is not possible at the display module The programming tool must be used in advance to register new entry codes NO O 19 13 1 Entry code types amp levels g Entry codes can be entered in 2 ways 8 digit or 16 digit depending on the peripheral device in question a Fora entry code 8 digit 2nd entry code 8 digit 16 digit input Processing is possible only with a peripheral device version compatible with the FX3u PLC 1 3 Foran entry code 8 digit input only SS Processing is possible even with a peripheral device version that is not compatible with the FX3u PLC Sa ce i Peripheral Device Number Registration Entry Code Of Digits Method FX3U Not FX3U Registration Level Ennyi oco Decctipiion Compatible Compatible I By selecting the AT 16 digit hexa
371. guration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 3 Enter the specifications for the products to be added Enter the data on the input output extension blocks and special function units blocks to be connected to the main unit in the following table and calculate the current For the data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 Calculation of current Number of input consumption of built in power output occupied supply points points 5V DC power 24V DC power supply mA supply mA 1 FX3U E Expansion board Number of Classification connected units p Eee Special adapter oe imi Enter the products to the D2 ra MEN main unit Input output extension block ra i FXwPXmEXS PXurxwrkw PXurxwrkw PXurxmrkw PXurxwrkw PXwrxwXw FX3u 7DM e module When connecting the FX3u 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest upstream unit to the FX3u 1PSU 5V is a main unit also enter the current consumption and number of occupied l O points for the input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER that are connected to the FX3u 1PSU 5V Calculate the totals 86 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 5
372. haracter quantity selector signal M 8092 M 8093 M 8094 M 8095 Not used M 8096 M 8097 M 8098 High Speed Ring Counter High speed ring counter operation 2 M8033 in units of 0 1ms 16 bits y MIETO 2 0 1ms high speed ring counter D8099 will operate after M8099 turns ON M 8090 440 Number and name Memory Information Correspond Operation and function ing special M 8101 M 8102 M 8104 M18105 M16106 M18107 IV 8108 Output Refresh Error M 8109 Output refresh error M 8110 M 81 11 M 8112 M 8113 M 8114 M 8115 M 8116 M 8117 M 8118 M 8119 RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 M18120 RS FNC 80 instruction M 8121 is wait n RS FNC 80 instruction M 8122 iu inei 3 RS FNC 80 instruction M 8123 Receive complete flag RS FNC 80 instruction eee i ree flag Me 125 M18126 Computer link ch1 Computer link ch1 Computer link ch1 M 8129 On demand Word Byte changeover RS FNC 80 instruction Time out check flag 3 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or RS instruction is OFF A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8517 device D8107 D8122 D8123 D8127 D8128 D8129 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers
373. he 2 Connect the OV terminal of the main unit or extension system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC unit to the S S terminal of the input extension block including special extension equipment at the same time 5 e zt 5 a 157 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 9 5 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 5 4 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit sink input common This example shows a sink input wiring common including the extension power supply unit When adding an input extension block check the signal name on the terminal block since the sink source type and sink type differ from each ther Sink and source input type AC power supply of Class D 100 to 240V grounding sy ov 24v Special MMC E I 4 LM m4 et Breaker Power supply ON MC Sink and wc E i z source Y emergency input i Stop type 24V DC service E Input extension power MC MC supply yoo ab ELE SV IOV 24V output Special function block 5V IOV 24V Sarna ees els ee KE 4 i sii a Power supply for loads to E be connected to PLC output terminals As for the details of emergency stop oper
374. he enable entry code screen 2 Press the OK button to enable the entry code Or to retain the entry code s canceled status press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Disabled Disabled OK icis the Entry Code and returns to the menu screen 19 14 Device All Clear Make Entry Code valid OK 5 Execute ESC gt Cancel The devices listed below can be initialized contact OFF or current value to 0 from the Clear all devices menu when a PLC STOP status is in effect Output X auxiliary relay special relay M state S timer T counter C data register special data register D extended register R File register D is not a subject device Non subject devices Input Y file register D extended file register ER Subject devices 19 14 1 Device all clear operation 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ClearAllDev item then press OK to display the Clear all devices screen To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC 2 Press the OK button to initialize the subject devices Or to cancel the operation press ESC If the PLC is running at this time a PLC is running message is displayed and the all clear is not executed In this case press OK or ESC to return to the menu screen Button Operation Description ESC Cancels th
375. he user registered device menu Other current values are displayed in a decimal format 2 In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56 User Registered Device Devices Set As User Display Data Length Format No Registered Devices D100 D101 32 Bit 2 D102 16 Bit Hexadecimal 3 D103 16 Bit 3 Program M8002 D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M56 M8002 MOV D8300 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D90 Initial pulse ee wow e User registered device 1 is set as 32 bit data at D101 D100 User registered device 2 is set as 16 bit data at D102 User registered device 3 is set as 16 bit data at D103 M K 1 56 aa User registered device 4 is not mov User MOV K 1 registered device monitoring User message in progress display command M56 M54 I td d Hexadecimal current value appears while user registered device device monitoring screen is displayed monitoring in User message i At other Monitor Test screens the current values and setting values progress display command are displayed in a decimal format M56 M54 384 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 User User Registered Device Setting 19 19 5 Program example 3 when 5 or more devices are displayed as user registered devices Use this program example as a refe
376. he following models FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER Generic name for the following models FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EX Generic name for the following models FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYS FX2N 16EYT C FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H Generic name for FX3U Series special function blocks FX2N Series special function units FX2N Series special function blocks and FX2NC Series special function blocks The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used For applicable devices refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the main unit to be used Generic name for the following models FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA FX3u 20SSC H Generic name for the following models FX3UC 4AD Generic name for the following models FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX2N 1RM E SET FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition Abbreviation generic name FX2N Series special function blocks FXON Series special function blocks Memory cassettes Battery FX Series terminal blocks Extension cables Input output cables Connectors for input output CC Link master Remote I O stations Remote device stations Remote stations Power supply adapter Dedicated power supply AS i master Peripheral devices Programming tool Programming software GX Developer FX PCS WIN
377. he main unit terminal numbers YO10 or more means the numbers from YO10 to the largest number that the main unit has The output numbers of FX3U 16MR ES are YOOO to YOO7 Relay output specifications FX3U 16MR LIS FX3U 32MR LIS FX3su 48MRILIS FXsu 64MRILIS FX3u 80MR LIS FX3u 128MR ES D oroutput 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points Fixed terminal Item Connecting type block Removable terminal block M3 screw M3 screw Output type Relay External power 30V DC or less or 240V AC or less supply 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards 2 A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value l For details on the common terminal for each model Resistance refer to the terminal block layout load Max 1 output point common terminal 2 A or less load 4 output points common terminal 8 A or less e 8 output points common terminal 8 A or less Inductive n aan For the product life refer to Subsection 4 4 2 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 2 4 Min load 5V DC 2 mA reference value Open circuit leakage B current OFF gt ON Approx 10 ms Response time ON OFF Approx 10 ms Circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Display of output l operation LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil Output circuit Load configuration power supply 4 COMO Fuse
378. he positions and number of screws depend on the product Refer to the external dimensions diagram For the external dimensions of the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the external dimensions of the input output extension block see Chapter 16 For the external dimensions of the special function units blocks see Chapter 18 Rear panel Rear panel FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices This section explains the connecting methods for extension devices 8 7 1 Connection of extension devices The connecting method varies depending on the combination of the products i e the main unit expansion board special adapters input output extension blocks and special function units blocks The connecting methods are explained with the following configuration examples Example of configuration Special Expansion FX2N Series input output FXON FX2N FX3U Series adapter board extension blocks special function blocks 1I1 1 PT FX3uU Series main unit Connecting Connecting Connecting Connecting method D method B method A method C FX2N Series FX2N Series input output S block powered extension unit 2N Series special function units Extension cable eF XoN 65EC eF Xon 3OEC
379. his Chapter explains the specifications external dimensions and terminal layout of the main units For the specifications for the input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications for the input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 Generic Specifications Item Specification amplent 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored temperature ambient 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operatin humidity is Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Hz m s mm VIDESUCH Sweep Count for X resistance When installed on 10 to 57 0 035 YZ 10 times When installed 10 to 57 i 0 075 direction a 95700150 98 Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1 000 Vp p noise width of 1 us rise time of 1 ns and period of resistance 30 to 100 Hz Dielectric 1 5kV AC for one minute Compliant with JEM 1021 withstand n l voltage 2 500V AC for one minute Between each terminals and ground terminal Insulation Compliant with JEM 1021 MQ VD resistance 2 2 PEGI Ey UE dace duel Between each terminals and ground terminal Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Grounding Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed Wortang Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessi
380. hout affixed nameplate labels refer to item 1 above are main unit internal batteries Connector ofafijojoji Ref No Month Example Apr 1 to 9 Jan to Sept X Oct Y Nov Z Dec Year Example 2004 Last 2 digits of Western calendar year 22 3 3 Special battery low voltage device amp notification program example Prepare a system which allows constant external monitoring of the battery status using an indicator lamp etc M8005 is i D Y001 is output when a battery low voltage condition occurs Batt ery low voltage e M8006 Battery low voltage is latched e D8005 Battery voltage can be monitored 435 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 22 FX3U 32BL Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 4 Battery Free Operation 22 4 Battery Free Operation FX3U series operation is possible without a battery PLC s internal battery removed when the following conditions are satisfied Refer to the FX3u FX3uc Programming Manuals for details concerning battery free operation 1 Amemory cassette must be installed 2 The following devices must not be used as keep devices Auxiliary relays state for annunciator included timers cumulative type counters data register keep device extended registers 3 The sampling trace function must be disabled 4 The clock function must be disabled 436 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 22 FX3U 32BL Battery User s Manual Hard
381. i Emergency In the case of sink input wiring M Stop 4 Main unit 1 I Q o Q C O 2 0 Q o c UO ga E muc cu ef suoneoyioads Qi Li 24V L4 24V Power supply for loads TE connected to sequencer gS 5 VES SOT d output terminals Sa l As for the details of v8 d aa i gency stop see DESIGN PRECAUTIONS 6 at Safety Precautions s i os Input Bl In the case of source input wiring s 2 impedance 1 7 E 3 E YO Fuse a2 ze o 5V 0V 24V uonejejsu oo 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N 2 Connect the 24V terminal in the case of sink input terminals in any case of 100V AC system and or the OV terminal in the case of source input to 200V AC system the S S terminal on the input extension block As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 5 o 5 ae 155 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 9 5 Examples of External Wiring AC Power Supply Type 9 5 2 Example of sink input common wiring An example of sink input common wiring is given below When connecting input output powered extension units blocks carefully check the signal names on the terminal block because the sink and source i
382. ications 124 Item Specification Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored temperature Anai 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operatin humidity i DEL Complies with EN 68 2 6 Hz 2 mm TEM eR GE nm Sweep Count for X orator 10 to 57 0 035 0t When installed fotos7 oor orection Shock Complies with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1 000 Vp p noise width of 1 us rise time of 1 ns and period of resistance 30 to 100 Hz a 1 5kV AC for one minute Complying with JEM 1021 voltage 2 500V AC for one minute Between each terminals and ground terminal Insulation Complying with JEM 1021 resistance 2 SER OMOR Dy 29N M eget Between each terminals and ground terminal Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Common grounding with a heavy SECOURS electrical system is not allowed 1 bon Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts atmosphere Working f 3 altitude Complies with IEC61131 2 2000m 1 Ground the PLC independently or jointly Another Another RO Independent grounding Shared grounding Best condition Good condition Refer to Section 9 4 Another equipment Common grounding Not allowed 2 For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resis
383. ied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install in a manner which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device connections Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS q DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 121 uononpoJju pueseimee4 M S WEN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo N SON UN SON jndinondu 9 Bull A ddng Jamod ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation
384. ies input output powered extension units M3 FX2N Series input output extension blocks 0 5 to 0 8N m FX2N Series special function unit block FX Series terminal block M3 5 1 M3 5 screws may be used for terminals For details refer to the manual for each special extension device 148 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures dh 3 Wire end treatment The solderless terminal size depends on the terminal screw size and wiring method S Use solderless terminals of the following size S Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 Nem to 0 8 Nem In the case of M3 terminal screw 2 Main unit input output powered extension unit block and special function unit block a When one wire is connected to one terminal ze 3o Terminal Crimp P 3 2m 24 TG SSS or less 3 2 0 13 6 2mm 0 24 Terminal or less Lo e When two wires are connected to one terminal uononpoJju jnpold CY I o 3 2 0 13 D 6 2mm 0 24 s Terminal Crimp 3 less 0 FR screw terminal o 6 3mm 0 25 S or more S o 3 2 0 13 Terminal 6 2mm 0 24 or less 6 3mm 0 25 or more SedINeq jeJaydued pue uoo QI In the case of M3 5 terminal screw FX Series terminal block FX2N 20PSU FX2N 8AD uejs S e O When one wire is connected to one terminal 8 Terminal Crimp o 3 7 0 15 screw terminal E 6 8mm 0 27
385. ifi opat Output input output Coren p l supply for i Type specifi eee supply at supply cation specifications points internal 24V cations startup mA 5V DC DC mA points power E IEEE jnpold CY uononpoJju FX3U SR EMNDS Relay NOU aS Transistor reser en 32 XSABRDS a aa a 345 A aa lo 600 2 I suoneouioedgs Qi oJ v lt DDD mc 20 o o2 oo o DENTES Basen Transistor sink FX3U 80M SSRIS Relay FX3U XS 8ONTDS Transistor Transistor sink PONES E OW PRGANTGSS Tarkon a t 1 n DE the supply voltage of the main unit is 16 8V to 19 2V DC the power supply for the internal 24V a DC is 250mA 2 When the supply voltage of the main unit is 16 8V to 19 2V DC the power supply for the internal 24V DC is 450mA T eu 2 Enter the specifications for the selected main unit a Enter the number of input output points and power supply type of the main unit according to the Aa above table Capacity of 8 Numberof l SORT of soman built in power d Classification connected Type IUe SUDST ORT EL supply ied bd 5 points startup internal 24V units 2 e points mA O 5V DC power DC mA supply mA gt a With built in power FX3U F T supply main unit 2 35 DM gt Example of entry FX3U 32MR DS 5 o lt 5 p Bui 1ndu 89 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manua
386. imits should be configured on the outside of the PLC When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case The output current of 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases CAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions DANGER Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be
387. in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion 461 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Revised History o 9w Revised History Date Discription 7 2005 First Edition The following products are added Main unit of transistor output type FX3U 16MT ES FX3u 16MT ESS FX3u 32MT ES FX3u 32MT ESS FX3U 48MT ES FX3U 48MT ESS FX3U 64MT ES FX3U 64MT ESS FX3U 80MT ES FX3U 80MT ESS Contents are added to product introduction Chapter 3 specifications exter
388. in unit and a transistor output Source type input output powered extension unit block are used O w N eo ST LC co N S s s 3 3 sS S 0 1A 50V x b diode is necessary X11 VX12 VX13 VX14 VX15 VX16 VX17 O N eo ST LO co N lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt gt 3 gt gt gt gt gt V X11 VX12 VX13 VX14 VX15 VX16 VX17 O v N eo St LC co N 99 eo eo e eo e eo aP gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt V V V V V V V V S S OV 24V Input output powered extension unit block a Main unit Transistor output source RESP EE 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET ESS UL Output extension blocks do not have the terminals 232 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 Input output powered extension unit Example of program M8000 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring When a sink input type unit is used O N o t LC Ko LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO 0 1A 50V gt J diode is X61 VX62 VX63 VX64 VX65 VX66 VX67 necessary e N co LO st st st st st st st st AN X61 VX62 VX63 V X64 VX65 VX66 VX67 N co LO co co C co C co CO A Input output powered extension unit FX2N
389. inds of communication functions e Programming communication through RS 232C RS 422 and USB Refer to Data Communication Edition e Simple link between PCs Refer to Data Communication Edition e Parallel link Refer to Data Communication Edition e Computer link Refer to Data Communication Edition e Inverter communication Refer to Data Communication Edition e No protocol communication through RS 232C RS 485 Refer to Data Communication Edition e CC Link Master FX2N 16CCL M Remote device station FX2N 32CCL Refer to the manual for each product e CC Link LT Master FX2N 64CL M Remote I O station Remote device station Refer to the manual for each product e MELSEC I O LINK Master FX2N 16LNK M Remote l O station Refer to the manual for each product e AS i system Master FX2N 32ASI M Slave station Refer to the manual for each product 5 Analog functions The special adapter and special function block for each analog function are connected For information not given in Analog Control Edition Refer to the manual for each product Kinds of analog functions e Voltage current input Voltage current output Temperature sensor input thermocouple and platinum resistance thermometer sensor Temperature control 31 gt Lon o Q Q em o E SeuJeN Hed pue seJnjee J jnpoljd CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi
390. ines ien e Ca ceu o ea ses coe eth acd oes Pes Se Be Geddes 177 10 4 4 Examples of external WIrlng ccccccsseecceceseeeeceeseecceaueeeeseesseeecsuausesesaueeessauseeesseeeeessesuseseneas 178 10 5 Pulse Catch ME T70 t0 METI T Fenena Ere Ra Parvi dea Meo E Pitra op o EDU E DE ed Deae etra bici Ht 179 10 5 1 Allocation of special memories to linput numbers ON duration of input signals 179 10 592 Cautions fer pulse CAG nsus di atcsc eie teo duces ata aeos iesu edo eatenus uctus eus cam een oetea re Satur 179 10 5 3 Examples of external WIrlng ccccccssseccceceseeecceesseecceeusecesseseeecsuacecssaeeeessagseeesseaeeeessesasenenias 180 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 181 PNM A TIL PH EE 181 112 Input SDecIHCalOFTiS fet der cuincterus de aia bien desde tus dimit lectus tionis bres Po tei tumsstesdx labi E R 182 11 2 1 High speed input special adapter FX3U 4HSX ADP ccccceccceceeceeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaaes 182 11 2 2 Cautions in connecting mating device sssaaa aE Na Ea NER ia 182 11 3 Types of Counting and OperatlOns oreet iere ete See c hne oan dees Pet n neta i nva n Rte mure dE cin 183 11 3 1 Classification according to counting method esesssesseeesseeeenenee menn 183 11 522 Types ANG INDUL SIQGMAL fOLTIS u5dasuduasetess tenetis pede oisi d
391. ing cases 5V DC and internal 24V DC are supplied to the products through an extension cable and the current consumption must be calculated Subtract the current consumption at the internal 24V DC as follows Forthe AC power type main unit subtract the current consumption at the internal 24V DC from the 24V DC service power supply Forthe DC power type main unit subtract the current consumption at the internal 24V DC from the power supply for the internal 24V DC The special function units blocks connected to the AC power type main unit or to the 24V DC service power supply terminal of the input output powered extension unit consume the external 24V DC Include the current in the calculation of current consumption When the terminal is connected with an external power supply the current is not included in the calculation of current consumption 100 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 1 6 8 1 A Main units o e Output current mA No Type ped S Input output 5VDC power 24V DC service power points points supply supply 2 AC power supply 24V DC input relay output type Sg PeudeMRES 16 f 3 400 zs pomes 32 78s i PXudSMRES 348 f 24m i e 8h 3332 Fosos w 4040 T 3 AC power supply 24V DC input transistor output type S 8 8 3 400 serie 4 Tene Pos
392. ing the memory cassette turn off power If it is attached or detached while PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause failures malfunctions or fire For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor Before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable turn off power Failure to do so may cause unit failure or malfunctions Before attaching or detaching the following devices turn off power Failure to do so may cause device failure or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension blocks connector conversion adapter and FX Series terminal block Battery and memory cassette 5 DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS Please contact a company certified in the disposal of electronic waste for environmentally safe 238 recycling and disposal of your device 6 TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS Before transporting the PLC turn on power to the PLC to check that the BATT LED is off and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the BATT LED on or the battery exhausted the backed up data may be unstable during transportation The PLC is precision equipment During transportation avoid impacts larger than that is specified in the manual section 4 1 of the PLC main unit Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation check the operations
393. input output devices are added AC Power Type In the following quick reference matrix the value at the intersection of the number of input points to be added horizontal axis with the number of output points to be added vertical axis indicates the remaining power supply capacity 1 Select the input output extension block number of points to be connected to the main unit Check that the number of input output points can be added When connecting the FX3u 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest upstream unit to the FX3u 1PSU 5V is a main unit include the current consumption by the input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER connected to the FXsu 1PSU 5V when calculating the total current consumption of the main unit 1 AC power supply DC input type 1 FX3U 16MR ES FX3u 16MT ES FX3u 16MT ESS FX3u 32MR ES FX3u 32MT ES FX3u 32MT ESS Cupu Example 40 o AC power supply 32 10 Not allowed to add DC input type Q a 100 50 jo MN ED 24 175 125 J75 Z 16 0 0 0 50 Fas 276 225 175 vas e 25 oof so seo asf ro et tool o 5 40 48 56 64 FX3U 16ML FX3U 32ML Sinker o added points Example When a 16 input and 16 output point extension block is connected to FX3u 16 32ML the current of the 24V DC service power supply becomes 150 mA or less gt Co 0 Input 2 FX3U 48MR ES FX3u 48MT ES FX3u A8MT ESS FX3U 64MR ES FX3U 64MT ES FX3U 64MT
394. input type unit is used External wiring Input output powered FX2N 32ET extension unit FX2N A8ET Transistor output sink poc E ae pp In the case of source wiring When a source input type unit is used External wiring Input output powered FX2N 32ET ESS UL extension unit FX2N 48ET ESS UL Transistor output Source 230 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 5 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC52 13 5 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC52 2e This section gives examples of wiring for capturing the ON OFF status of 24 switches to M30 to M37 M40 to 7 M47 and M50 to M57 using MTR instructions 1 Main Unit o Example of program E M8000 Example of wiring In the case of sink wiring 104 BULIM Ses snoueA When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor output sink type in the used main unit o1Asov Y n l i i i 14 lode is X Az died X11 VX12 VX13 VX14 VX15 VX16 VX17 FE AN Q X11 vX12 WX13 vX14 WX15 vx16 vX17 rc N 5 9 Q8 Q8 yE ys ye ys 2 mos AM i AM AN LIN LIN LIN AN oF S gt JE L qs c S S OV 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017 g ps 2g COM3 YO10 YO11 YO12 29 E In the case of source wiring 1 T When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor output source type in the used SOR main unit S D D Ps S
395. instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Time division Input matrix MTR instruction hexadecimal input HKY instruction digital switch DSW instruction inputs arrow switch ARWS instruction Pulse outputs Time division outputs Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction print ASCII Code PR instruction 20 9 1 Specifications 424 Item TRIAC output zu pe Input output circuit Vx AV i a vg 0 015 O A uF conna top lt Photo CO thyristor External wiring Load voltage 85 to 242V AC The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the hie aa 0 3 A point following value dies 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less Inductive 15 VA 100V AC load 36 VA 200V AC Min load 0 4 VA 100V AC j 1 6 VA 200V AC Open circuit 1 mA 100V AC leakage current 2 mA 200V AC Response time 2 2 ms or less Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation Operation indicator LED lights when photo thyristor power is supplied Power 2 7 W 112 mA 24V DC consumption 1 n systems where frequent large load ON OFF switching occurs due to rush currents the root mean square current should be 0 2 A or less Example 0 4A 4 x 0 02 0 42 x 0 7 j V 0 2A 0 02 0 7 10 0 02 0 7 10 Sec Sec Sec 2 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC FX3u Series Progr
396. ion 12 2 4 Max load Inductive load Min load 5V DC 2mA reference value Open circuit leakage current Response OFF gt ON Approx 10ms time ON OFF Approx 10ms Circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Display of output operation LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil Output circuit configuration power supply A common number applies to the Llof COM L1 Number of output points per common terminal e On FX3uU 16MR LIS one common terminal is used for one output point e On models other than FX3u 16MR LIS one common terminal is used for four or eight output points FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring for Relay Output 12 2 2 Product life of relay contacts QF gt The standard life of the contact used for conductive AC loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 23 ok 500 000 times at 20 VA The following table shows the approximate life of the relay based on the results of our life test Test condition On for 1 sec and off for 1 sec Example of applicable loads Magnetic switch manufactured by our company 0 2A 100V AC 20VA 3 000 000 times S K10 to S K95 0 1A 200V AC Load capacity Contact life BuutM 1ndino 0 35A 100V AC l 35VA 1 000 000 times S K100 to S K150 0 17A 200V AC 0 8A 100V AC 80VA 200 000 times S K180 S K400 0 4A 200V AC If rush overcurrent is shut o
397. ion Versions 64000 steps Flash 10 000 l 64000 steps Flash 10 000 l 1st article FXSU FLROM 64 5 14k 8k 16k 32k selectable Ver 2 20 16000 steps Flash 10 000 FAEERE ANSG 2k 4k 8k selectable times 21 1 2 Component names amp external dimensions Model Name Max Memory Capacity 0008Q 00098IN 9p02 J9 96JeUu2 sr UONONISU WwW sooi e eloeds gt 1 FXsu FLROM 64L 7 1 RD LED 2 RD key Reading PLC memory cassette 3 WR LED 4 WR key writing memory cassette PLC 5 Prevent reverse installation slot 6 PROTECT switch 7 Main unit connector 8 Detachment lever 5 6 Units mm inches 1 2 3 1 Prevent reverse installation slot 2 PROTECT switch 3 Main unit connector 4 Detachment lever Units mm inches 427 21 2 Installation amp Removal 21 FX3U FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette and a display module holder FX3U 7DM HLD are installed remove these 7DM items before installing or removing the memory cassette Be sure that the power is OFF when installing removing the memory cassette Connect the memory cassette securely to the prescribed connector A poor connection can cause malfunctions FX3U as shown in the figure to the right ion amp Removal the memory cassette detachment lever ise Ce 9 o _ mm c S So o Qo pum o D then press it all the way in when pressed all the
398. ions are used This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 4 digit 7 segment display 1 Main Unit Example of program M8000 SEGL D100 Y010 Example of wiring In the case of sink wirin 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3U 32MT ES Transistor output sink nj Je k Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder In the case of source wiring 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3U 32MT ESS Transistor output source n Jz ja 10 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder 234 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC 18 2 Input output powered extension unit block or ES Example of program 29 D e M8000 SEGL D100 Y020 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wirin 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output NO O c e ej E Lon a 2 ae Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32bET FX2N 48ET Transistor output sink LaLa k JO BULIM Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueuea ure N uny 1S9 pelewod indinoA
399. iption All devices Returns to the device selection screen oo All devices except x Switches to the test mode when hold for 1 second or longer 355 e Data registers D DD Scrolls upward Press for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling 355 Extended registers If pressed again at the beginning of the device No list the display jumps 5 o m R DR to the end of the device No list n Extended file registers l l sj ER DER Scrolls downward Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling Timer T If pressed again at the end of the device No list the display jumps to the inni f the device No list Counter C Begun Scrolls the display screen upward Hold for 1 second or longer for high Input X speed scrolling If pressed again at the beginning of the device No list the Output Y display jumps to the end of the device No list Auxiliary relay M Scrolls the display screen downward Hold for 1 second or longer for high State S speed scrolling If pressed again at the end of the device No list the 20 display jumps to the beginning of the device No list D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices 19 7 3 Monitor screen amp status display Refer to Section 19 21 for the procedure used to display the current values as hexadecimal values 1 Dat
400. ir mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY EUROPE B V Italian Branch Via Paracelso 12 1 20041 Agrate Brianza MI Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation itmee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V UK Branch Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 e mail automation meuk mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE llan amp Gavish Ltd ISRAEL Automation Service 24 Shenkar St Kiryat Arie IL 49001 Petah Tiqva Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 Fax 972 0 3 924 07 61 e mail iandg internet zahav net TEXEL Electronics Ltd ISRAEL Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel me netvision net il EUROPE GEVA Wiener Stra e 89 AT 2500 Baden Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 e mail office geva at AUSTRIA MITSUBIS
401. ircuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 217 ss ae Output extension block e transistor output source D Budi 1ndjno I peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 4 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type 12 4 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type This section explains the procedures for handling triac output and external wiring There are not triac output type of main units Select from the input output powered extension units blocks Forthe input output powered extension units blocks refer to Subsection 12 4 1 Handling of triac output and Subsection 12 4 2 External wiring precautions For the specifications and wiring examples refer to the specifications for each model For specifications on the input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 For specifications on the input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 12 4 1 Handling of triac output 218 1 Output terminals FX2N 16EYS On the triac output type units blocks one common terminal is
402. ired number of input output points from the following table Be D D Number of Capacity of built in power supply a Input Output PPS 24V DC service E m gen i VI Classification Type specifi specifications output 5V DC power Ore C UnDiy cations points supply mA mA points e a ER Relay Transistor ink 32 Transistor source 32 Rey e Je Pnpoid CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi manun FX3U 64MR ES Relay y P FX3U 64MT ES Transistor sink 64 22 5 FX3U 64MT ESS Transistor source T 25 FX3u 80MT ES Transistor sink 80 FX3U 80MT ESS Transistor source 80 FX3U 128MR ES 128 os O FX3U 128MT ES Transistor sink S FX3U 128MT ESS Transistor source When the number of input output points is insufficient add input output extension blocks 2 Enter the specifications for the selected main unit eu Enter the number of input output points and power supply type of the main unit according to the zz above table em ity of built i Number of NUTS Capacity of built in power SHRP y Classification connected Type input output 5V DC power 24V DC service power supply mA With built in power FX3U supply main unit Example of entry gt FX3U 32MR ES 400 points points units supply mA uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 85 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Confi
403. is already connected to the extension block 328 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 11 FX2N 2LC External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special POWER unit block number Manual supplied with product 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FXen 2LC ES 4 0 16 99 2 17 Terminal Layout Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block PIOS CT ACA CT 18 1 12 FX2N 8AD External Dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 4kg 0 88lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories X Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product H MITSUBISHI FX2n 8AD Terminal block M3 5 screws 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch The extension cable is already connected to the extension block ms ms Fc IE oe 1 F 67 2 64 E mounting hole pitch 8 0 32 Terminal Layout i Ver Eonvssp5 por v6 16 Fouqve 16 kon T VS i5 konv re re ow T 3
404. is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block to prevent fingers from touching terminals thereby improving the safety 2 Side UUUU ETT Nameplate n0000000000 UJUUU 2 DIN rail mounting groove The product model name control number and power supply specifications are shown The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 1 Nameplate 2 DIN rail mounting groove 265 SJOJUnOO peeds uDIH m NO BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I eoueua ure N uny 1s9 4 O c D nN F o o gt Q peJewod jndino ndul sun uoisuejx3 A syoo g uoisuaX3 ndnonndu C NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL EX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER DS 15 3 1 Product specifications 266 1 The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for
405. ital 10 10 e switch of e BCD E AANA A AY A A ZN AN AN A AV AA AN MA ZN ZN AN 1 4 0 1A 50V Ad bpp pop op gH diode is Eq E necessary bp Bunoouse qnoi eoueuea ure N uny 1S9 8 First input group Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET peJewog indinojndu Ol Transistor output sink sun uoisuejx3 A In the case of source wiring When an input output powered extension unit block with transistor output source is used with input output Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo powered extension unit NI Digital 10 10 225 switch of 2 BCD PS aN NNW V V WV v V V V W V VV VY 0 1A 50V Ahh Ahh ppp RE necessar y a 18 ss X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067 BE First input group Input output powered extension unit Transistor output source FX2N 32E T ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 225 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 2 When BIN instructions are used Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 2 digit digital switch to the data register D102 are given below Example of program M8000 K2X010 D102 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring When a sink and source input type unit is used
406. ith Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 234 13 6 1 When SEGL instructions are used ccccccssceecceesecececeeeeeccesseeecauececseeueeeessauseeesaueeeesseneesenseas 234 13 6 2 When BOD instructoris are used iudei seen scc bue eene exse sebo n osa dante sa n BID Row UP SD DONE EGET dest 236 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 238 14 1 Preparation tor Test ODerallODduasccaiesaoieion utu ded tae qd eet an ca stc tas aud oti asciende 239 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF ccccccecccesececeeeeeceeneeeceeeeseaseesaeeeseaeeeseaeeesseeeessaeeeseaaas 239 14 1 2 Connection to built in programming CONNECHOM ccccceecceeesseeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeas 239 14 1 3 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped 240 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON c ccccccecccseeeeceeeeeseecesseeeeseecesseeeeseeeetaneeees 241 14 2 1 Methods of running and stopping ssssesssssesssssseeeeennneneen enne nennen nnne nennen nnns 241 14 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods ccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 242 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running cccccceecceeceesececeeeeeseeceseeeeseeeetaneeees 243 14 31 Sell GiaGnOStle TUMCUOM ENS 243 Q POP MEE uH eR see oe crs Se ed eee 243 14 3
407. ith standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable Model name Description UL Marine im FX3U 7DM Display module that can be incorporated in FX3U Series a E main unit FX3U 7DM HLD Holder and extension cable to fit FX3U 7DM display module E on panel FX 10DM SETO Display module to be connected to peripheral device E connector with cable manual in Japanese supplied FX 10DM E Display module to be connected to peripheral device B connector with cable manual in English supplied 1 Products manufactured in and after May 2005 will comply with the overseas standard For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 3 1 6 G Expansion boards v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable e CE UL Model name Description Marine c FX3U CNV BD Conversion of connector for fitting special adapter fet fir ie FX3U 232 BD For RS 232C communication ca E For RS 422 communication FX3U 422 BD having the same function as that of peripheral device connector incorporated in main unit FX3U 485 BD For RS 485 communication FANEERBNEN 2 FX3U USB BD For USB communication yt E for personal computer for programming 1 Products manufactured in and after May 2005 will comply with the overseas standard For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 suoneouioedgs 3 1 7 H Special adapters 1 Analog functions v Compliance
408. ity count setting is m specified indirectly by D200 292 M8000 9 RUN monitor M100 User message display command fonts 0 CMEA adds a space 20H to the target quantity D200 current value 5 digits to generate 6 character data Saves the generated character data at the user message display position Starts a sub routine program that adds a space 20H to the production quantity CO current value max 5 digits to generate 6 character data Saves the generated character data at the user message display position Continued on next page 395 Sets character data other than Target SEE mE BMOV D1000 E Production and Remaining FEE os m eS Starts a sub routine program that 2 Bunoouse qnoi syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI oo 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 23 User Message Display Function Continued from previous page Starts a sub routine program that adds a space 20H to the ee remaining quantity D201 current ICAL Po value max 5 digits to generate 6 Saves the generated character data at the user message display FEND PO M8000 position wc pns RUN ee omi Lp p owe Hno xo 20 mov o 2 mov e 20 E cue 5 ois Hmo xe 20 g Processing preparation program 74 for data generating program ser ovs rst 01
409. jeutua L 293 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 16 4 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL With cover Without cover T IB FX2N 8EX ES Rear line extension connector C POWER Input indicator lamps LED lamps i FX2N 16EX ES UL When an input X number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers With cover Without cover FX2N 16EX ES UL Input indicator 9 lamps 3 LED lamps ele x S Rear line SR extension connector Lower FXa 16EX l a g Input indicator o numbers 3 k lam 2 i ps E o 70 LED lamps E e O N Higher OX numbers O B 294 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 16 4 3 External dimensions QF FX2N 8EX ES UL 8 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches NO T 2 O o F X2N 8E X ES mo 2 LO Lm d CD POWER ba 2 ofc Kel cO aS Cc 2 E 13 B us s L rJ mnn 3 m e 43 1 7 ce e D e FX2N 16EX ES UL 2 04 5 mounting holes I Unit mm inch
410. jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi OU Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires 2 3 9 Fixthe electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed BD 5 o Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent a electrical shock short circuit breakage of wire or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem uejs S e This chapter explains the followings e Sink source input 24V DC input nput specifications main unit instructions for wiring and examples of external wiring uonenBijuo N e Input interruption function e Pulse catch function SON HUN SON jndjno indul uonejejsu oo 2 a o AO oe O x pw lt 5 Q 163 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 1 Before Starting Input Wiring 10 1 Before Starting Input Wiring 10 1 1 Sink and source input 24V DC input type 164 The input terminals X of the main unit are common to sink source input of 24V DC internal power FX2N Series input output powered extension units blocks have input terminals common to sink source in
411. k Memory Cassette xt pbyh 733 Fs ex Turn the PLC power OFF install the memory is misconnected YvcozU cassette then attempt the operation again The Entry Code FE XE Ict Remove the memory cassette restart the unit I NI consistency check Programs 7 IJ 3h ER The memory cassette program does not match 1 8 don t match the RAM program mem 7 OCO Memory cassette Transfer PARY U amp Lic Transfer successful E go t f completed A ransfer a2 reading writing Transfer iA BL dz UL 7 Check if the memory cassette is properly n failed installed 5 401 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 24 Operation Error Messages amp Corrective Actions 19 24 1 When a Fatal error occurred message appears 402 Operation is possible with the Level C or Level B entry code function restrictions However the system is probably in one of the statuses described below Check these statuses in the order shown below and take the appropriate corrective action Perform an error check at the display module and if an error is active take the appropriate corrective action Refer to Section 19 9 for the error check procedure If a program error is active The fatal error was probably activated due to a program error Use the programming tool to correct the program Refer to Section
412. k 5V 0V 24V L Class D grounding Class D I grounding I TWO wire proximity Sensor grounding 1 2 9 4 D Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the terminal of the main unit Do not connect with 0V and 24V terminals Do not connect 24 terminal 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input 173 dh uononpoJju SeuJeN Wed pueseimee4 M jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo 2 a o AO oe O x pw lt 5 Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input 10 2 7 Examle of external wiring source input DC Power Supply Type Sink and source input type Main unit i 7 Glass D grounding c s L2 g MES NY m B AAY D X1 d Input E 5V IOV 24V impedance Two
413. king conditions Counting through interrupt handling by CPU Each counter must be used within limitations on maximum response frequency and overall frequency Software counters 11 3 2 Types and input signal forms The types and input signals waveforms of high speed counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input are shown below Type of counter Input signal form 1 phase 1 count input Counting direction Down counting or up counting is specified by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 ON Down counting OFF Up counting UP DOWN Up counting or down counting The counting direction can be checked with M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 1 phase 2 count input Phase A Hin 1 edge 1 1 1 1 count Phase B l l Up counting Down counting Mematic up counling or down counting 2 phase according to change in input status of phase AIB 2 count The counting direction can be checked with 4141414141 1 1 1 1 1 M8251 to M8255 Input Phase A ON Down counting OFF Up counting 4 edge count Phase B 1 1 1 1 Down counting 14 1 1 1 Up counting 11 3 3 High speed counter device notations The input terminal assignments for FX3U PLC high speed counters can be switched when used in combination with a special auxiliary relay This section classifies these high speed counter devices under the following notations Note that a
414. l Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 3 Enter the specifications for the products to be added Enter the data on the special function units blocks to be connected to the main unit in the following table and calculate the current For data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 Calculation of current Number of consumption of built in Current input output power supply consumption Type occupied points at startup Internal mA 24V DC mA l FX3U Expansion board Number of Classification connected units points Enter the es pow 0 0 oo connected a to the main unit input output po TC oann DO block FXoONDGNFXSU Of FXONPX2NEX3U ff FXOoN FX2N FX Special SONGS CRS a T FXoNFXaNFEX3SU NENNEN FXoN FX2N FX3U EE FX3uU 7DM F Display module Pf ef Calculate the totals rr E 90 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption dh 4 Determine whether the devices can be connected to the main unit i Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected Sg 1 Calculate the current consumption at startup 2 Current supply at Current consumption l o Total of current e Main unit consumed b
415. l name device Interrupt Disable M8050 input interrupt 000 disable e If an input interrupt or timer M8051 interrupt occurs while a special input interrupt auxiliary relay for that interrupt 1100 disable M8050 M8058 is ON the M8052 interrupt will not operate input interrupt For example turning M8050 ON E i200 disable disables the lOO0L interrupt EE hence the interrupt routine is not M8053 processed even in an allowable input interrupt program area 1300 disable M8054 If an input interrupt or timer input interrupt interrupt occurs while a special B 4 auxiliary relay for that interrupt I40L1 disable M8050 M8058 is OFF M8055 a The interrupt will be input interrupt accepted 1500 disable 4 b The interrupt routine will be M8056 processed promptly if it is permitted by the El FNC umer Aaa 04 instruction However if 7 l6LIL disable the DI FNC 05 instruction M8057 disables interrupts the Timer interrupt interrupt program will not ZOO disable 4 be processed until El FNC 18058 04 permits the interrupts Timer interrupt BOO disable 4 M8059 Counter interrupt Interrupt of 1010 to 1060 disabled disable 4 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Error Detection M 8060 I O configuration error D8060 M 8061 PLC hardware error D8061 M 8062 Not used M 8063 Serial communication error 1 ch1 D8063 M 8064 Parameter error D8064 D8065 D8069 M 8065 Syn
416. l adapter D 8260 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 D 8261 Input data Ch2 Output data Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8262 Input data Ch3 Output data Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 D 8263 Input data Ch4 Output data Ch4 Measured temperature Ch4 Measured temperature Ch4 Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for D 8266 Ch3 1 to 4095 Ch3 1 to 4095 Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for D 8268 Error statu D 8269 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K20 Model code K10 2nd analog special adapter D 8270 Measured temperature Ch LR Measures temperature Ch D 8272 Measures temperature Ch 0 8273 Measures temperature Ch D 8274 D s times for Eu due times for ors etoos o EIE SS D 8276 a E times for UO times for D 8277 mus e times for ONU E times for Ed Elbe D 8279 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K20 Model code K10 3rd analog special adapter D 8280 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 D 8281 Input data Ch2 Output data Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8282
417. l adapters BR eAnalog eCommunication ac 8 eHigh speed output j eHigh speed input As for FXON and FX2N Series refer to individual manuals Options Memory cassette Pc emm eBattery Display module MITSUBISHI MSEE ox eDisplay module eDisplay module holder Manuals supplied with product Each product comes with the installation manual or the User s Manual except the input output powered extension units blocks Installation manual The part names installation procedures and specifications are shown As for the functions and program examples refer to the separate User s Manual OL Edition User s manual The procedures for wiring and installing specifications and functions are explained To use some products separate manuals may be necessary 22 Manual for each use separate volume Refer to the manual for each purpose of use User s Manual Hardware Edition JY997D16501 Model FX3U HW E Details of hardware including input output specifications wiring F X3U installation and maintenance of PLC separate main unit manual Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instructions JY997D16601 Model FX P3 E Details of sequence program including basic and applied FX3U F X3UC instructions and various devices separate manual The manuals for FX3U Series will be available in or after July 2005 User s Manual
418. l pulse System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M56 Specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values which appear at the Monitor Test screen M8000 RUN monitor 19 21 3 Program example 2 specifying a decadal data display format 388 The following program example specifies a decimal display format for current values and setting values which appear at the Monitor Test screen In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56 M8002 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D90 Initial pulse System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M56 Specifies a decimal display format for current values which appear at the Monitor Test screen M8000 RUN monitor FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 22 Display Screen Protect Function 19 22 Display Screen Protect Function The display screen protect function prevents accidental operation by restricting the display module functions The display screen protect function is enabled when no entry code is registered The display screen protect function s protection level is specified in the system information system signal 1 DUILI 8 Refer to Section 19 4 for display module function Refer to Subsection 19 13 5 for the entry code cancel procedure Refer to Section 19 18 for system information
419. l voltage 24V DC 10 aso Input signal current 5 mA 24V DC FE Input impedance 4 3 KQ 33 Input ON current 3 5 mA or more 24V DC S Input sensitivity current TEE E 1 5 mA or less Input response time About 10 ms moz No voltage contact input a S amp Input signal form Sink NPN open collector transistor SBS Source PNP open collector transistor g Input circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler S Indication of input operation LED on panel is lit when there is input e AC power supply type Sink input wiring Source input wiring syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo Input circuit diagram DC power supply type Sink input wiring suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 1 The DC power type applies to the power supply voltage in Power Supply Specifications Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply 2 Do not connect with OV and 24V terminals yoojg jeutua 269 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS 3 Output specifications transistor output type Item FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET DSS Number of output points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit type Transistor source output External
420. le Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 2 Specifications 17 2 1 Generic Specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 17 2 2 Performance Specifications tems Specifications Supply voltage 100 240V AC Allowable supply voltage range 85 264V AC Rated frequency 50 60Hz The allowable momentary power failure time depends on the power supply used e 100V AC power supply system The operation is continued to the momentary power failure for 10 or less ms e 200V AC power supply system The operation is continued to the momentary power failure for 100 or less ms 30A max 5ms or less 100V AC 65A max 5ms or less 200V AC 20W Max Output current 24V DC 0 3A Internal for supply 5V DC 4A 1 The output current is restricted depending on the ambient temprature For details refer to the deratin curve in Section 6 7 Allowable instantaneous power failure time Rush current Power consumption 17 2 3 External Dimensions POWERCO LO T m e FXsu 1PSU 5V mouning hole pitch 9 0 36 55 2 17 17 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution 1 Do not use when combining with a DC power supply type main unit 2 When connecting an input extension block including FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER to the FX3U 1PSU 5V supply the power for it from the 24V DC service
421. le nT8E c 73 0 amp U 7c Incorrect t 7 M AX Entry Code Clear T N 4341 2847 all devices OK Execute OKo5X11 ESC Cancel ESC Ytlb All device TN A2A IWYP were cleard LFL nome Een E EE PLC Status 1 3 PCI R 1 3 Ver Ver Fatal error Pi D occurred z The Entry Code tJ 4R E is not set PLC status 1 3 SEA e PLC operation de EDS Fil BR is limited e fvcwzsd All operation TNT ORLEDS X is unrestricted HIBE C3 O p PLC operation Ee ETE IE s is unavailable en Tugg cC PLC Status 2 3 PCHE 2 3 PLC Status 2 3 PRAM PLC status 2 XEV Ah 7 OFIhAdyF PC amp 8 3 3 PLC status 3 K yFJBR V BRR DY M R ScanTime A4 ScanTime Curr ms HEE ms Scan time display Max ms EXE ms Min ms EuJM ms Memory Cassette Xt fity Nen XX eno cassette Cassette lt RAM XtUdty h RAM o Cassette gt RAM XtJ fty F SRAM Cassette RAM XtUmty RAM n Cassette Cassette RAM XEY ALY h RAM Write E8 amp 32 lt RAM l Please wait EIJA Gassene Cassette RAM AtJheyh gt RAM Read Sic tU RAM 2s Please wait EIJA Cassette Transfer Cassette Transfer IN RAM failed PAARL x bie Cassette RAM XtUftty RAM Verify FRA Please wait Jh Cassette RAM 7 U7 5h25 Programs match j Programs oop z don t match p up 403 SJO UNOD mh peeds ubiIH 3 NO BuutM 1ndino Jo BULIM C3 SOS ShOUEA m I
422. lection screen To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC Test subject selection screen 3 Use the buttons to select the test subject To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press 1 ESC i Test Subject Test Description i2 1 Contact forced ON OFF i3 2 Current value change 3 Setting value change 4 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to register the test subject selection and switch to the test mode To cancel the operation and return to the test subject selection screen press ESC Test Subject 1 No change 2 3 5 Operation varies as shown below depending on the selected test subject a For contact forced ON OFF The contact ON OFF status is highlighted when OK is pressed Status when OK is hold for 1 second or longer Numeric value begins blinking Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the test ESC subject selection screen Disabled Disabled OK Highlights the contact ON OFF status meaning the current value can not be changed b For current value change Use the buttons to change the value as desired then press OK to register the changed value Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the test ESC subject selection screen i Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction x Increases the va
423. lectric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent electrical shock short circuit breakage of wire or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem GHEE S2fcty Precautions EDD Read these precautions before use 4 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electrical shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals externally cut off all phases of the power supply Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard Correctly connect the battery for memory backup Do not charge disassemble heat or short circuit the battery Do not throw it into the fire 238 Doing so may rupture or ignite it 346 Before modifying the program under operation or performing operation for forcible output running or stopping carefully read the manual and sufficiently ensure the safety An operation error may damage the machine or cause accidents Do not change programs in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment such as the programming tool and GOT at the same time Such changes may cause destruction or malfunction of programs in the PLC Reference Before attaching or detach
424. les of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Hexadecimal Input HKY Instructions FNC71 13 4 Hexadecimal Input HKY Instructions FNC71 This section gives examples of wiring for capturing values 0 to 9 and function keys A to F from 16 switches 16 keys to D100 and MO to M5 using HKY instructions Hexadecimal values can be captured 1 Main Unit Example of program M8000 Example of wiring In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor output sink type in the used main unit External wiring In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor output source type in the used main unit External wiring ei Ett RENE ERNEUT 228 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 13 4 Hexadecimal Input HKY Instructions FNC71 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Main unit input output powered extension unit block Example of program M8000 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring When the main unit and a transistor output sink type input output powered extension unit block are used External wiring 24 Input output powered extension unit block Output extension block Transistor output sink 0 Main unit 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the termi
425. les of calculation are given in the heavy line frame Software Magni Response frequency and overall frequency depending counters fication on conditions of instruction to be used ur for Neither HSZ nor Only HSCT Only HSZ instruction Both HSZ and HSCT HSCS calcu HSCT instruction instruction y instructions HSCR lation Counter Counter type Nos HSZ or of response Overall Overall onse Overall TAX Overall HSCT overall nt frequency ipo frequency instruc frequ frequency frequency kHz kHz 1 phase C244 1 count input C245 40 30 numberof numberof instruc instruc 80 1 5 X 60 1 5 X numberof numberof 1 phase instruc instruc 2 count input C249 tion tion 1 edge 2 count phase 40 number of instruc tion 4 30 number of instruc tion 4 2 count 4 edge C254 input count 955 1 When an index register is added to a counter number specified by HSCS HSCR HSZ or HSCT instruction all hardware counters are switched to software counters 2 The high speed counters C244 OP and C245 OP cannot count signals of 10kKHz or more 193 SJojuno2 peeds ubiH NO BuutM 1ndjno 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO a
426. ltage is low a BATT LED lights red while the power is ON and M8005 and M8006 are switches ON Although the battery will continue to function for approximately 1 month after the BATT LED switches ON a replacement battery should be ordered and installed as soon as possible 22 3 1 Battery life amp replacement guidelines FX3u 32BL battery life Approx 5 years ambient temperature 25 C 77 F Guarantee period 1 year after delivery or 18 months after production FX3u 32BL battery replacement period Within 4 to 5 years Although the battery has a 5 year life approx this can vary according to ambient temperature conditions etc and the battery should therefore be replaced after 4 to 5 years Furthermore because batteries are subject to a natural discharge a replacement battery should be ordered in advance with reference to the above replacement schedule 22 3 2 Reading the date of manufacture 1 Reading the optional battery s lot No Batteries with affixed nameplate labels are optional batteries Nameplate Model name Connector LOT 4 4 Year Example 2004 4 L Month Example Apr Last digit of calendar 1 to 9 Jan to Sept year X Oct Y Nov Z Dec 29 COM Oo e o L e co C o SQ 28 ES 6 Lom 5 O er Oo T n nF O D 3 e Q D T Q ro D 2 Reading the battery s year month of manufacture main unit s internal battery Batteries wit
427. lue Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase OK Registers the current value or the setting value and returns to the test subject selection screen c For indirect setting format 359 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIE a3 N Budi 1ndjno JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices 360 D Use the buttons to select the desired setting method refer to table below then press OK to register this selection Changeable E Selectable Setting Values Setting Description Direct setting without index modifier The directly specified value becomes the setting Direct K H Direct value Direct setting with index modifier numeral The directly specified numeicral value index direct K H index register VO to V7 ZO setting registers current value becomes the setting to Z7 value Indirect setting without index modifier data register D extended register R The specified device s current value becomes the setting value i i ith i ifi Indirectl neroet setting AR DO Hose
428. m Circuit blocks which require attention on operation after write during RUN Others 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability Caution Instructions for falling edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse LDF ANDF or ORF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the target device When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse PLF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the device that is set as the operation condition It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse Instructions for rising edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition device is ON Target instructions for rising edge pulse LDP ANDP ORP and pulse operation type applied instructions such as MOVP Contact ON OFF status Instruction for Instruction for while write during RUN is rising edge falling edge executed pulse pulse OFF Not executed Not executed
429. malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension blocks connector conversion adapter and FX Series terminal block Battery and memory cassette 346 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 1 Description of Products Introduction of Related Products 19 1 Description of Products Introduction of Related Products The FX3u 7DM display module can be incorporated in the main unit or can be installed in the enclosure using the FX3U 7DM HLD display module holder Optional Optional MITSUBISHI MELSE Display module holder Extension cable Display module FX3U 7DM HLD Supplied with FX3u 7DM HLD FX3U 7DM Installation on main unit Installation in enclosure The display module can be The FX3u 7DM display module can be installed and used on incorporated into the main unit an outside panel FX3U PLC For a detailed description of the display module holder refer to the FX3U 7DM HLD User s Manual 347 SJOJUNOD peeds ubiH m NO BuutM 1ndjno JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOUEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO J wn pen o lt O
430. mber X October Y November Z December Year Example 2005 Last digit of year 5 1 3 Version upgrade history Manufacturer s Version Contents of version upgrade serial number Ver 2 20 sa First product dd May 2005 Corresponds to FX3UC PLC Ver 2 20 The following instructions are added or their functions are enhanced Ver 2 30 sh nd MEP and MEF instructions are added November 2005 The functions of the MUL FNC 22 DIV FNC 23 and RS2 FNC 87 instructions are enhanced 65 soma uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioeds 6 g o 3 uonenBijuo N SON UN SON Uonel ejsu CO indjno jndu e BuIA A ddng Jamod ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tool GX Developer is applicable to FX3u PLCs from the following version Model name Applicable GX PM pi RAUC PEE Media model name is Developer Remarks version version shown below version Available with Supports FX3uc PLCs Ver 1 00 or later restrictions Model selection FX3UC AP RE GX Developer Ver 8 18U or later Supports FX3uc PLCs Ver 1 30 or later SW IDSC F GPPW J Supports FX3u PLCs SWOIDS5C F GPPW E A ELS F a ELE
431. mm inches gt m n O MITSUBISHI Mi O8O O 0 35 1 38 11 5 Approx 8 5 0 46 a Approx 0 34 For FX3u PLC installation After installing the display module on the main unit the main unit will be approximately 2 5 mm 0 1 higher than the initial height For the other dimensions refer to the dimensional outline drawing of the main unit Unit mm inches 88 5 3 49 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 3 Installation and Removal 19 3 Installation and Removal This section describes how to install and remove the display module 1 Turn off the power of the PLC Before installing or removing the display module be sure to turn off the power to the PLC 2 Remove the top cover While pressing the top cover hook A remove the top cover B as shown in the right figure 3 Install remove the display module Installation Push the display module C down at position E shown in the lower right figure to install the display module on the main unit D Removal Pull the display module outward C to remove the display module from the main unit D 4 Attach the top cover Put side G of the display module s top cover F on the main unit D as shown then push down on the top cover F until it locks into place The top cover of the display mo
432. mmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 3 Output specifications relay output type Item Number of output points Connection type Output unit External power supply Output circuit insulation Indication of output operation Resistance load Max load Inductive load Open circuit leakage current Min load l OFF ON Response time Output circuit diagram 15 8 2 External dimensions ON OFF FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 24 points Removable terminal block M3 screw Relay 30V DC or less 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Mechanical insulation When power is applied to relay coil LED on panel lights 2A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the fol lowing value e 4 output points common terminal 8 A or less e 8 output points common terminal 8 A or less 80 VA For the product life refer to Subsection 4 4 2 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 2 4 5V DC 2 mA reference value Approx 10 ms Approx 10 ms power suppl coM I A common number applies to the L of COM FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 4 94 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 00000000000 80 3 15 UUUUUUDUUUU
433. ms a xm PXX MMTESS 64 fO 822 Fuses 80 4040 i 5 PXsrsOMTIESS 0 aw 22s Input output Output current mA CU eus Number of input Powersupply supply at Soapeme eua 2VDC power apad or uu qo points P PRY fe mA as o z DC power supply 24V DC input relay output type oo ea paoms x mu 6 7 Pevswmos e sa Sim 7 coo so RE DC power supply 24V DC input transistor output type Si FX3U 16MT DS 16 FX3U 16MT DSS 16 8 400 640 FX3U 32MT DS 32 ais F a a 3 Pomes 8 Hm Fosos a 3282 on d 9 PxseiWrDSS a 3282 posms 8 awm TE 1 When the supply voltage of the main unit is 16 8V to 19 2V DC the power supply for the internal 24V sS DC is 250mA 2 2 When the supply voltage of the main unit is 16 8V to 19 2V DC the power supply for the internal 24V 1 0 DC is 450mA 3 When adding the high speed input output special adapters FX3U 4HSX ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP and the analog special function blocks only FXoN 3A FX2N 2AD F X2N 2DA calculate the current supply at startup Bui 1ndu 101 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 2 B Expansion boards No need to calculate Number of input Current consumed mA output occupied m points 5V DC Internal 24V DC iii z Moo MEM C p iim
434. n Disabled Disabled OK Executes the consistency check 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the memory cassette transfer screen PLC is running Result and measures to take The consistency check is not executed if a PLC is running message appears In this case stop the PLC then perform step 3 described above 5 Press ESC to display the menu screen Cassette RAM Verify Programs match Cassette RAM Verify Programs don t match 379 SJOJUNOD peeds ybiIH a3 N BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 18 System Information Restrictions From PLC 19 18 System Information Restrictions From PLC Some of the display module functions require system information settings in order to enable program control of these functions Functions which require the use of system information are listed below e Monitor test function Display screen protect function For hexadecimal display of current value Refer to Section 19 22 for details Refer to Section 19 21 for the setting Operation button ON OFF info
435. n Close C24 NET 10 H NET I CC Link Ethernet 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting 70 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 5 5 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability 5 5 1 Applicable products and versions Model name Compatible versions GOT1000 Series From first product Caution The GOT1000 Series is applicable to the device ranges in FX3u PLCs Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual 5 5 2 Inthe case of peripheral equipment not applicable Model name Compatible versions F940WGOT with built in 2 port interface Ver 1 00 or later from first product F940GOT E with built in 2 port interface Ver 1 00 or later from first product F930GOT E K with built in 2 port interface Ver 1 00 or later from first product F920GOT K with built in 2 port interface Ver 1 00 or later from first product ET 940 with built in 2 port interface Ver 1 00 or later from first product FX 10DM SETO E From first product FX 10DU E Ver 3 00 or later Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in FX2N and FX2Nc PLCs 1 The F940GOT and ET 940 whose version is former than 1 10 do not support the transparent 2 port function of the GX Developer
436. n OP input cannot be programmed Standard Device Switched Device Standard Device Switched Device Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers C244 C244 OP C248 C248 OP C245 C245 OP C253 C253 OP 183 SJojuno2 peeds ubiH NO BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I ale ovo SS Ge Eu RSIS 002 E oo 2 0 5 e mI x oD co o zc gt gt mm 0 00 O 3 8 MS 2 7 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 4 List of Device Numbers and Functions 11 4 List of Device Numbers and Functions For details on the counter number OP refer to Subsection 11 3 3 Counter Device No 1 edge count External reset External start Classification Data Data length type counter 4 edge count Data length inout terminal input terminal 2 1 phase poi C244 0P DPA C245 OP e 248 OPY 3 counter 1 phase CAO 2 count input C248 Software 2 phase 2 count C252 input 1 nz ace 4 184 Hardware counter 1 None None 32 bit bi directional counter 32 bit bi directional None counter Provided C244 8 counter C245 C247 C241 C242 C243 Software C249 cou
437. n jid The directly specified device No index data register D index register VO to specified PM V7 ZO to Z7 device No register s current value becomes the device No specified by the setting value That device s Extended register R index register VO current value becomes the setting value to V7 ZO to Z7 Use the buttons to determine the setting value The content that is changed varies according to the selected setting method as shown below For direct setting or direct setting index register method Use the buttons to change the value as desired then press OK to register the changed value For indirect setting or indirect setting index register method Use the buttons to change the device No as desired then press OK to register the setting value 6 After the setting operation is completed return to the test subject selection screen where the ESC button can then be pressed to return to the monitor screen 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 Output Y auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M state S Forced ON OFF operations are possible for the output Y auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M state S contacts 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose ON OFF sta
438. n a 2 byte character shift JIS code arrangement extends into the next line the system replaces those characters with 2 spaces Ex If a full size character arrangement exists at DL IL 1 16 higher order DLILJ 17 lower order spaces will display at those positions Therefore the use of full size characters shift JIS code should be avoided at the shaded areas shown in the above table 392 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 23 User Message Display Function 19 23 3 Displaying a word device current value as a message QF A numeric value can be displayed at the user message by combining BCD FNC18 ASCI FNC82 and BS BMOV FNC15 instructions Refer to Subsection 19 23 6 for a program example NO 19 23 4 Program example 1 user messages display switching O The following program example is for user messages that appear in accordance with the auxiliary relay M100 E to M102 ON OFF statuses E Note that user messages do not appear when a screen other than the top screen time display is displayed 1 3 1 Operation sz The 3 messages shown below appear in accordance with the auxiliary relay M100 to M102 ON OFF ea statuses cS When auxiliary relays are ON simultaneously the messages appear in the No 1 No 2 No 3 order The following is a program example in which the system information has been assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56
439. n file registers ER Po Y Partial modification of program JD v et PA emer or E sek Modification of whole program batch writing ae Y Writing of parameters to PLC i Y Writing of comments to PLC EE Y 1 Since the writing function is used during running the programming tool must be applicable to the writing function white running such as GX Developer FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection se This PLC does not incorporate consumable parts that are factors in the reduction of service life 8 However the batteries and output relays points of contact have a limited life expectancy NO 14 4 1 Procedures for checking model name O The model name of the main unit can be checked on the nameplate on the right side After extension devices E are connected the nameplate cannot be seen Check the model name in the following places When the terminal block cover output side When the top cover is removed is opened 1 3 ss MITSUBISHI 3 ES D Model name Model name abbreviation ol oo oo oo oo oo a a O c D nN F o o gt Q Output form R Relay
440. n panel 2 Alpoint Resistance The total resistance load current per common should be as follows load 4 output points common 8A or less Maximum load e 8 output points common 8A or less 80 VA 1 T Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 4 4 2 cpp For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 2 4 7359 Open circuit leakage current ES Minimum load 5V DC 2 mA reference values OFF ON Approx 10 ms ON OFF Approx 10 ms 18 Response time suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo Output circuit diagram ginpoy ejdsiq y A common number applies to the L of COML 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 311 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 10 EX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 16 10 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYR With cover Without cover FX2N 8EYR CD POWER Output Rear line bbb indicator extension connector 6650 lamps LED lamps irm ed FX2N 16EYR When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Without cover yr Output indicator B Io 8 lamps T E LED lamps E EE Rear line Be E 1 extension Lower E EA C X connector en E z numbers 2 Output i
441. n speed setting by GX Developer The communication speed can be set in the following position Select Online Transfer setup PC side I F and double click the Serial icon In programming software not applicable to the FX3u Series Communication is executed at 9 600 or 19 200 bps FXau Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability b 5 2 4 Cautions on write during RUN z S In FX3U PLCs write during RUN program changes in the RUN mode is enabled using the following Z programming tools 2 For the operating procedure of and cautions on write during RUN refer to the manual of the used programming tool 2 oo Programming tools supporting write during RUN ze Programming tool Remarks nae Ver 2 00A or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2N PLCs Ver 1 00 or later Ver 7 00A or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2N PLCs Ver 3 00 or later Ver 8 13P or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3UC PLCs Ver 1 00 or later GX Developer Ver 8 18U or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3UC PLCs Ver 1 30 or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3U and VETO 492 0r later FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later Supports write du
442. nal dimensions terminal layout Chapter 4 examination of system configuration Chapter 6 wiring examples for each purpose Chapter 13 etc Main unit of AC power type FX3U 128MR ES FX3u 128MT ES FX3u 128MT ESS Main unit of DC power type FX3U 16MR DS FX3u 16MT DS FX3u 16MT DSS FX3U 32MR DS FX3u 32MT DS FX3u 32MT DSS FX3U 48MR DS FX3U 48MT DS FX3u A8MT DSS FX3U 64MR DS FX3U 64MT DS FX3u 64MT DSS FX3U 80MR DS FX3U 80MT DS FX3u 80MT DSS Contents are added to product introduction Chapter 3 specifications external dimensions terminal layout Chapter 4 examination of system configuration Chapter 6 installation in enclosure Chapter 8 example of power supply wiring Chapter 9 example of input wiring Chapter 10 example of output wiring Chapter 12 etc Input output powered extension unit of DC power type FX2N 48ER DS FX2N 48ET DSS FX2N 48ER D FX2N 48ET D Contents are added to product introduction Chapter 3 examination of system 2 2006 configuration Chapter 6 installation in enclosure Chapter 8 example of power supply wiring Chapter 9 input output powered extension units Chapter 15 etc 8 point type input output extension block FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EX FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H Contents are added to product introduction Chapter 3 examination of system configuration Chapter 6 input output extension block
443. nal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET Output extension blocks do not have the terminals In the case of source wiring When the main unit and a transistor output source type input output powered extension unit block are used External wiring S S OV 24V Input output powered extension unit block Output extension block Trassi output Source EN 8 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET ESS UL Output extension blocks do not have the terminals 229 SJOJUhOO p ds y iH m NO O e O e E 104 BULIM Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueuea ure N uny 1S9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Hexadecimal Input HKY Instructions FNC71 3 Input output powered extension unit Example of program M8000 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring When a sink
444. nal block 1 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 1 Version Upgrade History 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 5 1 Version Upgrade History 5 1 1 Version check method In FX3U PLCs users can obtain the PLC version information by monitoring special data register D8001 decimal number or the PLC version can be checked in PLC Status in the display module For the operating procedure of the display module refer to Chapter 19 D8001 2 2 o l lns i2niind zsssessssescd E dp e i Version information Example Ver 2 20 PLC type Example 24 FX2N F X2NC F Xau F X3uc PLC 5 1 2 How to look at manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be seen from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example FX3U 48MR ES manufacturer s serial number 570001 MITSUBISHI CONTROLLER MITSUBISHI ELCINTIUPDTTDTMN 5 Right side MODEL FX3u 48MR ES 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS671 SERIAL 570001 OF LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ CE ate MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN i P N EE EA E AIST B ES Uzezezezsezezed besssessesejesd T Control number Month Example July 1 to 9 January to Septe
445. nches MASS Weight 0 4kg 0 88lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Terminal resistor 2 resistors for standard cable 2 resistors for high performance cable Manual supplied with product a 9 0 36 lt Terminal block M3 screw for power supply 87 3 43 terminal M3 5 screw for signal terminal 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 75 2 96 mounting hole pitch The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Terminal Layout 335 SJO UNOD peedS uDIL adh NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A syoo g uoisuaX3 idnonndu C N E U o D s CD c xe E lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 24 FX2N 32CCL External Dimensions 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied
446. nd programming Ensure that the communication parameters are correctly set according to their applications e NN network parallel link etc Check programs according to applications e Remote maintenance Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the AT commands Wiring Check the communication cables for correct wiring STOP the PLC and correctly set the parameters During programming each instruction is checked If a syntax error is detected modify the instruction correctly 253 SJO UNOD peedS uDIL adh NO BuutM 1ndino Jo BuuiM O S o c 72 c o D a uny 1S9 eoueua ure N Bunoouse qnoi peJewog indinojndu DO sjluf uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error codes in shaded columns are added in FX3U PLCs Eor eec Operation al Contents of error Action code error occurrence Circuit error M8066 D8066 00 Nero LD LDI is continuously used 9 times or more 6610 instructions instructions 6613 6614 E combination Instruction below is not connected to bus line 6617 STL RET
447. nd qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual his product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under
448. nd spark killer etc parallel to the load Item Guide 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Rated voltage Approx 0 1uF Approx 100 to 1206 Electrostatic capacity Resistance value Reference Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner 208 PLC output contact Diode PLC output contact Manufacturer Rubycon Corporation Inductive load for commutation Inductive load Surge absorber Model name 250MCRA104100M B0325 Limit of normal rotation Inter lock PLC output contact Limit of reverse PLC output rotation contact FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring for Relay Output 12 2 5 Example of external wiring oz Q 25 n p D Qo AC power supply dix a 100 to 240V relay outpu Breaker Power ON Vacant terminal BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA Output extension block relay output I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N
449. nder the following conditions The input output numbers are the actual numbers on the program They may differ from the numbers shown on the product terminals e Some examples show wiring to be used for transistor output They are examples of wiring for the transistor output types of input output powered extension units blocks Product input output specifications Check the product input output specifications when using any example of wiring Products only for sink input and products both for sink input and for source input are available Products for sink output and products for source output are available he examples of programming applied instructions are given based on the allocation of the input output numbers for wiring For the applied instructions refer to the Programming Manual 222 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 SJOJUhOO peeds uDIH m 13 2 1 When DSW instructions are used NO Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 4 digit digital switch to the data register D100 are given below 1 Main unit O e O r E Example of program M8000 Example of wiring In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and output
450. ndicator Fiz EI E lamps s EOE SOE 8 LED lamps O lt Higher 2x numbers Bie EE En OQ NJ 312 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 16 10 3 External dimensions QF FX2N 8EYR 2 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches NO T o gt FX2N 8EYR zu 5 LOO CD POWER T c 6556 es E 6666 t C 2 O E Ja Sz 2 ce J 5 2 N 43 1 7 cg D n FX2N 16EYR I 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 80 3 15 pelewod idnonndu Ow mounting hole pitch sun uoisuejx3 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 313 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 EX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT and FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT and FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 1 Product specifications 314 1 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapter Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Product type FX2N ext
451. ndjnojndu e 18 6 Connector Conversion Adapter 18 6 1 FX2N CNV BC N Sok External Dimensions ss oo 2 3 2 MASS Weight 40g 0 09lbs Gm Installation Screws only MITSUBISHI PAER MODEL EX N CNV BC LOT NO HH suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua 343 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 7 Interface Module 18 7 Interface Module 18 7 1 FX 232AWC H External Dimensions Unit mm inches MITSUBISHI he O ER N 6x Oo FX 232AW C H 80 3 15 25 0 99 18 7 2 FX USB AW MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22Ibs eAccessories Connector Manual supplied with product RS 232C D SUB 25 pin female RS 422 D SUB 25 pin female External Dimensions Unit mm inches 17 0 67 45 1 78 HI MITSUBIS FX USB AW 344 MASS Weight 20g 0 05lbs Accessories Connector USB driver software CD ROM USB cable 3m 9 10 Manual supplied with product RS 422 MINI DIN 8 pin male USB MINI B connector female 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 18 8 Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 8 Display Module
452. nduy Ow Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder In the case of source wiring 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output sun uoisuejx3 Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32bET ESS UL FX2N A8ET ESS UL A Transistor output source n J2 Ja Syoo g uoisuaX3 ndnonndu C 10 NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISU9 X3 oo Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoo g JeuiuJe 235 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 13 6 2 When BCD instructions are used This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 2 digit 7 segment display 1 Main Unit Example of program M8000 D100 K2Y010 Example of wiring In the case of sink wiring 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3U 32MT ES Transistor output sink Ja Js Ji J In the case of source wiring 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3U 32MT ESS Transistor output source Je Js ji J 236 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13
453. nection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends IOMPUd CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires g 29 Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed Oz o Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent 223 electrical shock short circuit breakage of wire or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem 6 This chapter explains the procedures for installing the PLC in enclosure oS The procedures for wiring the input and output terminals are described in the following chapters GE Q e Installation location and layout in enclosure o Procedures for connecting extension devices Procedures for power supply wiring 7 o8 zE 9 DUUM A ddns Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 123 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 1 8 Installation In Enclosure 8 1 Generic Specifications Generic Specif
454. neral data message error cables This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program or check the contents of the operands used in the applied instructions FROM TO error Check whether the specified buffer memories exist in the counterpart equipment Check for the correct connection of extension cables e Check the cable connection between the programming panel PP programming device and the PLC e Check for the correct connection of extension cables Peripheral equipment access error The unit number 0 to 7 of the special function unit block error is put in LU 257 SJO UNOD peedS uDIL adh NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 S o c 72 c o D a uny 1S9 eoueua ure N Bunoouse qnoi peJewog indinojndu DO sun uoisuejx3 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu e NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7 Troubleshooting For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 14 2 For the procedures on operating the display module refer to Chapter 19 For the procedures on operating peripheral devices refer to the manuals for the peripheral devices Fo
455. nfigure the system with an extension power supply unit gl If the calculation results for the internal 24V DC power supply and input output occupied points are negative 7 values the actual input output occupied points exceed the connectable input output occupied points B Reconfigure the system with an input output powered extension unit 3 3 Ze uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 99 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption The following tables show the number of input output points or the number of input output occupied points for each type of device along with the power supply type and current consumption values needed for selecting a product Number of input output points or input output occupied points on each type of device Output current of 5V DC power supply and 24V DC service power supply of main unit and input output powered extension units Current consumed by expansion boards special adapters input output extension blocks special function units blocks and display module 1 The DC power type main unit does not have a 24V DC service power supply Instead it has an internal 24V DC power supply The current consumption is determined differently in the follow
456. nformation operation button ON OFF information eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 387 19 21 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format seessseeeeesse 388 19 21 1 System information specifying a hexadecimal current value display format 388 19 21 2 Program example 1 specifying a hexadecimal data display format 388 19 21 3 Program example 2 specifying a decadal data display format ssseuuesssse 388 19 22 Display Screen Protect FUNCION ceisir EAEE EE E AERE 389 19 22 1 Entry code amp display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions 389 19 22 2 Relationship between entry code amp display screen protect function 389 1922S Enty code IeVels iiaa s docu aee oco A iva end D s aum Dod aa EV ito dd coups ae 390 19 22 4 System information display screen protect function eeeeeesseeseeseseeeeereeee 390 19 22 5 Program example screen protect function setting esseeessseseeeeeenneeerne 390 19 22 6 Pointers for using the display screen protect function seeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 391 19 23 User Message Display Function lessen nennen nnn nnne nnns 392 19 23 1 System information user message display function seeeessees
457. ng OABCDEF2 with A or O to 9 numeral AABCD345 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning B1234567 with B BABCDEF7 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning C8904567 with C CDEF567F A All operations prohibited B Anti plagiarism C Erroneous write prohibited 2 For Ver 2 20 and later 16 digit entry codes are used If an 8 digit entry code is specified processing occurs in the same manner as in versions prior to Ver 2 20 16 Digit dad Serting Entry code Content Entry code Input Example l i s OABCDEF262297529 All online operations prohibited A to F 0 to 9 16 digit value AABCDEBF34523724 2 em n ny B123456789012345 Writing prohibited A to F O to 9 16 digit value 7ABCDEF73DAEB93A oe ER 7 sat F DR Z890445234817567 Reading writing prohibited A to F 0 to 9 16 digit value CDEF567EABDEEA4G 19 22 4 System information display screen protect function 1 System signal 1 Sie Setting y i Content Function Restriction Summary Information Level 1 All functions except the user message display and top screen time display functions are disabled The following functions are disabled monitor test s test function device all clear DLILI 8 2 time change contrast setting memory cassette transfer and menu display language setting All functions are enabled values 2 System signal 2 System signal 2 is unrelated to this function 19 22 5 Program example screen prote
458. ngement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 4 Expansion Board 18 4 Expansion Board 92 18 4 1 FX3u USB BD NO External Dimensions 2 3 2 MASS Weight 20g 0 05lbs E mounting holes Unit mm inches E eAccessories Two M3 tapping screws for installation of board USB 3 driver software CD ROM USB cable 3m 9 10 13 Manual supplied with product lt Connector USB MINI B connector female B 53 5 2 11 d 18 4 2 FX3u 232 BD 14 dE External Dimensions ER 2 08 2 MASS Weight 20g 0 05lbs El i Unit mm inches mounting holes l eAccessories Two M3 tapping screws for installation of board Manual supplied with product Connector RS 232C D SUB 9 pin male pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 om5 o xxo 225 i GAO Terminal Layout SS 1 CD DCD z o 2 RD RXD JE HE 17 o 8 pili Som 810 o 4 5 SG GND o 9 o o 5 6 DR DSR ns 7 Notused S 8 Not used E 9 Not used 18 4 3 FX3u 422 BD suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo External Dimensions 2 3 2 MASS Weight 20g 0 05lbs mounting holes SETA UC Accessories Two M3 tapping screws for installation of board Manual supplied with product Connector RS 422 MINI DIN 8 pin female a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 53 5 2 11 yoojg jeutua 341 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and T
459. nk Remote device station Remote I O station FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification 1 Enter the specifications for the main unit a Capacity of built in power 5 Number of Number of supply Classification connected Type input output 24V DC service 2 units points points power supply power supply mA So am 5 gt Er 35 es With built in power FX3U 48MR ES supply Main unit 3 zi Bo 2 Enter the specifications for the products to be added to the main unit ae S8 Calculation of current S NUTIPELOE Number of consumption of built in i ower s l Classification connected Type inputoutput S i d 4 TERES occupied 5V DC power Internal 24V points points SUI t DC power c dii supply mA amp S 9 FX3u 232 BD FX3U AHSX ADP EAM 30 Sas FX3U FX3U 2HSY ADP ADP 60 EI 5 0O OL Special adapter iom n EM 0 mae FKUAADADP 0 f d 0 FKUAAD ADP 18 9 connected to the main unit OW FX2N 16EX ES UL 16 100 O s gt ee T P Input output 3 ery FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 16 150 S 2 B Special function Se unit block FX2N 10PG 120 0 te Se zE Calculate the totals 400 8 3 Enter the specifications for the input output powered extension unit a z Capacity of built in power Power Number of Number of supply suppl Classification
460. nput indicator F E lamps F 8 LED lamps m POWER CO a d Rear line px II 1 AX B extension 2 E E L 7 connector 1 Lower FXa 16EX a numbers 8 Input indicator Bx EZ e x 8 lamps at f LED lamps EE ps x 17 S pg P Higher sal gt x lt numbers 8 m x O mE E 233 D 7 Be 19 ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 297 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX2N 16EX C 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C When an input X number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers With cover Without cover Input indicator PXa t amp ic h lamps n LED lamps o 0000000 B Sooners Input indicator lamps LED lamps 00000000 16 5 3 External dimensions Connector type Rear line extension connector Terminal arrangement xoja 11 xo xi 2 12 xt xz 3 13 x2 xs 4 14 xs X4 5 15 x4 X5 6 16 x5 Xe 7 17 X6 xr 8 18 x7 9 19 24 10 20 p4 FX2N 8EX 2 04 5 mounting holes 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch WEEDS NE RS 43 1 7 FX2N 16EX 2 04 5 mounting holes 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FXa 16EX 298 Unit mm inches Unit mm inches FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8
461. nput type units blocks and the sink input type units blocks vary in signal names on the terminal block Sink and source input type AC power supply of E OR 100 to 240V syloylz4y Special adapter 9 1 a EEE Breaker m 7 4 Class D Power supply ON ATE grounding L PL 69 MC Sink and ss iB Emergency source a e stop dk 24V DC type gt P service power Input extension supply block output 5V 0V 24V 4 Class D Special function grounding block Class D grounding Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals Sink and xu As for the details of I source i emergency stop input Pay operation see DESIGN E II a vos UM REESE Safety Precautions field Input extension block 5V 0V 24V LEE aaa Et ee Oe 6 Class D 24V DC z j I block amp Supply output ru RUN NEN MG CONCEDAT i 3 In the case of the sink input type the S S terminal is used as the 24 terminal Output eee 4 Some special function units blocks do not have the power OC supply terminal 5VI0V 24V When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in E ot ie ae including any eee Ot ee cien anes Oe ae 5 Do not connect the 24V terminals 24V DC rvi r Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in supply of the main unit and the input output E A d th
462. nst the DIN rail 132 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 5 3 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function unit block 1 Push out the DIN rail mounting hook A in the right fig oiii NEL ure of the input output extension block For input output powered extension units 8 point type input output extension blocks and special extension units blocks this operation is unnecessary 2 Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove B in the right figure onto the DIN rail 3 Push the product against the DIN rail Keep a gap of 1 to 2 mm 0 04 to 0 08 between the products 4 Connect the extension cable For the procedures on connecting the extension cable refer to Subsection 8 7 4 8 5 4 Removal of main unit 1 Open the terminal block covers and a Looedoocooc099096 O remove the protective terminal covers A siete aiite enel in the right figure Eripe ene penu RT BATT c N CO c c 2 Gradually loosen the left and right termi nal block mounting screws B in the right oe Y6 Li Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 figure and remove the terminal blocks ay sees m The terminal block cannot be removed from the FX3u um B 16ML I main unit A 3 Disconnect the e
463. nsumed by extension devices coma somal Since the calculated values of the current consumption of the 5V DC and 24V DC power supplies are negative it is necessary to reexamine the configuration IONPAd Q3 uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi O U D D CES 2h Oo O a S ES v pue UOISJ9A The next subsection explains the procedures for evaluating a reexamined and modified configura tion wa shS uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu mJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 109 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 9 3 Re examination of suitability for configuration 6 Examination of System Configuration 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification When the main unit is short of 5V DC or 24V DC current use an input output powered extension unit Reexamine the system configuration using an input output powered extension unit Example of reexamined system configuration F x3u 2HSY ADP FX3uU 2HSY ADP FX3uU 4HSX ADP gt ills o Z _ E O OO O O O O E ES XxX Z Z l Z LL N N N x lt x lt x LL LL LL LL CC 8 output points 4 input points Link LT Remote device station duel SUpply adapter 110 FX3U A8MR ES FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Extension cable CC Link To CC Link master station CC Li
464. nt 0 5A point The total load current per common The total load current per common terminal should be the following value terminal should be the following value e 8 output points common terminal 1 6 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less A or less e 8 output points common terminal 1 6 A or less 12 W 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA or less 30V DC Min load 0 2 ms or less 200 mA at 24V DC ON OFF 0 2 ms or less 200 mA at 24V DC Resistance Max load load Response time Output circuit diagram A common number applies to the of COM 15 6 2 External dimensions FX2N 32bET 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches QD MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX2y 32ET TRANSISTOR UNIT wave UUUUUUUUUDUU 19 0 36 The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws 276 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D QI g E 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches BD 4 o m tp SQ HE ES OCH CS 9 69 63 ES ES 69 G3 ES 6963 IE Q e 9 69 63 69 9 63 69 9 63 e9 e 63 69 69 3 69 O MC Se eee dooooo00000 MITSUBISHI 32238239 5 557 D 12 ei o MELSECFXA 48ET Ae a 55686885 2 comi YT va ooe y y oel Y C a oa L8 I l Y Ys yz
465. ntact ON OFF status 5 Press ESC to return to the monitor screen 19 7 5 Test mode operation notes When using multiple same number timers T and counters C Operation occurs as follows if multiple timers T and counters C are used in programs which contain CJ instructions and step ladders e When a setting change is performed after switching from the device monitor to the test function mode the setting change is applied to the timer T or counter C which is nearest to Step O When changing the setting values for same number timers T and counters C use the programming tool to change the program 361 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIE a3 N BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 5 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 8 Monitor Test Mode User Registered Devices 19 8 Monitor Test Mode User Registered Devices Regarding user registered devices at Monitor Test menu monitor and test operations can be performed for a maximum of 4 data registers 16 bit 32 bit specified by the system information Refer to Section 19 19 for the user registered device setting procedur
466. nter C250 1 edge count m Hardware 4 edge count n None ee counter 1 edge count 3 Provided 4 edge count z 32 bit 1 edge count 4 ET 4 edge count 4 Sounet Software 1 edge count C253 OP 9 9 Provided Provided counter 4 edge count C254 C255 These counters are handled as software counters depending on working conditions When they are handled as software counters they have limitations on maximum response frequency and overall frequency For the conditions under which they are handled as software counter refer to Section 11 8 For the overall frequency refer to Section 11 9 None When the input terminals of the main unit receive pulses having a response frequency of 50k to 100kHz wire the terminals as stated below The wiring length should be 5m 16 4 or less Connect a bleeder resistance of 1 5kQ 1W or more to the input terminal so that the load current of the open collector transistor output on the mating device side is 20mA or more For the wiring refer to Section 11 10 C244 C245 and C248 are useally used as software counters When they are used in combination with special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8390 to M8392 they can be used as hardware counters C244 OP C245 OP and C248 OP For the procedures on switching the counter function refer to Subsection 11 11 3 The 2 phase 2 input counters are 1 edge count counters When they are used in combination with spe
467. nts 500 steps e Sequence program e GX Developer Extended file registers ERO to ER32767 32768 points 1 The total size of the programs comments file registers must not exceed the maximum capacity of the memory cassette 2 The maximum number of points for the memory capacity comments and file registers can be specified when the FX3U C programming tool is selected The maximum number of points cannot be specified when a programming tool other than the FX3U C is selected FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 21 FXSU FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 4 PROTECT Switch 21 4 PROTECT Switch Asowey o 9Sseg 21 4 1 PROTECT switch setting NO NO Reading from and writing to memory cassette operations can be performed by using the programming tool UJ Because sequence programs are written by an electronic format a special AE g ROM writer and ultraviolet eraser are not required The PROTECT switch must be turned OFF to enable writing so 21 4 2 PROTECT switch operation B 1 Preparing the operation tools z Set the PROTECT switch knob by using the tip of a pair of tweezers a S precision screwdriver or a tool with a tip width of approx 0 8mm 0 04 Shape of tool tip G Do not use objects with round tips as the round tip can easily slip off the ood B switch knob possibly resulting in an incorrect setting C Tool tip Bad O 2 Switch operation procedure 4 A
468. nual Hardware Edition 19 23 User Message Display Function 19 23 7 Character data input procedure User messages are entered and assigned to file registers in advance using GX Developer Messages are displayed by a file register data register transfer with the message being created in place of the numeric values etc 32 data register points are assigned to each message 1 Starting GX Developer To start up GX Developer click the Windows Start button then click Programs MELSOFT Application GX Developer 2 Setting The PLC Model Name New Project Set the PLC series and the PLC Type settings as je 3 TT shown below T m Required Setting Items Setting Content Psi UE PLC series FXCPU C FC im n PLC Type FX3U C a Device memory data which is the same as program data s name is created Setup project name f Setup project name Drive Path Project name H wse Title 3 Parameter Settings To specify the parameter settings select PLC parameter from the project p essssss i Unset project data list Es iin Device comment If the project data list does not display click the toolbar s Display Project sA EEEE data list items ESI Device memory Click the Memory capacity tab to perform file register assignments FX parameter Memor capacity Device PE name l Q assignment PLC system PLC spstem 2 Positioning Memory capacity 16000 Comm
469. o 277 Data Transfer 3 gt 278 RBFM _ Divided BFM Read 279 WBFM _ Divided BFM Write 53 High Speed Processing 2 z 2d 280 HSCT High Speed Counter Compare With Data S S Table 200 281 to 289 Extension File Register Control 290 LOADR Load From ER EN 291 SAVER Save to ER Ur 292 INITR Initialize R and ER C 293 LOGR Logging R and ER 294 RWER Rewrite to ER 295 INITER Initialize ER 2 296 to 8 299 P 459 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers C Character code User s Manual Hardware Edition C 1 ASCII Code Table ENEN 9w Appendix C Character code Appendix C 1 ASCII Code Table y ASCII Code 5C symbol is displayed as Y even if the language display setting at FX3U 7DM is set to English LANGUAGE ENGLISH The Character at ASCII Code 7E is not displayed 1 ASCII code table 7 bit code expressed in hexadecimal Example A becomes 41H hexadecimal number by ASCII code mamma o T T7 T135 4 5 9 7 5 9 819 T9 5 T elole m BE re L a AA E a p eelse settee ee ee erts ne oe SES NE NS r displayed Lee mM dum cj NNRNNENEAE ea EN eT Se 2 Examples of ASCII codes n m Ol EC W P olol eo oF AOIN Decima Mom upset Wu asm 460 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Warranty o Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product
470. o FX2N 48EL Total current Analog special function block FXON 3A FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA doma rs 50mA nil Sm lt 300mA units units units mA 4 Determine whether the devices can be added to the input output powered extension unit Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected 1 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 24V DC power supply 24V DC service power supply The value obtained by this calculation when the value is positive indicates the remaining capacity of 24V DC service power supply and the capacity can be used for external loads MO SUD Current consumption Calculation result Input output powered Total of current consumed by extension unit extension devices 2 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply ppc aN Current consumption Calculation result Input output powered Total of current consumed by extension unit extension devices If the calculation results for the current consumption of the 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply are negative values the current consumption exceeds the capacity of the built in power supply Reconfigure the system adding input output powered extension units or extension power supply units 96 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V
471. ock function block function unit function unit unn FX2N 10PG FX2N 64CL M FX2N 1RM FX2N 1RM FX2N 32ET ESS UL IOMPUd CY uononpoJju Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 4 input 4 input 4 input points output points output points I CL1X4 D1B2 CL1XYA4 DT1B2 CL1XY4 DT1B2 suoneouioedgs Unit numbers are assigned to the special function units blocks in the above configuration as shown below Qi Unit No Input output Input output SES PES l ut outpu ut outpu i 99 opecial adapter expansion Main unit extension block extension block function 829 board XE a FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 64MR ES FX2N 16EX FXoN 16EYT block FX3U 232 BD ES UL ESS UL FX2N 4AD i Unit No Unit No Unit No No 3 uejs S e Input output m Special Special pa ia ion function block function block function unit function unit E m m as D FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 10PG FX2N 64CL M FX2N 1RM FX2N 1RM Station No 1 Z5 4 input a cO 23S gt g CL1X4 D1B2 CL1XY4 DT1B2 CL1XY4 DT1B2 P B uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 119 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 7 2 3 Application of unit number labels 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y and Unit Numbers 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Units Blocks 120 The special function units blocks come with unit numbe
472. of the PLC 238 434 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3U Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Manual revision Bo 2 2006 Foreword This manual contains text diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation safe use and operation of the FX3U Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit And store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Outline Precautions This manual provides information for the use of the FX3u Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained a
473. of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install in a manner which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device connections Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC 17 1 Introduction When the internal power supplied from the FX3U Series PLC AC power supply type is insufficient for powering output extension blocks or special function blocks the FX3u 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit is available Up to two units of FX3u 1PSU 5V may be connected in one system Connect extension equipment to the FX3U 1PSU 5V according to the configuration specification limits described in Subsection 17 2 2 For the system configuration with FX3u 1PSU 5V refer to Chapter 6 For the mounting refer to Chapter 8 For the wiring refer to Chapter 9 322 17 FX3U 1PSU 5V Extension Power Supply Unit 17 2 Specifications FX3u Series Programmab
474. off all phases of the power supply Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard Correctly connect the battery for memory backup Do not charge disassemble heat or short circuit the battery Do not throw it into the fire Doing so may rupture or ignite it Before modifying the program under operation or performing operation for forcible output running or stopping carefully read the manual and sufficiently ensure the safety An operation error may damage the machine or cause accidents Do not change programs in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment such as the programming tool and GOT at the same time Such changes may cause destruction or malfunction of programs in the PLC STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Before attaching or detaching the memory cassette turn off power f it is attached or detached while PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause failures malfunctions or fire For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor Before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable turn off power Failure to do so may cause unit failure or malfunctions Before attaching or detaching the following devices turn off power Failure to do so may cause device failure or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension blocks connect
475. ogether with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install in a manner which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device connections Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 162 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition g WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION s o Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply in the main unit and extension units from the outside Such power supply may cause damages to the product 2 Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal in
476. oints changeable 2 Data register For keeping 16 bits D512 to D7999 7488 points D1000 and later in 7488 points of fixed 32 bits when data register for keeping can be set as mam aired Heo idee Ms file register points in 500 point units b E P File register D7999 points g p po y a changing the parameter settings 25 a For special 16 bits D8000 to D8511 512 points For index 16 bits ke u 16 points E Extension register 16 bits RO to R32767 EE Retained by battery during power failure ERO to 32 68 Usable only when memory cassette is Extension file register 16 bits ER32767 moaned For branching of l For CJ instructions and CALL JAMP and CALL PO to P4095 j 4096 points ii structions Input interruption and Pointer input delay IOLILI to ISL TL 6 points interruption i Timer interruption 6O00 to 1800 Counter interruption 1010 to 1060 For HSCS instructions Nesting For master control NO to N7 For MC instructions IOMPUd CY e pmj o e c S O 2 suoneouioedgs Qi l 16 bits 32 768 to 32 767 Soo Decimal number K Sg 32 bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 2 g SR e Hexadecimal number 16 bits 0 to FFFF H 32 bits 0toFFFFFFFF Constant 128 126 126 128 Decimal point and exponential notations are possible uejs S e O o Designation by characters enclosed with Character string Character string Up to 32 one byte characters can be used for a 3i
477. oints 128 144 160 2 Number of remaining points Number of input output points 128 points Number of input output points excluding remote I O points on CC Link Number of input output occupied points Up to 256 points RQ QQAAA MRQQQQQQQQAAT MQQQQQQQQAAT MQQQQQQQQAAT MRQQQQQQAQDAAT MW MQQQQQAASAA MRQQQQQQQQAAT MQQQQQQQQAAT Number of CC Link input output points Up to 224 points 384 points or less in total FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 6 3 3 Maximum number of input output points when AS i master is used 1 Calculation of maximum number of input output points When AS i system master block is used the following maximum number of input output points can be connected Maximum number of Number of input Number of input output occupied Number of active slaves input output points output points points 384 points A B C D E units 8 points x 8 points Total number of points obtained by Number of points occupied by formula number of active slaves x 8 points Maximum number gt of points controllable on The number is calculated by system multiplying by 8 points regardless of the number of input output points of the active slaves Total number of input output points special function units blocks For details refer to Subsec
478. ol depending on the type of the programming tool and the registered keyword 2 Cautions in using peripheral devices not applicable to 2nd keyword A sequence program for which the second keyword has been registered with a programming tool GX Developer earlier than Ver 8 23Z cannot be cleared 259 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL a3 NO BuutM 1ndjno 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb O c D nN F o o gt Q pelewod indinoAnduy QI sun uoisuejx3 A syoo g uoisuaX3 ndnonndu C NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition ENEN 1 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units 260 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS DESIGN PRECAUTIONS WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 2 3 4 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning l
479. ollers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 11 2 Function switching switching of logic of external reset input signal The external reset input for the counters C241 to C245 C247 to C250 and C252 to C255 resets the counters when it is turned ON If the logic is inverted by the following program the counters can be reset by turning OFF the input Counter No Inversion of logic of external reset input signal C241 to C245 C247 to C250 C252 to C255 Details of change The logic of external reset input is inverted to reset the counters when the input is turned OFF The logic for all applicable counter numbers is inverted Cautions in inverting the logic of the external reset input signal Although C253 is a hardware counter it is switched to a software counter by inverting the logic of the external reset input signal 11 11 3 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals When the software counters C244 C245 C248 and C253 are combined with the following special auxiliary relays the allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed Program the special auxiliary relays just before the counters Counter No When used as hardware counter Details of change e The count input terminal is changed from X000 to X006 e Reset input is not given e Start input is not given The counter functions as a hardware counter M8388 0393 D M8388 C244 OP The count inp
480. on If the calculation results for the current consumption by 5V DC is a negative value add an extension power supply unit FX3u 1PSU 5V Refer to Section 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption jndinogndu mJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 87 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 6 5 3 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added DC Power Type The following matrix shows the expandable units up to the O mark where the desired inputs horizontal axis and outputs vertical axis intersect System are expandable up to mark when the supply voltage is 16 8V to 19 2V Select the input output extension block number of points to be connected to the main unit The DC power type main units have restrictions in expandable I O points since they lack a built in service power supply DC power supply DC input type 1 FX3U 16MR DS FX3U 16MT DS FX3u 16MT DSS FX3u 32MR DS FX3u 32MT DS FX3U 32MT DSS These main units do not have a built in 24V DC service power supply cm E Example DC power supply S E Not allowed to add 32 E AERE DC input type o E FX3U 16MLT DL refefofoto ova sefefel eleo o Number o added poi 0 8 16 24
481. on Content 1 Model name 2 Version 19 5 2 Top screen time display Following the title screen display the Current Time screen is then displayed 31 5 05 23 59 59 Tue A user screen can also be displayed by using the user message display function Refer to Section 19 23 for user message display function Although the year displays in a 2 digit format 05 this can be changed to a 4 digit format 2005 by revising the program Refer to Subsection 19 12 3 for the 2 digit year to 4 digit year change procedure 19 5 3 Menu screen As shown in the figure at right the menu screen displays 4 lines of the total menu Press the button to scroll downward through the menu SREE ErrorCheck Button operations at this menu screen are explained below LANGUAGE Contrast Button Operation Description ESC Returns to the top screen time display ClockMenu Scrolls upward through the menu l EntryCode l i Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling l CiearAiliDey This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the l beginning of the menu PLC Status Scrolls downward through the menu ScanTime Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling l Cassette l This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the end of B EE the menu OK Selects the item where the cursor is blinking 351 SJOJUhOO peedS uDIL adh NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3
482. onenBijuo jndinogndu eJ O o Z O o uonejejsu e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 7 8 Connecting method G connection of extension block to input output powered extension unit 144 This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an input output extension block to an input output powered extension unit Remove the extension connector cover A in the right figure on the right side of the input output powered extension unit Connect the extension cable B in the right figure from the extension block to be added right side to the extension connector of the input output powered extension unit NN SS os A X SSSSWSNSS SSSSSSSSNN e When connecting FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX2N 1RM E SET or FX3U 1PSU 5V read input output powered extension unit as the unit When connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension unit FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX2N 1RM E SET or FX3U 1PSU 5V connect the unit to be added right side and the existing unit main unit with the supplied extension cable or the optional extension cable For FX2N Series input output powered extension unit FX2N 1RM E SET or FX3u 1PSU 5V the extension cable FXoN 30EC or FXON 65EC can be used For FX2N 10GM or
483. oning instruction Accumulated number of pulses output to YOO1 for PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR FNC 59 instructions or current address of Y001 for positioning instruction DRT DS Notus O OOO Inverter Communication Function D 8150 D 8151 D 8152 D 8153 D 8154 D 8155 D 8156 Response wait time of inverter communication ch1 Step number of instruction during inverter communication ch1 Default 1 Error code for inverter communication ch1 Inverter communication error step number latched ch1 Default 1 Parameter number when error occurs during IVBWR FNC274 instruction ch1 Default 1 Response wait time of inverter communication ch2 Step number of instruction during inverter communication ch2 Default 1 Correspond ing special device M8130 M8132 M8132 M8132 D8138 D8139 M8151 M8152 M8153 M8154 M8156 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 2 Oz Number and eoespone og Content of register ing special ae name te device D Error code for inverter 1 D 8197 communication ch2 dL Inverter communication error step 22 D 8158 number latched ch2 M8158 Default 1 D Parameter number when error E D 8159 occurs during IVBWR FNC274 M8159 instruction ch2 Default 1 1 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN H0000 2nd keyword is not set v 3
484. onitor Test ErrorCheck LANGUAGE Contrast ClockMenu EntryCode ClearAllDev PLC Status ocanlime Cassette 3 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the LANGUAGE item then press OK to display the display language LANGUAGE selection screen E X To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display SIZE gt Eng l press ESC zi Y 364 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 10 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 Use the buttons to move the cursor to E zc 8 To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Moves the cursor upward T Moves the cursor downward OK Registers the selected display language and returns to the menu screen 5 Press OK to register the selected display language and return to the menu screen 19 10 2 Changing to English menus Refer to Subsection 19 10 1 Changing to Japanese menus for the access procedure from the title screen 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the LANGUAGE item then press OK to display the display language LANGUAGE selection screen HA To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display T C press ESC Ae E es 2 Use the buttons to move the c
485. onnector P 7 16 input output points eee e eeauat 22 FX 16EYT TB i 6 Transistor output sink ETEN 5 FX 16EYT H TB i 1 Transistor output sink Ls S For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 2 Input output cables Model name Function FX 16E 500CAB S Bulk wire FX 16E 150CAB FX 16E 300CAB 3m 9 10 Flat cable with tube Both ends are provided with 20 pin connectors FX 16E 500CAB FX 16E 150CAB R FX 16E 300CAB R 3m 9 10 Round multicore cable Both ends are provided with 20 pin connectors FX 16E 500CAB R ica ere Flat cable with tube The end on the PLC side is provided with two 20 pin FX A32E 300CAB 3m 9 10 connectors and the end on the terminal block side is provided with a FX A32E 500CAB 5m 164 exclusive connector 1 common terminal for 32 input output points 3 Input output connector Model name Function FX2C lI O CON 10 piece set Input output connector for flat cable FX2c I O CON S 5 piece set Input output connector for bulk wire for 0 3 mm AGW22 FX2c I O CON SA 5 piece set Input output connector for bulk wire for 0 5 mm AGW20 3 1 11 N Remote I O NI For the remote I O of CC Link CC Link LT and AS i system refer to the manual and catalog of each master 3 1 12 O Power supply unit v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable e Model name Description omang power He Marine FX2N 20PSU 24V DC power supply 100
486. ontent of register name Clock D 8010 Accumulated instruction execution Present scan time time from 0 step 2 in units of 0 1 ms D 8011 Minimum scan time D 8012 Maximum scan time Minimum value of scan time in units of 0 1 ms Maximum value of scan time in units of 0 1 ms D 8013 0 to 59 seconds E Second data for real time clock D 8014 0 to 59 minutes B Minute data for real time clock D 8015 0 to 23 hours B Hour data for real time clock D 8016 1 to 31 days B Day data for real time clock D 8017 1 to 12 months B Month data for real time clock D 8018 2 digits of year data 0 to 99 B Year data for real time clock D 8019 0 Sunday to 6 Saturday Day of the week data for real time clock 2 Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan operation when M8039 is activated Input Filter D 8020 Input filter adjustment D 8021 D 8022 D 8023 D 8024 Not used D 8025 D 8026 D 8027 Index Register Z0 and VO Input filter value of X000 to X017 3 Default 10 ms D 8028 Value of ZO Z register D 8029 Value of VO V register 9 X000 to X007 in FX3u 16ML J 4 The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to D8195 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Number and name Constant Scan D 8030 D 8031 D 8032 D 8033 D 8034 D 8035 D 8036 D 803
487. ops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases NCAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install in a manner which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device connections Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC DANGER Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 221
488. or cables An individual wire type can also be used for wiring to the terminal blocks of PLC side input output products Number of Number of i f Drive Power Model Name E Connection Destination Input Points Output Points Supply FX 16E TB 16 input points or 16 output points Connects directly to PLC input output terminals 100V AC input type FX2N 16EX C sink input 4 6 Relay output type FX2N 16EYT C sink output p bx i j l 24V DC 16 Triac output type FX2N 16EYT C sink output 112 MA FX2N 16EX C sink input 32 input points 1 FX 32bE TB 32 output points FX2N 16EYT C sink output or 16 input amp 16 output points FX 16EX A1 TB 2 FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYT TB Transistor output 24V DC 6 sink type FX2N 16EYT C sink output 112 mA Transistor output 24V DC 16 sink type FX2N 16EYT C sink output 112 mA 1 A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C The current consumption is shown in the table below Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption FX2N 16EX C 24V DC 112 mA 2 The applications shown below are not supported FX 16EYT H TB Unsupported Applications VIR poea High speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instruction processing Time division Input matrix MTR instruction hexadecimal input HKY instruction digital switch DSW input instruction arrow switch ARWS instruction Other R
489. or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair
490. or conversion adapter and FX Series terminal block Battery and memory cassette DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Please contact a company certified in the disposal of electronic waste for environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Before transporting the PLC turn on power to the PLC to check that the BATT LED is off and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the BATT LED on or the battery exhausted the backed up data may be unstable during transportation The PLC is precision equipment During transportation avoid impacts larger than that is specified in the manual Section 4 1 of the PLC main unit Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation check the operations of the PLC 238 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation T 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF NO Incorrect connection of the power supply terminal contact of the DC input wire and power supply wire or short circuiting of output wires may result in serious damage Oo Before applying power check that the power supply and ground terminals are connected correctly and input 8 output devices are wired properly z 3 The dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance test of the
491. or less aco AE A For FX2N 16EYT C ERE FX2N 48ET 16 points common 1 6A or less i o FX2N 48ET D FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H 1A point FX2N 16EYT C 0 3A point For FX2N 8EYT H 4 points common 2A or less A uoisuo Extension block ginpoy ejdsiq 20 7 Open circuit leakage current 0 1mA or less yoojg JeuiuJe 213 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 3 4 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity External Wiring of Sink Output Type External Wiring of Source Output Type 2 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right External Wiring of Sink Output Type Limit of normal rotation Limit of reverse PLC output rotation element External Wiring of Source Output Type Limit of normal rotation Limit of reverse PL
492. ote device station product for CC Link Supplied PXavb4CL u hrm iem aaa with User s Manual JY997D05401 p When using refer also to FX2N 64CL M product Hardware Volume l User s Manual Details FX2N 64CL M Separate Users Manuals JY997D08501 Details of the CC Link LT master special B volume function block Detailed Volume Supplied Remote device As for the remote device station remote I O station power v with Remote I O supply adapter and dedicated power supply for CC Link LT product Power supply adapter refer to the relevant manuals and related documents Supplied py 32ASI M Procedures for handling the AS i system v with i JY992D76901 User s Manual master special function block product Supplied FX2N 16LNK M JY992D72101 Procedures for handling the MELSEC I O llCommon di User s Manual LINK master special function block ere FX3u FX3uc Series Details of analog special function block v p User s Manual Analog JY997D16701 FX3u 4AD FX3U 4DA FX3uc 4AD and 09R619 As for the CC Link remote I O station and remote device station refer to the relevant manuals and related documents 09R703 Manuals for analog temperature control voume Control Edition product analog special adapter FX3u ADP 24 Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with prod
493. output T Transistor output peJewog jndinoanduj DO 14 4 2 Periodic inspection battery life etc sjiuf uoisuejx3 1 Battery A Part Life Standard life 5 years at ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F Model FX3u 32BL battery Guarantee for 1 year Syoo g UOISUS X3 indinojndu eo Standard life of FX3u 32BL 5 years at ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F Free guarantee period 1 year after delivery or up to 18 months after manufacture NI Standard frequency of replacement of FX3u 32BL 4 to 5 years Although the standard life is 5 years the life varies depending on the ambient temperature Replace the SOR battery every 4 to 5 years Batteries discharge spontaneously Purchase the battery in advance in 2 a consideration of the frequency of replacement shown above E 2 Other devices When inspecting the battery check the following points e Check that the temperature in the panel is not abnormally increased by other heat generating bodies or direct sunlight Check that dust or conductive dust has not entered the panel oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO Check for loosening of wiring and other abnormalities A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 245 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 14 4 3 Maintenance product lif
494. ovable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Relay 12 30V DC or less Oo External power supply 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or 8 cUL standards Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation a Indication of output operation When power is applied to relay coil LED is lit 2A point 2A point 1 3 The total load current per common The total load current per common lt s l terminal should be the following value terminal should be the following value Resistance l E n cda ond e 4 output points common terminal 8 A 4 output points common terminal 8 A 2s or less or less D Max load 8 output points common terminal 8 A or less I 80 VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 4 4 2 359 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 2 4 Sgp Open circuit leakage current F Min load 5V DC 2 mA reference value a OFF ON Approx 10 ms ON OFF Approx 10 ms Response time pe1eMog jndino ndul SHUN uoisugjx4 Output circuit diagram power suppl coM I Fuse A number 1 or more is entered in of COM 490 UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI com 15 3 2 External dimensions 2 g FX2N 32ER ES UL z 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches oo m 59 83 83 23 83 SS ES ES ES ES SS ES
495. pending on input output allocation The input output powered extension unit 48 points type assigns output numbers in ascending order from A B C below A OOOOOOOO 10123456 7 E o u u u u u u u U U U U M OO0000000 0 1234567 P ke e e e e e e e eee M 264 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 2 Power Supply Specifications Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition When the terminal block covers are open 10 Input X terminals 11 Terminal block fitting screws 14 Output Y terminals 11 Terminal block mounting screws 15 Protective terminal COVers 9 Power supply terminal Connect the power supply to the input output powered extension unit at this terminal 10 Input X terminals Wire switches and sensors to these terminals 11 Terminal block mounting screws Ifthe input output powered extension unit must be replaced loosen these screws to remove the upper part of the terminal block 12 Terminal names The signal names for the power supply input terminals and output terminals are shown 13 Terminal block covers Protects the upper and lower stages of the terminal block 14 Output Y terminals Wire the intended loads contactors solenoid valves etc to these terminals 15 Protective terminal covers A protective terminal cover refer to the following drawing
496. peration error may still occur operation For example 6704 ee SUC HOM Nes Hag Teves OF T2002 itself is not an error But if Z had a value of i 400 the timer T600 would attempt to be accessed 6705 Operand of applied instruction is inapplicable This would cause an operation error since there is device no T600 device available Device number range or data value for operand of 6706 NR us applied instruction exceeds limit 6707 File register is accessed without parameter setting of file register 254 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Error code 6708 6709 6710 6730 6732 6733 6734 6735 6736 6740 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 6747 6748 6749 PLC operation at Contents of error error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error codes in shaded columns are added in FX3U PLCs Action This error occurs in the execution of the operation e Review the program or check the contents of the operands used in the applied instructions Check whether the specified buffer memories exist in the equipment Check whether the extension cables are correctly connected This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program or check the contents of the operands used in the applied instructions
497. peration to display the device whose current value is to be changed D6200 Refer to Subsection 19 7 2 for monitor function operation D6201 D6202 D6203 2 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test mode The current value begins blinking refer to fig at right 3 Use the buttons to change the value as desired To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the monitor screen i Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase OK Registers the current value and returns to the monitor screen 4 Press OK to register the current value and return to the monitor screen File register D The display module s test function cannot be used to change the current value of the file register D which is stored in the program memory 358 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Timer T counter C 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device where the test function is to be used Refer to Subsection 19 7 2 for monitor function operation Monitor screen 2 Press the OK button to display the cursor then select the test subject se
498. play module s display screen protect function The relationship between entry codes and the display screen protect function is shown below Entry code Entry code Display Screen Protect Function Restrictions registration Status Status Entry code is Entry code is being used Restriction of functions is according to the entry code Entry code is NOt canceled Entry code is not being used level registered is Entry code is being used Entry code Is l All functions are enabled no restrictions canceled Entry code is not being used l Entry code is being used Restriction of functions is according to the display Entry code is not registered screen protect function Entry code is not being used All functions are enabled no restrictions 389 SJOJUhOO peeds ybiIH a3 NO BuutM 1ndjno JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I ale oN Nn SS Ge Er Be ESIS 002 ae oo 2 0 5 e mI x OD io o zc gt qd mm 0 00 O 35 c E 2 7 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 o 5 3 gt f Ww o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 22 Display Screen Protect Function 19 22 3 Entry code levels 1 For versions prior to Ver 2 20 8 Digit Entry code Level Entry code Content Entry code Input Example 8 digit hexadecimal value beginni
499. play position Row horizontal character position MI ia 31 S 51 61 t73 t81 191 00 11 t121 0131 041 t51 EG ne t eo DOO 11 DOO 12 DOO 13 DOO 14 DOO 15 DLUILI 16 1 order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order 2 lin tm ie DOO 19 DOO 20 DOO 21 DOO 22 DOO 23 DLIL14 24 order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order EE DOO 27 DOO 28 DOO 29 DOO 30 DOO 31 DLIL14 32 order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order DOL 36 DOL 37 DOL 38 DOL 39 DLILI 40 order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order 2 System signal 2 System Setting Information Screen Display ON uonisod JejoeJeuo eonJeA eur o User message display command MAA 4 This command is enabled only when the top screen time display is displayed Cancels the user message display and displays the top screen time display ON when the user registered device monitor screen MAA 6 or the user message screen is displayed OFF when other screens are displayed 19 23 2 Shift JIS code arrangement precautions To prevent garbled characters whe
500. points ei S Total the number of points counted in Steps 1 2 and 3 and check that it does not exceed 256 S points maximum number of input output points Maximum number of Number of input output occupied 2 Number of input output points input output points points DT zt 35 256 points E units 8 points di Maximum number of gt D Each special function unit block 3 points controllable on used for FROM TO instructions B system Total number of input output points of input output powered occupies eight input or output 3 extension units and input output extension blocks points ag om A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M or FX2N B Number of input output points of input output 16LNK M powered extension units E Number of special function units blocks I C Number of input output points of input output extension blocks suoneouioedgs 5 When CC Link or AS i master is used count the remote I O points When CC Link or AS i master is used the total number of input output points of the remote I O sta tions connected on the network and the number of input output points calculated in the previous step are 384 or less For details refer to the following subsection Qi oJ v lt DDD Sg 20 03 oo c 1 FX2n 16CCL M CC Link master Calculate the number of remote I O points connected on the network in the following step When CC Link master is us
501. power supply terminal AC 1 5kV AC power supply and ground terminal for 1 min e Between power supply terminal DC 500V AC for power supply and ground terminal 1 min Between 24V DC service power supply connected to input terminal 24V DC 299 AC for and ground terminal e Between input terminal 100V AC and 1 5kV AC ground terminal for 1 min Between output terminal relay and 1 5kV AC ground terminal for 1 min Between output terminal transistor 500V AC for and ground terminal 1 min 1 5kV AC for 1 min oM Q or more on 500V DC Megger Only input output powered extension unit block Only input output powered extension unit block Terminals of expansion board special adapter and special function unit block Between output terminal triac and ground terminal Since the communication line and the main t BOSEN terial OF expansion neat unit CPU are not insulated it is not allowed to except FX3U USB BD and FX3u Not allowed Not allowed dH V CNV BD and ground terminal perform the dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test between them Do not perform the dielectric withstand Between terminal of expansion board Kotallewed Net alowed voltage test and insulation resistance test FX3U USB BD and ground terminal between the communication line and the main unit CPU e Between terminal of special adapter 500V AC for more on
502. pper limit lt LLV lower limit not started gt operation lt Limit cycle method gt Check whether the target setting contents are 6754 Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for correct auto tuning SHPV lt 0 Limit cycle method Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is 6755 Abnormal auto tuning transfer status not started Data of device controlling transfer status is Ensure that devices occupied by PID instruction are abnormally overwritten not overwritten in the program Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Limit cycle method Increase the difference ULV LLV between the 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning upper limit and lower limit of the output value for measurement time ton gt t ton lt 0 T lt 0 auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant o or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 PID operation is started gt The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning lt Limit cycle method gt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 PID 6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time operation is started TI
503. pply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire 9 proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required TE 3 In the case of sink input wiring a T short circuit the terminals of the ES extension units as well as the S S Zu 5V OV 24V terminal and the 24V terminal of E QE the main unit grounding 169 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input Use of input output extension units blocks of sink input type Main unit 00 Fuse 1 grounding ES Sink and source input type 24v p AY Input impedance 5V OV 24V p 14 i Two wire proximity sensor Class D Sink input type grounding 24V 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder Special function block resistance may be required 3 In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit Class D grounding SV IOV 24V 170 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 5 Example of external wiring source input AC Power S
504. product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem 283 Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog Indjnojndu Ol SHUN UOISUS XJZ 17 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg jeutua FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 1 Outline 16 1 Outline Connect input output extension blocks to the PLC to add more input output points 8 or 16 points can be added by an input output extension block Since the power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to prepare another power supply unit for each input output extension block 16 1 1 Product type There are various types of input output extension blocks Select optimum blocks considering the input type output type and connection unit of your system Input output extension blocks Power supply Number of points Input type Output type Power supply to L3 24V DC Terminal block Sink source inside of PLC 24V DC Sink Transistor Source 5V DC Transistor 100V AC system Sink 284 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks 16 1 Outline 16 1 2 List of products 1 For input output extension Sink common
505. programs according to the applications Continues operation 3807 Modem initialization error Remote maintenance 3808 Ensure modem power is ON and check the 3812 3813 N N network parameter error R Check the communication cables for correct 374 wiring 3820 PLC hardware error M806 1 D8061 Xo Nem 77 0 0 sm 6102 Operation circuit error 6103 I O bus error M8069 ON Check for the correct connection of extension 6104 Powered extension unit 24 V failure M8069 ON cables Check user program The scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000 When turning the power ON to the main unit a 24V power failure occurs in a powered extension I O table creation error CPU error unit The error occurs if the 24V power is not supplied for 10 seconds or more after the main power is turned ON Check the number of the connected special function System configuration error units blocks For a few special function units blocks the connectable number is limited 6105 Watchdog timer error Stops operation 6106 6107 252 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Error code PLC PP communication error D8062 0000 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 Serial communication error 1 M8063 D8063 0000 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6312 6313 6314 6320 Parameter error M8064 D8064 0000 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 6407 6409 Syntax
506. ption to ensure that the total current to be consumed by the added extension devices can be supplied by the built in power supply Refer to Subsection 6 5 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption AC Power Type IONPAd Q3 DC power type main unit When only input output extension devices are added use the quick reference matrix Refer to Subsection 6 5 3 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added DC Power Type uononpoJju I When special extension devices are added calculate the current consumption to ensure that the 5V DC and the internal 24V DC power can supply the total current by the added extension devices When the added extension devices include FXoN 3A FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA FX3U 4HSX ADP or FX3u 2HSY ADP calculate the current consumption internal 24V DC at startup Refer to Subsection 6 5 4 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption DC Power Type suoneouioedgs Qi O U lt O oc 5 7 O O Oo 2 o o2 oo en a uejs S uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu mJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 83 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 6 5 1 Quick reference matrix when only
507. put No LILO to LILI3 Photo couple i power supply Amri hamarre nen ey JUST EOC TESTI eT Es l 100 to 120V AC 10 24V DC o 416 LIL4 to UO7 AAOtoAA3 AA4to AA7 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block 20 7 FX 16EYR TB FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB Se The FX 16EYR TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor 8 Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output NO The applications shown below are not supported e Unsupported Applications E Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width E Pulse modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction interruption positioning atouts DVIT instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS 1 3 P instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction z Time division Input matrix MTR instruction hexadecimal input HKY instruction digital switch DSW instruction ea input arrow switch ARWS instruction n Time division Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction print ASCII Code PR instruction Response time Approx 10 ms Circuit isolation Operation indicators Power consumption s Mechanical isol
508. put or only for sink input 1 Difference between circuits e Sink input common Sink input means a DC input signal with current flow from the input X terminal When a sensor with a transistor output is connected NPN open collector transistor output can be used e Source input common Source input means a DC input signal with current flow into the input X terminal When a sensor with a transistor output is connected PNP open collector transistor output can be used 2 Method of switching between sink source input To switch the input type to sink or source input wire the S S terminal to the OV or 24V or terminal 1 In the case of AC power supply type Sink input 24V terminal and S S terminal are connected Source input OV terminal and S S terminal are connected Refer to Subsection 10 2 4 and 10 2 5 for wiring examples 2 In the case of DC power supply type Sink input C9 terminal and S S terminal are connected Source input O terminal and S S terminal are connected Refer to Subsection 10 2 6 and 10 2 7 for wiring examples Instructions for using Concurrent use of sink source input It is possible to set all input terminals X of the main unit to the sink input mode or the source input mode However sink and source input terminals cannot be used concurrently The main unit and input output powered extension units are individually set to the sink or source input mode
509. put 1 DUTY FNC186 instruction TIPS Timing clock output 2 d M 8332 DUTY FNC186 instruction D8332 Timing clock output 3 DUTY FNC186 instruction nisse Timing clock output 4 dus M 8334 DUTY FNC186 instruction D8334 Timing clock output 5 M 8335 Not used DVIT FNC151 instruction M 8336 4 Interrupt input specification D8336 function enabled M 8337 Not used PLSV FNC157 instruction M 8338 Acceleration deceleration operation M 8339 Not used YOOO Pulse output monitor ON B Meo BUSY OFF READY M 83414 YOOO Clear signal output function B enable M 83424 YOOO Zero return direction B specification M 8343 Y000 Forward limit M 8344 Y000 Reverse limit M 8345 4 Y000 DOG signal logic reverse 4 Y000 Zero point signal logic E M 8346 reverse 4 YOOO Interrupt signal logic B M 8347 reverse M 8348 Y000 Positioning X instruction B activation M 8349 4 YOOO Pulse output stop command 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 443 21 Oz a 0008Q 0008IN sr1 uononJjsu W s n d jeioeds 9po00 J9joeJeu2 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond Number and E Operation and function ing special Positioning Y001 Pulse output monitor MIB 350 ON BUSY OFF READY M 83511 YOO1 Clear signal output function enable M835
510. put powered extension units blocks come with an I O number label Apply the I O number label to spaces on the enclosure see the following figure so that the input output D numbers can be identified ALDBSS AV For X050 So 1 0 NUMBER zm LABEL FE x P 7 N NP IF NP 7 E x PF q x PF 0o m JY818D25401B 3 Qeg Ud 9 3 3 63 63 53 3 T o 10 6963 6969 G9 69 3 69 68 ES ES 9 69 2 LEER AVE eee ee ee one E 20 MITSUBISHI 22232257 ii E39 7 om 3 40 40 7 59 50 warren Hii 28 c 60 cort Yr Scud Ys P YT TOU YT LYS COM Ye CY Weg g 9 6969 69 9 f aoa PF E 70 ROS NOAE BE EE x lO 100 4 110 For Y040 120 d TT A suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e C o 2 cu Q c fo o 5 jnd no ndu SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 117 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Units Blocks 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Units Blocks 7 2 1 Concept of assigning When power is turned on the main unit CPU automatically assigns the numbers 0 to 7 to special function units blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit Unit numbers are not given to input output powered extension units blocks 1 Special function units blocks connected to main unit The numbe
511. put response time Approx 10 ms No voltage contact input ppur szigma type NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Sink input line connection Main unit Input circuit diagram 290 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 4 Output specifications Relay output type QF Item FX2N 8ER So n D Output points 4 points 2 Connection unit Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output unit Relay 12 External power supply 250V AC 30V DC or less o Output circuit insulation method Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel Resistan 2 A point a ie US The total resistance load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less 1 3 Maximum load 80 VA ss Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 4 4 2 Sa For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 2 4 ES D Open circuit leakage current Minimum load 5V DC 2 mA reference values OFF ON Approx 10 ms I Response time az ON OFF Approx 10 ms S x3 C 2 D 51S Fo gt 25 9 c e Q EE DC power 1 5 Output circuit diagram supply unit nos a O 285 gee O S amp a 16 3 2 Parts identification
512. r 8 bit entry code A Level B or Level C entry code is registered The registered entry code has been canceled by an entry code menu Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 All operation is unrestricted operation 1 5 The Entry Code is not set No entry codes have been registered moz Fatal error occurred Refer to Subsection 19 24 1 for details TE T 2 PLC Status 2 3 zi PLC Status 2 3 38 1 TE 2 Bo 3 Display Content 1 T Program memory type ze x aS Displayed message Program memory type oS 1 Internal Memory PLC internal RAM memory S Memory Cassette Memory cassette flash memory oo Memory cassette protect switch status Displayed message Switch Status sag 2 Protection switch Internal RAM memory without protect switch z T Protection switch ON Memory cassette protect switch is ON D Protection switch OFF Memory cassette protect switch is OFF 3 Program memory s max setting capacity in step units 20 D 3 2 at E o Q 375 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 16 Scan Time Scan Time Display 3 PLC Status 3 3 PLC Status 373 1 2 1 I I I 1000 20007 Display Content 1 Battery voltage 2 Number of registered comments number of registered comments number of parameter specified comments 19 16 Scan Time Scan Time Display The scan time s current val
513. r Input current 8 X000 to X005 6 mA 24V DC a X006 X007 7 mA 24V DC X010 or more 5 mA 24V DC 7 Example Products of OMRON E3 Type Model name Type Model name co Microswitch Models Z V and D2RV Operation switch Model A3P zi Proximity switch Model TL Photoelectric switch Model E3S i 2 In the case of input device with built in series diode The voltage drop of the series diode should be approx 4V or less When lead switches with a series LED are used up to two switches can be connected in series Also make sure that the input current is over the input sensing level while the switches are ON uonejejsu oo 2 a o AO oe O x pw lt 5 Q source input sink input 1 In the case of a type only for sink input connect the device to the COM terminal 167 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 168 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input 3 In the case of input device with built in parallel resistance Use a device having a parallel resistance Rp of 15kQ or more If the resistance is less than 15kQ connect a bleeder resistance Rb obtained by the following formula as shown in the following figure Rb P ko 15 Rp Bleeder resistance PLC sink input 1 In the case of a type only for sink input connect the device to the COM terminal 4 In
514. r Installing Method in Enclosure 2 Example of direct installation 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 FX3U Series FX2N 16EYT main unit ESS UL 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 Extension cable eF XoN 65EC eF XoN 30EC FX2N CNV BC indicates an M4 screw 3 Example of combination of installation on DIN rail and direct installation 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 F X2N FX3U Series 46EYT main unit ESS UL DIN rail 1 FX2N CNV BC Extension cable eF XOoN 65EC eF XoN 30EC indicates an M4 screw 1 FX2N CNV BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail 130 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail The main unit can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 8 5 1 Preparation for installation 1 Connecting extension devices Some extension devices must be mounted on the main unit before the unit is installed in the enclosure Mount the expansion board and special adapters on the main unit before installing it in the enclosure e Mount the input output powered extension units blocks and the special function units blocks in the enclosure after installing the main unit in the enclosure The memory cassette and the display module can be fi
515. r common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less 80 VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 4 4 2 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 2 4 Resistance load Maximum load Open circuit leakage current Minimum load 5V DC 2 mA reference values OFF ON Approx 10 ms ON OFF Approx 10 ms Response time DC power Output circuit diagram supply unit 16 2 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement Input numbers X are assigned to the upper four points and output numbers Y are assigned to the lower four points With cover Without cover FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER ES CD POWER Input indicator 0000 lamps LED lamps Output indicator lamps LED lamps Rear line extension connector 288 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 EX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 16 2 3 External dimensions QF S5 8 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches i o NO T O B FX2N 8ER ES o O mo E C POWER uo ut S 2o O S eo gt Cc o a E s am zs 3 a Q ce e D 6 I Bunoouse qnoi eoUueue9 ule N uny 1s9 peJewog Indjnojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISU9 X3 oo suondo pue Syuf 1X3 Jeuo A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20
516. r current 3 000 000 times S K600 200 000 times S K800 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB The FX 16EYT H TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction interruption positioning DVIT instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Time division Input matrix MTR instruction hexadecimal input HKY instruction digital switch DSW instruction input arrow switch ARWS instruction Pulse outputs Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction print ASCII Code PR instruction 20 8 1 Specifications Transistor output Item FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB Photo Photo e coupler coupler input output circuitry External External wiring wiring Load voltage 5 to 30V DC 5 to 30V DC
517. r labels Apply the unit number labels to spaces on the enclosure see the following figure so that the unit numbers can be identified PRI b 7 Dy BS Y818D33101 f No 0 No 1 No ex POWERS CC Link E zzm DARE oooooooo zuco So FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Installation In Enclosure DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 2 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is appl
518. r output type Item Output points Connection unit Output unit type External power supply Output circuit insulation method FX2N 8EYT H 8 points Removable terminal block M3 screws Transistor sink output 5 to 30V DC Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 1A point The total load current per common should be as follows e 4 output points common 2A or less Inductive load 24W 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA 30V DC Resistance Maximum load load Minimum load OFFON 0 2 ms or less 1A ON OFF 0 4 ms or less 1A Response time Output circuit diagram sUpON Ut supply unit 318 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 12 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output 16 12 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangment QF With cover Without cover FX2N BEYT H 8 NO FX2N 8EYT H CO POWER Output Rear line o dis indicator bau z OOOO lamps CO ec O LED lamps 5 Sess em Gan 53 oS cao o h Ge e D e I Bunoouse qnoi eoUueue9 ule N uny 1s9 16 12 3 External dimensions peJewog Indjnojndu Ol holes Unit mm inches 2 04 5 mounting sun uoisuejx3 FX2N 8EYT H CD POWER oTo 12 3 OOOO 4567 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 17 Pun A
519. r s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 3 C Input output extension blocks The input output extension block has built in input or output terminals to add input or output terminals FX2N OQ E LI LEIZLI Incorporating input or output terminals L Classification 1 None Not compliant with standard Series name UL Compliant with standard Input output type Connection on terminal block or with connector e ER 24V DC SIBI SU EE d output terminal block e ER ES 24V DC sink source input relay output terminal block eX 24V DC Sink input terminal block e X C 24V DC sink input connector eXL C 5V DC input connector eX ES 24V DC sink source input terminal block e X UA1 100V AC input terminal block ve Tae SSR outputite d ec e Triac output terminal bloc p o e YT Transistor ink output terminal block input and output eYT H _ Transistor en pula nd block points Input output extension eYT C Transistor sink output connector i eYR ES Relay output terminal block e YT ESS Transistor source output terminal block v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable Number of input output points Total Model name T id DUM SEES Ud he Marine ird of input a aa EMC LVD points points Fuss piu extension Input extension m 8 8 POWSEXESUUL 24VDC Temialbok v O v 7 8 8
520. r s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 6 3 1 Calculation of number of input output points To obtain the total number of input output points count the input output points of input output powered extension units blocks and the input output occupied points of special function units blocks The number of remote I O points on CC Link or AS i master network must be excluded Total the number of input output points on the main unit and the number of those on the input output powered extension units blocks To obtain the total number of input output points count the input points X000 and more and output points YOOO and more of the main unit and input output powered extension units blocks The number of input output points of each type of device is shown on the list below The list of numbers of input output points is shown in Section 6 8 Count the input output points of the remote I O stations connected on FX2N 64CL M or FX2N 16LNK M network Add the number of remote I O points to the number of input output points from the main unit and input output powered extension units blocks calculated in the above step For the method of calculating the number of remote I O points refer to the manual of each master Count the number of input output occupied points of special function units blocks
521. r supply specifications and instructions for wiring This chapter contains explanations of the input specifications and instructions for wiring This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the high speed counter FX3U 4HSX ADP examples of programming This chapter contains explanations for the output specifications and instructions for wiring This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring Examples of wiring for each use input output devices for main uses This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for test operation and adjustment maintenance and error check items and measures to be taken upon occurrence of error Reference Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 2 Extension devices Chapter 15 to 18 Division Input output powered extension units Input output extension blocks Extension power supply unit Extension products for special functions such as analog control positioning and communication OEE Reference This chapter contains explanations for the input output Chapter 15 specifications external dimensions and terminal layout for each product Chapter 16 This chapter contains explana
522. r the phone numbers and addresses of Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd refer to the service network at the end of this manual 14 7 1 Output does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 1 Output does not turn on Stop the PLC and forcibly turn the inoperable output on then off with a peripheral device or the display module to check its operation Check for troubles with external wiring When the output operates The output may be turned off unintentionally in the program Reexamine the program Duplicate coil or RST instructions e When the output does not operate Check the configuration of the connected devices and the connection of the extension cables If the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension cables are acceptable the output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer 2 Output does not turn off Stop the PLC and check that the output turns off Check for trouble with external wiring For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 14 2 When the output turns off The output may be turned on unintentionally in the program Check that there are no duplicate coils in the program When the output does not turn off The output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer 14 7 2 24V DC input does not operate main unit and input output extension
523. r to the manual for each block 1 Input output numbers X Y are octal Octal numbers are assigned as input output numbers X Y as shown below X000 to X007 X010 to X017 X020 to X027 X070 to X077 X100 to 107 YO000 to YOO7 YO10 to YO17 YO20 to Y027 YO7O to YO77 Y100 to Y107 2 Numbers for added input output unit block To an added input output powered extension unit block input numbers and output numbers following the input numbers and output numbers given to the preceding device are assigned The last digit of the assigned numbers must begin with O For example when the last number on the preceding device is X043 the input numbers are assigned to the next device starting from X050 When the FX2N 8ER is used some input output numbers are not used X044 to X047 Unused numbers X000 to X017 X020 to X037 X040 to X043 X050 to X057 Input extension Input output Input extension Main unit extension block block block FX3U 32MR ES FX2N 16EX FX2N 8ER FX2N 8EX Y000 to YO17 Y020 to YO23 Y024 to YO27 Unused numbers 115 soma uononpoJju SeuJeN Wed pueseimee4 M jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e Q fe 5 Sh S o o 3 nd no ndu SON UN SON uonejejsu oo e BuulM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Outp
524. rd with tapping screws for fixation Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Contact failures may cause malfunctions When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when the installation work is completed Failure to do so could cause fires equipment failures and malfunctions Fit the extension cables peripheral device connecting cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to the designated connectors ps Contact failures may cause malfunctions 428 Fit the display module memory cassette and function extension board securely to the designated connectors Contact failures may cause malfunctions Before attaching or detaching the following devices turn off power Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal block Battery and memory cassette Connect the memory cassette securely to the prescribed connector A poor connection can cause malfunctions Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions Cross section drawing memory cassette installation condition Press the 4 corners in approx 0 4mm 0 02 Memory cassette RRA ASSAS ASSN PLC body Rai
525. rdance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fixthe electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent electrical shock short circuit breakage of wire or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem This chapter explains the procedures for wiring the output terminals Wiring procedures Procedures for cabling according to shape of output terminal Output wiring procedures 204
526. re 5 to 24V DC Response Y 003 or more 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24V DC time Y 000 to Y002 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC Y 003 or more 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24V DC Circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Display of output operation LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the of COM Number of output points per common terminal e On FX3U 16MT LIS one common terminal is used for 1 output point e On models other than FX3u 16MT LIS 1 common terminal is used for 4 or 8 output points FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 3 2 Output specifications main unit transistor output Source type or Transistor output source specifications o Item FX3U 16MT FX3u 32MT FX3U 48MT FX3u 64MT FX3u 80MT FX3u 128MT OSS OSS OSS OSS OSS ESS eii ot output 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points Fixed terminal Connecting type block Removable terminal block M3 screw BuutM 1ndino M3 screw Output type form Transistor source output External power 5 to 30V DC 1 3 supply Sz 0 5A point Sa The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following Se value P Resistance For details on the common terminal for each model load refer to the
527. re parallel to the main unit and fit the board to the expansion board connector 4 Secure the expansion board C in the right figure on the main unit with the supplied M3 tapping screws D in the right figure e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 140 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 7 3 Connecting method B connection of special adapter When an expansion board is used connect the board as stated in the previous subsection before connecting the special adapter When a high speed input output special adapter is used fit the adapter before connecting other special adapters 1 Remove the special adapter connector cover A in the right figure from the expansion board When fitting a high speed input output special adapter also remove the high speed input output special adapter connector cover C in the right figure When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has been connected to the expansion board read expansion board as special adapter 2 Slide the special adapter connecting hooks B in B the right figure of the main unit When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has been connected to the main unit read main unit as special adapter This applies to the following steps 3 Connect the special adapter C in the right figure
528. re externally wired to 24V DC power supply the current consumed by them is added to the current consumption 5 One extension cable can be used on a system The cable to be used depends on the products to be added The extension cable must be selected carefully For an outline of the extension cable refer to Subsection 6 4 3 Extension cable 6 The number of input output points varies depending on the type 7 The special function units blocks except FX2N 16LNK M occupy eight input output points each For details on the special function units blocks refer to Subsection 6 4 2 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 6 1 2 System configuration with special adapters 1 When high speed input output special adapters are used When only high speed input output special adapters are connected the adapters can be used without an expansion board Good Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Expansion board Main unit high speed input high speed input high speed output nds i EE When the board is not connected 2 When analog and communication special adapters are used 1 Analog and communication special adapters must be used with an expansion board G d Special adapter Special adapter Expansion board Main unit OO communication analog Special adapter Special adapter Expansion board M
529. rence when setting 5 or more devices as user registered devices 1 Operation In this program example the 7 devices shown in the table below are set as user registered devices with the current value display format set individually for each device 1 The display formats specified here apply only to current values which appear at the user registered device menu Other current values appear in a decimal format 2 In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56 User Registered Device Data Length Display No Registered Devices Format 1 32 Bit Hexadecimal 2 16 Bit Decimal 3 16 Bit Decimal 4 16 Bit Decimal 5 16 Bit Hexadecimal 6 16 Bit Decimal 7 16 Bit Hexadecimal 2 Program M8002 l System information system No 1 is 7 D8300 set at D50 to D90 Initial pulse Svstem inf tion system No 2 i ystem information system No 2 is D5301 s tat M50 to M56 Sets K 1 at D52 to D57 because user FMOV registered devices 2 to 4 are unused At Monitor Test screens other than M8002 the user registered device screen the current values and setting values Initial pulse e e are displayed in a decimal format U ZRSTP Initialization of the user registered device dod Setting of flag that specifies the monitoring display in regress command button ON default user registered devices M56 M54 M53 M61 M67 User device message U eteedada l monitoring display ser registered device screen sc
530. rent Consumption b 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption o 1 Select an input output powered extension unit 5 For the data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 2 Capacity of built in power Um Power Number of Rabie seal ud supply SE supply Classification connected Type p point F 5V DC power 24V DC service o classification units points supply mA DOS NE ds With built i D i uilt in Input output FX2N power supply powered extension unit Example of entry gt FX2N 48ER ES UL 48 690 460 IONPAd Q3 uononpoJju NO D Enter the specifications for the products to be added Enter the data for the input output extension blocks and special function units blocks to be con nected to the input output powered extension unit and calculate the current For data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 Calculation of current suoneouioedgs Qi Power Number of Number of consumption of built in power Fps supply Classification connected Type input output supply ss 5 classification units points points 5V DC power 24V DC power o Supply im E De A ll F X2N P 1 DENM eg Fa i 23 FX2N NEN a ran EE Line ran ADEM EIC 2 Henson Pw AEEBM N iouis FPo NNNM z
531. res or malfunctions FS Perform wiring properly to the FXoN FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem 261 I eoueua ure N uny 1s9 4 O c D 62 F o o gt Q pe1eMog jndino ndul sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Outline 15 1 Outline An input output powered extension unit is used to expand inputs outputs Power can be supplied to subsequent extension blocks from an input output powered extension unit with a built in 24V DC power supply An input output powered extension unit is required when the capacity of the main unit s built in power supply is insufficient for the current consumption demands of the extension blocks 15 1 1 Product configuration There are various types of input output powered extension units They differ in supply voltage number of input output poin
532. ring RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3U and Mena Obie FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 30 or later Ver 1 00 or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2 PLCs Ver 3 30 or later jnpold CY uononpoJju I CD O D Q Q fat ct o o FX PCS WIN E varo o0 rlater Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2N PLCs Ver 1 00 or later Vard o0 or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2N PLCs Ver 3 00 or later Cautions on write during RUN Item Caution Program memories which can be written in Built in RAM and optional memory cassette whose write protect switch is set 6 RUN mode to OFF Ow o Number of program GX Developer 256 steps or less after edition addition deletion including NOP immediately ET steps which can be Ver 8 23Z or later after circuit blocks except final circuit S 3 written for circuit change in RUN i io 127 steps or less after edition addition deletion including NOP immediately si mode FX PCS IWIN E after circuit blocks except final circuit N Circuit blocks in which labels P and are added deleted or changed in edited circuits eus Circuit blocks in which 1 ms timers T246 to T249 and T255 to T511 are ae Circuit blocks which cannot be written in added in edited circuits 2 5 RUN mode Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits em Instruction to
533. rmation procedure Refer to Section 19 20 for details Touse user registered devices Refer to Section 19 19 for the setting procedure User message display function Refer to Section 19 23 for details 19 18 1 System information list opecial data register D8300 and D8301 devices with first numbers specified are assigned as system information devices data register auxiliary relay The data register excluding special data register should be specified at the system information s system signal 1 and the auxiliary relay excluding special auxiliary relay should be specified at the system information s system signal 2 Both D8300 and D8301 have default settings of 1 Refer to Section 19 19 to 19 23 for explanations of each system signal 1 System signal 1 specia Aus System Description Reference register Information ooo User registered device 1 type DLILI 1 User registered device 1 No DLUILI 2 Devices for user registered device User registered device 2 type DOO 3 settings l User registered device 2 No Only data registers can be Section 19 19 DLILI 4 specified for user registered User registered device 3 type D8300 KOO DULI 5 devices User registered device 3 No Occupies 41 DLILI 6 User registered device 4 type ponis DLILI 7 User registered device 4 No DLILI 8 Device for display screen protect function Section 19 22 DLILI 9 Device where user message display character strings are saved Use
534. rminator lt Default ETX gt B D 8126 Not used Computer link ch1 D 8127 Specification of on demand head device register Computer link ch1 D 8128 Specification of on demand data elie M8129 length register RS FNC 80 instruction computer D 8129 link ch Time out time setting 3 Latch battery backed device 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Number and name High Speed Counter Comparison High Speed Table and Positioning D 8130 D 8131 D 8132 D 8133 D 8134 D 8135 D 8136 D 8137 D 8138 D 8139 D 8140 D 8141 D 8142 D 8143 Content of register HSZ FNC 55 instruction High speed comparison table counter HSZ FNC 55 and PLSY FNC 57 instructions Speed pattern table counter Lower HSZ FNC 55 and PLSY FNC 57 instructions Speed pattern frequency Lower HSZ FNC 55 and PLSY FNC 57 instructions Upper Number of target pulses for speed pattern Lower PLSY FNC 57 PLSR FNC 59 instructions Accumulated total number Upper of pulses output to YOOO and Y001 HSCT FNC280 instruction Table count HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 HSZ FNC 55 and HSCT FNC280 instructions Number of instructions being executed Accumulated number of pulses output to YOOO for PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR FNC 59 instructions or current address of YOOO for positi
535. rn off power Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal block Battery and memory cassette DANGER Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock NCAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent electrical shock short circuit breakage of wire or damage to the product The dispo
536. ro in progress command button ON program by and buttons M56 M54 M52 M59 Sets the first device which appears at the user registered device screen as K100 a D101 D100 32 bit device with a ies hexadecimal current value display Continued on next page M60 385 SJOJUNOD peeds ybiIH dh _ N Budi 1ndjno JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 User User Registered Device Setting Continued from previous page M61 At user registered device screen scrolling by and buttons sets K102 the 2nd displayed device as a D102 EE 16 bit device with a decimal current value display format M62 At user registered device screen scrolling by and buttons sets K103 the 3rd displayed device as a D103 OU 16 bit device with a decimal current value display format M63 At user registered device screen scrolling by and buttons sets K104 the 4th displayed device as a D104 UE 16 bit device with a decimal current value display format M64 At user registered device screen scrolling by and
537. rocedures for handling the 8 ch analog input special function block to be used also for thermocouple input Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt 100 temperature sensor input special adapter When using refer also to FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt 100 temperature sensor input special function block Procedures for handling the 4 ch thermocouple input special adapter When using refer also to FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition 09R608 Procedures for handling the 4 ch thermocouple input special function block Procedures for handling the 2 ch temperature control special function block When using refer to FX2N 2LC User s Manual Separate oe JY992D85801 Procedures for handling the 2 ch 09R607 volume User s Manual temperature control special function block Supplied with product Supplied with product Analog output When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed JY992D74901 JY997D20801 FX2N 2DA User s Guide FX3U 4DA Installation Manual Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog output special function block Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog output special function block When using refer also to FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition 25 uononpou pue soinjeo4 MJ S WEN Hed IONPAd CY
538. roducts ccccseceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeens 347 19 2 SPCCIIGCALIONS PME M DER 348 19 2 1 Display Switch SDpeciITIGdllORiS scuuta sede eoo aec oue ctu uae dei det eet esae eiie a E PeDo ee ot Ie qoot e eet etu ates 348 1922 Pans VAVOUIN Me E 348 19 2 3 External CMV iso Sta Sacre let cicada ate ag bht cau outs Eit alam amp toenae eaten Race uci iac e Ed 348 19 3 Installation and Remowval esssssssssssssssesesseeeeeennne nennen nennen nnn nnne nnn nns na rna nns 349 19 4 SUMMALY Of FUNCIONS e veeeqist duos tet aria uide Doeendie a vet io Me iot vivet iat Meca eld usta tu Mu 350 19 5 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen seeeeeeeeussse 351 ILT TE SCEE pr 351 19 5 2 Top screen time display ccccceeccecceseeececeeseeeceusscecseeueeeeseeseeessuausesseeueeesseuseeessaaseeessseesessneas 351 poco UE aM RH MTS 351 19 6 Menu UU CU Ne rH 352 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered DeVICES ccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeeas 354 Were Cle AMC ei RET UR 354 19 7 2 Monit r mode operallOn i356 58 ni xo Resa ies cor ne t n ecaitstcu e ca teer Adee Da daar Meee 355 19 7 3 Monitor screen amp status display sssssssssssssessssesseeeeeeee nennen enne nnne nnne nnne 356 19 74 Test mode operation e cR T 358 19 7 5 Test mode operation MOUS itus as xo asina eni seen Pe ve nas eaan exe Eheu eu E ase Aser
539. rogrammable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 2 Special function units No Number of input Current consumed mA occupied output 5V DC Internal 24V DC External 24V DC FX2N 10GM 5 EXAM MENU Type FX2N 1RM E SET 6 8 6 G Display module No need to calculate Number of input Current consumed mA occupied output No Type points 5V DC Internal 24V DC External 24V DC 6 8 7 H Extension power supply unit 0 No need to calculate Number of input Current consumed mA No Type occupied output 5V DC Internal 24V DC points FX3U 1PSU 5V oe 1000 300 1 The ambient temperature restricts the output current For details refer to the derating curve in Section 6 7 105 uononpoJju SeuJeN Wed pueseimee4 M jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi ov lt DDD S5 X 5J oO o o2 oo OL wa shS uoneJnBijuo N SON HUN SON nd no ndu uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification 69 Example of System Configuration and System Modification The procedures for evaluating the
540. rox 21kQ 50Hz PAE Approx 18kO 60Hz M Eus 3 8mA 80V AC or more Input sensitivity current nan Nguoi 1 7mA 30V AC or more current 17 Sok Input response time Approx 25 to 30 ms 7 g oo Input signal type Voltage contact 5 Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input 1 9 100 to 120V AC suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO Photocoupler A uoisuo Input circuit diagram ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 303 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input 16 7 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangment FX2N 8EX UAL UL With cover Without cover FX2N 8EX UA1 Rear line CO POWER Input LIS eli extension 550 Mad connector LED lamps itt p 16 7 3 External dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8EX UA1 CD POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 43 1 7 87 3 43 304 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output LLL LLL ALLLLLIL L ILLLLLLTTTTTTTTTTTTTU 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output gm 16 8 1 Product specifications N The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications
541. rox For the dimensions of each product refer to the 18 mm 0 71 x number of units external dimensions diagram gt 50mm 1 97 I 8 3 2 2 stage layout suoneouioedgs In the case of a 2 stage layout connect the first stage and the second stage with the extension cable When an extension block is connected at the top of the second stage FX2N CNV BC connector conversion adapter is necessary Qi oK 0o D zd 1 When an input output powered extension unit is connected at the top of the 2nd stage 929 m gm Input output powered extension er Special adapter units blocks Special function units blocks 5G ng db ong mi mi m 6 108958875165554 502511035 OS n non n hn li main unit o Oo OG o SERRE S 1 6 a EE a HN Hs H O E acer D S L 4Ll 4Ll 4L 4aLl 4L 4L 4aL aL lLlc mmm m m el ee ee ee el ll lll l 2 S Up to 10 units approx 18mm Forthe dimensions of each product refer to the 0 71 x number of units external dimensions diagram N a ee eee co Input output m m UE 3S Oe cO powered D D o9 ZS 7 extension D D 9p D Oo Oo Oo l units o 9 S Extension cable eF XoN 65EC 650mm 25 59 For the dimensions of each product refer to the eF XoN 30EC 300mm 11 81 external dimensions diagram 1 The shaded part in the above figure includes FX2N 1RM E SET Ey 50mm 1 97 and FX3U 1PSU 5V however only FX2N 1RM E SET is connectable to FX2N 1RM
542. rs 0 to 7 are assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit 2 FX2N 1RM E SET Up to three FX2nN 1RM E SET can be sequentially connected to the end of one system All these connected units have the same number as the unit number of the first unit FX2N 1RM E SET For FX2n 1RM E SET refer to FX2N 1RM E SET USER S MANUAL 3 Products to which unit numbers are not assigned Input output powered extension units FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL etc Input output extension blocks FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL etc e Special function block FX2N 16LNK M e Connector conversion adapter FX2N CNV BC Expansion boards FX3U 232 BD etc e Special adapters FX3U 232ADP etc Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V FXau Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Units Blocks 7 2 2 Example of assigning S a Unit numbers are assigned to the special function units blocks in the following configuration For assignment of input output numbers refer to Section 7 1 z Input output Input output Special E ced Main unit extension block extension block function 2 FX3U 232 BD FX3U 64MR ES FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EYT block Sq ES UL ESS UL FX2N 4AD a3 Sg 30 CD di Input output powered extension Special Special Special Special function bl
543. rs are used Software Magni Response frequency and overall frequency depending on counters fication conditions of instruction to be used in Neither HSZ nor Only HSCT Both HSZ and HSCT calcu Only HSZ instruction i Counter HSCT instruction instruction instructions Counter type lation Nos Max of Overall Overall Overall Overall onm response frequency frequency frequency kHz kHz C241 C242 30 25 numberof numberof instruc instruc 50 1 5 X 50 1 5 X numberof numberof instruc instruc tions tions 30 numberof instruc tions 4 25 number of instruc tions 4 1 When an index register is added to a counter number specified by HSCS HSCR HSZ or HSCT instruction all hardware counters are switched to software counters 2 The high speed counters C244 OP and C245 OP cannot count signals of 10 kHz or more 194 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 11 9 Calculation of Response Frequency and Overall Frequency FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 Calculation of overall frequency The overall frequency is calculated by the high speed comparison instruction used in the program based on the above table Overall frequency gt Sum of response frequency of high speed counter x Magnification for calculation of overall frequency 2 Example of calculation When only HSZ instruction is used six times in a program the frequency is calcula
544. rs other than communication adapters is restricted as shown in the following table Number of connectable special adapters of each type Type and function of expansion board to be used Communi roe High speed High speed cation dose input output When expansion board is not used Cannot be connected 2 unit When FXs3u 232 BD FX3u 422 BD FX3u 485 BD or 1 unit Aini 2 unit 2 unit FX3u USB BD is used 6 4 2 Special function units blocks High speed input output special adapter Up to eight special function units blocks can be connected in one system When connecting the following products take into consideration the combination number of units blocks and connecting order Type Limitations e t cannot be used together with FX2N 32ASI M FX2N 16CCL M e When some units are used a remote I O station cannot be connected to the second and following master stations It cannot be used together with FX2N 16CCL M 2N 32ASI M Field Only one unit can be used for the whole system Upto3 units can be sequentially connected to the end of a system FX2N 1RM E SET However when three units are connected they are counted as one unit and the number of input output occupied points is 8 When any of these products is connected to a FX2N Series input output powered extension unit the current consumption is restricted The total current consumption of FXoN 3A FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA must be the following value or less FXON 3A FX2N 32E
545. s FX2N 16EYT ESS UL When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers Without cover m Ie M Gy FX2N 8EYT ESS UL Rear line extension connector and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Output indicator lamps LED lamps eo cus com OOOOOOOO Output indicator lamps LED lamps oca omoo OOOOOOOO Without cover FX2N 16EYT ESS UL O 0000000 Rear line extension connector Lower numbers o o o o o Oo o o Higher numbers 4A SA A EA OA ZA 9A SA A LA OA LAQ9A VA ZA LPAI ZA OAL 309 SJOJUNOD p ds y iH m NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog Indjnojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 17 Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 3 External dimensions FX2N 8EYT ESS UL 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8EYT ESS CD POWER oTo 1 2 3 OOOO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 2 4 5 mounting holes
546. s Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fixthe electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed I suoneouioedgs Qi Jug The expansion board and special adapters of a terminal block type have terminal blocks for Europe Ss a no 2 eo 1 Applicable products 8 Classification Model names Expansion Board FX3u 485 BD FX3U 485ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U A4AD PT ADP FX3u A4AD TC ADP Special Adapters FX3u 4HSX ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP uejs S e uonenBijuo 2 Electric wires Compliant electric wires and tightening torque N Electric wire size Tightening z stranded wire solid wire Enogrestinent 98 O One electric wire 0 3mMm to 0 5mm Remove the coating of the stranded wire twist 25 AWG22 to 20 the core wires and connect the wires directly US Two electric 2 e Remove the coating from the solid wire and wires 0 3mm AWG22 connect the wire directly 0 3 24505 2 0 22 to 0 25Nem Bar terminal with insulating sleeve 3 mm to 0 5 mm Bar terminal with AWG22 to 20 recommended product l l i Al 0 5 8WH Phoenix Contact insulating sleeve Refer to the following outline CRUK drawing of bar terminal CRIMPFOX UD6 Phoenix Contact uonejejsu oo 3 Treatment of electric wire ends Treat the ends of stranded wires and solid wires without coating or using bar terminals
547. s S 4 4 79 4 Model name SOHITIBg no E 0 16 w 0 16 2 96 0 16 pitch W LUE TNR UE RR E FXoN 3A wa ME io FX2N 2AD Sg t ip io gt FX2N 2DA ale HiX nr z LO FX2N 1PG 3o Ec a FX2N 1PG E 39 1 54 aa O Q Olo 9 e as FX2N 10PG i i NENNEN ndi FX2N 64CL M 3 FX2N 32CCL 4 4 FX2N 16LNK M 2 Oo 0 16 wi ee FX3U 4AD ES TE x FX3U 4DA o A semi BE 1 FX3u 20SSC H ENS FX3U 1PSU 5V s FX2N 4AD 4 J ig FX2N 4DA go 2 FX2N 4AD PT B Os FX2N 4AD TC 51 2 01 si E 1 FX2N 5A O ES LEI Vv FX2N 2LC FX2N 1HC FX2N 1RM SET 5 FX2N 1RM E SET FX2N 232IF SEF FX2N 32ASI M 83S so FX2N 16CCL M Dod figure shown left FX2N 8AD 67 2 64 6 FX2N 20PSU 52 2 05 o9 pamon enema B si FX2N 20GM directly S 8 6 2 Example of mounting hole pitches T Z5 37 1 27 26 45 67 11 oe 1 47 155 6 11 1 07 1 03 1 78 2 64 0 44 140 5 52 Unit mm inches ze K SK Se gt k gt k sk ER a a sue a o ET an NT AERIS RUNE MAU 1 EERE An ERN TONNE 7 au Qu ge eee 16 I I i ii io to Ci B GEHE J ji D PIO oo i I i O oo i i I I cO dee c c uc cuu du cq cc ioi Ae Palle T ae ioi i 2 i 2 i 2 i gt k FX3u 48MR ES 0 087 0 08 0 08 2 0 08 FX2N 32ER ES UL 9 FX3U 232ADP FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 2AD FX2N 8AD E Euer en en 3 8 The gap between products is 2 mm 0 08 i 20 ES zo 10 Bui 1ndu 137 FXsu Series Programmable
548. s supply 1 This power consumption is the value maximized by input output extension blocks and special function units blocks connected to the main unit For input output powered extension units blocks power consumption information refer to Section 15 2 2 The power supply is not for external use The current capacity specified above is for the input output extension blocks special function blocks special adapters and expansion boards 3 When supply voltage is 16 8 to 19 2V DC the connectable extension equipment decreases For details refer to Subsection 6 5 3 or 6 5 4 50 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 3 Input Specifications 4 3 Input Specifications 2 o The main unit input specifications are explained below S 4 3 1 24V DC Input sink source 2 The input numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers X010 or more means the numbers from X010 to the largest number that the main unit has am The input numbers for FX3u 16MLJ are X000 to X007 Sg For details on input and source input refer to Subsection 10 1 1 5 Specifications Item x FX3U 16MLI FX3U 32MLI FX3U 48MLI FX3U 64MLI FX3U 80MLI FXaU 128ML1 2 Number of input points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points jnpold CY Fixed termi 3 Input connecting type nal block M3 Removable terminal
549. s vs v put qqvraponqvtspv po vz vas v2 23 Terminal block2 8 Terminal block 1 FX3U 80MT DSS 4 T Povas Tvaopyazpvaayae 3 S zr E vea vO Jae poya yae Yeva ev vi vs vi YS vr SAE RA AAA 9 99 Terminal block 2 ERE Terminal block 1 ns sg za SL 3 63 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 7 FX3u 128ML 64 AC power supply type Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2 1 SIS OV OV Xo X2 X4 XG XOX T2XTAIK TO X20 X22 X24 26 CN Eavgavpa X5 x5 x7 xt tax 5x 7x2 ipeaspos Xeopxsa papas xao pxaz xaaprae xso xe2 xe x6 60x62x64 X66 XTO XT2 X74 X70 27X31 xa xe pep xa xaspxa xs es xes xs xe r xes xes xer xr i xrapxrs xr7 FX3U 128MR ES FX3uU 128MT ES Y55lv57lvYeolve2 vaspvaspva so vsa vsa vsefcow ver vea ves ver v ro vT2 YT4 vT6 VO V2 pop V5 V7 JV tov 2geowvts vv7 v29 va2 v2 vae cow vat vss v3s vs7 vao va2 N com Yt YS v4 Ye pav jv s via v tegeovs vz v2a v2s vz7 v3o vsz vsajv3e ovv Terminal block 2 Terminal block 1 FX3U 128MT ESS vaavagpvr ve ilvsalvssivs veo vez ve4 vee ve v7 TIYT3IYTS 77 V vas vasjvavsolvsalvsajvse va ve i vealvesiYe7 Y ov 72 y 74 Y76 voes v7 JV 10 2p va v 18v 17 20 Y22lY24 28 vv v33 Y38 Y37 Y40Y42 N svo Y1 Y3 Ya ve vata 4v tap valy2 tlv23 v28 Y 27 3032 Sav ep ve v41 Terminal block 2 Termi
550. s and Representation of Error Codes Ladder error If the operations of the PLC are abnormal perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool An I O error Comms error or Runtime error may have occurred No errors that stop the PLC have occurred Off FXau Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes gm Error codes can be checked with the programming tool or on the display module FX3U 7DM 8 14 6 1 Operation and check on display module FX3u 7DM NO 1 Move the cursor to ErrorCheck pressing the or button on the menu screen shown right 2 For the menu configuration refer to Section 19 6 E The buttons on the menu screen work as stated below Monitor Test Operation 3XErrorCheck T Operation ee Soe button LANGUAGE 13 ESC The screen returns to the top screen time display Contrast The cursor moves upward When the button is held ec for 1 second or more the cursor moves quickly ClockMenu ze When the cursor is in the uppermost position the EntryCode y button is ineffective ClearAlIlDev The cursor moves downward When the button is PLC Status held for 1 second or more the cursor moves ScanTime quickly When the cursor is in the lowermost position the Cass
551. s are the transistor sink type in the used main unit 104 BULIM Ses snoueA I o 22 Digital 737 switch of o P BCD E peJewog indinojndu Ol 0 1A 50V diode is necessary ET a a a IS pp pap El b LLLA 4 109 10 sun uoisuejx3 NN 8 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit SOR D 5 DE gt S5 Digital 10 n switch of BCD 18 gt N VY NW W 0 1A 50V diode is necessary ph E EIL ae ee a AR EJ is n nee ee ee ar suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO 10 aH z a uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 223 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 2 Main unit input output powered extension unit block Example of program M8000 Examples of wiring In the case of sink wiring When the main unit and a transistor output sink type input output powered extension unit block are used 10 pp 1 Digital switch of BCD ZAA 109 AN 4 0 1 50V WVE LI rr Cr i diode is elegi E necessary ETT E poer 1 4 aie 8 2 COM 24 X Input output powered extension unit
552. s on Doing so may cause electrical shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals externally cut off all phases of the power supply Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard Correctly connect the battery for memory backup Do not charge disassemble heat or short circuit the battery Do not throw it into the fire Doing so may rupture or ignite it Before modifying the program under operation or performing operation for forcible output running or stopping carefully read the manual and sufficiently ensure the safety An operation error may damage the machine or cause accidents Do not change programs in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment such as the programming tool and GOT at the same time Such changes may cause destruction or malfunction of programs in the PLC STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Before attaching or detaching the memory cassette turn off power If it is attached or detached while PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause failures malfunctions or fire For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor Before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable turn off power Failure to do so may cause unit failure or malfunctions Before attaching or detaching the following devices turn off power Failure to do so may cause device failure or
553. s shown in the figure below the switch knob can be pushed or pulled When setting the switch do not o set it in an intermediate position Switch setting Push tool direction Switch Switch case Pull knob direction OFFeON OFFeON 21 4 3 Precautions when setting and using the switch Leaving the switch knob at an intermediate position for an extended period can cause an equipment failure Also use care to avoid scratching the PCB when setting the switch 431 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 21 FXSU FLROM 16 64 64L Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 5 Memory Cassette PLC RAM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 21 5 Memory Cassette PLC RAM Memory Transfers by Loader Function The FX3U FLROM 64L loader function WR and RD key operation is explained in this section Program transfers reading writing are possible between the memory cassette and the PLC s internal RAM memory The loader function is enabled while the PLC is stopped 21 5 1 Tool for pressing the WR and RD keys Use an insulator tool plastic ceramic etc to press the WR and RD keys The area around the keys is not insulated Using a metal screwdriver etc can cause equipment damage 21 5 2 Writing WR 64L PLC A memory cassette program is written to the PLC s internal RAM memory Required condition The PLC must be stopped 1 Install the memory cassette on the main unit
554. s to FX2N 48ER UA1 UL a maximum of 32 outputs are expandable i B BEN p Bui 1ndu 93 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 94 2 Check the current capacity of the 24V DC service power supply based on the value shown in the quick reference matrix In the case of AC power supply DC input type The remaining power supply capacity current can be used as a power supply to loads sensors or the like When special adapters and special function units blocks are connected by external wiring it is necessary to consider whether they can be covered by the remaining power supply capacity In the case of DC power supply DC input type 24V DC service power supply is not provided In the case of AC power supply AC input type 24V DC service power supply is not provided When the power supply capacity is insufficient connect another input output powered extension unit When two input output powered extension units or more are connected calculate the power supply capacities of the input output extension blocks and special function units blocks connected to them and check the capacity FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Cur
555. sal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem 405 SJOJUhOO peeds ybiIH a3 N BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow s lup uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo N Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue SylUf 1X3 JOUIO a uoisuo J o nel o es O Q c D 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 1 Overview User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 1 Overview A terminal block is used to convert connector type input output terminals into a terminal block Moreover dedicated input and output terminal blocks built in element types can be used to receive AC input signals for conversion to relay transistor triac output types FXw 16EX C JL A r r Optional cable or T user fabricated cable Terminal block Terminal block MITSUBISHI FX 16E TB MITSUBISHI 406 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX 16 32E TB Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 1 Overview 20 1 1 Product configuration The connection destinations shown below are products which can be connected by connector lt connect
556. se malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal 13 and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC SS 2 When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are Sa turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block FS output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case 3 The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off I DESIGN PRECAUTIONS WIRING PRECAUTIONS Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case 4 When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases NCAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do no
557. se 100 kHz x 2 points when 2 units are connected Refer to Chapter 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 in this manual and Programming Manual Pulse catch function Signals with short ON width or OFF width can be captured without a complicated program Refer to Chapter 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch in this manual and Programming Manual Input terminal Signal ON OFF width X000 to X005 SUS X006 X007 50us FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Input interruption function with delay function Interruption routines can be processed preferentially by external signals with the minimum ON or OFF width of 5 us X000 to X005 Timer interruption and high speed counter interruption functions are also provided Refer to Chapter 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch in this manual and Programming Manual Pulse output function 1 When output terminals in the transistor output type main unit are used pulses open collector outputs of up to 100 kHz can be output simultaneously to three axes YOOO Y001 and Y002 2 When two high speed output special adapters FX3U 2HSY ADP are used pulses differential line driver outputs of up to 200 kHz can be output simultaneously to four axes Refer to Positioning Control Edition Various positioning instructions Refer to Positioning Control Edition
558. se electric shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fixthe electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent electrical shock short circuit breakage of wire or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem This chapter explains the procedures for wiring cabling and wiring the power supply The input output wiring procedures are stated in the following chapter Wiring procedures Procedures for connecting cables to various shapes of power supply and
559. se for the main unit For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications sink input common Item FX2N 32ES Number of input points 16 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form Sink Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5 mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3 KQ TE Ms 3 5 mA or more 24V DC Input sensitivity current current Input OFF current 1 5 mA or less Input response time About 10 ms Input signal form No voltage contact input or NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler Indication of input operation LED on panel is lit when there is input Sink input wiring Input circuit diagram 278 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 7 FX2N 32ES FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 Output specifications triac output type Item FX2N 32ES Number of output points 16 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Triac output SSR 85 to 242V AC External power supply Output circuit insulation Indication of output operation Insulation with photo th
560. seaueeeesseueeessusesesseaaeeees 202 12 Output Wiring Procedures 203 12 1 Sink and Source Output Transistor Jesss ideato xenon nere m t ln t nri tit eve dece si ete e 205 12 2 External Wiring for Relay OUtput cccccccsesecccssseecceeseecseeseecseeeecseaeeesseaseessegeeessegeeessseeeees 206 12 2 1 Outpubspecilicatlons main UNI siirsi Jan vecbes dian ves hu e Red one d S epoca etes exe ee eun ETA ee ndo da ded aE 206 12 2 2 Prod ctlite of relay COntacls aor pue a Rd tette euo desee a PUE E 207 12 2 9Handling orreldy OU UI i ce ink denuo iu o vfeita i Naa Aad ec det edt aU cae ated 207 12 2 4 C auuons on extetrial WING eai oat unis ooa Fas limes cepe de re mele Ae lame de tienen 208 12 2 5 Example of external WIFIDg 5 i raise Sed tue pna sa vett mee oad due GbA ege o OE Qu doe ees ee 209 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type cccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 210 12 3 1 Output specifications main unit transistor output sink type eesseeeseeeeseseess 210 12 3 2 Output specifications main unit transistor output source type sseeeeseeesessssss 211 12 3 3 Handling of transistor OUtQUL cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeseseaeeeesseeeeeeesaaeeeeesaeeeeeseas 212 12 374 Extemal wring PRECAUTIONS tete E e 214 12 3 5 Example of external wiring ccccccccssseccecseeecceee
561. sed cassette posture Memory cassette NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN S NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN S NNNNNNNNNNN RQQVQVQAQQALL RQQQVQQAVE YOOQ S RQQVWQAAA RQQQVAQMQVL RQQQVAMQVL RQQQAQVQALL RQQVQAQQALL RQQVQVQQQALL RQQAQQVLL RQVQAQQAVLL RQQQVAQQVL RQQQVAOQQALL RQQVQVQAOQAVLL Memory cassette Tilted cassette posture DOOOOOS RQ row GEE S2fcty Precautions NEED Read these precautions before use 3 WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Referenc Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock NCAUTION E Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply in the main unit and extension units from the outside Such power supply may cause damages to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit and extension units with a 2mm or thicker wire Do not connect the grounding
562. seecseeueceesceseeecsuaecesseeueeeessseeessaseeesseausessnses 216 12 4 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type ccccecccccseeeeceeeseeceesseeceeseessesseeesseseeesseeeeeeas 218 12 44 Hanalirig ort86 OHIpUl ca Gr cedet oe aae ot Cus aaa a a ee elim hee ncc tenis 218 12 42 Extena WINING DFE CAUTIONS ssa ixuscv sciri nor aa C HaCSc ias io Eod ci aee Ce DE eas Uc aoc e Mes v Eugen EN 219 124 3 Exatnple On external WIRING acie decern a C ease ace iubes a a 220 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 221 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring s eios adeste oa i resa t a rait bares esed vetib iui as Sesto eiu b oet cess d ates 222 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 223 13 2 1 When DSW instructions are Used eoe open o ger e eic ose bester tq Es erased 223 19 22 When BIN instructions are Sed an sence tee co e rase ep sac zoevxY e vexa dx poa sa ea DU URUS EM e o Pe Vb CRM PADS US 226 13 3 Ten Key Input TKY Instructions FNC 70 ccccccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeaeusessaeeeesaaeeeesaees 227 13 4 Hexadecimal Input HKY Instructions FNC71 cece cecccseececeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeees 228 13 5 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC52 cccccccccececceeeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesseeeseeetseeeesseeeees 231 13 6 Seven Segment w
563. selay OUIDUD Gu tuto luti E o te atas 52 44 2 Product lie of relay Contacts ac eec re Cotto Eos ed enct det ics es ie EH abut Papius esa ee 53 4 43 Transistor output SINK LY DC uo ctore eo ee Lene eot Frases tt os aav e Dese e oa cec esee ee MT SEEN 53 4 4 4 Transistor output source tYPe cccccesseeccceseeecceeecccseeueececeusseecceaueeesseeueeeecsueeesssaeeeessuauseesssages 54 4 5 Performance Specifications cccccceseccceececcesceceneeecececseeececesseeeeseaeessaeessaeeeseueessaeeeseeessaeeeesens 55 4 6 External Dimensions Weight and Installation ccccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeeesaaeeeesaaes 58 4 6 T EXSU TOMEN EX93U 32MIEI uiri otio ueni cir mta Leute teretes vu Ro tuc n educa Gies di m sales 58 4 6 2 FX3U 48ML I FX3U 64MLI FX3U 80MLI FX3U 128MLJ eeeessseseeeeenneenennnnn mnn 59 Zr Terminal Layout ictus itii om haberte oce haereat a pud odorato 60 AT Interpretallofis c codecs deus oec ave Ico see ibediuiat A uide due oe add te plos eo ileus 60 Ae Te eur PE 61 d 1 9 EX90 92MIBl ee qoe b aset eee es eee Ln uL MEME LL D E 61 A AEA ASM E TT rH RETENIR ee ee eae ee 62 z Toe P euin EP 62 ano FAV GOM earan css alec saat dete s Latis didnt t beendet iste oda tacos dc esc Eus SE cde de 63 OTT EA Oat eaters ta Hcc en 64 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 65 MNA VOLSIOM NA DGrAGES IGLONY e 65
564. shi Electric sales site Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility 89 336 EEC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3U series manufactured from May 1st 2005 FX3U MR ES Where x x indicates 16 32 48 64 80 FX3U AHSX ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP FX3U FLROM 16 FX3U FLROM 64L FX3U 7DM from June 1st 2005 FX3U 232ADP FX3U 485ADP FX3U A4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U AAD PT ADP FX3U A4AD TC ADP FX3U 232 BD FX3U 422 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3U CNV BD FX3U USB BD FX3u FLROM 64 from November 1st 2005 FX3U MT ES FX3U MT ESS Where x x indicates 16 32 48 64 80 from February 1st 2006 FX3U 128MR ES FX3u 128MT ES FX3U 128MT ESS FX3U MR DS FX3U MT DS FX3U MT DSS Where x indicates 16 32 48 64 80 Standard Remark EN61131 2 2003 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirements and tests e Radiated Emissions Mains Terminal Voltage Emissions e RF immunity Fast Transients e ESD e Surge Conducted Power magnetic fields Models MELSEC FX2N series manufactured from July 1st 1997 from April 1st 1998 FX2N ER ES UL FX2N ET ESS UL Where
565. sion block FX2N 16EYT ESS UL YO50 to Y067 Y070 to YO73 Y100 to Y103 Y110 to Y127 Y074 to Y O77 Unused numbers Input output Special Special function extension block function block block unit FX2N 92ET leXoN BER ES UL FX2N 10PG FX2N 64CL M ESS UL The output numbers are carried from 70s to 100s Station No 1 Station No 2 4 input 4 input points output points zal CLIX4 D1B2 CLIXY4 DTIB2 CLIXY4 DTIB2 X114 X115 gt X116 X117 Y100 Y101 Y102 Y103 X110 to X113 116 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y 7 1 3 Application of I O number label The input out
566. sion 8 23Z can be used for programming by selecting FX3U C or FX2N C restrictions will be made on programming un 24 For more information refer to Chapter 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Sg Connectability 95 3 2 2 Communication cables Y Compliance with standard or self declaration LI Not targeted A Partial compliance a3 ac oaei name escription arine o USB cable 3m For connection between personal computer and USB cable 9405 EOM SE ee B USB cable 3m 9 10 supplied with FX3u USB BD or commercially available cable up to 5m 16 4 I USB MINI B plug USB A plug suoneouioedgs RS 232C cable Qi D SUB 25Pin D SUB 9Pin F2 232CAB 1 uon For connection between personal computer and MES RS 232C RS 422 converter o og D SUB 25Pin e D SUB 25Pin p 3 z Te F2 232CAB For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter D SUB 25Pin Half pitch 14 pin 3m F2 232CAB 2 910 For connection between personal computer and uejs S e RS 232C RS 422 converter Q 3mm D SUB 9Pin D SUB 9Pin 8 FX 232CAB 1 910 For connection between GOT F900 Series personal z z computer and FX3u 232 BD 3 3m D SUB 9Pin p Half pitch14Pin FX 232CAB 2 910 For connection between GOT F900 Series personal T computer and FX3U 232 BD z RS 422 cable d E 15m D SUB 25Pin MINI DIN 8Pin B FX 422CABO For connection betwe
567. sion block Main unit some blocks can be connected Special Expansion adapter Power supply Power supply Power supply from Power supply from from main unit from main unit input output powered extension power supply extension unit unit 1r lI J Refer to Section 6 5 Refer to Section 6 6 Refer to Section 6 7 When connecting an input extension block on the downstream side of an extension power supply unit supply the power to the input extension block from the nearest main unit on the upstream side or from an input output powered extension unit on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit In the example above the input output powered extension unit supplies the power to extension blocks For details refer to Section 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit Calculation of Current Consumption For details refer to Section 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current Consumption For details refer to Section 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 7T uononpoJju SeuJeN Wed pue s n d MJ Pnpoid CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi O U lt O oc 5 7 O O Oo 2 o o2 oo en a uoneJnBijuo uejs S jndinogndu mJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration 6 3 Use
568. ss ESC Button Operation Description ESC Returns to the device selection screen Scrolls the user registered devices User specified device 1 user specified device 4 user specified device 3 user specified device 2 user specified device 1 Scrolls the user registered devices User specified device 1 user specified device 2 user specified device 3 user specified device 4 user specified device 1 OK Switches to the test mode when hold for 1 second or longer 362 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module 19 9 Error Check FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 8 2 Test mode operation 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the user registered device whose current value is to be changed Refer to Subsection 19 7 2 for monitor function operation D timer Halt 100 2 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test mode The current value then begins blinking refer to fig at right 3 Use the buttons to change the value as desired To cancel D the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC Halt timer 100 Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the monitor Screen Halt timer i Reduces the value D 100 Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction A Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase OK Registers the current value
569. ss 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC Y 003 or more 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24V DC Circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Display of output l TT operation LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven Output circuit configuration i DC power supply A common number applies to the of V FXau Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications b 4 5 Performance Specifications 3 O a si The performance specifications are common to FX3U Series PLCs o Item Performance Stored program repetitive operation system dedicated LSI with 2 Operation control system l l interruption function DT Iur ce FORO SVSIEIR Batch processing system when END instruction is executed ES P P y Input output refresh instruction and pulse catch function are provided See Programming language Relay symbol system step ladder system SFC notation possible 64000 step 2k 4k 8k 16k or 32k step memory can be selected by parameter settings Comments and file registers can be created in the program memory by parameter settings e Comments Up to 6350 points 50 points 500 steps e File registers Up to 7000 points 500 points 500 steps 64000 step RAM backed up by built in lithium battery i e Battery life Approx 5 years guarantee for 1 year capacity type Program PDE With password protection f
570. sseeeeeenenneenee nne 28 2 Features and Part Names 30 ZA MANOR zr Ig 30 2 2 Names and T ncllonsior Palts cedo tuoi retos to tete Fre Nue A Sd ute ie o cu e ie auina be eds 32 Z23b rop anelli a a eoo ubi doit ipte cato ot ctos iuh cios Sere ee eee OPN ete 32 IAM So T p 34 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards 35 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names 35 SRI MANT CC dee dena ee 36 3 1 2 B Input output powered extension units ccc cecccceecccceeeecceeeeeseeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseaecesseeeesseeessaneeeeeees 37 3 1 9 C Input output extension blocks qu oe Ue pases roc Yu ce Doe A ee 38 3 1 4 D E Special function units blocks seeeeseeeseseeseeenemn 39 3 1 5 F Display modules and holder iiu iei e bes Era piede eene ua CE aste E aa ccE eee e dienes chee Ue ct Euh 41 3 1 6 G Expansion DO ANS ET DTE 41 g Le IBI Special adaplerssuessgso melee quete uit eee Ue pasta a oe ase eg Roar eee VERE Deu DUE 41 31 6 EXTENSION DoWer SUD DIY UII soc eu eap a corte ate SENE s e diem ne Exe inepto n uen tb oa epa E eS eiua coude SuU 42 3 1 9 J Extension cables and connector conversion adapter K Battery L Memory cassettes 42 3 1 10 M FX Series terminal blocks cables and connectors eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 43 SIRNA WING PR MIO O
571. stor output on the mating device and the input current of the main body 2 is 20 mA or more ch 3 Input sensitivity ES The PLC input current and input sensitivity are shown in the following table a When there is a series diode or resistance at the input contact or there is a parallel resistance or leakage current at the input contact wire the terminals in accordance with the following table For the instructions for connecting input devices refer to Subsection 10 2 3 X010 to max input number jnpold CY Item X000 to X005 X006 to X007 SET a of the main unit 9 Input voltage AC power type 24V DC 10 DC power type 16 8 to 28 8V DC Input current 6 mA 7 mA o mA Input sensitivity SNAM current 1 5 mA or less 1 5 mA or less 1 5 mA or less 4 Examples of input wiring For the wiring of input interruption pulse catch and rotary encoder refer to the following sections Example of wiring of input interruption Refer to Section 10 4 Example of wiring of pulse catch Refer to Section 10 5 Example of wiring of rotary encoder Refer to Section 11 10 I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A 10 2 3 Instructions for connecting input devices 1 In the case of no voltage contact The input current of this PLC is 5 to 7 mA 24V DC Use input devices applicable to this minute current uejs S e If no voltage contacts switches for large current are used contact failure may occur 9 Input numbe
572. strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using e f in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor e Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor Q9 Registration Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
573. suitability of the system configuration are explained using an example system configuration consisting of an expansion board special adapters input output powered extension units blocks and special function blocks 6 9 1 Example system configuration A system configuration is examined using the following example FX3U A8MR ES FX3U 2HSY ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP FX3U 4HSX ADP FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL IHE Extension cable CC Link To CC Link master station FX2N CNV BC FX2N 10PG FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 64CL M FX2n 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 2LC CC Link LT 8 output points 4 input points CC Link Power Remote Remote supply device nan i device adapter station station station 106 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification 6 9 2 Expansion of main unit z 3 The suitability of the above system configuration is evaluated as shown below B 1 Enter the specifications for the main unit 2 Capacity of built in power Number of Number of supply Classification connected Type input output 24V DC service 29 units points points 9V DC power power supply 83 supply mA mA With built in 23 ga power FX3U 48MR ES S supply Main unit S 2 Enter the specifications for the products to be connected to the main uni
574. sulated from each other grounding 11 2 2 Cautions in connecting mating device Encoders with the output forms in the following table can be connected to the input terminals The encoders may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility Check the specifications in advance Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high speed counter input terminals Terminals for connecting Output form that can be directly connected Open collector transistor output form applicable to 24V DC Differential line driver output form Set the input voltage of FX3U 4HSX ADP to 5V DC or less Input terminals of main unit Input terminals of FX3U 4HSX ADP 182 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 11 3 Types of Counting and Operations 11 3 Types of Counting and Operations The main unit has built in 32 bit high speed bi directional counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input The high speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters according to the counting method For some high speed counters external reset input terminals or external start input terminals start of counting can be selected 11 3 1 Classification according to counting method Classification Details Counting by hardware ai a They are switched to software counters under some wor
575. supply is off If power is being supplied correctly consult your local External wiring is incorrect Mitsubishi Electric distributer Power of the specified voltage is After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re not being supplied to the power apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If supply terminal no improvement is obtained consult your local Mitsubishi The power cable is broken Electric distributer 14 5 2 BATT LED on off State of LED State of PLC Remedies l Immediately replace the battery Refer to Chapter 22 FX3U On The battery voltage is low 32BL Battery The battery voltage is higher than the Off value set with D8006 meme 247 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIL a3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb O c D nN F o o gt Q peJewog indinojndu DO sun uoisuejx3 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 14 5 3 ERROR LED on flashing off 248 Flashing Parameter error State of LED State of PLC Remedies 1 Stop the PLC and re apply power If ERROR LED goes off a watchdog timer error may have
576. t 4 Calculation of current eo Number of Nini ul consumption of built in 8 Classification connected Type E T power supply 2 units points points 5V pev power 24V DC power a pev mA supply mA FX3u 232 BD 5 5 232 SR F X3U EX3U MHHSX ADP ADP 30 C CD Special adapter ies BEEN S products connected to the main unit 4 FX2N 16EYT ESS UL ME 150 7 Input output FX2N 16EX ES UL 16 100 ze O FX2N 2LC 0 9 Special function FX2N 64CL M 0 a je o Calculate the totals 760 650 ov 1 The number for FX2N 64CL M is calculated by adding the number of input output points at the ZSE connected remote I O station to 8 points 2 3i e 107 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification 3 Calculate the number of input output points Calculate the number of input output points on the whole system 1 Calculate the number of input output points of the main unit and extension devices Number of input output points Max number of Main unit Total input output points Calculation result inout oUtout boints of extension devices ux Er lt 256 ponis EONA 2 Calculate the number of remote I O points on the network Since this system uses CC Link calculate the number of the remote I O stations Max number of Input output on network Calculation result IPIBIT
577. t Output form Open collector transistor A 3 a pelewod indinonndu Ow General purpose input terminal block X000 to X007 I LT He sun uoisuejx3 ET 77 TENET O000000000 zoso O B fii soo 8 Z y FULL aa a m m w zo 0 5 Soo ooooooo zo 8 UP d H L A Rotary encoder Output form Differential line driver ac 1st unit X000 X001 x002 x006 H 2nd unit X003 X004 X005 X007 High speed input special adapters FX3U 4HSX ADP 490 UOISUS X3 indjnojndu e NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj Cautions for high speed input special adapters Do not use the same input number for both the high speed input special adapter terminal and the main unit terminal oo e When wiring the input numbers assigned to a high speed input special adapter do not wire the same input number in main unit suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO When not wiring the input numbers assigned to a high speed input special adapter the main unit s input terminals can be used as general inputs A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 181 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 2 Input Specifications 11 2 Input Specifications For input to the high speed counters the input terminals X000 to X007 of the main unit or high speed input special adapter are us
578. t area select 16 bit integer and HEX 399 SJOJUNOD peedS uOIL adh NO BuutM 1ndino Jo BuuiM O3 SOS ShOUEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO J wn pen o lt o ok D 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 23 User Message Display Function 5 Entering User Messages As shown in the illustration below the dialog box for character string inputs is opened by double clicking on GX Developer s character string display area or the data register display area When entering Japanese scripts Chinese characters etc data input automatically occurs in the lower order higher order sequence and the input can therefore be used as it is at the display module s user message display The GX Developer screen s character string shown below is for program example 1 Refer to Subsection 19 23 4 for program example 1 details 7 MELSOE T series GX Developer Usenet project Device memory MAEM Olujg fx male J eie xx ale sim mem A mew vis vj E53 P E FA ES 13d rr M eh e co a e eot Ie eti Fer I ass i XN ald Kl ETAZ SL BU Ni PE KH Ed Eo Ec Pd ed EA EA ESES E 30
579. t correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 Foran input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 Do not take input signals from loads generating surge 176 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch 10 4 Input Interruption IOOL to I50L With Delay Function FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 4 Input Interruption I00 to 150I With Delay Function The PLC main unit is provided with an input interruption function input delay interruption function and has six interruption input points The ON or OFF duration of interruption input signals should be 5us or more For details on programming refer to the programming manual 10 4 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration Interrupt pointer ON or OFF duration of input Interrupt disable Input No Interruption on Interruption on NR signal leading edge trailing edge X000 1001 1000 M8050 X001 1101 1100 M8051 X002 1201 1200 M8052 Sus or more X003 1301 1300 M8053 X004 1401 1400 M8054 X005 1501 1500 M8055 10 4 2 Input interruption delay function This input interruption has a function to delay execution of interruption routine in 1ms units With this delay function the position of the sensor used for input interruption can be adjus
580. t form Sink gee Input signal voltage 24V DC 410 B3 E Input signal current 5 mA 24V DC gs Input impedance 4 3 KQ Input ON Input sensitivity 3 5 mA or more 24V DC ud current Input OFF SEES 1 5 mA or less see Input response time About 10 ms i Input signal form No voltage contact input or NPN open collector transistor 1 6 Input circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler Indication of input operation LED on panel is lit when there is input Jre e AC power supply type e DC power supply type E Sink input wiring Sink input wiring zi NI Pun A ddng Jewog Input circuit diagram UOISU9 X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO 1 The DC power type applies to the power supply voltage in Power Supply Specifications Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply 2 Do not connect with 24 terminal A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 275 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET D 3 Output specifications transistor output type Number of output points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit type Transistor sink output External power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler Indication of output operation When photocoupler is driven LED on panel is lit 0 5A poi
581. t lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions DANGER Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock cm or damage of product 88 Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or ES starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Perform wiring properly to the FXoN FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the
582. tance test of the terminals of each product refer to the following subsection Refer to Subsection 4 1 1 3 Do not use the PLC under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure Doing so may damage the PLC FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Installation location sad 8 2 Installation location o e S Use the PLC under the environmental conditions complying with the generic specifications Section 8 1 o Keep a space of 50 mm 1 97 away between the unit main body and other devices and structure 2 Install the unit as far away as possible from high voltage lines high voltage devices and power equipment To prevent temperature rise do not install the PLC on a floor or a ceiling or in the vertical direction 22 Install it horizontally on a wall as shown below 3 Arrange the extension cable in such a way that the left connectors of the input output powered extension units oo e blocks or special function units blocks are connected on the side closer to the main unit 8 2 1 Installation location in enclosure jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo N SON UN SON jndjnondu 9 DUUM A ddns Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 125 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure
583. tax error D8314 D8315 D8066 D8069 M 8066 Ladder error D8314 D8315 D8067 D8069 7 M 8067 Operation error D8314 D8315 D8068 M 8068 Operation error latch D8312 D8313 M 8069 2 I O bus check 5 Not cleared PLC 6 Serial communication error 2 ch2 PLC is detected by M8438 7 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 8 When M8069 is ON I O bus check is executed 439 21 Oz a 0008Q 0008IN sr1 uononJjsu W s n d jeioeds 9po00 J9joeJeu2 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond ing special device Number and name Operation and function Parallel link Set M8070 when Parallel link Set M8071 when using slave station Parallel link ON when operating Parallel link ON when M8070 or M8071 setting is incorrect Parallel Link M 8072 M 8073 1 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Sampling Trace M 8074 M 8075 Ready request for sampling trace M 8076 Start request for sampling trace M 8077 ON during sampling trace D8075 to M 8078 ON when sampling trace is D8098 completed M 8079 Sampling trace system area M 8080 M 8081 M 8082 M 8083 M 8084 iM8085 Not used E M 8086 M 8087 M 8088 M 8089 TEO BKCMP FNC194 to FNC199 instructions Block comparison signal COMRD FNC182 and BINDA M 8091 FNC261 instructions Output c
584. tch between the PLC Status screen pages Press OK or ESC to return to the menu screen Button Operation Description ESC Returns to the menu screen Returns to the previous page ls PLC Status 3 3 9 PLC Status 2 3 PLC Status 1 3 N Proceeds to the next page x PLC Status 1 3 gt PLC Status 2 3 gt PLC Status 3 3 OK Returns to the menu screen 3 Press OK or ESC to return to the menu screen 374 PLC Status 1 3 Ver 2 00 All operation is unrestricted PLC Status 1 3 Ver 2 00 PLC operation is limited PLC Status 2 3 Internal Memory Protection Capacity 64K PLC Status 3 3 Battery 3 2V Comments 1000 2000 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 15 PLC Status 11 19 15 2 PLC status display items QF 1 PLC Status 1 3 i PLC Status 1 3 N N BuutM 1ndino Display Content 1 Main unit s version information 1 3 Indicates the PLC s entry code registration status Messages vary according to the entry code status ga When a 16 bit entry code status is all online operations prohibited and when an 8 bit entry code status is n level A the entry code must be canceled in order to view the PLC information Displayed message PLC status I For 16 bit entry code A writing prohibit or reading writing prohibit entry code is 2 PLC operation is limited registered Fo
585. ted M8060 BCD converted tfol2 value Device number 10 to 337 1 Input X 0 Output Y D 8061 Error code for PLC hardware error M8061 D 8062 Error code for PLC PP M8062 communication error D 8063 Error code for serial M8063 communication error 1 ch 1 D 8064 Error code for parameter error M8064 D 8065 Error code for syntax error M8065 D 8066 Error code for ladder error M8066 D 8067 2 Error code for operation error M8067 n Operation error step number D 8068 M8068 latched 9 Error step number of M8065 to M8065 to 2 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 3 In case of 32K steps or more step number is stored in D8313 D8312 4 n case of 32K steps or more step number is stored in D8315 D8314 Parallel Link Refer to Data Communication Edition for details Parallel link error time out check time 500 ms D 8070 D 8071 D 8072 D 8073 447 21 Oz a 0008Q 0008IN sr1 uononJjsu W s n d jeioeds 9po00 J9joeJeu2 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond ing special device Number and name Content of register Sampling Trace D 8074 D 8075 D 8076 D 8077 D 8078 D 8079 D 8080 D 8081 D 8082 D 8083 D 8084 l l These devices are occupied by the D 8085 D 8086 D 8087 D 8088 D 8089 D 8090 D 8091 D 8092 D 8093 D 8094 D 8095 D 8096 D 8097 D 8098 PLC sys
586. ted by the formulas shown in the Only HSZ instruction column in the above table Magnification High speed counter No to be Input Calculation of max Tor Instruction calculation of used frequency response frequency to be used overall frequency C237 Operatomas 20kHz 30 6 times 24kHz x1 software counter L h SZ instruc C241 10kHz 30 6 times 24kHz tion is used C253 OP 4 edge count Software counter six times 2kHz 30 6 times 4 6kHz 1 The overall frequency is calculated as shown below because HSZ instruction is used six times Overall frequency 50 1 5 x 6 41kHz 2 The sum of the response frequencies of the high speed counters used is calculated as shown below 20kHz x 1 C237 10kHz x 1 C241 2kHz x 4 C253 OP 38kHz lt 41kHz 195 SJojuno2 peeds ubiH NO BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 10 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 11 10 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 11 10 1 1 phase 1 input C235 to C245
587. ted in the sequence program It is necessary to adjust the actual position of the sensor For the programming refer to the programming manual 10 4 3 Cautions for input interruption 1 Non overlap of of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch SPD ZRN DSZR and DVIT instructions and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers Example When the input interrupt pointer 1001 is used X000 is occupied Therefore it is impossible to use C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C252 and C254 input interruption including delay interruption pointer 1000 pulse catch contact M8170 and SPD ZRN DSZR and DVIT instructions at the same time 2 Cautions in wiring The wiring length should be 5m or less e Connect a bleeder resistance of 1 5kQ 1 W or more to the input terminal so that the sum of the load current of the open collector transistor output on the other side device and the input current of the main body is 20 mA or more Source input PNP open collector transistor Sink input NPN open collector transistor PLC sink input Bleeder Bleeder resistance resistance S 2 wire 2 wire Rb proximity Rb proximity sensor sensor PLC source input 177 dh uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A
588. tem when the sampling trace function is used in the A6GPP A6PHP A7PHP or personal computer M8075 to M8079 1 The sampling trace devices are used by peripheral equipment D 8099 D 8100 High Speed Ring Counter Up operation high speed ring counter of 0 to 32 767 in units of 0 1ms 16 bit 2 2 0 1ms high speed ring counter D8099 will operate after M8099 turns ON Memory Information D 8101 PLC type and system version D 8102 D 8103 D 8104 D 8105 D 8106 D 8107 D 8108 448 BCD converted E 2 0 value ii FX3U Pension 2 20 FX3UC 16K steps 64K steps Not used Number of registered device comments M8107 Number of special function units blocks connected A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond ing special device Number and Content of register name Output Refresh Error Y number where output refresh error occurs DISTO o OTT RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 RS FNC 80 instruction and D 8109 M8109 D 8120 computer link ch 1 Communication format setting 3 Computer link ch 1 B EE Station number setting RS FNC 80 instruction 4 D 8122 Remaining points of transmit data ME AA RS FNC 80 instruction 4 15123 Monitoring receive data points ox RS FNC 80 instruction EPIS Header Default STX gt E RS FNC 80 instruction RONE Te
589. terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system refer to Section 9 4 Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Perform wiring properly to the FXoN FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock short circuit wire breakage or damages to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fix the e
590. terminal block layout 1 4 Max load 1 output point common terminal 0 5 A or less m 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less 9 FA 8 output points common terminal 1 6 A or less 2288 o gt 12W 24V DC ED load a eben cliculiieanade 0 1 mA or less 30V DC 15 current m U ON voltage 1 5 V or less FE Min load 89 OFF SON Y 000 to Y002 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC E Response Y 003 or more 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24V DC time on opr Y000 to Y002 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC 16 Y003 or more 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24V DC ams Circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation si SE 0 0 0 z of Display Ob output LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven 78 operation NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj Output circuit configuration oo suondo A common number applies to the of V pue shun 1X3 Jeuo Number of output points per common terminal e On FX3U 16M LISS one common terminal is used for 1 output point e On models other than FX3u 16MT LISS 1 common terminal is used for 4 or 8 output points A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 211 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 3 3 Handling of transistor output 1 Output terminals One 4 or 8 transistor output points are covered by one common
591. ters pie of program For C251 AI 03 m While X012 is on C251 counts the operation of the input terminals X000 A phase and X001 B phase through interruption While X011 is turned on the counter is reset when RST instruction as K1234 is executed e When the current value exceeds the setting YOO2 turns on and when the current value becomes lower than the setting YOO2 turns off e Y0O3 turns on down count or off up count according to the counting direction Main unit 2 For C254 X011 dX EL eae C254 starts counting immediately when the input terminal ere aa ate RST C254 X006 is turned on while X012 is on X012 dL LEID LL E The count input terminals are X000 A phase and X001 B DO D1 phase Gd X C254 is reset by X011 on the sequence and it is reset e When the current value exceeds the setting D1 D0 YOOA M8254 operates and when the current value becomes lower than the setting YOO4 turns off B phase input External start input YOOS5 turns on down count or off up count according to A phase input External rus the counting direction inpu Main unit A 2 phase encoder generates A phase output and B phase output between which there is a 90 phase difference The high speed counter automatically counts up or down according to the output as shown below Operation by 1 edge count Phase A i i 1 i 4 1 l Phase B l i Up counting Down counting Operation by 4 edge
592. th or screws 1 7 S eAccessories Label for indication of link E m station number SOR gr Manual supplied with product o 2 E S Terminal block European type S c o Terminal resistance 3309 1104 built in suondo pue sun xJ Jeuo a uoisuo Terminal resistance setting switch F 3309 gt OPEN S 110Q 3 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 339 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Special Adapters 18 3 7 FX3u AHSX ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 80g 0 18lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type 10 poles oji o fo oj fo oj fo oj fo oj l 18 3 8 FX3u 2HSY ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 80g 0 18lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type PLS DIR 10 Switch Output form switching poles between PLS EDIR and FP ERP oji oj oj ojo oj ojo oji oj ojo ie m 340 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arra
593. the COM terminal of a DC system 100 to 240V AC 100 to 120V AC 2 Input circuit The primary input circuit and the secondary input circuit are insulated with a photocoupler There is a delay of approx 25 to 30ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON nput impedance 3 Input sensitivity The input current and input sensitivity of these PLCs are shown in the following table Input Specifications Input voltage 100 to 120V AC 10 15 50 60Hz Input current 6 2 mA 110V 60Hz Percentage of simultaneous power on P 4 7 mA 100V 50Hz 7096 or less Input ON 3 8 mA 80V AC sensitivity OFF 1 7 mA 30V AC 175 uononpoJju SOWeN ed pueseimee4 M jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A ueis sS e uonenBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo 2 a o So oe O x pw lt 5 Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 100V AC Input Except Main Unit 10 3 3 Example of external wiring Main unit Fuse X Br a 0 ee SC e 24V DC input type Sink wiring gerer Two wire i proximity Sp mem Sensor Input output powered extension unit FX2N 48ER UA1 UL NE e NL JL Class D grounding 100V AC input type 1 Handle the power supply circui
594. the enclosure with screws S Point 2 Position the holes so that there is a gap of 1 to 2 mm 0 04 to 0 08 between the products PI a8 25 8 6 1 Hole pitches for direct mounting 3 amp The product mounting hole pitches are shown below For the pitch that varies depending on the product refer to the table 3 1 Main unit A or B zr 22 5 Unit mm inches si 0 87 W 0 2 Mounting hole p as mece name pitch W 4 i FX3U 16MR ES i Io D o RE FX3U 16MT ES E A 9 FX3U 16MT ESS 8 13 9 103 4 06 2 o o FX3U 16MR DS a To E ILLE EE FX3U 16MT DS 22 5 FX3U 16MT DSS 5 0 87 W 0 2 FX3U 32MR ES PPS RE TET FX3U 32MT ES 829 i Oi FX3U 32MT ESS 2 ols 123 4 85 B ir FX3U 32MR DS 22 FX3U 32MT DS 6 o o o bua FX3U 32MT DSS 9 MEE BENE FX3U 48MR ES S FX3u 48MT ES FX3U 48MT ESS FX3U 48MR DS FX3U 48MT DS FX3u 48MT DSS FX3U 64MR ES FX3U 64MT ES FX3U 64MT ESS FX3U 64MR DS B FX3uU 64MT DS FX3U 64MT DSS FX3u 80MR ES FX3u 80MT ES FX3u 80MT ESS FX3u 80MR DS FX3u 80MT DS FX3u 80MT DSS FX3U 128MR ES FX3U 128MT ES 323 12 72 FX3U 128MT ESS uonenBijuo 155 6 11 SON HUN SON jndjnondu 193 7 6 9 258 10 16 DuutM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p y Bui 1ndu 135 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 136 2 Special adapter C 2 5 15 0 1 0 6 StH 5 5 0 2 W 0 2 e pum
595. the stopped state They are updated according to the input terminal conditions 2 Since the current values may be changed according to MOV instruction in the program and the operation results the most recently obtained values are retained 3 Only display modules can change the current value by the extension file register test function 4 The current values of the file registers stored in the program memory cannot be monitored or tested on the display module 5 Change of timer and counter settings The settings of the timers T and counters C can be changed only when the timers are driven by the program 243 SJOJUNOD peeds uDIH m NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O S O o c o D o uny 1S9 eoueua ure N Bunoouse qnoi peJewog Indjnojndu DO sun uoisuejx3 a Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 3 Program modification function The sequence program can be transferred while the PLC is running or in the stopped state as shown below v Effective Ineffective item In stopped status Batch writing of file registers D and extensio
596. tion 6 3 1 A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M or FX2N B Number of input output points of input output 16LNK M powered extension units E Number of input output points occupied by special C Number of input output points of input output function units blocks extension blocks F Number of active slaves connected to AS i system master block 1 Up to 31 slaves can be connected to the AS i system master block The maximum number is calculated by the formula 8 points x number of slaves regardless of the number of I O points used on one slave For details refer to AS i System User s Manual 2 Procedures for calculating number of input output points based on example of system configuration For the main unit input output powered extension units blocks and AS i system the number of input output points and the total number of points are restricted X000 to X027 X030 to X057 X060 to X077 X100 to X117 Loos RPUPSUISUE a pa Special FX2N 32ASI M Main unit powered extension extension m function unit extension unit le eyes 4 01010 4 Y 000 to YO27 Y030 to Y057 24 24 24 24 16 0 16 0 l 48 points 48 points 16 points 16 points 8 points 8 points AS i system Repeater Slave 5 Slave 4 Slave 3 Slave 2 Slave 1 AS i power 4 points 4 points 8 points 8 points 4 points supply Number of input output points occupie
597. tion or when an overflow occurs as a result of shift operation Not used BMOV direction specification FNC 15 HSC mode FNC 53 to 55 RAMP mode FNC 67 PR mode FNC 77 Interrupt permission during FROM TO FNC 78 and 79 instruction execution ON when operation such as DSW FNC 72 is completed 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Correspond ing special device FXsu Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond ing special device Number and name Operation and function PLC Mode When M8030 set to ON LED on PLC is not lit even if low battery voltage is detected If this special auxiliary relay is activated the ON OFF image memory of Y M S T and C and present values of T C D special data registers and R are cleared to M 8030 Battery LED OFF M 8031 Non latch memory all clear M 8032 zero l Latch memory However file registers D in _ all clear program memory and extension file registers ER in the memory cassette are not cleared M 8033 When PLC is switched from RUN Memory hold to STOP image memory and data STOP memory are retained M 8034 All external output contacts of PLC All outputs disable are turned OFF M 8035 Forced RUN mode M 8036 Forced RUN signal M 8037 Forced STOP signal M 8038 Communication parameter setting D8176 to Parameter setting flag for N N network se
598. tions of specifications for the extension power supply unit and external dimensions Chapter 17 This chapter contains explanations for the external dimensions and terminal layout For details refer to the manual for each extension Chapter 18 device 3 Optional products Chapter 19 to 22 Division Display module FX Series terminal blocks Memory cassette Battery ae mm E This chapter contains explanation of the specifications external dimensions mounting procedures and operating procedures for Chapter 19 display modules This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring FX 16 32EL TB ee a This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for the Chapter 21 memory cassette and the installation procedures This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for replacing Chapter 22 the battery and detecting battery voltage drop P 4 Others Appendices A to C Division List of special devices List of instructions List of character codes a a E This chapter contains an explanation list of the special auxiliary relays M8000 to M8511 and special data registers D8000 to Appendix A D8511 For details refer to the programming manual This chapter contains an explanation list of the basic instructions and applied instructions Appendix B For details refer to the programming manual This chapter contains an explanation list of the character codes that Abbendix C
599. to 240V AC z For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 43 uh uononpoJju pueseimee4 M RV ZZ D 3 D o jonpoJg uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uonenBijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejejsu oo e BuulM A ddng jewog ue uorneJedaJd EEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 44 l B RS 232C RS 422 cable e Connection cabling Connection cabling for extention devices Peripheral device connector FX 232AWC H ee ee eee FX3U 232 BD i r f f f f f f f 1 f f r f f f r f f r f f f f f f f f f f f f f i 5 f E e 4 f r f r f f f f r 4 r r r f r f r f f r f f r f f f f r f f r f f f f 1 r Q9 FX3U iden BD E rs 422 i o FX3U USB BD f L Uezesdsssndeel LI No Shap
600. to FX2N 1RM E SET Handy Manual Number of Number of input output Count of number of connected special connected units points occupied function units blocks 1 unit 2 units 8 points 1 3 units 2 For details refer to catalogs or contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric Corporation branch office 3 Applying for UL standard in February 2006 For details refer to catalogs or contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric Corporation branch office 4 Data link and communication functions v Compliance with standard or self declaration L1 Not targeted Not applicable D Eu Model name Description EAC Marine FX2N 2321F 1 ch RS 232C no protocol communication x TUE sms Master for CC Link FX2N 16CCL M Connectable stations Remote I O station 7 stations v Remote device station 8 stations FX2N 32CCL Remote device station for CC Link T 1 to 4 stations occupied FX2N 64CL M Master for CC Link LT pw cq dI se E FX2N 16LNK M Master for MELSEC I O Link FX2N 32ASI M Master for AS i system 945 p eee For details refer to catalogs or contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric Corporation branch office For more information on CE UL and cUL refer to Page 15 40 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 5 F Display modules and holder v Compliance w
601. to Integer Conversion Floating Point 130 SIN Floating Point Sine 131 COS Floating Point Cosine 132 TAN Floating Point Tangent 139 ASIN Floating Point Arc Sine 134 ACOS Floating Point Arc Cosine 135 ATAN Floating Point Arc Tangent B Instruction List B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Function Floating Point Degree to Radian 136 RAD Conversion Floating Point Radian to Degree ter Conversion U m E 138 139 Data Operation 2 140 WSUM Sum of Word Data 141 WTOB WORD to BYTE 142 BTOW BYTE to WORD 143 UNI 4 bit Linking of Word Data 144 DIS 4 bit Grouping of Word Data 147 SWAP Byte Swap 149 SORT2 Sort Tabulated Data 2 e D 2 io J 5 a e oO Pr pn o 150 DSZR 151 DVIT DOG Search Zero Return Interrupt Positioning ayesseg N AJOWS A NO NO apeg gt sooi eq jeioedg co ce ce e g co ce ce e 9poo J9joeJeu2 sr1 uononJjsu 152 TBL Batch Data Positioning Mode 153 154 155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read 156 ZRN Zero Return 157 PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output 158 DRVI Drive to Increment 159 DRVA Drive to Absolute Real Time Clock Control 160 TCMP RTC Data Compare 161 TZCP RTC Data Zone Compare 162 TADD RTC Data Addition 163 TSUB RTC Data Subtraction 164 HTOS Hour to Second Conversion 165 STOH Second to Hour Conversion 166 TRD Read RTC data 167 TWR Set RTC data 169 HOUR Hour Meter External Devic
602. to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC 2 When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case 3 The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case 4 When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line t
603. to start and stop the E PLC refer to the right figure Turn the switch to RUN and the PLC will start Turn it to STOP and the PLC will stop 1 3 ss cg 2 Running and stopping with general purpose input RUN terminal Operation with one switch RUN One of the input terminals X000 to X017 of the main unit X000 to X007 on a 16 point type unit can be used as a RUN input terminal by a parameter setting refer to the figure below When the specified input terminal is turned on the PLC starts When it is turned off the PLC is started or stopped depending on the state of the built in RUN STOP switch For details refer to Kinds of Parameters and Settings in Programming Manual O c D nN F o o gt Q peJewog indinojndu DO General purpose input terminal specified as RUN ee by pagmeter General purpose input terminal letras as RUN Ih A Md sun uoisuejx3 A Operation with two switches RUN and STOP The PLC can be started and stopped with individual RUN and STOP pushbutton switches For this operation a sequence program using M8035 to M8037 is necessary For details refer to Operations of Special Devices in Programming Manual syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI General purpose General purpose input ierminak MA input U ES com Specilied as specified as 222 PUN ee input by parameter La Tem by parameter E o E S S OV 24v X000 X001
604. ts input form output form and connection type Input output powered extension units Power supply Number of points Input form Output form Connection type 100 to 240V AC 24V DC Terminal block sink source 100V AC source Transistor sink 15 1 2 Product list 262 Each model of input output powered extension unit has a sink and source type and a sink type If you intend to add input output powered extension units we recommend you to add the same types of units as the main unit or the sink and source type For details on sink and source refer to Subsection 10 1 1 Sink common Source common Connection Model TUE Number Common wiring Tvpe Number Common wiring type yP of points system yP of points system AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input Relay ransistor AC power supply only for 24V DC sink input Relay Terminal Transistor AC power supply only for 100V AC DC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input DC power supply only for 24V DC sink input 24V DC 24 24 block FX2N 48ET D 15 FX2N 32 48E Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 2 Power Supply Specifications Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Power Supply Specifications se y Power Supply Input 24V DC Service Power Supply F Q FX2N 32ER ES UL PONCE FX2N 48E
605. ts are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases NCAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install in a manner which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device connections Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC DANGER Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 203 oz Q c 2 o5 n p D Qo BuutM 1ndino
606. tted to the main unit after it is installed The battery can be replaced with a new one in the state where the main unit is in the enclosure For the replacement procedures refer to Subsection 14 4 4 2 Affixing The Dust Proof Sheet The dust proof sheet should be affixed to the ventilation port before beginning the installation and wiring work For the affixing procedure refer to the instructions on the dust proof sheet Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet when the installation and wiring work is completed 131 soma uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Wed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu mJ SON JIU SON 9 DUUM A ddns Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 5 2 Installation of main unit The main unit must be installed before installing a expansion board or special adapter on the enclosure For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 8 7 2 8 7 3 and 9 5 2 1 Push out all DIN rail mounting hooks A in the right figure 2 Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove C in the right figure onto the DIN rail 3 Lock the DIN rail mounting hooks D in the following figure while pressing the PLC agai
607. ttery is required to retain backup program memory and keep device data and maintain clock operation in the event of a power outage Data Retained By Backup Battery Program memory Internal RAM parameters programs device comments file registers Auxiliary relay state for annunciator included timer cumulative type counter data register keep device Extended register e Sampling trace result Device memory Current time Current time clock 22 2 Specifications fom Remarks Nominal voltage Battery voltage can be monitored with PLC data register D8005 22 2 1 Differences between main unit s internal battery and the optional battery Although the optional battery FX3U 32BL serves as the same as the main unit s internal battery they differ in the ways described below They may also have different external colors due to dates of manufacture Main Unit Internal Battery Optional Battery Spare A nameplate label indicating the product model and lot No is affixed Bera Connector appearance Nameplate Warranty even cone Ore mors TIO cale Di 1 year from delivery or 18 months from the date l manufacture with reference to the main unit s l period of manufacture with reference to the lot No manufacture No 434 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 22 FX3U 32BL Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 3 Battery Handling 22 3 Battery Handling ayjesseg N AOUIS N A When the battery vo
608. tting D8180 When M8039 is ON PLC waits until scan time specified in D8039 and D8039 then executes cyclic operation 1 Executed at END instruction Refer to Programming Manual for details M 8039 Constant scan mode Step Ladder and Annunciator M 8040 While M8040 is turned ON transfer Transfer disable between states is disabled M 8041 Transfer from initial state is enabled Transfer start in automatic operation mode M 8042 Pulse output is given in response Start pulse to a start input 1p M 8043 Set this in the last state of zero S Zero return return mode complete M 8044 2 Set this when machine zero return Zero point condition is detected M 8045 Disables the all output reset All output reset function when the operation mode disable is changed 3 ON when M8047 is ON and either M 8046 of SO to 899 or S1000 to 4095 is M8047 STL state ON active M 8047 D8040 to D8047 are enabled when D8040 to STL monitoring M8047 is ON D8047 enable 3 M 8048 ON when M8049 is ON and either Annunciator of S900 to S999 is ON operate 2 M 8049 D8049 is enabled when M8049 is D8049 Annunciator ON M8048 enable l 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 3 Executed at END instruction A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Number and Corres pond Operation and function ing specia
609. ture Display example The Entry Code Is not set gt gt EntryCode ClearAllDev Clear devices OK 5 Execute ESC gt Cancel Display example gt gt PLC Status 9K lPic status 1 3 QESC Ver 2 00 The Entry Code is not set A E Display example lt ESC_ PLC Status 2 3 cassette OFF Memory Protection Capacity 64K w I I Display example E C PLC Status 3 3 Battery 2 9V Comments Display example gt gt ScanTime ScanT ime Curr Ma x Min Display example Memory Cassette gt gt Cassette RAM gt gt Cassette Cassette RAM RAM Cassette 353 SJOJUNOD p ds y iH 3 N BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO J wn pen o lt O c D 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices 19 7 Monitor Test Mode Excluding User Registered Devices 19 7 1 Relevant devices 354 Monitoring and testing can be performed from the Monitor Test menu for the devices listed below Monitoring testing is not possible for the file register D and the ind
610. tus is to be changed Refer to Subsection 19 7 2 for monitor function operation 2 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test mode The device then begins blinking refer to figure at right Y000 d ET To cancel the operation and return to the test subject selection i screen press ESC 3 Use the buttons to move the blinking position to the device where a forced ON OFF is desired To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC Button ESC Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the monitor screen Moves in the lower device No direction for forced ON OFF subject selection Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling Moves in the higher device No direction for forced ON OFF subject selection Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling OK Highlights the contacts ON OFF status 4 Press the OK button to highlight the contact s ON OFF status To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the monitor screen Moves in the lower device No direction for forced ON OFF subject selection Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling Moves in the higher device No direction for forced ON OFF subject selection Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling OK Highlights the co
611. u Ol sun uoisuejx3 Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 5 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 10 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting 19 10 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting The language used at the display module menus is specified at the LANGUAGE menu The language setting procedure is described below All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in Japanese When the menu display language is set to English please convert the screen messages to their English translations Refer to Section 19 25 for the Japanese amp English display character correspondence table 19 10 1 Changing to Japanese menus The procedure for changing from English menus to Japanese menus is described below 1 Turn the PLC power on Following a brief title screen display 1 5 seconds the current time screen or a user message is displayed MELSEC F Title screen FX3U Series Ver 2 00 v Approx 1 5 secs Top screen Time display 05 5 97 23 59 59 Tue Or User creation screen example lt Production gt Target 10000 Production 100 Remaining 9900 2 Press the OK button to display the menu screen shown to the right 4 lines of the menu display 1g dg 7 gt M
612. u 48MT LIS FX3u 64MT LIS FX3u 80MT LIS FX3u 128MT ES Output circuit configuration DC power supply A common number applies to the of COM L Transistor output source type 54 The output numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers YO10 or more means the numbers from YO10 to the largest number that the main unit has The output numbers of FX3U 16MT LISS are YOOO to YOO7 Transistor output source specifications Item FX3U 16MT FX3U 32MT FX3U 48MT FX3U 64MT FX3U 80MT FX3U 128MT OSS OSS OSS OSS OSS ESS ee of output 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points Fixed terminal Connecting type block Removable terminal block M3 screw M3 screw Output type form Transistor source output External power supply 5 to 30V DC 0 5A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value For details on the common terminal for each model Resistance f pe refer to the terminal block layout e 1 output point common terminal 0 5 A or less 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less 8 output points common terminal 1 6 A or less Inductive 12W 24V DC Open circuit leakage Max load SUN 0 1 mA or less 30V DC ON voltage 1 5 V or less Min load 5 OFF ON YOOO to Y002 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC Response Y003 or more 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24V DC time ON SOrrF Y000 to Y002 5 us or le
613. u venei te cese b muse tut c Mee 132 8 5 3 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function unit block 133 8 5 4 Removal of main UNIt ccc ccc eecceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeae cesses eeeseeeeesseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeesseaeeesseeeees 133 8 6 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 SCreWS ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeeneeeeeeas 135 9 6 1 Hole pitches for direct MOUNINO ccs oec ecco esses NOE eel aa eee oe eae he el ae ei deck 135 8 6 2 Example of mounting hole pitChes cccccccccccceecceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeseeceseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeseneeeees 137 6 3 INS TaNeLION Ol TAIN EPIRI EE EE ET 138 8 6 4 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function unit block 138 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 8 7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices cccccccceecceseeeeceeeeeseecesaeeeaeees 139 9 7 1 Connection or extension devices aii qu n ptas secu ch des o sid stan evectus Vo ct ades ep ene uu do M Ue arbe Oa RE 139 8 7 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion board sesseeeeeeeen 140 8 7 3 Connecting method B connection of special adapter seeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeernee 141 8 7 4 Connecting method C connection of powered extension unit block to main unit
614. uaX3 ndnonndu C NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO J wn pen o lt O ci D 20 yoojg JeuiuJe 381 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 User User Registered Device Setting 19 19 User User Registered Device Setting The procedure for specifying the devices which display as User at the Monitor Test menu is explained below The user registered devices are specified by writing the device type and device No at DULI to DLIL 7 in the system information system signal 1 Refer to Section 19 8 for operation Refer to Section 19 18 for system information setting Refer to Subsection 19 19 3 to 19 19 5 for program examples 19 19 1 System information user registered device setting 1 System signal 1 ges d Setting Value bur pevceype DOU K7 Data register D 16 bit DLILI K8 Data register D 32 bit ial lt NN ya Er Bien I 0 ee oe iip vedi pride L1 i MN BOE Kr paar oan DE suni 2 System signal 2 System Setting Information Display Screen Status User registered device screen or user message screen is displayed Other screen is displayed 19 19 2 Precaution when setting 3 or fewer devices When 3 or fewer devices are set as user registered devices the type setting for unused devices should be set to a value other
615. uct Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with product FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX2N 2AD User s Guide FX3U 4AD Installation Manual FX3U 4AD ADP User s Manual FX2N 4AD User s Guide FX2N 8AD User s Manual FX3U 4AD PT ADP User s Manual FX2N 4AD PT User s Guide FX3U 4AD TC ADP User s Manual FX2N 4AD TC User s Guide FX2N 2LC User s Guide JY992D74701 JY997D20701 JY997D13901 JY992D65201 JY992D86001 JY997D14701 JY992D65601 JY997D14801 JY992D65501 JY992D85601 1 Introduction 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Indispensable manuals v Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Model Manual Contents number name code Analog input temperature input and temperature control When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input special function block Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special function block When using refer also to FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special adapter When using refer also to FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special function block P
616. ue minimum value and maximum value can be displayed from the ScanTime menu 19 16 1 Scan time display operation 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ScanTime item then press OK to display the scan time ScanTime screen To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time Curr display press ESC Max 2 Press OK or ESC to return to the menu screen Min 19 17 Cassette Memory Cassette Transfers Data transfers and consistency checks between the internal RAM memory and a connected memory cassette can be performed from the Cassette menu when the PLC is in a STOP state This menu is disabled however if an entry code is registered in the internal RAM In this case remove the memory cassette and use the programming tool to cancel the internal RAM s entry code Item Operation Description Cassette RAM Copies internal program memory RAM data to a connected memory cassette Cassette RAM Copies data from a connected memory cassette to the internal program memory RAM Cassette RAM Performs a consistency check of the connected memory cassette data and the internal program memory RAM data 376 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 17 Cassette Memory Cassette Transfers 19 17 1 Transfer from internal RAM to memory cassette Cassette RAM 1 At the menu screen use the
617. uejs S e uonenBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON JIU SON uonejejsu oo 2 a o So oe O x pw lt 5 Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch 10 4 Input Interruption IO0L7to I50L With Delay Function 10 4 4 Examples of external wiring 178 Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side Examples of input interruption 1000 or 1001 wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it according to the following diagrams 1 When 24V DC service power supply is used Fuse l Class D grounding The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less 2 When 24V DC external power supply is used The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less FXau Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8177 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8177 The PLC main unit is provided with a pulse catch function and has 8 pulse catch input points For details on programming refer to the programming manual 10 5 1 Allocation of special memories to linput numbers ON duration of input signals Input No Contact on sequence program ON duration of input signal X000 M8170 X001 M8171 X002
618. unction with entry code function Max memory capacity jnpold CY e o e c S o Built in memory memory Ed Flash memory The max memory capacity varies depending on the S model of the memory cassette 8 Memory cassette e FX3U FLROM 64L 64000 steps with loader function S Option e FX3U FLROM 64 64000 steps without loader function e FX3U FLROM 16 16000 steps without loader function 5 Max allowable write 10 000 times Writing function LE Provided Program can be modified while the PLC is running so during running Qo 3 Real time Sun a TOCK Clock function 1980 to 2079 with correction for leap year 2 or 4 digit year accuracy within 45 seconds month at 25 C 6 Ver 2 30 or later e Sequence instructions 29 S M Step ladder instructions 2 as Kinds of a en Former than Ver 2 30 a instructions S e Sequence instructions 27 Step ladder instructions 2 Applied instructions 209 kinds 486 instructions N Processing 0 065 us instruction Z3 speed Applied instructions 0 642 us to several hundred us instruction ae zg 1 Extension combined number 248 points of input points Total number 1 2 lt 3 total number of points is 2 Extension of points 256 or less combined number 248 points Number of of output points OR ome to LO numser 224 points or less i i i p of points CC Link p Either the CC Link or AS i master can be aR ET b used the two cannot be used emote num
619. upply Type 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input dh S Sink and source input type Main unit Fuse 11 2g EN 1 E EN beni ENG 3 E ioe 23 Ti Dey B S p RY X1 E H X1 Input Input 4 5V 0V 24V impedance terminal Input extension block Sink and source input type EUH p MN SEE Lm ee VERE 5V OV 24V 3 1 24V Special function block 5V OV 24V T Class D grounding Class D grounding suoneouioedgs Qi Two wire proximity seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uoneJnBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON JIU SON Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures uonejejsu oo For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required e In the case of source input wiring short circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S S terminal and the OV terminal of the main unit 2 ag nU o AO ne O O Iu lt 5 Q 171 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures Input Interruption and Pulse Catch User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC Input Type Common to Sink Source Input 10 2
620. upply for loads to Mr be connected to PLC output terminals Sink and 24V DC As for the details of 6 SOULE service emergency stop 9o input 4 power operation see DESIGN gu type supply PRECAUTIONS at sj output Safety Precautions field S 25 O Ys co 2c Se es 3 Some special function units blocks do not have the 8 power supply terminal e Output extension When using an external power supply turn it ON at the A block same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit 5v lov 24V When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the Si system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC gt including special extension equipment at the same time 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals 4 Do not connect the 24V terminals 24V DC service power in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system supply of the main unit and the input output extension Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time unit with each other Connect the OV terminal in the main unit and extension units or earlier in 5 Some special extension units blocks do not have power extension units than the main unit terminals For the details refer to WIRING PRECAUTIONS in When using an external power supply turn it ON at the Safety Precautions same time with the extension unit or earlier than the As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at extension unit Safety Precautions field When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of t
621. urned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases 4 N DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install in a manner which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device connections Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock or damage of product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or starting the operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 145 dh
622. ursor to English To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Moves the cursor upward Moves the cursor downward OK Registers the selected display language and returns to the menu screen 3 Press OK to register the selected display language and return to the menu screen 19 10 3 D8302 changes by program amp related devices Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302 D8302 has a battery backup for latch D8302 changes by user program can also be specified D8302 Current Display When the display language is set to Japanese Value Language M8002 K1 English Other English 365 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIE a3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I JE oN NH SS Ge Eu RSIS 002 SLs oo 2 0 5 co mI x oD 2200 osie gt q mm 0 00 O A MS 2 7 A syoojg UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS X3 oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Contrast 19 11 Contrast 366 The liquid crystal display contrast setting is specified at the Contrast menu Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302 A contrast setting of 0 is specified at factory default
623. used M 8438 Serial communication error 2 ch2 D8438 M 8439 to M 8448 Not used M 8449 Special block error flag D8449 M 8450 to M 8459 Not used Positioning DVIT FNC151 instruction YOOO Men User Pn Virus ids M 8461 DVIT FNC151 instruction YOO1 D8336 User interrupt input command M 8462 DVIT FNC151 instruction YOO2 D8336 User interrupt input command DVIT FNC151 instruction Y003 M 8463 User Sedi uu kret ono DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 instructions YOOO NEGRA Clear d m specification id function enabled DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 instructions YOO 1 Meus Clear mr d us specification D9409 function enabled DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 instructions Y002 uaa Clear Sia does specification EMO function enabled DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 M 8467 instructions YOO3 D8467 Clear signal device specification function enabled M 8468 to M 8511 Not used 3 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP adapters are connected to a PLC A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 21 Oz a 0008Q 0008IN sr uononJjsu W seoi eq jeioeds 9poo J9joeJeu2 445 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D85
624. used by output element fracture due to load short circuiting WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 220 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses DESIGN PRECAUTIONS DESIGN PRECAUTIONS WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs Otherwise malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC 2 When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically dr
625. used for 4 or 8 points Therefore the common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems for example 100V AC and 200V AC Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and the output element triac are insulated with a photo thyristor The common terminal blocks are separate from one another Display of operation When the photo thyristor is driven the LED is lit and the output triac is turned on Response time The time from when the photo thyristor is driven or shut down until the output triac is turned on and until it is turned off is 1ms or less and 10ms or less respectively Output current The max current per output point is 0 3A However to restrict temperature rise the max current per one output from four points should be 0 8A average per point is 0 2A When a load with high rush current is turned on and off frequently the root mean square current should be 0 2A or less Example 4 x 0 02 0 4 x 0 7 0 02 0 7 10 0 2A 0 02 0 7 10 Sec sec sec Open circuit leakage current A C R absorber is connected for turn off in parallel with the triac output terminal of this type of PLC Therefore when the circuit opens a leakage current will be 1mA at 100V AC and 2mA at 200V AC Since the triac output type devices leak current when the circuits are open small size relays and micro current loads having low rated operating current may keep operating even when the tri
626. user messages plus data display or The following is a program example in which the counter s current value appears at the user message BS Note that user messages do not appear when a screen other than the top screen time display is displayed Operation The message shown below appears when auxiliary relay M100 switches on _ N In this program example the system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56 E Production Target 4 B Production 13 Remaining lt lt 1 The current values of the devices shown below appear as the target quantity the production quantity 5a and the remaining quantity z Item Remarks Target Specifies the CO setting 14 Production Counts the number of M101 ON operations Remaining Remaining D201 target D200 production CO i2 z5 Displaying a word device current value as a message A numeric value can be displayed at the user message by combining BCD FNC18 ASCI FNC82 and BMOV FNC15 instructions etc Character data zog User message data to be displayed is created in GX Developer and is assigned to file registers D1000 to D1031 230 Refer to Subsection 19 23 7 for character data input 8 Program i M8002 1 Sets system information system signal 1 at D50 to D90 Sets system information system signal 2 at M50 to M56 Specifies 10000 as the target quantity K10000 D200 D200 Initial pulse ud Coco Production quant
627. ut Numbers X Y and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y 7 1 2 Example of assigning An example of assignment of input output numbers X Y is shown below 1 Example of configuration Special adapter FX3U 4AD ADP Input extension Input output Special Main unit block extension block function FX3U 64MR ES FX2N 8EX FX2N 8ER block ES UL ES UL FX2N 4AD Expansion board FX3U 232 BD Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET ESS UL Input output Special Special function Output extension extension block function block block block FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 10PG FX2N 64CL M FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 4 input CL1X4 D1B2 CL1XY4 DT1B2 CL1XY4 DT1B2 2 Assignment of input output numbers Input output numbers are assigned to the above example configuration as shown below X054 to X057 Unused numbers X040 to X047 X050to0X0532 Input extension Input output Special Main unit block extension block function FX3U 64MR ES FX2N 8EX FX2N 8ER block ES UL ES UL FX2N 4AD Yo00 to Y037 Y040 to YO43 Y044 to Y047 Unused numbers C J C __ xoo0 to x037 Special adapter FX3U 4AD ADP Expansion board FX3U 232 BD The input numbers are carried from 70s to 100s X104 to X107 Unused numbers X060 to X077 X100to X103 X X110 to X117 Input output powered extension Output exten
628. ut terminal is changed from X002 to X007 Reset input is not given Start input is not given The counter functions as a hardware counter C245 OP e Reset input is not given C248 OP e The counter functions as a hardware counter M8388 e Reset input is not given C253 OP The counter functions as a software counter 201 SJojuno2 peeds ubiH NO BuutM 1ndino 10 BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA mb I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJewog jndinoanduj DO sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indinojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20 yoojg JeuiuJe FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 11 11 4 Function switching procedures for using 2 phase 2 count input counters C251 to C255 in 4 edge count mode The 2 phase 2 count input counters C251 to C255 are in the 1 edge count mode The counters can be operated in the 4 edge count mode by programming as shown below Counter No To use 4 edge count 2 phase 2 input counter Details of change C251 1 edge count before change Phase A IN id Phase B f C292 Up counting Phase A i 1 1 1 Phase B i i C253 Down counting l 4 edge count after change 1 1 1 141 C25
629. utM 1ndjno JO BULIM O3 SOS ShOLEA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1s9 pelewod indinonndu Ow sun uoisuejx3 A Syoo g uoisuaX3 ndnonndu C NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun UOISU9 X3 JBUIO 20 D 3 2 at E o Q FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX3U 7DM Display Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 12 Clock Menu Current Time Setting 19 12 2 Displaying the current time 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ClockMenu item then press OK to display the selection Current timet screen shown to the right E ates ate To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Clock setting 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Current time item To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 3 Press the OK button to display the current time mE To cancel the operation and return to the selection screen press 2 digit display ESC Button Operation Description 31 1 04 ESC Returns to the selection screen 23759259 Sat Disabled Disabled OK Returns to the selection screen SEIS pay 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the selection screen T ET 5 Press ESC to return to the menu screen 23 59 59 Sat 19 12 3 Changing the current time s Year from 2 digit format to 4 di
630. value obtained by this calculation when the value is positive indicates the remaining capacity of the 24V DC service power supply that can be used for external loads I suoneouioedgs Qi O U D CD cS pen oO O a S 2 v pue UOISJ9A QW aa err ele Current consumption Calculation result 23 E wadini Total of current consumed by a Main unit extension devices o _ 600mA 400mA 200mA Oma KOJ 7 uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 113 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 9 Example of System Configuration and System Modification T Determine whether the devices can be connected to the input output pow ered extension unit Calculate the current by the following formula to confirm whether the extension devices selected in otep 4 can be connected 1 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply E Ubi Current consumption Calculation result Input output powered Total of current consumed by extension unit extension devices E 690mA 7 390mA 300mA gt OMA EO 2 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 24V DC power supply 24V DC service power supply The value obtained by this calculation when the value is positive indicates the remaining capacity of 24V DC service power supply and the capacity can be used for external loads
631. values as hexadecimal values E 1 At the menu screen use the and buttons to move the cursor E to the Monitor Test item then press OK to display the device 1 6b selection screen shown at right i DD 32bit 1 3 To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC at the menu screen SS 2 Use the and buttons to move the cursor to the device which is E EE to be monitored I R 16bit D To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press DR 32bi t ESC l 14 ER 16bit DER 32bit 3Eg X l 88 8g l S I M l I l 1 I User i 3 Press OK to display the monitor screen for the device which was selected for monitoring To cancel the operation and return to the device selection screen press ESC After the power is turned on the number of the device to be displayed is shown as follows a The first time the power is turned on the display begins with device No 1 b At subsequent power ONs the device which was being monitored at the previous operation is displayed they are saved in memory for each device type peJewog indinojndu Ol sun uoisuejx3 syo0 g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI 4 Use the and buttons to move the cursor or the screen to the SOR until the device to be monitored is displayed S a Refer to Subsection 19 7 3 for status display ES Selected Device Type Button Operation Descr
632. ve conductive dust atmosphere Working l 3 altitude Compliant with IEC61131 2 2000m 1 Ground the PLC independently or jointly Refer to Section 9 4 Another Another Another PLC Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed 2 For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resistance test of the terminals of each product refer to the following Refer to Subsection 4 1 1 3 Do not use the PLC under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure Doing so may damage the PLC 47 soma uononpoJju SeuJeN Wed pueseimee4 M jnpold CY e o e S o suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uonenBijuo N SON HUN SON jndjno indul uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Generic Specifications 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test Perform dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test at the following voltage between each terminals and the main unit ground terminal Dielectric Insulation Between terminals Remarks strength resistance Terminals of main unit and input output powered extension unit block Between
633. ver use the product in areas with dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or wind and rain If the product is used in such a place described electrical shock fire malfunctions damage or deterioration may be caused Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly thus avoiding failure or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM and terminal block DIN rail only Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block and FXoN FX2N l i l l DIN rail or direct mounting FX3U Series special extension block special adapter Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities When drilling screw holes or wiring cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits such an accident may cause fire failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when the installation work is completed Failure to do so could cause fires equipment failures and malfunctions Fit the extension cables peripheral device connecting cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to the designated connectors Contact failures may cause malfunctions Before attaching or detaching the following devices tu
634. vices M8000 D8000 A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Correspond ing special device Operation and function High Speed Counter Function M 8380 Operation status of C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 and C254 M 8381 Operation status of C236 M 8382 Operation status of C237 C242 and C245 M 8383 Operation status of C238 C248 C248 OP C250 C253 and C255 M 8384 Operation status of C239 and C243 M 8385 M 8386 Operation status of C240 M 8387 Operation status of C244 OP Operation status of C245 OP M 8388 Contact for high speed counter B function change M 8389 External reset input logic reverse M 8390 Function changeover device for B C244 M 8391 M 8392 Function changeover device for Function changeover device for i 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Interrupt Program M 8393 Contact for delay time setting D8393 HCMOV FNC189 gus Drive contact for interrupt program i M 8395 M 8396 Not used M 8397 M 8398 Ring Counter Ring counter operation in units of 1ms 32 bits D8398 y4 D8399 M 8399 Not used 4 1ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON RS2 FNC 87 ch1
635. ware Edition 22 5 Battery Replacement NO _ 22 5 Battery Replacement onosse2 Asowey Before replacing the battery Step 4 of the replacement procedure below must be performed within 20 seconds after step 3 or the memory content could be lost Turn the power OFF 2 Remove the battery cover Slightly lift the B side of the battery cover A Grasp the cover A between your fingers and remove it 29 COM Oo e o L e co C o SQ 28 ES 6 Lom 5 O er Oo T n nF O g D o Q D T Q ro D 3 Remove the old battery Extract the old battery from the battery holder C and disconnect the battery connector D 4 Install the new battery Connect the battery connector D to the new battery and insert the battery into the battery holder C 5 Attach the battery cover A 22 6 Battery Related Precautions 1 The FX3u series uses a different battery type than those used for the FX2n F2 40BL and FX2Nc FX2Nc 32BL series e Not for use with the FX3U series 2 When performing battery free operation the clock stops when the main unit power is turned OFF 437 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition ENEN Appendix A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A Operation of Special Devices M8000 D8000 A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 The device numb
636. which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device connections Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC GHEE S2fcty Precautions ED Read these precautions before use 2 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock Use the product in the environment within the generic specifications described in section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or wind and rain If the product is used in such a place described electrical shock fire malfunctions damage or deterioration may be caused Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly thus avoiding failure or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM and terminal block DIN rail only Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block and FXoN FX2N l l l l i DIN rail or direct mounting FX3U Series special extension block special adapter Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to fix the function extension boa
637. wiring Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 Examples of pulse catch M8170 wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it according to the following diagrams 1 When 24V DC service power supply is used The grounding resistance should be 100 or less 2 When 24V DC external power supply is used The grounding resistance should be 1000 or less 180 FXsu Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 1 Outline SJojuno2 peeds ubiH 11 Use of High speed Counters C235 to C255 NO 11 1 Outline O The high speed counters can count the signals to the general purpose input terminals to the main unit or to the high speed input special adapters options a These two types of counters differ in the maximum response frequency and type of input signals to be counted 13 For details refer to Section 11 2 lt lt General purpose input terminals of main unit oS Signals from an open collector transistor output can be input to the counters The counters can count cg signals of up to 100kHz 1 phase D e High speed input special adapters Signals from a differential line driver output can be input to the counters The counters can count signals of I up to 200kHz 1 phase Sins E Oo at Rotary encoder etc E E Main uni
638. with product FX2N 32CCL TM POWER U N TUE 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 0000 Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Terminal Layout 18 1 25 FX2N 16LNK M External Dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws eAccessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws 58868666 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Terminal Layout 336 FXau Series Prog rammable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 2 Extension Power Supply Unit 18 2 Extension Power Supply Unit 18 2 1 FX3u 1PSU 5V External Dimensions MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Extension cable 55mm 2 16 Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product POWERCO T O O l0 5 ur e Oo oc O S O FXsu 1PSU 5V Terminal block M3 screws 4 0 16 55 2 17 Terminal Layout 18 3 Special Adapters 18 3 1 FX3uU 4AD ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm
639. xpansion board is not installed the connector is not provided 2 Cover of high speed input Remove this cover and connect the first high speed input special adapter output special adapter FX3U 4HSX ADP or high speed output special adapter FX3U 2HSY connector ADP to the connector When the communication analog special adapter is connected this connector is not used 3 Expansion board securing These holes are designed to secure the expansion board with screws screw holes 2 places supplied with the expansion board The expansion board dummy cover is fitted before shipment Remove the dummy cover and fit the board 4 Nameplate The product model name control number and power supply specifications are shown Example FX3U 48MR ES manufacturer s serial number 570001 MITSUBISHI Proggauwaste MODEL FXsu 48MR ES 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS0 1 SERIAL 570001 us LISTED 80M1 IND cont ca C we MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION TT E Control number Month Example July 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 2005 Last digit of year 5 DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 34 FXau Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products Compliant with Overseas Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products to be Connected and Interpretation of Model Names a 5 SO O Q
640. xtension cables and the connecting cables including expansion board and special adapters 4 Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the hole of the DIN rail mounting hook C in the right figure This step also applies for the DIN rail mounting hooks of the special adapters 5 Move the flathead screwdriver as shown in the right figure to draw out the DIN rail mounting hooks of all devices 6 Remove the product from the DIN rail D in the right figure 133 md uononpoJju pueseimee4 M SeuJeN Hed jnpold CY uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi seone Jejoeudueg pue uOISJ9A uejs S e uonenBijuo jndinogndu eJ SON HUN SON 9 DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 7 Push in the DIN rail mounting hooks E in the right figure For input output powered extension units 8 point type input output extension blocks and special extension units blocks this operation is unnecessary ty E 0 134 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 8 6 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws z o The product can be installed directly in
641. y 3o extension devices 8 ill 2 Va 2 _ 2 Calculate the current consumption of the internal 24V DC The positive value from the calculation means it is expandable Power supply capacity for Mitten Calculation result internal 24V DC consumprion TN Total of current Main unit consumed by extension devices D 4 2 4 _ IONPAd Q3 uononpoJju I suoneouioedgs Qi 3 Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply oys lt 27 930 Capacity of 5V DC Current Sm power supply Calculation result n Total of current Main unit consumed by extension devices m OW If the calculation results for the current consumption for the startup the internal 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply are negative values the current consumption exceeds the capacity of the built in power supply N Reexamine the system configuration adding input output powered extension units z5 Refer to Section 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current z Consumption 25 ZS uonejejsu oo e DUUM A ddng Jewog ue uorneJedaJd BEN p Bui 1ndu 91 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Calculation of Current Consumption 6 6
642. yoojg JeuiuJe 289 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N 8 16E Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 16 3 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8ER Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications Item FX2N 8ER MASS Weight 0 2 kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 8ER Input points 4 points Vertical terminal block M3 screws For a detailed description of wiring refer Connection unit Connector terminal block to the input line connection diagram of the main unit Input type Sink Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5 MA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ itivi dag 3 5 mA or more at 24V DC Input sensitivity current current E a 1 5 mA or less current In
643. yristor When photo thyristor is driven LED on panel is lit 0 3A point The total load current per common terminal should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less 15 VA 100V AC 30 VA 200V AC 1 mA 100V AC 2 mA 200V AC 0 4 VA 100V AC 1 6 VA 200V AC 1 ms or less Resistance load Max load Inductive load Open circuit leakage current Min load OFF ON ON OFF Response time 10 ms or less Load External y VA Output circuit diagram ponen DEN TAG 2 coMI Fuse A common number applies to the L of COM 15 7 2 External dimensions FX2N 32ES 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches ETT O0000000 84685886 INOOOOOO000 MITSUBISHI WISIS RC FXo 32ES OUTOOOOOO000 86883 TRIAC UNIT 86886 UUUUUUUUUUU 5 52 mountin i 9 0 367 150 5 91 The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws 15 7 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ES ET Teo x2 pa X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 Te ENT RAj x1 X3 X5 x7 X1 X8 35 X7 279 SJOJUNOD peedS uDIE a3 NO BuutM 1ndino JO BULIM O SOS ShOLEA mb I eoueua ure N uny 1s9 O c D nN F o o gt Q peJewod SHUN uoIsSug x4 jndino ndul A Syoo g UOISUS X3 indjnojndu eo NI Pun A ddng Jewog UOISUS Xj oo suondo pue sun 1X3 JOUIO A uoisuo ginpoy ejdsiq 20
644. z O w B No Type FX3uU USB BD FX3U CNV BD 1 When FX3u 422 BD is connected add the current consumed by GOT programming tool lll GOT programming tool No need to calculate Number of input Current consumed mA No Type output occupied points 5V DC Internal 24V DC xan i Pee pm 5 E PCTOOMSETO E poe 220 1 When FX 20P RWM is used the current is 180 mA 6 8 3 C Special adapters No need to calculate Number of input Current consumed mA Current ae Type output oreupied CR EID AUD Entend ay De l MR points iil piel startup mA pup ee peu o3 9 x gee e 39 8 8 9 PxwaApp fe 5 9 49 moma poe 3 9 39 o PxwaiberAp poe 3 9 8 FxwawpToADe E 39 9 OT pza pom 3 o o f Fxudssop 8 9 9 1 1 When applying the DC power type main unit calculate the current consumption at startup 102 FX3u Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardwaer Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 1 6 8 4 D input output powered extension units blocks 3 3 5 1 Input output powered extension units S D Output current mA LA es Input output 5V DC power 24V DC service 2 outpuEpelnts points supply power supply So points ae FXeN 32ER ES UL 32 16 16 3 amp FX2N 32ES 16 16 3 Poes 4 A 4 pamo a m l poseo

it

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents